I Shall Come Again
Chapter 1

Author Of The Earth Is But One Country

Author Of The Apocalypse Unsealed

A Story With An Incredible Ending That Is Made Credible By The Sheer

1weight of evidence. It is a must for anyone interested in the proofs
of the advent of the Promised One of all ages. John Huddleston

Chief Of Budget And Planning

1Division, International Monetary Fund,

1A scholarly work of meticulous research. Appealing to reason and
applying the scientific method to prophetic scripture, it demonstrates
that God has once again revealed Himself to humankind and has
provided hope for unity and peace on this planet.
John Paul Vader, M. D.

• • •
Chapter 2

Author Of For The Good Of Mankind An Extraordinary Account Of The Religious Prophecies Of The Past

1and their fulfillment in the Bahá’í Faith…well researched and
documented. This is the most thorough examination of the proofs
of the Bahá’í Revelation that I have read… William Diehl, Ed. D.
Adjunct Faculty Member,

• • •
Chapter 3

University Of Michigan

1…fascinating reading for anyone interested in deciphering the great-
est mystery of all time: the return of Christ. Each chapter reveals
a little of the mystery and climbs, progressively, to a convincing
conclusion. This is, without question, the most comprehensive book
of proofs on the Bahá’í Faith. M. Moshrefzadeh, M.D.

• • •
Chapter 4

Writer And Scholar

1This book says that the Epiphany is now…that it is not yet too late
to join in the Sacred Ritual that presages the redemption of man. In
love there is no threat. This book, like all sacred communions, is an
act of love. It is also an act of scholarship. William Maxwell, Ed. D.
Chairman, The IQ Foundation

2I Shall
Come Again

• • •
Chapter 5

Volume I Time Prophecies Of The Second Coming

1Foreword by the Hon. Dorothy W. Nelson
Judge, U. S. Court of Appeals

2Copyright © 1992, 2000 by Hushidar Hugh Motlagh
All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America.
ISBN 0-937661-16-3 (cloth)
ISBN 0-937661-15-5 (paper)
Library of Congress Catalog Card No. 98-94039
Acknowledgments of permission to reprint previously copy-
righted material appear on pages 495-498.
Cover design by Rowshan Maani

SECOND EDITION

4Cover: The two stars symbolize the twin luminaries of our
time, the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh, whose message spread like
lightening from the East to the West.

5To order copies of this book and other works by this
author, in the United States call or fax:
1-800-949-1863
If you prefer, order online from any country:
www.globalperspective.org
For further information and possible change of our
address, visit our website or send us an E-mail to:

• • •
Chapter 6

Our Present Address:

1Global Perspective, 1106 Greenbanks Dr.
Mt. Pleasant, MI 48858, USA

2In Commemoration of the Hundredth
Anniversary of the Passing of
Bahá’u’lláh, this Book is Dedicated to:

• • •
Chapter 7

The Glory Of God

1Whatever you do, do it all for the glory of God [emphasis
added to all passages on this page]. I Corinthians 10:31 NIV
Did I not tell you that if you have faith you will see the
glory of God? John 11: 40 NEB

2Great is the glory of the Lord. Psalms 138:5
Sing to the Lord a new song; sing to the Lord, all the earth.
Sing to the Lord, praise his name; proclaim his salvation
day after day. Declare his glory among the nations…
Psalms 96:1-2 NIV
For the earth shall be filled with the knowledge of the glory
of the Lord, as the waters cover the sea. Habakkuk 2:14
And we rejoice in the hope of the glory of God.
Romans 5:2 NIV
I have come in the shadows of the clouds of glory…
Bahá’u’lláh

3I believe that the Scriptures do reveal unto us, in plain
language, that Jesus Christ will appear again on this earth
…in the glory of God. William Miller

• • •
Chapter 8

Part I Preparing For The Journey

Views Of The Prophecies And

1Prophetic Chronology, 1842, p. 33

Works By This Author

1About the Bahá’í Faith
Six-volume series on proofs and prophecies

I Shall Come Again
Lord Of Lords
King Of Kings
In The Clouds Of Glory
The Spirit That Acknowledges Jesus Christ
By My Fruits You Shall Know Me

1Introductory books on the Bahá’í Faith
One God, Many Faiths; One Garden, Many Flowers
Heaven’s Most Glorious Gift

Destiny Is A Choice
On Wings Of Destiny
Choosing Your Destiny

1Bahá’í Faith: Teachings for Inner Peace and Purpose
Bahá’í Faith: Teachings for Global Peace and Unity

Books For Christians
Seek And Ye Shall Find
The Glory Of The Son
The Glory Of The Father

1Come Now, Let Us Reason Together
The News Every Christian Should Know

Compilations
The Glorious Journey To God
The Remembrance Of God
Unto Him Shall We Return
Others
Teaching: The Crown Of Immortal Glory
Proclaim The Most Great Name

1Does Your Fishbowl Need Fresh Water?

1“Watch!” What Does That Mean?………………

22. I Shall Come Upon You Like a
Thief Part I ……………………………………………………….
The Master’s Strategy ………………………………
The Most Manifest And the Most Hidden …..
Who Shall Sit Upon the Throne? ……………….
Power and Glory ……………………………………..
What More Could the Master Say?…………….

33. Be Strong, Fear Not …………………………………………
Requirements for Success …………………………
Freedom from Fear ……………………………….
Following the Light of Reason ……………….
Postponing Judgment ……………………………
Persisting …………………………………………….
Being Humble ………………………………………
Praying ………………………………………………..
Prayers for Divine Guidance ……………………..

44. I Shall Come Again ………………………………………….
O Lord Show Thyself ……………………………….
Bahá’u’lláh Glorifies Christ ………………………
The Origin of the Bahá’í Faith …………………..

55. Why Do You Not Understand
My Language? ……………………………………………….
The Promise of a King and its
Fulfillment ………………………………………….
The Promise of Freedom and its
Fulfillment ………………………………………….
Descending from Heaven ………………………..
Power ……………………………………………………
Glory …………………………………………………….
Seeing …………………………………………………..
Life, Death, and Resurrection ………………….
Suffering First, Glory Later …………………….
The Second Advent is Also Prophesied
to Begin with Suffering ………………………..
The Right to Interpret ……………………………..

66. The Great and Terrible
Day of the Lord ……………………………………………..
The Standards of Judgment ……………………..
The Spiritual State of Our Time ………………
The Great Tribulation ……………………………..
To Summarize ……………………………………….

77. You Judge By Worldly Standards ……………………
God’s Way Versus the Human Way …………..
Flaming Fire ………………………………………….
The Worm That Does Not Die …………………
Comparing the First Century
With the Twentieth ……………………………….

8X I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 9

Part Ii Proofs: Time Prophecies

18. The Wise Shall Understand …………………………….
The “Sprouting” of Time Prophecies………..
The Failure to Decode the
Symbolic Prophecies ……………………………
The Advent Movement …………………………..
The Year of Fulfillment …………………………..
The Millerite Movement …………………………
The Great Disappointment ………………………
Explanation for the Disappointment …………
The Subtle and Sealed Language of
Prophecy …………………………………………….

29. Cause Thy Face to Shine Upon Thy
Sanctuary ………………………………………………………
Time Prophecies of the First Advent ………..
Daniel’s Prophecy of 69 Weeks ……………….
The Prophecy of 70 Weeks ……………………..
Confirming God’s Covenant
With People …………………………………………
The Symbolism of Sacrifice
and Oblation ……………………………………….
Other Time prophecies of
the First Advent …………………………………..
Time Prophecies of the First Advent
Based on the Revised Dates ………………….
The Prophecy of 62 Weeks ……………………..

3Contents XI

4The Coded Language of Prophecy……………

510. Unto Two Thousand and
Three Hundred Days Part I …………………………….
The Date of the Second Advent
in Relation to the First ………………………….
The Significance of Daniel’s
Time Prophecies ………………………………….
The Prophecy of 2300 Days …………………….
The Cleansing of the Sanctuary ……………….
When Shall These Things Be? …………………
The Law of Double Fulfillment ……………….
To Conclude…………………………………………..

611. Unto Two Thousand and
Three Hundred Days Part II ……………………………
The Tarrying Time …………………………………
The Exact Time Never Revealed ……………..
Proclaiming the Year of the Lord ……………..
Similarities Between Daniel’s Vision
of the First and Second Advents ……………
Stand in the Holy Place …………………………..

712. The Times of the Gentiles ……………………………….
The Times of the Gentiles ……………………….
A Call for the Creation of Israel ………………
The Edicts of Submission ……………………….
The Principle of “the Critical Domino” ……
Comparing the Prophecies of the

8XII I Shall Come Again

9First and Second Advents ……………………..
“The Times of the Gentiles” and
“That Day” …………………………………………

1013. The Spirit That Acknowledges
Jesus Christ ……………………………………………………
An Introduction to Islam ………………………..
The Spirit That Acknowledges
Jesus Christ …………………………………………
One God, One Race, One Religion …………..

1114. They Will Prophesy for 1260 Days ………………….
Prophecies From the Book
of Revelation ……………………………………….
The Two Witnesses Who Will
Prophesy 1260 Days …………………………….
The Gentiles Will Trample the
Holy City 42 Months ……………………………
The Symbolism of
“the Trampling of Jerusalem” ……………….
The Two Witnesses Who Lie Unburied
for Three and a Half Days …………………….
The Resurrection of the Two Witnesses …….
The Woman With the Child and
the Seven-headed Dragon ……………………..
Other Explanations …………………………………
The Context of the Prophetic Figures ……….
The Prophecy of the Four Angels …………….
Other Prophecies from the
Book of Revelation ………………………………

12Contents XIII

1315. The Great Prince ……………………………………………
Michael, the Great Prince ……………………….
Increase in Knowledge and Travel ……………
The Time of the Advent of
the Great Prince …………………………………..
Daniel’s Second Prophecy of
“Three Times and a Half ” …………………….
Harmony Among the Prophecies ……………..

1416. The Seven Times ……………………………………………
Moses’ Prophecy of the Seven Times ……….
The Meteor that Lighted the World …………..
The Link Between Two Critical Events …….
Transforming the Codes into Dates…………..
A Unique Prophetic Figure ……………………..
The Major Prophetic Eras ……………………….
The Relationship Between Heavenly and
Earthly “Jerusalem and Sanctuary” ………..
To Conclude…………………………………………..

1517. The Ancient of Days……………………………………….
The Prophecy of 1290 Days …………………….
The Biblical Sources of
Time Prophecies ………………………………….
The Báb’s Prophecies
Concerning Bahá’u’lláh ………………………..
Summer Is Near……………………………………..
Would the Master Be Late? ……………………..

16XIV I Shall Come Again

1718. The Times Spoken of by
All Holy Prophets …………………………………………..
Zoroastrian and Native American
Time Prophecies ………………………………….
Prophecies Pointing to 1844 or 1260 ………..
From the Old Testament ………………………
From the New Testament …………………….

• • •
Chapter 10

From Zoroastrian And

1Islamic Prophecies Pointing to
1260, Covered in Volume IV …………………
Prophecies Pointing to
1852-1853 and 1863 …………………………….
Prophecies Pointing to the Public
Declaration of Bahá’u’lláh …………………….
The Qur’án’s Prophecy Pointing to the
First Declaration of Bahá’u’lláh
Covered in Volume IV ………………………….
The Báb’s Prophecies Pointing to the
First Declaration of Bahá’u’lláh …………….
The Evidence is Established ……………………
He Will Not Be Late ………………………………
The Three Stages of the Social and
Spiritual Evolution of Humanity ……………

219. And This Gospel of the Kingdom
Will be Proclaimed …………………………………………
The Child Preachers of the
Mid-19th Century…………………………………
Joseph Wolff, the Hero of the

3Contents XV

• • •
Chapter 11

Part Iii

1God’s Covenant With Humanity
20. My People Perish for
Want of Knowledge ……………………………………….. 395
Why Haven’t I Heard
About this Faith Before? ……………………… 395
The Gentle Method of Teaching ……………… 396
Mistrust of the Non-traditional
And Unfamiliar …………………………………… 397
The Excessive Fear of Falsehood ……………. 398
Preoccupation With Worldly Concerns ……. 400
Lack of Knowledge,
the Common Denominator …………………… 401
The Role of Religious Leaders ……………….. 402

221. I Have Set My Rainbow
in the Clouds …………………………………………………. 409
The Gift of Freedom ……………………………… 414

322. Through Knowledge Shall
the Just Be Delivered …………………………………….. 423
The Gift of Understanding
and Knowledge …………………………………… 423
The Gift of Responsibility ……………………… 428

• • •
Chapter 12

Appendices Appendix I: Then Shall The Sanctuary

1Be Cleansed …………………………………………………..
The Position Held by Adventists ……………..

2The Symbolism of “the Cleansing
of the Sanctuary” …………………………………
Tabernacle and Sanctuary in
Bahá’í Scriptures …………………………………

3Appendix II: William Miller’s Dream ……………………
Interpretation …………………………………………

4Appendix III: I Shall Come Upon You
Like a Thief Part II………………………………………….

5References…………………………………………………………….

6Permissions …………………………………………………………..

7Index ……………………………………………………………………

8Index of Bible Verses Used in this Book …………………

9Contents of Volumes II and III ………………………………

• • •
Chapter 13

Foreword T His Work Offers Proofs Of The Most Remarkable Event In

1human history—the Advent of the Prince of Peace, the
Desire of the Ages, the Redeemer of the World. It presents
hundreds of scriptural prophecies and proofs fitting a pattern
that clearly indicates that the Return expected by the followers
of all the world’s great religions has already occurred. The
prophecies and promises have been fulfilled in the advent of
Bahá’u’lláh (the Glory of God) and His Herald, the Báb (the
Gate), who appeared in the mid-19th century and established
the Bahá’í Faith—a universal religion dedicated to world unity.
The references offered in this work to prove the validity of
Bahá’u’lláh’s claim to be the great world Redeemer come
mostly from the Bible. Prophecies from the Scriptures of other
religions have also been presented, for they have all foretold
His coming. Scientific explanations and mathematical calcula-
tions further substantiate this claim. The overwhelming weight

22 I Shall Come Again

3of the evidence presented here cannot be ignored. It challenges
the reader to investigate further Bahá’u’lláh’s Revelation.
The author was born to a Jewish family that later became
Bahá’í. His grandfather, after making an extensive study of
proofs and prophecies, recognized Bahá’u’lláh as the expected
Messiah of the Jews in the last days. Although influenced by
his grandfather, the author pursued his own independent search
into the Bahá’í Revelation. After years of study, he became
convinced of the validity of Bahá’u’lláh’s claim and teachings.
It seems ironic to him that his Jewish ancestors met many
Christians who would say: “The Messiah has come!” And
now he is saying to the descendants of those same Christians:
“The Messiah has come again!”
This book points out that the prophets and seers of past ages
longed to witness the dawning of this glorious time in history—
the Day of the Lord. Bahá’ís believe that this blessed Day
has indeed dawned, that Christ has returned, and that all the
prophecies have been fulfilled!
At the opening of this glorious age (1844), a few followed
the warnings of the Scriptures; they stayed awake and watchful
and caught a glimpse of its glory. But the vast majority, as
predicted by the prophets, were caught by surprise—asleep
and dreaming of a loud trumpet blast that would awaken
them, hoping for an unseen hand that would raise them to the
heavens on high.
Seekers who study Bahá’u’lláh’s world order—the Kingdom
of God on earth prayed for by Christ—find it practical, indeed
ideal. Who could rationally deny the need for global unity,
for a universal language, and for world peace? But even
though Bahá’u’lláh’s teachings are in harmony with the needs
of the age and scientific understanding, and even though the
Bahá’í life inspires spiritual transformation, there need to be
objective proofs of the validity of Bahá’u’lláh’s prophetic
Mission. That is the purpose of this book.

4Foreword

5Bahá’u’lláh offers a message of hope and fulfillment, of love,
peace, and harmony; a message that can transform our planet
into a veritable paradise, that can bring the heart of humanity
into fellowship with God.
How glorious a world in which justice, love, and peace prevail;
a world whose inhabitants worship one God, acknowledge
one Faith, speak in one language, and abide by one Law.
How wondrous a world in which prejudice is uprooted,
fanaticism forsaken, illiteracy eradicated, poverty eliminated,
work exalted, and idleness despised. How blessed a world in
which religion and science stand together as perfect partners
in fostering human progress; a world in which the station of
woman is acknowledged as man’s equal. How enchanting a
world from whose heart worldliness is effaced, crime cast
out, enmity expelled, and war banished. How splendid a
world in which the love of God dominates and moves the
hearts of all its inhabitants—a love from which will spring
every noble act, every pure and worthy deed.
Such is the world whose advent all the prophets have foretold;
such is the day for whose dawning the Bahá’ís have offered
countless lives; such is the peace for whose triumph the Báb
suffered and gave His youthful life; and such is the kingdom
for whose coming Bahá’u’lláh endured forty years of afflic-
tion, exile, and imprisonment. What a blessed gift to live in
this glorious time!
Dorothy W. Nelson

He Who Overcomes

• • •
Chapter 14

He Who Overcomes

1B ehold, I come quickly…He who overcomes…I will
make him a pillar in the temple of my God…And I
will also write on him my new name.
Revelation 3:11-12 NKJ
Recently, a series of interviews entitled, Prophecy Today,
Christian Leaders Look at the Signs of the Time, was con-
ducted with several distinguished Christians. Leaders of
various denominations, both Catholic and Protestant, were
asked to link the events of our time to biblical prophecy.
Among the leaders interviewed was Dr. James Kennedy, one
of the most distinguished Christian scholars and founder of
the Westminster Academy. He is known to many Christians
through his writings as well as his weekly television and
radio broadcasts that reach millions in 3,300 communities in
the United States and 21 other countries. When asked “What
do you believe are some of the major mistakes we tend to

2The great Princeton theologian of the last century, Dr.
Charles Hodge, said something which I have always
thought is worth remembering. He said that though the
Old Testament is filled with some 333 prophecies con-
cerning the first coming of Christ; in spite of that,
nobody got it right. And as you know, they crucified
Christ because of a misunderstanding about what the
Messiah was really coming to do. And we should because
of that be somewhat humbled and modest in our attempts
to interpret prophecies concerning the second coming of
Christ. It is quite possible that all of us [Christian
leaders] are wrong as well. [Emphasis added.]1
To see the present clearly, we must look at the past; to un-
derstand our lives, we must understand the lives of those who
have lived before us:
People are fond of saying that “the past is dead,” but it
is actually the future that is dead—and we make it come
alive only by applying what we have learned from the
living past to the present. Sydney Harris

• • •
Chapter 15

Richard Niebuhr Much Wisdom Comes From History:

1Days should speak, and multitudes of years should teach
wisdom… Job 32:7
A Christian publication declares:
The Bible does tell us, of course, that we should use the
past as the right kind of spiritual rearview mirror. We
should learn from our own or others’ errors.
The Hebrew or Old Testament Scriptures, said Paul, provide
us this opportunity. “For whatever things were written
before were written for our learning”… (Romans 15:4).
Paul said the spiritual errors ancient Israel made “were
written for our admonition” (I Cor. 10:11).2

He Who Overcomes

3Has history repeated itself in our time? Is it possible that the
masses of people have once again missed their Redeemer
“because of a misunderstanding about what He was really
coming to do?” Are Christian leaders of our time willing to
acknowledge Dr. Kennedy’s message of humility in interpret-
ing biblical prophecy?
…he shall save the humble person. [Emphasis added
throughout this section.] Job 22:29
Show me your ways, O Lord, teach me your paths; guide
me in your truth and teach me, for you are God my
Savior, and my hope is in you all day long…He guides
the humble in what is right and teaches them his way.
Psalms 25:4-5, 9 NIV
Deliver me, O Lord, I beseech thee…The Lord preserves
the simple-hearted; I was brought low and he saved me.
Psalms 116:4, 6 NEB
Seek the Lord, all you humble of the land, you who do
what he commands. Seek righteousness, seek humility;
perhaps you will be sheltered on the day of the Lord’s
anger. Zephaniah 2:3 NIV
…the Lord has anointed me to preach good news to the
poor [the meek, ARV]. Isaiah 61:1 NIV
See also Luke 4:18
Christian scholar Dr. Barry Chant in his book The Return
illustrates the need for humility by this example:
Imagine four theologians sitting in a library one day, when
a pigeon flutters down and lands on the window sill.
“Aha,” says one, “a symbol of peace.”
“No,” suggests another. “In Scripture, the dove is always
a symbol of the Holy Spirit.”
“Not always.” interjects the third scholar. “It reminds me
of the freedom we have in Christ.”
“I cannot agree with any of you,” argues the fourth.
“That bird obviously reminds us of the return of Christ.”

48 I Shall Come Again

5Now, so far, there is no problem. Each man has a perfect
right to his view and each may have good reason for it.
But let us imagine that this is what happens next—
The fourth man goes on to say, “Listen, you may not
agree, but I’m telling you that you are all wrong. There
is only one possible significance in the landing of that
bird. It is the message of the parousia [the coming and
presence of Christ]!”
Another then says, “Wait a minute! I have had such an
experience of liberation in Christ that there can be no
other meaning for me than spiritual freedom. That bird has
nothing whatsoever to do with some eschatalogical event!”
And then the second speaker chips in. “You men obviously
know nothing whatever of the Scriptures. The dove is
the…sign of the Spirit. To say anything else is to border
on heresy! I insist that you consider my viewpoint and
that you seriously question your own views.”
And then the one who spoke first says, “Listen to me, all
of you. From time immemorial, the dove has been a sign
of peace. I have history and tradition on my side. And I’m
prepared to fight anyone to prove it!”
Dr. Chant then concludes:
Voltaire, an atheistic philosopher once said, “I disapprove
of what you say, but I will defend to the death your right
to say it.” We need a similar attitude in the area of
eschatology.4
Bahá’u’lláh begins The Book of Certitude—which examines
the proofs of His Mission—with the topic of detachment:
No man shall attain the shores of the ocean of true
understanding except he be detached from all that is
in heaven and on earth. Sanctify your souls, O ye
peoples of the world, that haply ye may attain that
station which God hath destined for you

He Who Overcomes

7And he concludes another of His books (The Hidden Words)
with the topic of detachment:
I bear witness, O friends! that the favor is complete, the
argument fulfilled, the proof manifest and the evidence
established. Let it now be seen what your endeavors in
the path of detachment will reveal.6
What is “detachment”? It is best defined by communication
specialists Ronald Adler and Neil Towne. They state that in
all human relationships and regarding all subjects the most
essential ingredient for effective communication is:
…the ability and disposition to be open-minded—to set
aside for the moment his or her own beliefs, attitudes,
and values and consider those of the other person.
This is especially difficult when the other person’s position
is radically different from your own. The temptation is to
think (and sometimes say), “That’s crazy!” “How can you
believe that?”…attitudes like these often aren’t helpful
even if your position is correct. Being open-minded is
often difficult because people confuse understanding
another’s position with accepting it.7
Countless attachments surround us and entangle us. There is
attachment to:
• Names and labels
• Traditions
• The opinion of authority figures (pastors, parents, celebrities)
• Security, popularity, or power
• Personal inclinations or prejudices
• The voice of the majority
• The voice of ego
• Ignorance
• Illusions and unverified assumptions
• Despair, apathy, and cynicism
• The glitter and glamor of the world

810 I Shall Come Again

9Even one of these attachments can entangle our freedom
and strangle our vision of truth. Bahá’u’lláh refers to many
attachments, but the one He emphasizes in The Book of
Certitude is dependence on the opinion of others:
…man can never hope to attain unto the knowledge of the
All-Glorious, can never quaff from the stream of divine
knowledge and wisdom, can never enter the abode of
immortality, nor partake of the cup of divine nearness and
favor, unless and until he ceases to regard the words and
deeds of mortal men as a standard for the true understand-
ing and recognition of God and His Prophets.8
Noted psychologist, Dr. Wayne Dyer, discusses the necessity
of detachment:
Certainly it is fine to have strong opinions about anything
that you choose, but the moment you become attached to
these ideas and thereby define yourself by them, you shut
out the possibility of hearing another point of view. This
attachment to ideas and to making others wrong is the
history of the being called Human Being, and it accounts
for untold wars and misery since the beginning of recorded
history.
Seldom do people stop and truly hear what the other
person has to say. Seldom if ever do we change our mind
based upon solid ideas presented by others.9
We can respect and even appreciate the past and the ways
of our ancestors. We can love them for having chosen to
go their own way. But to be attached to having to live
and think the way others before you did, because you
showed up looking like them in forms, is to deny your-
self enlightenment.10
Detachment is freedom, attachment is slavery; freedom from
what others expect us to be, slavery to their judgment of
who we should be and our own judgment of how they should
be. Detachment is an absolute necessity because of this
pervasive principle:

He Who Overcomes

11Every way of a man is right in his own eyes.
Proverbs 21:2
Attachment is perhaps the greatest weakness in human nature,
and overcoming it—attaining detachment—is man’s greatest
victory, his supreme purpose, glory and honor. Both the
difficulty and the glory of “overcoming” are of such mag-
nitude that the Book of Revelation refers to them eight times.
Here are two of these references:
I am coming soon…Him who overcomes…I will write on
him the name of my God…I will also write on him my
new name. He who has an ear, let him hear what the
Spirit says to the churches. Revelation 3:11-13 NIV
To him who overcomes, I will give the right to sit with
me on my throne… Revelation 3:21 NIV
See also Rev. 2:7, 11, 17, 26; 3:5; 21:7
The Cause of God hath come as a token of His grace.
Happy are they who act; happy are they who understand;
happy the man that hath clung unto the truth, detached
from all that is in the heavens and all that is on earth.11
Bahá’u’lláh
The only acceptable attachment is to God:
…they that tread the path of faith…must cleanse themselves
of all that is earthly [detachment]…They should put their
trust in God, and, holding fast unto Him [attachment],
follow in His way.12 Bahá’u’lláh
The Scriptures ask us to “test everything” (I Thess. 5:21 NIV),
to “test the spirits to see whether they are from God ” (I
John 4:1 NIV), to “prove all things” and to “hold fast that
which is good ” (I Thess. 5:21). The necessity of testing is
confirmed in all sacred Scriptures:
Take heed to carefully consider the words of every soul,
then hold fast to the proofs which attest the truth.13
The Báb

1212 I Shall Come Again

13What follows is an attempt to comply with those directives
and guidance; to put the new Messenger to the test; to see
whether He who claims to be the Spirit of truth, the return
of Christ, the expected Savior and Redeemer of the world,
is indeed from God. It is an attempt that has taken the author
over thirty years—and thousands of hours of research and
writing. It tells a story so remarkable that it happens only
once in thousands of years.
It is about a Messenger, Bahá’u’lláh, the Glory of God:
• Who sacrificed His freedom and comfort to liberate the
human race from the fetters of war, prejudice, and injustice.
• Who endured every conceivable loss, pain, and suffering
for nearly 40 years, yet never wavered in His claim.
• Who, without help, withstood and overcame three of the
most powerful and despotic kings of the earth.
• Who did not attend school, yet wrote words of exquisite
grace and wisdom with astonishing speed.
• Who lived in prison and exile most of His life, yet com-
posed Writings equal to a hundred volumes, unveiling the
knowledge, wisdom, and inspiration that humanity needs
to live in peace for the next thousand years and more.
• A Messenger who has already influenced millions with
His teachings, hailed by great thinkers from many lands
as the ultimate remedy for the afflictions of the world.
• A Teacher whose teachings, within the span of a century,
have given rise to a global community based on the
highest ethical standards—a community that extends to the
farthest reaches of the earth—with members in over
countries and dependencies.
• A Redeemer about whose advent the Bible speaks more
than a thousand times, predicting the events of His life and
His Revelation; events that, according to the facts pre-
sented in this volume and the next, could happen by

He Who Overcomes

15chance only once in 10 80 times—a figure that equals
the estimated number of elementary particles (protons,
neutrons, and electrons) in the observable universe. (See
Volume II, Lord of Lords.)
If Bahá’u’lláh’s claim is false, we need to know, and no
harm will come from knowing. If it is true, we also need
to know. For knowing God’s latest Manifestation of Truth —
the Prince of Peace—is a privilege and a bounty with which
nothing can ever compare. Only through Him can the
purpose of human life be known — a purpose that is the
wellspring of the deepest and most enduring joy.
Paul said we need three things—faith, hope, and love. We
must have faith that the Comforter (John 15:26) would not
leave us comfortless in an hour of dire need, we must have
love for truth, and hope that we can find it.
I will not leave you comfortless: I will come to you.
Christ (John 14:18)
This work consists of six volumes that cover the objective
proofs of Bahá’u’lláh’s Revelation. By objective is meant the
evidences or proofs that are equally accessible to everyone,
that can be examined and verified by all seekers of truth. At
the other extreme, and totally different from these, are
subjective evidences, which result from personal spiritual
transformations or encounters. Such evidences are not equally
accessible to all seekers of truth, and as a rule, cannot be
repeated, tested, and verified. They must be accepted mainly
on faith. These have not received the status of primary
proofs in this book, yet because of the credence given to
them by many seekers, they have not been ignored.

• • •
Chapter 16

Preliminary Material

1I, therefore, begins with some preliminary material, which
lays a groundwork for the study of scriptural proofs, and
provides some factual background for those with little or no
exposure to the Bahá’í Faith. It addresses seven central
questions:
• What did Jesus mean when He repeatedly gave this
warning: “Watch!”? (Chapter 1)
• What did Jesus mean when He said “I shall come like a
thief ”? (Chapter 2)
• What attitudes and attributes, according to the Scriptures,
characterize the true seeker? (Chapter 3)
• What is the message of the Bahá’í Faith and who are its

2• Does God speak in the same way humans do? What
features characterize the unique language of the divine?
(Chapter 5)
• Can the interpreters of the Word of God tell with certainty
which prophecies are literal, which prophecies are sym-
bolic? (Chapter 6)
• Is it possible to single out from the Scriptures as well as
historical records the main difference between what people
have expected from God’s Messengers and Redeemers
and what they are given? Does the same difference exist
today? (Chapter 7)
These seven chapters constitute an independent unit. They are
placed at the beginning of the book for this purpose only: to
prove that it is possible to arrive late for the banquet of the
Kingdom, and to miss the Bridegroom. Readers not in need
of this message may wish to proceed directly to Part II,
which carries the main theme of Volume I: the fulfillment of
time prophecies pointing to the advent of the Redeemer of

• • •
Chapter 17

The Subsequent Volumes

1with many other biblical predictions pertaining to the return
of Christ: His new name, the chief events of His life, and the
prevailing conditions of the appointed time. (See the table of
contents of those Volumes at the end of this book.)
Volume IV—The Spirit That Acknowledges Jesus Christ—
presents the identical prophecies of the Bible and the Qur’án
concerning the return of Christ. It attempts to eradicate the
prevailing misconceptions about Islam in the West and to
demonstrate the Qur’án’s confirmation of the Bible and
glorification of Christ and His mother, as well as Noah,

2the spiritual teachings of the Bible and the Qur’án are not just
similar; they are identical.
Volume V—In the Clouds of Glory—demonstrates the sharp
contrast between divine and human language. It explores the
meaning of the symbolic prophecies that point to the return
of Christ. It shows how the symbols interrelate and interact,
demonstrates the harmony of seemingly contradictory words,
and resolves some of the most enduring mysteries of the
Scriptures.
Volume VI—By My Fruits Ye Shall Know Me—examines
many other scriptural standards by which a Messenger from
God can be known.
In this work, the words Messenger, Redeemer, Manifestation
(of God), Savior, and divine Teacher are used interchange-
ably. Some writers apply the word Christ to the divine Spirit
manifested in Jesus, and the word Jesus to the Redeemer’s
personal identity. Such a distinction is not always followed
in this book. The author has emphasized some scriptural
passages by putting them in bold print.
Some authorities doubt the authenticity of the words of Jesus.
That position is not upheld here. First, Bahá’u’lláh confirms
the Gospel as “genuine” and “heavenly.” 14 Second, the Word
of God is unique and distinctive. It stands out clearly above
the word of His creatures. The passages attributed to Jesus
testify to this distinction.
To enhance clarity, two modern translations of the Old and
New Testaments are used: The New English Bible (NEB), and
New International Version (NIV). The wording in different
editions of The New International Version varies slightly. For
passages from The King James Version (K JV), identifying
abbreviations are not used. To clarify or emphasize special
meanings, in a few instances, The Amplified Bible (AB), The
New American Bible (NAB), and The New King James Version

• • •
Chapter 18

Appreciations And Acknowledgments Sources Of Guidance And Inspiration

1Bahá’u’lláh’s Book of Certitude, more than any other, has been my
guide and inspiration. I have also drawn from Gleanings from the
Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, Selections from the Writings of the Báb, and
‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s works, especially Some Answered Questions. It is im-
possible to estimate my debts to these sources. To fully acknowledge
my indebtedness would require referring to the names of Bahá’u’lláh,
the Báb, and ‘Abdu’l-Bahá on almost every page.
This acknowledgment does not imply that all the views presented
here stem from the Bahá’í sacred Writings, or that they constitute an
“official” Bahá’í interpretation of those Scriptures.
I make no claim that this work is free from errors. I have made many
corrections and expect to be corrected by others for decades to
come. What matters is not if I have erred in judging specific facts
or interpretations, but if I have erred in judging the concluding
message of this book. That judgment is for everyone to make for him-
self only after he has examined all the facts presented here. The
concluding message of this book should not and cannot be invalidated
by my shortcomings. For we all err “and come short of the glory of
God” (Romans 3:23).

2Contributors of Thought and Talent
I am indebted most for the contributions made by: Jim Allen, Kenneth
Augustine, Dr. Fredrick Bonds, Waldo Boyd, Dr. Carlos Castillo, Dr.
R. Jackson Armstrong-Ingram, Michael S. Centner, John Dale, Jr., Dr.
William Diehl, Alan Gamble, Irma Gray, John Huddleston, Dr. Enrico
Indiogine, Dr. Thomas Kalantar, Kern Kuipers, Joe Killeen, Bruce
Limber, Virginia Martig, Dr. Dorothea Martin, Dr. William Maxwell,
Dr. Dorothy Nelson, Gail Radley, Richard Reid, Robert Riggs, Dr.
Thomas Rowe, Dr. Robert Stockman, Michael W. Thomas, and Jane
Zehnder-Merrell.
I also wish to express my appreciation to other contributors of thought
or talent: Mahmud, Ahmad, Parviz, May, and Navid Motlagh.

• • •
Chapter 19

Part I Preparing For The Journey Finding And Following The Searchlights Of Truth

1But when the Son of Man comes, will he find faith on
earth? Luke 18:8 NEB
As things were in Noah’s days, so will they be when the
Son of Man comes. Matthew 24:37 NEB
…I shall come upon you like a thief… Revelation 3:3 NEB
It will be good for those servants whose master finds
them watching when he comes. Luke 12:37 NIV
That is the day when I come like a thief! Happy the
man who stays awake… Revelation 16:15 NEB
Be on the alert… Luke 21:36 NEB
…do not let him find you sleeping. Mark 13:36 NIV
Take ye heed, watch and pray… Mark 13:33
Watch ye therefore, and pray always… Luke 21:36
…whatsoever ye shall ask in prayer, believing, ye shall
receive. Matthew 21:22
…Unto them that look for him [Christ] shall he appear
the second time… Hebrews 9:28

2Be Always on the Watch
Luke 21:36 NIV

3“Watch!”
What Does That Mean?

4T he Olivet Discourse (Matt., Chapters 24 and 25)E contains
the most comprehensive and emphatic pronouncement
Jesus made during His ministry to prepare Christians for His
return. This chapter introduces the parts of this discourse that
encourage Christians to investigate the good news of “the
coming of the Kingdom of God on earth.” It shows that
in the light of Christ’s clear and definitive instructions,
Bahá’u’lláh’s claim deserves the most serious investigation
by all Christians, especially those who wish to follow the
counsels of their Lord and Savior. Succeeding chapters and
volumes will examine other themes of Jesus’ discourse, among
them the fulfillment of some of His most specific predictions
in Bahá’u’lláh’s Revelation.

5E
It also appears in Mark, Chapter 13, and Luke, Chapter 21. But each of the
latter contains only about a third of the verses found in Matthew.

622 I Shall Come Again

7The Olivet Discourse was uttered in response to the disciples’
concern and curiosity about the future:
When he was sitting on the Mount of Olives the disciples
came to speak to him privately. ‘Tell us,’ they said, ‘when
will this happen? And what will be the signal for your
coming and the end of the age?’ Matthew 24:3 NEB
Perhaps the most critical word Jesus used in His discourse
to awaken the Christians to the reality of His return is this:
“Watch!”
Be on guard! Be alert!…keep watch…do not let him find
you sleeping. What I say to you, I say to everyone:
“Watch!” Christ (Mark 13:33-37 NIV)
Be always on the watch…that you may be able to stand
before the Son of Man. Luke 21:36 NIV

8What did He mean by that word? Did He mean: look always
heavenward, and gaze into space? Certainly not! To compre-
hend Jesus' prophecies, it is absolutely essential to decode
this critical word.
As Dr. Ray Stedman,1 a Christian scholar, observes, in His
discourse Jesus uses three different parables to explain His
intentions in saying “Watch!” All of them contain the answer
to this question: the Master is away for a long time. How
should we find and recognize Him when He returns? All of
them explain the meaning of the key word, “Watch!”
The first of the three parables points to the role of those in
positions of leadership. Religious leaders have a sublime sta-
tion, as high and bright as the stars of heaven (Daniel 12:3).
They also have duties commensurate with their position of
honor. Perhaps the most awesome task Jesus has entrusted to
them is that of preparing Christians for His return. As a
reward for complying with His counsel, He has promised to
“put them in charge of all His possessions:”

9Chapter 1: Be Always On the Watch

10Who then is the faithful and wise servant [leader], whom
the master has put in charge of the servants in his house-
hold [the church]E to give them their food at the proper
time? It will be good for that servant whose master finds
him doing so when he returns. I tell you the truth, he will
put him in charge of all his possessions.
Christ (Matthew 24:45-47 NIV)
To be placed in charge of all the Master’s possessions is the
highest and most honored reward anyone can receive. But the
reward must be earned:
That servant who knows his master’s will and does not
get ready or does not do what his master wants will be
beaten with many blows…From everyone who has been
given much, much will be demanded; and from the one
who has been entrusted with much, much more will be
asked. Christ (Luke 12:47-48 NIV)
Both the rewards and the punishments assigned to those in
positions of power are extraordinary. Leaders are responsible
not only for themselves but, to some extent, for the spiritual
destiny of those they lead.
Daniel, too, predicts a bright destiny for those leaders who
walk by the light of wisdom and understanding:
The wise leaders shall shine like the bright vault of
heaven, and those who have guided the people in the true
path shall be like the stars for ever and ever…keep the
words secret and seal the book till the time of the end…
only the wise leaders shall understand.
Daniel 12:3, 4, 10 NEB
Many religious leaders speak in glowing terms about the
return of Christ. They plant the hope of His return in the
hearts of millions. This is commendable. But to conform to

11E
…every teacher of the law [of the Lord] who has been instructed about
the kingdom of heaven is like the owner of a house… Matthew 13:52 NIV

1224 I Shall Come Again

13the Master’s counsels, they need to take one more step: trans-
form this positive force—hope—into action and search. Some
religious leaders hesitate in this endeavor. Others instill
avoidance. The climate of fear and avoidance that is thus
created affects not only the lay people but the leaders as well.
It generates an attitude of apathy, the feeling that truth need
not be sought; it is something that one is either born into or
forced to recognize by the power of the supernatural.
The second parable, in which Jesus teaches the reality of His
return, is that of the banquet of the Kingdom, or the wise
and foolish maidens—perhaps the most touching of all His
parables (Matt. 25:1-13). He utters this parable to teach not
fear of being deceived, but fear of being deprived of His
Glory at His second coming.
To keep the seekers’ attention on the topic—the closing of
the age and His return—Jesus prefaces the parable with this
passage: “When that day comes the kingdom of Heaven will
be like this” (Matt. 25:1 NEB). That is, when the promised
day dawns, the Kingdom of God on earth will begin as this
parable portrays. As Unger’s Bible Dictionary states:
…the “kingdom of heaven” in its earthly manifested form
was postponed until Christ’s Second Advent…According to
the clear teaching of the Bible it will be realized only in
connection with the Second Advent. The testimony of
Scripture agrees completely with this fact…the kingdom of
heaven is no other than the rule of God on the earth
Jesus then relates the story of ten maidens who waited a long
time to meet the Bridegroom [Christ]. In preparing for the
Bridegroom and His wedding banquet they took their lamps
and went out to meet Him. Five of them carried oil, the rest
did not. The five maidens who carried oil He praised as being
wise, the rest as unwise. Both the wise and unwise maidens
waited a long time for the Bridegroom whom they wished to
meet. The only difference between them was the extra oil
the wise ones carried. Why carry oil? Accompanying the

14Chapter 1: Be Always On the Watch

15Bridegroom and entering His banquet were deemed by the
wise maidens as the greatest glory and honor. They made
every effort to be prepared. They took every precaution to
be sure they could keep their lamps burning as long as
possible. They knew that without lighted lamps they could
neither see the Bridegroom nor enter His banquet.
The unwise maidens felt that their only duty was waiting and
wishing. To them what mattered was the lamp of the church;
carrying oil did not seem essential. They did not believe they
could miss the Bridegroom or be kept out of His banquet.
The Bridegroom finally arrived in the dark and secrecy of
midnight. The wise maidens with lighted lamps received the
unparalleled honor of accompanying the Bridegroom to the
banquet. The others—who had been complacent, who had not
feared missing the Bridegroom, who had not taken extra
precautions—arrived too late. They met closed doors, and
their pleas to enter the banquet went unheeded.
What the parable teaches is this: waiting and wishing are not
sufficient. Almost all Christians are waiting for Christ to
return and wish to meet Him. But only those who have taken
advantage of every opportunity to enlighten themselves, only
those who carry the oil of wisdom, not just the lamp of the
church can accompany Him to His banquet. It is indeed
possible to miss the Bridegroom.
In all the verses quoted, the attribute of wisdom stands out.
All the verses indicate that:
• Only the wise leaders shall understand (Daniel 12:10 NEB).
• Only the wise leaders shall shine (Daniel 12:3 NEB).
• Only the wise maidens can enter the banquet of the King-
dom (Matt. 25:1-13).
• Only the faithful and wise servants [leaders] are put in
charge of the Master’s possessions (Matt. 24:45-47).
This verse also links deliverance to wisdom:

1626 I Shall Come Again

17…whoso walketh wisely, he shall be delivered.
Proverbs 28:26
Still another passage from Isaiah points to a link not only
between wisdom and understanding of prophecies but also the
scarcity of wisdom among the “wise men” of our time:
All prophetic vision has become for you like a sealed
book…the wisdom of their wise men shall vanish and the
discernment of the discerning shall be lost.
Isaiah 29:11-14 NEB
It is evident that wisdom is required when a vital choice is at
stake, especially one that demands discernment. In this case
the choice is investigating the good news of the coming of
the Master, or ignoring the news. A sincere desire to learn
the facts—investigation—is the first step toward attaining
wisdom:
“The true beginning of wisdom is the desire to learn”
(Wisdom of Solomon 6:17 NEB). “A wise man will hear, and
will increase learning” (Prov. 1:5). “The ear of the wise
seeketh knowledge” (Prov. 18:15). “The wise shall inherit
glory” (Prov. 3:35).
The parable of the banquet of the Kingdom teaches one more
lesson. It indicates that each individual must carry out his
own independent investigation of truth. When the unwise
maidens found that their lamps were going out and they had
no oil, they asked their companions to give them some, but
none was given to them. The companions could not comply
with the request. The investigation and recognition of truth
must always come from one’s own soul. As each person sees
the physical realm only with his own eyes, even so should
he see the spiritual. God has granted the gift of recognizing
His divine glory to every soul.
An example may further illustrate why the wise maidens
could not share their oil with their companions. Suppose you
see a spiritually gifted friend, full of love, knowledge, and

18Chapter 1: Be Always On the Watch

19wisdom, on his deathbed. You say, “Dear friend, before you
go please give me some of your spiritual wealth.” What
would you expect him to say? Would he not say, “I have
gained that wealth at great cost and through many years. You
too must work for yours.” Earthly wealth can be bequeathed,
but spiritual wealth cannot.
The responsibility and ability of each individual to find the
truth is emphasized in all the scriptures:
…I have perfected in every one of you My creation, so
that the excellence of My handiwork may be fully revealed
unto men. It follows, therefore, that every man hath been,
and will continue to be, able of himself to appreciate the
Beauty of God, the Glorified. Had he not been endowed
with such a capacity, how could he be called to account
for his failure? 3 Bahá’u’lláh

20Behold, I have set before thee an open door, and no man
can shut it. Christ (Revelation 3:8)

21This day I call heaven and earth as witnesses…that I have
set before you life and death…Now choose life…the Lord
is your life… Deuteronomy 30:19-20 NIV

22The parable of the wedding banquet raises this question: why
did the Bridegroom, or any one of His invited guests, not open
the door to the unwise maidens? Answer: should strangers go
to a wedding to which they are not invited? The Bridegroom
had made it clear that Christians who would not honor His
wishes did not belong to His household. Those who faced
closed doors, had ignored the Master’s repeated warnings and
counsels. They had made no attempt to join His household
when the going was tough. Why should they be allowed to
join the banquet?
It is impossible to conceive of a literary device more fitting
than this simple but touching parable to teach the vital
lessons it communicates. It is the quintessence of perfection.

2328 I Shall Come Again

24The last of the three parables, that of the talents (Matt.
25:14-30), likens Jesus to a Master who leaves for a long
journey. Before leaving, the Master calls His servants and
entrusts them with His possessions . To each of them He
gives according to his capacity or talents. Two of the servants,
who had received the most, double their possessions by
investing them. The third one, who had received the least,
buries his.
“A long time afterwards their master returns to settle accounts
with them.” The two servants who had invested their posses-
sions heard these glowing words from their Master: “You
have proved trustworthy in a small way; I will now put you
in charge of something big. Come and share your master’s
delight.” What of the fearful servant who did not invest his
possessions? He presented excuses that showed lack of trust
in his Master. He said, “I was afraid and went out and hid
my talent in the ground.” His Master called him “wicked and
lazy.” Wicked because he pretended to trust Him in words
but not in deeds, lazy because he would not take time to use
his God-given talents for the very purpose for which they
were given him. Then the Master punished the fearful servant
by taking his meager possessions away from him and shutting
him out of His heavenly Kingdom.
It is clear “investing” means using one’s talents in the light
of divine guidance to find and follow the Truth—in this case
the Master Himself. The severe punishment imposed on the
fearful servant points to the severity of his infraction: denying
the very Master who granted him the cherished possessions.
The fearful servant had Jesus Christ in his heart, His Name
at least, but did not obey His command or trust His counsels.
At last, he lost even the very Name he had zealously guarded.
The adventurous, enterprising servants also had Jesus Christ
in their hearts. But since they trusted in His Command
“Watch!”—which means nothing short of “Investigate!”—
they doubled their possessions. They kept the Christ of the
Gospel, and to that added the Christ of the new Revelation.

25Chapter 1: Be Always On the Watch

26Whoever has will be given more; whoever does not have,
even what he has will be taken from him.
Christ (Mark 4:25 NIV)
Jesus used still another parable to show God’s displeasure
with those who are not adventurous, who cling to what they
already have for fear of losing it (Luke 19:11-27).
We can find one more message that the parable of the talents
shares with that of the banquet of the Kingdom. The five
maidens accompanied the Bridegroom to the banquet only
because of a little “oil” or inner light and wisdom they
carried along, only because of a little extra precaution they
took. The two enterprising servants, who invested their
capital, also entered the heavenly Kingdom for the same
reason: “You have proved trustworthy in a small way,” they
were told. Both parables teach us that sometimes a little extra
effort leads to phenomenal gains, in this case everlasting
fellowship with the Master in His Kingdom. Sometimes,
champions become Olympians by staying an inch or a frac-
tion of a second ahead of other runners. An unknown woman
made herself immortal by pouring a small, but precious, bottle
of fragrant oil over Jesus’ head (Matt. 26:6-13).
Many Christians do not investigate the Bahá’í Faith out of
fear of losing what they already have. Some of them even
hesitate to read a book such as this. This is exactly how that
one-talent servant thought. He too was afraid that by invest-
ing his capital—investigating—he might lose his cherished
possessions.
Of course, he felt he had “good reasons” for burying his
wealth, but the Master accepted none of them. His Master
had given him all the instructions, the signs, and clues:
“behold, I have foretold you all things” (Mark 13:23). He
knew that he must be watching for “the thief:” “I shall come
upon you like a thief ” (Rev. 3:3 NEB). Watching is required
only when someone or something can be missed. He knew
the command of the Scriptures: “Test everything” (I Thess.

2730 I Shall Come Again

285:21 NIV), “test the Spirits to see whether they are from God”
(I John 4:1 NIV). He knew that once again the Master would
appear to those who looked for him: “unto them that look for
him shall he appear the second time” (Heb. 9:28).
He knew the blessed task his Lord had entrusted to him:
“Happy that servant who is found at his task when his
master comes!” (Matt. 24:46 NEB). What task? The task of
looking for the Master: “Happy are those servants whom the
master finds on the alert when he comes” (Luke 12:37 NEB).
On the alert for what? For news of the coming of the Master;
about the claim of the One who speaks, lives, and acts like
the Master. “Keep your lamps burning” (Luke 12:35 NIV).
What lamp? The lamp of search. He knew from the loving
counsels of his Lord and Savior that with a little invest-
ment of his time and talents he could sit with Him on His
throne (Rev. 3:21) and receive the immortal crown of glory:
And when the Chief Shepherd appears, you will receive
the crown of glory that will never fade away.
I Peter 5:4 NIV
Why then did this servant hesitate to search, to be daring?
Why did he relinquish his responsibility? Why did he “bury”
his “talents”? It is clear our Creator dearly loves and rewards
courage, the spirit of adventure and openness. Avoidance and
fear of the search for truth have no place in His Presence.
In the Book of Revelation, too, Jesus warns that He will
keep “the fearful” out of His Kingdom. The first obstacle
to the kingdom of heaven, He specifies, is fear felt by His
followers; the second is unbelief; the third is abominable
deeds:
He that overcometh [the obstacles] shall inherit all things;
and I will be his God, and he shall be my son. But the
fearful, and the unbelieving, and the abominable…shall
have their part in the lake which burneth with fire [of
separation from God]… Christ (Revelation 21:7-8)

29Chapter 1: Be Always On the Watch

30What kind of fear deserves such a severe punishment? None
except this: the fear of searching for truth, the fear of losing
the security that goes with inertia, with preserving the status
quo, the fear of stepping into the Kingdom:
Fear not, little flock; for it is your Father’s good pleasure
to give you the kingdom. Christ (Luke 12:32)
The consequence of this fear is often a lukewarm and
apathetic attitude.
I know your deeds, that you are neither cold nor hot. I
wish you were either one or the other!
Christ (Revelation 3:15 NIV)
I know that you have little strength, yet you have kept my
word and have not denied my name.
Christ (Revelation 3:8 NIV)
The parable of the talents and the above quoted prophecy
from Revelation both specify the same severe punishment
for fearful believers. One describes the punishment as going
to a place where there is sorrow and anger (“weeping and
grinding of teeth”); the other as sinking in a burning desire
for God and a consuming sense of remorse and grief for
rejecting Heaven’s brightest gift, for saying “no” to the call
of the Lord, for refusing to examine even briefly His mighty
words to get a glimpse of His great power and glory. The
intention of the Master in using strong metaphors, such as
“grinding of teeth,” “scorching fire,” or “burning lake” is not
to frighten His beloved servants for whom He gave His life.
His intention is to motivate them, to set them free from the
fetters of fear and complacency. For He knows they will be
afflicted with both. He knows that even the sound of the
words “Christ has come again!” casts fear in their hearts.
After uttering the three parables, Jesus goes on to conclude
His discourse (Matt. 25:31- 46) with a brief profile of His
own destiny when He comes again. He refers to both the
glory that will accompany Him and the sufferings that He
and His humble servants must endure again.

3132 I Shall Come Again

32He states that when His new followers will be in pain and
suffering, some people will offer them a helping hand, while
others will ignore them. On those who offer help, He bestows
the same sublime gift He grants to the wise maidens and the
wise servants: “His Father’s blessings” and “the kingdom that
had been made ready for them since the world began.” To
them He says, “when I was hungry, you gave me food; when
thirsty, you gave me drink; when I was a stranger you took
me into your home, when naked you clothed me; when I was
ill you came to my help, when in prison you visited me”
(Matt. 25:35-36 NEB). When those servants ask the King,
“When did we see you ill or in prison, and come to visit
you?” (Matt. 25:39 NEB), He responds, “I tell you this: any-
thing you did for one of my brothers here, however humble,
you did for me” (Matt. 25:40 NEB).
On those who felt indifferent to the King’s anguish and
adversities, or refused to lend a helping hand to His humble
and suffering servants, He inflicts a severe punishment: He
deprives them of His glorious Kingdom (Matt. 25:41). To
them He says:
“The curse is upon you…for when I was hungry you gave
me nothing to eat, when thirsty nothing to drink; when I
was a stranger you gave me no home, when naked you
did not clothe me; when I was ill and in prison you did
not come to my help.” And they too will reply, “Lord,
when was it that we saw you hungry or thirsty or a
stranger or naked or ill or in prison, and did nothing for
you?” And he will answer, “I tell you this: anything you
did not do for one of these, however humble, you did not
do for me.” Christ (Matthew 25:41-46 NEB)
Why would people cause pain and suffering to their Redeemer?
Why would they reject Him? Why would they mistreat His
servants?
There will be terrible times in the last days. People will
be lovers of themselves, lovers of money…lovers of pleasure

33Chapter 1: Be Always On the Watch

34rather than lovers of God—having a form of godliness
but denying its power…They are the kind who…are…always
learning but never able to acknowledge the truth. Just as
Jannes and Jambres opposed Moses, so also these men
oppose the truth… II Timothy 3:1-8 NIV
To reveal the state of the world at the time of His second
coming, Jesus said:
As things were in Noah’s days, so will they be when the
Son of Man comes. Christ (Matthew 24:37 NEB)
The New American Bible version of the same verse reads:
The coming [parousia] of the Son of Man will repeat what
happened in Noah’s time. Matthew 24:37
The Greek word used here is parousia, which according to
scholars means both coming and presence. As one source
indicates: “parousia does not mean the moment of coming
but covers the entire duration of the visit.” 4 Harper’s Bible
Dictionary defines parousia as “arrival, coming, or being
present.”
Isaiah too makes the same prediction:
These days recall for me the days of Noah…
Isaiah 54:9 NEB
Noah was present among the people, yet they were unaware
of His presence. To them He was as invisible as “a thief.”
They kept doing what they would usually do—“they ate and
drank and married” (Luke 17:27 NEB); “they knew nothing
until the flood came” (Matt. 24:39 NEB). Their minds were
dulled by complacency, and their souls occupied with worldly
cares. Those same obstacles are predicted to be pervasive at
the time of the second advent:
Keep a watch on yourselves; do not let your minds be
dulled by dissipation and drunkenness and worldly cares
…Be on the alert… Christ (Luke 21:34-36 NEB)

3534 I Shall Come Again

36There is a close link between this prophecy and the one
pointing to the destiny of Noah. The link is this:
• Certain veils will conceal the identity of Christ.
• These veils will be spiritual.
It is clear, “being on the alert” or “on the watch” can be
attained by removing the veils, by cultivating a sincere
desire to know the truth, and by paying attention to news of
the Master's arrival.
Some Christians believe that as long as they belong to a
certain church or espouse a particular set of beliefs, they
will be the chosen ones. When Christ returns, He will take
them to heaven (the rapture). They assume that only the
Redeemer does the choosing, based on people’s previous
beliefs. There is little anyone can do except wait and hope
that he or she will be one of the chosen ones. In one of His
parables Jesus says:
Be like men who wait for their master’s return from a
wedding-party, ready to let him in the moment he arrives
and knocks. Happy are those servants whom the master
finds on the alert when he comes. Christ (Luke 12:36-37 NEB)
What does Jesus mean by “knocks”? It is clear He means the
Redeemer will call you, invite you to His presence, or ask
you to investigate His identity. When someone knocks, the
man or woman of the house has the freedom to either open
the door or to leave it closed. What does Jesus mean by “let
him in”? It is equally clear, He means let him into your
heart, be receptive, be open-minded. Again the freedom of
choice is evident. When a person knows the Voice, he opens
the door without fear. If he cannot recognize it, he must
investigate the caller. Not responding to him is the same as
rejecting him. As these verses imply, people’s freedom to
choose or reject their Redeemer will not be taken away from
them. This is how it has been and always will be. This
subject is so critical, it is discussed in greater depth later.

37Chapter 1: Be Always On the Watch

38(See God’s eternal covenant with humanity: I Have Set My
Rainbow in the Clouds, Chapter 21.) In the Book of Revela-
tion, which is mainly about the return of the Redeemer of our
time, Jesus confirms the human freedom to accept Him or
reject Him:
Here I stand knocking at the door; if anyone hears my
voice and opens the door, I will come in and sit down to
supper with him and he with me. To him who is victorious
[in opening his heart] I will grant a place on my throne,
as I myself was victorious and sat down with my Father
on his throne. Hear, you who have ears to hear, what the
Spirit says to the churches! Christ (Revelation 3:20-22 NEB)
The Master simply invites the people to His banquet. He does
not force them to attend. If they close their hearts to Him,
He too will close His banquet to them:
Blessed the insatiate soul who casteth away his selfish
desires for love of Me and taketh his place at the banquet
table which I have sent down from the heaven of divine
bounty…6 Bahá’u’lláh
I tell you that not one of those who were invited [but did
not come] shall taste my banquet. Christ (Luke 14:24 NEB)
The imagery Jesus uses to encourage investigation is always
tinged with a most urgent and emphatic tone:
Be ready for action, with belts fastened and lamps alight…
ready to let him in the moment he arrives and knocks…
Even if it is the middle of the night or before dawn…
Christ (Luke 12:35-38 NEB)
This is the kind of readiness often required of soldiers or in
emergencies. Why so much emphasis on speed?
The event is so vital and the consequence so far reaching that
there must not be even a moment’s hesitation between hear-
ing the news of the coming of the Master and the initiation
of the search and discovery mission.

3936 I Shall Come Again

40On that day no one who is on the roof of his house, with
his goods inside, should go down to get them. Likewise,
no one in the field should go back for anything.
Christ (Luke 17:31 NIV)
To summarize, “watch” is a state of mind opposite to “sleep.”
Sleeping implies negligence, unawareness, an inability to see
or hear; the absence of a desire to think, to know, and to
investigate. To be asleep is to be wrapped in one’s fantasies
and illusions; to rest in the dark of one’s wishes, dreams, and
desires. To be alert and watchful is to learn, to see, to inquire,
to test, to stay in touch with a larger dimension of life than
one’s own preoccupations. The glory of the dawn always goes
unnoticed by the sleeper, but never by the careful watchman.
In the spring of 1833, eleven years before the advent of the
Báb, Miss Margaret MacDonald of Scotland disclosed the
message of a vision she claimed she had received about the
manner of Christ’s return. Her vision offers further insight
into the meaning of the critical word “Watch!” and the purpose
of Jesus’ prophetic parables. She recorded and printed an
account of her vision under the title “Recollections of the
first morning of the outpouring of the Spirit:”
It was first the awful state of the land that was pressed
upon me. I saw the blindness and infatuation of the people
to be very great…Now there is distress of nations, with
perplexity, the seas and the waves roaring, men’s hearts
failing them for fear—now look out for the sign of the
Son of man. Here I was made to stop and cry out, O it
is not known what the sign of the Son of man is; the
people of God think they are waiting, but they know not
what it is. I felt this needed to be revealed, and that there
was great darkness and error about it…I saw the error to
be, that men think that it will be something seen by the
natural eye; but ’tis spiritual discernment that is needed,
the eye of God in his people. Many passages were
revealed, in a light in which I had not before seen them.

41Chapter 1: Be Always On the Watch

42I repeated, ‘Now is the kingdom of Heaven like unto ten
virgins, who went forth to meet the Bridegroom, five wise
and five foolish; they that were foolish took their lamps,
but took no oil with them; but they that were wise took
oil in their vessels with their lamps.’ ‘But be ye not un-
wise, but understanding what the will of the Lord is; and
be not drunk with wine…but be filled with the Spirit.’ This
was the oil the wise virgins took in their vessels—this is
the light to be kept burning—the light of God—that we
may discern that which cometh not with observation to
the natural eye. Only those who have the light of God
within them will see the sign of his appearance…I often
said, Oh the glorious inbreaking of God which is now
about to burst on this earth…It was a glorious light above
the brightness of the sun, that shone round about me. I
felt that those who were filled with the Spirit could see
spiritual things, and feel walking in the midst of them,
while those who had not the Spirit could see nothing—
so that two shall be in one bed, the one taken and the
other left, because the one has the light of God within
while the other cannot see the Kingdom of Heaven.7
[Emphasis added.]
Some authorities maintain that Miss MacDonald’s vision gave
rise to the idea of “the rapture,” to the expectation that Jesus
will make two appearances, first secretly, and then later
openly. More about this in Appendix III.
As stated, in the Book of Revelation Jesus offers many gifts
to those who overcome the obstacles that prevent them from
knowing their Lord. This is one of them:
To him who overcomes and does my will to the end…I
will also give him the morning star. Revelation 2:26,28 NIV
In 1852, a noted Christian author, John Darby wrote:
And who is it that sees the morning star? He who watches
while it is night. All see the sun in its brightness; but

4338 I Shall Come Again

44those only who are not of the night, yet knowing that
morally it is night and are looking for the morning star—
those, and those only, see the morning star and get it as
their portion.8
The meaning of the command “Watch! ” and “Be on the
alert!” become clearer when we study in the next chapter
Jesus' purpose in saying, “ I shall come upon you like a
thief !”

45I Shall Come Upon You

• • •
Chapter 20

Part I

Like A Thief

1Revelation 3:3 NEB

1I beseech God, exalted be His glory, that He may
graciously awaken the peoples of the earth
Bahá’u’lláh
That is the day when I come like a thief! Happy the man
who stays awake… Christ (Revelation 16:15 NEB)
Christian scholar Dr. Ray Stedman, in his book Waiting for
the Second Coming, writes:
The first characteristic of the Day of the Lord, said Paul
to the Thessalonians, is that it will come stealthily. It will
come “like a thief in the night” (v. 2). I recall hearing of
an incident where an entire family was sleeping upstairs

240 I Shall Come Again

3one night when someone entered their home and stole
several items of value; the thief came and left without their
knowing it. That is the way a professional thief operates.
He enters silently and unobtrusively and does his work.
That, said Paul, is the way the Lord will come.2
He then concludes:
What should be the result in our lives?…The apostle [Paul]
stirs us from our apathy and from fantasies and dreams
such as the world dreams…“Be alert,” warns the apostle
(v. 6). “Do not lose sight of reality. This is the hour when
God is about to move on earth again. Snap out of your
lethargy and tune in to His voice.”

4The Master’s Strategy
Why does the Master urge His servants to stay awake, to keep
constant watch? The Master has a clear and definitive plan;
to pursue it, He has devised a perfect strategy, an ingenious
plot. His chief goal is to disclose His glory to His faithful
and humble servants, while concealing it from others. To
accomplish this goal, He offers certain simple but coded
instructions that He knows only His faithful and humble
servants can decipher; He gives certain emphatic warnings
that He knows only they will heed.
No ordinary plotter can do this. Only a divine strategist can
devise such instructions. Only He can conceal a blazing glory
before whose radiance the sun, with all its splendor, pales
into darkness. Only He can hide His identity from the great
masses of perfectly sighted but inattentive and veiled viewers
—those who look but see only their own desires, who think
but within the domain of tradition, who listen but hear only
the whisperings of their own selves, who dig deep into the
earth, discover and detect long-forgotten facts from fading
archaeological records but fail to discern the luminous face
of their Lord. Only He has the wisdom to devise a strategy

5Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

6that can be deciphered by a few of His simple and humble
servants, but remain a supreme mystery to others—among
them some of His most well read, best educated, and noted
followers. He is the Perfect Plotter, the Supreme Strategist of
the universe, the All-Knowing, the All-Wise.
He knows that only His most humble servants will undertake
the effort of searching for His concealed glory. He predicts
that others will be busy with their daily affairs (Matt. 24:37-
39)—working, vacationing, studying, saving, worrying and
wondering why, in spite of all material means and comforts,
life is so full of stress and distress. He knows that people will
have more things to do than they have time for; that there
will be too many attractions to allow them to be attracted
to their Lord. To awaken them, He gives them this astonish-
ingly clear and definitive clue, which He knows most people
will not heed; if they did, His prophecy would not come true:
The coming of the Son of Man will repeat what happened
in Noah’s time. Christ (Matthew 24:37 NAB)
To pursue His plan the Master must choose the most advan-
tageous time—when people live in the darkest depths of
unawareness. The Master had used this same strategy before.
It had worked then; it must work again. While the great
masses of people and their leaders had their sights set on a
mighty Messiah crowned with jewels, a Prince adorned with
swords, a King with myriads of angels at His command, He
came in the guise of a poor and humble man with no home to
protect Him from the heat of the blazing sun, with no bed
to give Him rest through the long hours of the night. Only a
handful discerned His divine glory. People do not change that
much. If the strategy worked then, it must work again.
Those who were eloquent orators and gifted debaters, who
could hold spellbound an audience with their brilliant inter-
pretation of prophecies; those who were the unquestioned
teachers of the Law, the masters of Hebrew and Greek; those

742 I Shall Come Again

8who could quote verse after verse from memory with their
exact location in the Scriptures—yes, scholars, leaders, and
orators of great distinction who could do all these and more,
could not discern the blazing glory of their Messiah, the One
who was the light of the world. Why did their education not
lead them to their Lord? “The letter they knew, but of the
spirit they knew nothing.”
The Jews looked at their suffering Master, but saw only
mercy, misery, and meekness. Of misery and meekness, they
had plenty. They lived like slaves in their own country. And
mercy could not save them from the hands of an astute
enemy. Only power could restore their pride.
They asked their Master to come down from the cross and
prove His powers. They wondered why a Savior could not
save Himself. While they were busy mocking the Son of God
sent from heaven (John 6:38); while they were laughing and
jeering at the One whom Bahá’u’lláh calls the Lord of the
visible and invisible; while they were rejoicing that they had
done away with an impostor, a handful of people, mostly
unschooled, very ordinary people—peasants and fishermen—
were bitterly mourning the painful and agonizing departure
of their Lord, their only hope and desire. Yes, people do
not change that much. The strategy worked then, it must
work again.
Even if this drama repeats itself a thousand times, people will
continue to do what others have done before them. They will
repeat the exact words of their forefathers. They will say,
“No, this time is different. This time our Master will be a
real king. This time He will have a real throne. This time
He will soar through the clouds of glory like a blazing shaft
of light with the roar of thunder. He will not be crowned
again with thorn and thistle. He will not fall again into the
hands of His enemies. The stars of heaven will crown Him.
He will not be held by the harsh hands of His foes, but by
the soft embrace of a rainbow. He will not need again the
help of the poor and lowly. At His command He will have

9Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

10the arrayed armies and angels of heaven.” Most people do
not learn from the experience of others, especially from what
others experienced long ago.
The Master knows that when He comes, the darkness of
despair and confusion will be so vast and deep that, without
His help, even His most humble servants will fail to find Him.
To guide their steps by the light of knowledge, He offers
them hundreds of clues and warnings. He tells them that that
day will come under the veil of clouds and darkness, and so
will the Master.
Perhaps no one is as much concerned with preserving
secrecy as a thief. Everything he does revolves around that
goal. The strategy of a thief offers a perfect demonstration
of the Master’s strategy. These two warnings—about the
secret coming of the Master, and the secret coming of His
day—should not simply be read and glossed over, but
pondered upon day and night. They should adorn a wall in
every home:
…I shall come upon you like a thief…
Christ (Revelation 3:3 NEB)
Lo, I am going to come like a thief! Blessed—happy, to
be envied—is he who stays awake (alert)…
Christ (Revelation 16:15 AB)
…the day of the Lord will come like a thief in the night
[emphasis added]. I Thessalonians 5:2 NIV
That day arrives secretly and passes secretly, even as a thief
does. The sleepers are taken by surprise, unaware of what has
happened. If they knew the exact time, secrecy could not be
maintained. The event must occur when people least expect it:
But understand this: If the owner of the house had known
at what hour the thief was coming, he would not have let
his house be broken into. You also must be ready, because
the Son of Man will come at an hour when you do not
expect him. Christ (Luke 12:39-40 NIV)

1144 I Shall Come Again

12The owner of the house or the householder here symbolizes
a person in possession of the desired resources: knowledge,
wealth, power, prestige. As we already noted, Jesus applies
the term specifically to religious leaders (Matt. 24:45-47) or
to the teachers of the word of God who are given instruc-
tions about “the kingdom of heaven,” namely the coming of
God’s kingdom to the earthly realm:
…every teacher of the law [of the Lord] who has been
instructed about the kingdom of heaven is like the owner
of a house who brings out of his storeroom new treasures
as well as old. Christ (Matthew 13:52 NIV)

13Those in positions of power tend to see themselves as “the
householders” and the new Redeemer as “a thief ” who comes
to steal their spiritual and earthly heritage. Instinctively, they
distrust Him and try to prevent Him from pursuing His plans.
For instance, those who had the most to lose, conspired
against Jesus. They thought that by crucifying Him they could
stop His influence. They were the enemies of His plan. Yet
without knowing it, they became the instruments of His plan.
Their counterparts tried to destroy Bahá’u’lláh by sending
Him to the most deadly prison in the most desolate city in
the Holy Land. Without knowing it, they too became the
instruments of His plan. Instead of changing that which was
pre-ordained, they brought about its fulfillment. The same
kind of people imprisoned and executed the Báb for the same
reasons, and faced the same consequence:
Ye cannot alter the things which the Almighty hath
prescribed unto Me. Naught shall touch Me besides that
which God, My Lord, hath pre-ordained for Me. In Him
have I placed my whole trust…4 The Báb

14How can the thief preserve and pursue His pre-ordained plan?
How can He keep His enemies in the dark? He can do this
by clothing the bare facts of His coming with symbols. The
secret must always be kept in such a way as to allow no one

15Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

16the opportunity to misuse or undermine any part of the
divine plan. If the householder could decipher some of the
thief’s well-guarded secrets, then perhaps he could prevent
the thief from “breaking into his home,” into what he con-
siders rightfully his own, the domain of his rule and power.
If the householder could decode more than he is allowed,
then perhaps he could prevent or alter the execution of the
thief’s plans.
The Day of Return is inscrutable unto all men until after
the divine Revelation hath been fulfilled.5 Bahá’u’lláh
When King Herod learned from the wise men of the East that
the king of the Jews was born, he feared the loss of his
power, and plotted in vain to destroy the child before He
could attain His divine destiny (Matt. 2:1-18). An angel in a
dream inspired Joseph to take Jesus and Mary to Egypt,
where they could live in safety. If this help had not come,
Jesus could not have fulfilled His Mission. Because the
secrets were kept, Herod was unable to alter the pre-ordained
plan. Not only that, he himself served as an instrument in
carrying out the plan. Without knowing it, he brought about
the fulfillment of the prophecies (Matt. 2:15).
The kings and rulers in the 19th century also tried in vain
to devise ingenious plots against the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh
(see Volumes II and III):
Why do the nations rage and the peoples plot in vain?
The kings of the earth take their stand and the rulers
gather together against the Lord… Psalms 2:1-2 NIV
The term householder also symbolizes any individual who
does not wish to open his heart to the Master, and to let “his
house be broken into.” He is the person who does not feel
threatened by the good news of the Kingdom, but would
like to retain what he already has. Since he does not feel
threatened, he does not try to hinder the thief. His main goal
is simply to protect himself.

1746 I Shall Come Again

18The Master, of course, honors his wishes and in no way does
He try to enter his heart without his consent, without being
invited. How can He do this? This, too, He can do by “not
removing the veil,” by living as other humans do, by being
humble “like a servant” (Luke 22:27), and by not engaging
in dramatic displays of His divine power, His supreme
splendor. That is His best strategy.
No other analogy than “the householder who fears his house
will be broken into” could better describe the way people
feel when they are asked to renew their spiritual possessions,
such as by adopting a new name. They know the Master’s
promise and pre-ordained plan: “the old order of things has
passed away…I am making everything new!” (Rev. 21:4-5
NIV). Yet they feel threatened by the new order of things;
they perceive it as a loss of their eternal heritage. They know
the Master has asked them to stay awake, yet they remain
absorbed in their dreams. Why?
We may enjoy the dreaming part so much that we do not
even want to consider that there is much more available if
we awaken. Thus we choose to remain asleep, unaware of
the grandness that is there for us in awakening. When we
stay with the familiar we take no risks. Dr. Wayne Dyer

19Among the many who sleep with their hearts and homes
firmly locked, among the multitudes who cherish the comfort
of sleeping and the joy of dreaming, a few adventurous house-
holders do just the opposite. They keep constant vigilance
through the whole night with their hopes aglow and their
hearts and homes open. They trim their lamps, and wear their
beautiful white robes with fastened belts, ready for the call
to the banquet. They keep their eyes on the door and set their
hopes on heaven. They pray through the whole night, and
wait for their heavenly Bridegroom to arrive at any moment
and take them. They want to be His possession. That is their
highest hope, their most cherished desire and honor.

20Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

21Fear finds no room in their souls. They know no intruder can
rob them, no earthly thief, no imposter can break in and steal
the precious pearl of their faith. Their trust in their Lord is
limitless, their confidence in His undying care and protection
beyond measure.
When the heavenly thief knocks, they hear His call and know
His voice. They jump with joy—as a bride who hears the
voice of her adored One—and welcome Him to their arms,
to their hearts and homes with the utmost ecstasy. As a
reward for their faith, vigilance, and courage, the heavenly
thief takes them all for Himself. He needs many jewels for
the crown of His Kingdom. He seeks them and gathers them
from the farthest reaches of the earth, from the houses and
the fields, the meadows and mountains. And He does all this
in full secrecy from the slumberers. How could they hear
Him? How could they know? It is midnight. They are sound
asleep and dreaming.
The heavenly thief knows that to remain invisible, He must
take only the hearts and souls of His servants. If He took
their bodies, He would awaken some of the slumberers. That
would violate His most urgent concern: secrecy.
Two men will be in the field; one will be taken and the
other left. Two women will be grinding with a hand mill;
one will be taken and the other left. Therefore keep
watch… Christ (Matthew 24:40-42 NIV)
Those taken are the first fruits of the vineyard of the Lord,
ripe and ready for the kingdom.
Then as I looked there appeared a white cloud, and on the
cloud sat one like a son of man. He had on his head a
crown of gold and in his hand a sharp sickle. Another
angel came out of the temple and called in a loud voice
to him who sat on the cloud: ‘Stretch out your sickle and
reap; for harvest-time has come, and earth’s crop is over-
ripe.’ So he who sat on the cloud put his sickle to the
earth and its harvest was reaped. Revelation 14:14-16 NEB

2248 I Shall Come Again

23What then does the Master’s secret plan require from the
sincere seekers of truth, from those who wish to welcome
their Master, from those who do not mind “their house
being broken into”? It requires perfect readiness, absolute
receptivity and sensitivity. That is how Jesus concludes the
analogy: “you also must be ready” (Luke 12:40 NIV). The
seekers must be as prepared to play their role as the Master
does His.
Of course the Master does not need to keep everything a
secret. To the seekers of His Kingdom He has offered all the
clues they need to find Him: “behold I have foretold you all
things” (Mark 13:23). But they are the kind of clues that
would neither help the householder to prevent the thief from
carrying out His plan, nor force him into submission. The
householder has the right to enjoy his own spiritual freedom,
but not to violate the Master’s. He has the right to keep his
heart closed to the Master, but not to keep Him beyond the
reach of other hearts.
It is an essential part of the Master’s plan and an eternal
requirement of His Covenant, to become known only to those
who sincerely seek Him by being faithful to His instruc-
tions, only to those who use all their talents, only to those
who strive with their whole heart for the un-paralleled
reward of finding their Lord.
…thou shalt find him, if thou seek him with all thy heart
and with all thy soul. Deuteronomy 4:29
To be known is one of the Master’s most cherished desires,
but only to those servants who leave their selves behind.
If anyone wishes to be a follower of mine, he must leave
self behind…Whoever cares for his own safety is lost…
Christ (Luke 9:23-24 NEB)
If anyone would come after me, he must deny himself and
take up his cross and follow me.
Christ (Matthew 16:24 NIV)

24Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

25No one who sets his hand to the plough and then keeps
looking back is fit for the kingdom of God.
Christ (Luke 9:62 NEB)

26The heavenly Host does not wish to have any ungrateful or
unprepared guests at His banquet:
The kingdom of Heaven is like this. There was a king
who prepared a feast for his son’s wedding…When the
king came in to see the company at table, he observed one
man who was not dressed for a wedding. “My friend,” said
the king, “how do you come to be here without your
wedding clothes?” He had nothing to say. The king then
said to his attendants, “Bind him hand and foot; turn him
out into the dark, the place of wailing and grinding of
teeth.” For though many are invited, few are chosen.
Christ (Matthew 22:1-2, 11-14 NEB)

27The Master wants to be followed only by those who set aside
whatever pleases them—whether it is the quiet and comfort
of tradition or “the ease of a passing day”—to pursue that
which pleases their Lord. His plan is to test those who call
on His name, to measure their purity in the crucible of trials.
He intends to separate the Annases and Caiaphases from the
Peters and Mary Magdalenes. He wishes to disclose people’s
inward motives:
…wait until the Lord comes. For he will bring to light what
darkness hides, and disclose men’s inward motives
[emphasis added throughout]… I Corinthians 4:5 NEB

28It was for the same reason—to test His followers—that the
Master hid Himself behind “the clouds of glory” on his first
appearance:
Many in Israel will stand or fall because of him [Jesus],
and thus the secret thoughts of many will be laid bare.
Luke 2:35 NEB

2950 I Shall Come Again

30If the Master revealed His full glory, how could people feel
free to disclose their true selves, their inner motives? If the
Master “removed the veil,” who could dare deny Him? How
could anyone not see or recognize Him?
Were I to remove the veil, all would recognize Me as their
Best Beloved, and no one would deny Me.6 The Báb
Why does Jesus use the word “if ” in the following prophecy
addressed to the people of our time?
Wake up! Strengthen what remains and is about to die, for
I have not found your deeds complete in the sight of my
God. Remember, therefore, what you have received and
heard; obey it, and repent. But if you do not wake up, I
will come like a thief…He who has an ear, let him hear
what the Spirit says to the churches.
Christ (Revelation 3:2, 3, 6 NIV)
Does Jesus mean the way He comes depends on how people
will act? Does He mean that if Christians fail to watch for
Him, He will come like a thief, otherwise not like a thief ?
The answer to this question can be found in the first two
words of the prophecy. Jesus begins by urging Christians to
“Wake up!” Evidently He knew they would be asleep at His
coming and must be awakened. He knew they would be
dreaming their own earthly dreams and would be unable to
see and recognize their Master’s heavenly visions of truth and
glory. “If a little eyelid can conceal the world, what then can
the vast expanse of human thoughts and theories, advanced
and stored for centuries, conceal?”
The answer to the meaning of “if ” can also be found in
other prophecies where Jesus declares unconditionally that He
will indeed come like a thief (Rev. 16:15). Then what does
the word “if ” imply? It implies this: the thief remains invis-
ible only to those who stay asleep; He remains hidden only
to those who fail to watch for Him, who ignore the good news
of His coming. He need not hide Himself from others. Why
would He wish to conceal Himself from those who have been

31Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

32faithful to His counsels, who have remained awake and alert
to the news, who have been looking for Him?
…unto them that look for him shall he appear the second
time… Hebrews 9:28

33That a shroud enfolds all people, that a veil conceals the
heavenly thief is confirmed also in this prophecy:
…the covering that covereth all peoples, and the veil that
is spread over all nations. Isaiah 25:7 ARV

34Behold how great is the Cause, and yet how the people
are wrapt in veils.8 The Báb

35…the peoples of the world are wrapt in palpable veils.9
Bahá’u’lláh
The accumulations of vain fancy have obscured men’s ears
and stopped them from hearing the Voice of God, and the
veils of human learning and false imaginings have pre-
vented their eyes from beholding the splendor of the light
of His countenance.10 Bahá’u’lláh

36God’s Wisdom ordains that only the “eye” that is humble,
unafraid, and pure from preconceived, even though popular,
notions should see the Lord.
…without holiness no one will see the Lord.
Hebrews 12:14 NIV

37Thus visibility or invisibility is a result of people’s responses.
They choose to see or not to see the heavenly thief. If they
search for their Master with open hearts and minds, they will
behold His heavenly glory, otherwise they will see nothing
but the clouds of their own desires and fantasies.
Awake, sleeper…and Christ will shine upon you.
Ephesians 5:14 NEB

38The Master remains forever both manifest and hidden.

3952 I Shall Come Again

40…He is the Beginning and the End, the Manifest and the
Hidden…11 The Báb

41One more point: just before saying that He will come like a
thief, Jesus declared:
Remember, therefore, what you have received and heard;
obey it, and repent. Christ (Revelation 3:3 NIV)

42What does He ask the servant to obey? The context of the
passage clearly shows He asks the servant to obey the
commandment to stay awake and to investigate the good
news of His Return. In the next verse He predicts that at His
coming only a few will keep their “clothes” pure. Only a few
will walk with Him dressed in white (Rev. 3:4).

• • •
Chapter 21

The Most Manifest And The Most Hidden

1To gain a glimmer of God’s Wisdom, to understand how
the Creator relates to humans, it is absolutely essential to
recognize the immutable and universal “law of visibility and
invisibility.” The best evidence of God’s unlimited and
mysterious powers is this: He always remains both the
most visible and the most invisible to human beings. He
is everywhere and in everything:
The glory and greatness of Almighty God are marvelously
discerned in all His works and divinely read in the book
of heaven. Galileo Galilei

2Everyone who is seriously involved in the pursuit of science
becomes convinced that a Spirit is manifest in the Law of
the Universe—a Spirit vastly superior to that of man, and
one in the face of which we, with our modest powers, must
feel humble. Albert Einstein

3Nature is too thin a screen; the glory of the omnipresent
God bursts through everywhere. Ralph Waldo Emerson

4Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

5Every atom declares God’s supreme grandeur; every star
manifests His awesome splendor; every flower unfolds His
wisdom and wonders. He shines with dazzling brightness, yet
many cannot detect even the faintest glimmer of His glory.
Among those incapable of finding any evidence of God are
some of the most astute scientists who detect invisible atoms
and distant galaxies billions of light years away, yet fail to
detect God. Nothing could be more puzzling.
How profound our sense of wonder if we learned that millions
of people with perfect eyes were unable to see, or that count-
less others with flawless hearing could not hear. That is how
puzzling it is to know that many of the people with the
sharpest minds—minds that penetrate the most abstruse
mysteries of nature—cannot discern God. Yet this is so
commonplace that we are used to accepting it with little, if
any, surprise.
The ability to make and maintain the mysterious “law of
visibility and invisibility” is perhaps the most marvelous
evidence of the Creator’s supreme power and wisdom. If this
law were ever lifted, the whole purpose and design of creation
would instantly crumble. This universal law holds true not
only in the way God reveals Himself to humans, but also in
the way His Messengers or Mediators reveal themselves.
That some humans give their lives for those Messengers,
whereas others take the lives of those Messengers is a clear
evidence of this supreme mystery, of how well this immutable
law is upheld.
…they [God’s Messengers] all abide on the throne of divine
Revelation, and are established upon the seat of divine
Concealment.12 Bahá’u’lláh
…[they are] the throne of the revelation and concealment
of God among His creatures…13 The Báb
They are the mirrors that truly and faithfully reflect the
light of God. Whatever is applicable to them is in reality

654 I Shall Come Again

7applicable to God, Himself, Who is both the Visible and
the Invisible.14 Bahá’u’lláh

8Our Creator keeps a perfect balance between how much of
His glory He should reveal to inspire faith without disturb-
ing our freedom, and how much of His glory He should
conceal from those unreceptive to His call and unworthy of
attaining His presence. Thus the supreme gift of knowing
Him is not imposed and the bounty of loving Him does not
lose its luster.
Truly you are a God who hides himself… Isaiah 45:15 NIV

9He chose to hide His own Self behind a thousand veils,
lest profane and mortal eyes discover His glory.15
Bahá’u’lláh
He wraps himself in light as with a garment…He makes
the clouds his chariot and rides on the wings of the wind.
Psalms 104:2-3 NIV
To the king who exiled Him, the Báb wrote:
Were the veil to be removed from thine eye thou wouldst
crawl unto Me on thy breast, even through the snow, from
fear of the chastisement of God
Without humility, and constant striving and searching, the
“morning light” hides forever behind the “veils of glory:”
Let us humble ourselves, let us strive to know the Lord,
whose justice dawns like morning light, and its dawning
is as sure as the sunrise. Hosea 6:3 NEB

10…if you search with all your heart, I [God] will let you
find me… Jeremiah 29:14 NEB
If people saw the Master’s heavenly Kingdom, if they beheld
the glories of “immortal sovereignty” in His “Father’s many
mansions” (John 14:2), how could they not feel forced to
carry the cross after Him, to become His perfect followers?

11Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

12Did thou behold immortal sovereignty, thou wouldst strive
to pass from this fleeting world. But to conceal the one
from thee and to reveal the other is a mystery which none
but the pure in heart can comprehend.17 Bahá’u’lláh
Should the greatness of this Day be revealed in its fullness,
every man would forsake a myriad lives in his longing to
partake, though it be for one moment, of its great glory—
how much more this world and its corruptible treasures!
Bahá’u’lláh
The great mathematician, Blaise Pascal, discerned not only
the mysteries of the visible but the invisible as well. Here he
speaks about Christ but his thought expresses a universal
principle that establishes the Creator’s relationship with all
humankind for all time:
It was…not right that Christ should appear in a manner
manifestly divine and absolutely capable of convincing all
men, but neither was it right that His coming should be
so hidden that He could not be recognized by those who
sincerely sought Him. He wished to make Himself perfectly
recognizable to them. Thus wishing to appear openly to
those who seek Him with all their heart and hidden from
those who shun Him with all their heart, He has qualified
our knowledge of Him by giving signs which can be seen
by those who seek Him and not by those who do not.
The basic laws that govern the relationship between the
Creator and the created never change.
Every part of this law must remain in force upon all
mankind, and in all ages; as not depending either on time
or place, or any other circumstances liable to change, but
on the nature of God, and the nature of man, and their
unchangeable relation to each other. John Wesley
There is no pleasure or honor in entering hearts by force and
fear. The Master’s glory lies in this: to be invited and wel-
comed. If He wished, He could conquer the hearts of all
humanity in an instant:

1356 I Shall Come Again

14Should it be Our wish, it is in Our power to compel,
through the agency of but one letter of Our Revelation,
the world and all that is therein to recognize, in less than
the twinkling of an eye, the truth of Our Cause
The Báb
…one drop out of the ocean of His bountiful grace is
enough to confer upon all beings the glory of everlasting
life. But inasmuch as the divine Purpose hath decreed
that the true should be known from the false…He hath,
therefore, in every season sent down upon mankind the
showers of tests from His realm of glory.20 Bahá’u’lláh

15“The arm of the Lord is not too short” to reach and lift all
those who are fallen. It is the fallen who avoid His arm. His
light dazzles the eyes. It is the eyes that avoid His light.
Surely the arm of the Lord is not too short to save…your
sins have hidden his face from you… Isaiah 59:1-2 NIV

16The sun with all its glory is veiled by a little eyelid. How
much more can be veiled by the drifting mists of fancy and
desire, by the glow and glitter of the world?
The light shines on in the dark, and the darkness has
never mastered it. John 1:5 NEB

17Who Shall Sit Upon the Throne?
What is “the great Day of the Lord” like? It is a time when
“many…shall be tried” (Daniel 12:10); when the work of each
person “will be shown for what it is, because the Day will
bring it to light. It will be revealed with fire, and the fire will
test the quality of each man’s work” (I Cor. 3:13 NIV).
For there is nothing hidden that will not become public,
nothing under cover that will not be made known and
brought into the open. Christ (Luke 8:17 NEB)

18Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

19Those who recognize and follow the Redeemer are promised
“thrones of their own” in the Kingdom of heaven:
…in the world that is to be…you my followers will have
thrones of your own… Christ (Matthew 19:28 NEB)
See also I Peter 5:4

20Those who trust the Redeemer, who discern His power and
glory in the garment of humility and weakness, who look
beyond the barrier of flesh to see the divine in the human,
can also behold the heavenly throne in all its splendor be-
hind the veils of the world. Others see nothing but an empty
promise. Who shall sit upon the throne and be crowned?
Only those who stand the test:
Blessed is the man who perseveres under trial, because
when he has stood the test, he will receive the crown of
life… James 1:12 NIV

21In the earthly realm no one can escape tests and trials. Even
the distinguished disciples were asked to pray for strength to
face the loss of their Lord: “pray that you may be spared the
test” (Matt. 26:41 NEB). Even the Redeemer Himself went
through trials to set an example for others (Matt. 26:39-44).
Even gold passes through the assayer’s fire, and more
precious than perishable gold is faith which has stood the
test. These trials come so that your faith may prove itself
worthy…when Jesus Christ is revealed. I Peter 1:7 NEB

22…from time immemorial even unto eternity the Almighty
hath tried, and will continue to try, His servants, so that
light may be distinguished from darkness…22 Bahá’u’lláh

23The Redeemer presents an awesome challenge to those who
call on His name: “Who can stand when he [the Redeemer]
appears? For he will be like a refiner’s fire” (Mal. 3:2 NIV).
Only those who enter His fiery crucible with courage, faith,
and patience can stand the test, can meet the demands of the
Hour. Only they are granted the crown of immortal glory.

2458 I Shall Come Again

25To attain the Master’s presence and become worthy of His
grace, those who seek His Kingdom must put all their
spiritual talents to work. They must be ready to encounter
and endure the hardest tests and trials. They must put tradi-
tion aside and become as nonjudgmental and pure as little
children. For “whoever does not accept the kingdom of God
like a child will never enter it” (Luke 18:17 NEB). They must
constantly recall the Master’s words: “Be careful, or your
hearts will be weighed down with dissipation, drunkenness
and the anxieties of life, and that day will close on you un-
expectedly like a trap” (Luke 21:34 NIV).
Only when the lamp of search, of earnest striving, of
longing desire, of passionate devotion, of fervid love, of
rapture, and ecstasy, is kindled within the seeker’s heart,
and the breeze of His loving-kindness is wafted upon his
soul, will the darkness of error be dispelled, the mists of
doubts and misgivings be dissipated, and the lights of
knowledge and certitude envelop his being.23 Bahá’u’lláh
To live up to the awesome challenge the thief presents, the
highest degree of alertness is required. The hearers must be
ready to test every call, just as the detectives must be willing
to follow every lead.
On this journey [of the search for truth] the traveler
abideth in every land and dwelleth in every region. In
every face, he seeketh the beauty of the Friend; in every
country he looketh for the Beloved. He joineth every
company, and seeketh fellowship with every soul, that
haply in some mind he may uncover the secret of the
Friend, or in some face he may behold the beauty of the
Loved One.24 Bahá’u’lláh

• • •
Chapter 22

Power And Glory

1One question remains. The Master gave all these clues and
instructions to show that His return would not be dramatic.
Why, then, did He say that He would come on clouds with

2Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

3great power and glory? This question has deeply puzzled
Christian scholars. Some of them, such as Dr. Ray Stedman,
have resolved the paradox this way: Christ will make two
appearances, first “stealthily, without warning,” and then later
from heaven with power and glory.25 Before reading further,
perhaps you could resolve the puzzle on your own:
• The Master wants to carry out His plan with precision. He
does not want the householder to have any opportunity to
alter or undermine His original design.
• He wants to test His servants in every possible way, so
that nothing hidden is left undisclosed. He wants to
separate those who are willing to search for their Master
from those who are content with the security of a well-
established name.
• He does not wish to have any unprepared or ungrateful
guests at His banquet.
• He does not wish to allow anyone the privilege of apply-
ing the prophecies to himself. If people were absolutely
sure how the Master would come and on what “day and
hour,” some of them would imitate Him. They would
advance an identical claim, at the same time, and in the
same way.
What strategies should the Master adopt?
The Master is extremely kind and caring. He would not give
an incomprehensible puzzle to His beloved servants: “my yoke
is easy and my burden is light” (Matt. 11:30 NIV). He has left
them many instructions. What they need is not a new course
in theology, but a fresh mind uncluttered by preconceived
notions. And if for any reason they fail to resolve the puzzle,
He has promised to resolve it for them when He returns.
Since everyone errs and “falls short of the glory of God”
(Romans 3:23 NIV), it would be best if no one came to a final
conclusion without first studying all the new clues and instruc-
tions the Master has promised to reveal upon His return:

460 I Shall Come Again

5…judge nothing before the appointed time; wait till the
Lord comes. He will bring to light what is hidden in
darkness [emphasis added]… I Corinthians 4:5 NIV
In keeping with the preceding promise, Bahá’u’lláh, the
Glory of God, decoded all the clues needed for resolving the
divine puzzle.
Every hidden thing hath been brought to light, by the
virtue of the Will of the Supreme Ordainer [emphasis
added]…26 Bahá’u’lláh
Through Him hath appeared that which had been hidden
from time immemorial and been veiled from the eyes of
men.27 Bahá’u’lláh
We have decreed, O people, that the highest and last end
of all learning be the recognition of Him Who is the
Object of all knowledge; and yet, behold how ye have
allowed your learning to shut you out, as by a veil, from
Him Who is the Dayspring of this Light, through Whom
every hidden thing hath been revealed.28 Bahá’u’lláh
Some of the mysteries Bahá’u’lláh has brought to light are
presented later in this volume, many others in succeeding
volumes.
People have always faced difficult puzzles. How best can
they be deciphered? By mastering Hebrew and Greek? By
reading the latest archeological research? By going to the most
prestigious universities with the most scholarly publications
on the Scriptures? This prophecy points specifically to the
people of our time:
They are the kind who…are…always learning but never
able to acknowledge the truth. II Timothy 3:6-7 NIV
The people of Israel faced puzzles very similar to ours. Who
solved their puzzles? Was it Annas and Caiaphas (the leading
religious leaders and scholars of their time), or was it Peter
(a fisherman) and Mary Magdalene (a peasant)? Who was

6Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

7more educated among Jesus’ twelve apostles? Was it the man
who betrayed Him or the man who could hardly keep track
of the days of the week? Who recognized the glory of the
Master? The unknown woman who cheered her Lord and
immortalized her memory by pouring her precious perfume
on Him, or the established teachers of the Law who jeered
at Him?
…wherever the gospel is preached throughout the world,
what she has done will also be told, in memory of her.
Christ (Mark 14:9 NIV)
Who, then, can solve the divine puzzle? And who is crowned
with salvation?
For the Lord takes delight in his people; he crowns the
humble with salvation [emphasis added]. Psalms 149:4 NIV
Seek the Lord, all you humble of the land…Seek righteous-
ness, seek humility; perhaps you will be sheltered on the
day of the Lord’s anger [our day]. Zephaniah 2:3 NIV

8What More Could the Master Say?
Let us summarize some of the devices Jesus used to commu-
nicate the absolute necessity of finding and recognizing Him—
in His second advent as in the first—through investigation:
A Command
• The command to “Watch! ”, to be always awake and
alert—terms that say: “Investigate! ”
Analogies
• The analogy of “the thief in the night” to convey secrecy,
to declare this message: investigate the news of the
coming of the Master just as a detective would follow
every lead to find a thief (Matt. 24:43; Rev. 3:3).

962 I Shall Come Again

10• The analogy of “the sheep and the goats” to show a
contrast between those in the Master’s flock, namely
the Christians, who will hear and welcome the chief
Shepherd and those who will ignore His call (Matt.
25:32-34).
Historical Examples
• “The story of Noah and Lot” to show both the secret
coming of the Master and the denial He must face again
(Matt. 24:37-39).
Parables
• Three parables to explain further the meaning of the
word “Watch!” (Matt. 24:42-51; 25:1-30).
• Two parables to portray the gradual growth or unfolding
of the Redeemer’s heavenly Kingdom on earth: the
parable of “mustard seed,” and that of “the leaven” (Matt.
13:31-33).
• Two parables to show both the secrecy of the Redeemer’s
return and the need for preparing and investigating the
onset of His Kingdom: the parable of “the hidden
treasure,” and that of “a merchant looking for fine
pearls” (Matt. 13:44-46).
• A second parable on the theme of a wedding banquet to
teach that God will continue to honor the freedom He
has granted to humanity, that people will indeed have a
choice between receiving their Redeemer or rejecting
Him (Luke 12:35-40).
• A third parable with the theme of a wedding banquet to
point both to the suffering of the King’s servants and
the unresponsiveness of the people to His call (Matt.
22:1-14).
• The parable of “the doorkeeper” to emphasize the need
for alertness to the news of the coming of the Master
(Mark 13:32-37).

11Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

12• The parable of the dragnet to point to the separation of
the people at the end of the age (Matt. 13:47-50; see also
Matt. 25:31-32).
• The parable of “the weeds and good seeds” to predict
divisions and alterations the Master will find in His
church at the time of His return. Such conditions will
inevitably make it difficult for the servants to recognize
their Master’s voice, to understand His original in-
structions on finding and following Him (Matt. 13:24-
30, 36-43).
Did Jesus not know what the state of the world and of His
church would be at the time of His return? Why did He ask
this question:
…when the Son of Man comes, will he find faith on earth?
Luke 18:8 NEB
We have a total of twelve parables all confirming one
another, all leading to the same conclusion: that the banquet
of the kingdom will be open only to those who investi-
gate the news of the coming of the Master with absolute
sincerity, and that many Christians will fail to heed this
warning.
Descriptions
• A graphic description of the suffering that the Master and
His humble followers must endure again (Matt. 25:35-
46). Volume II presents an entire chapter on this topic.
• A list of the obstacles that will conceal the identity of
the Master and the attributes that will lead the faithful
servant to His presence (Luke 21:34-36).

13The Consequences of Action and Inaction
• A graphic—but symbolic—description of the way God
will reward those who investigate the good news of the
Master’s return and punish those who ignore this news.

1464 I Shall Come Again

15To motivate Christians to awareness and action, nowhere
Jesus appeals as often and as strongly to reward and
punishment and to fear of God, as He does in His
prophecies of His second Advent (Matt. 24:48-51; 25:12,
30, 41, 46; 13:30, 40-43, 47-50; 22:13-14; II Thess. 1:9;
Rev. 14:7). The punishment He imposes is always the
most severe (separation from Him and His Kingdom); the
reward He promises is always the most splendid (the
crown of glory, and a place on His throne (I Peter 5:4;
Rev. 3:21). Why so much emphasis on reward and punish-
ment? As we noted, the Scriptures teach that the key to
understanding the prophecies is wisdom (Daniel 12:10;
12:3; Matt. 25:1-4; 24:45-47). There is a clear connection
between wisdom and the fear of God:
The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom, and
they who live by it grow in understanding.
Psalms 111:10 NEB
The essence of wisdom is the fear of God
Bahá’u’lláh
It is evident that the Creator who is the Essence of Love
would not wish to be feared, but loved:
“Thy paradise is My love…” 30 “The essence of wealth is
love for Me; whoso loveth Me is the possessor of all
things…” 31 “I belong to him that loveth Me…”
Bahá’u’lláh
What purpose then does “fear of God” serve? It serves to
move humans out of apathy, and out of attraction and attach-
ment to the world. It is the voice that awakens the soul to
this call: “Since God is the goal, the hope, and desire of the
world, no one should be complacent in his duties toward
Him. No one should risk and suffer the loss of that which
humans were made for.” This awakening by fear is healthy.
It protects the soul from the ravages of primitive and selfish
passions and desires. It draws the soul away from the glitter
of the world and leads it to the hope and peace of nearness

16Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

17to God. Further, the fear of God releases the soul from the
pressures and unreasonable expectations of society. Confor-
mity comes from fearing people, courage from fearing God.
But this fear need not be intense or endure long. When the
light of the knowledge of God casts its glory upon the soul,
fear vanishes away as darkness is banished by the sun. The
fear of the Lord turns into the love of the Lord.
There is no fear in love…perfect love drives out fear…
I John 4:18 NIV
A lover [of God] feareth nothing…
Bahá’u’lláh
Fear overcome by love becomes a positive force. Isaiah
predicted that the promised Redeemer “will delight in the
fear of the Lord:”
The Spirit of the Lord will rest on him—the Spirit of
wisdom and of understanding, the Spirit of counsel and
of power, the Spirit of knowledge and of the fear of the
Lord—and he will delight in the fear of the Lord.
Isaiah 11:2-3 NIV
To summarize: the fear of God is the vanguard and the first
glimmer of wisdom. It protects and leads humans to their
divine destiny:
• It keeps the soul from falling until it grows and gains
strength in the light of love.
• It awakens humans by reminding them of the consequences
of apathy, inaction, and laxity toward their Creator. The
purpose of this awakening is not to make people live in
fear but rather to stir them to awareness and action.
• This fear leads humans to investigate, to acquire knowl-
edge, and to understand God’s way and wisdom. Without
the light of understanding and knowledge, the soul is blind.
The fear of the Lord is the beginning of knowledge…
Proverbs 1:7

1866 I Shall Come Again

19• The light of knowledge eventually leads humans to
perfect faith, trust, and love; for God is absolute beauty
and perfection.
He [the Lord] will be the sure foundation for your times,
a rich store of salvation and wisdom and knowledge;
the fear of the Lord is the key to this treasure.
Isaiah 33:6 NIV
What is the common thread running through the parables of
the Olivet Discourse and other instructions pointing to the
second coming of Christ? That there is a clear contrast
between people, between the wise and the unwise, the sheep
and the goat, the daring and the fearful, the curious and the
complacent, the good seed and the weed. And in all cases the
reward or the punishment assigned to each of them is of the
extreme: the highest reward, the harshest punishment. It does
not seem logical to divide people into only two groups
except by this standard: whether they accept or reject the
Master. The heavenly reward and the harsh punishment
assigned to each group is a further evidence of this.
This division, however, does not in any way imply that
individuals within each of the two groups are equal or will
be rewarded equally. Each of the two groups contains an
infinite variety of people with infinite degrees of moral and
spiritual maturity. Each individual is rewarded by the degree
of his faith and deeds.
I will judge between one sheep and another, and between
rams and goats…I myself will judge between the fat sheep
and the lean sheep. Ezekiel 34:17, 20 NIV

20The purpose of knowing the Master is spiritual transformation:
What good is it, my brothers, if a man claims to have
faith but has no deeds? Can such faith save him?…faith
by itself, if it is not accompanied by action, is dead.
James 2:14, 17 NIV

21Chapter 2: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

22The essence of faith is fewness of words and abundance
of deeds…34 Bahá’u’lláh
Divine justice ordains that those who acknowledge the Master
by their words but deny Him by their deeds should not attain
the fruits of their faith. As for those who do not acknowledge
the Master, they will not be treated equally either, for their
motives and deeds are not the same. They too will reap the
fruits of their deeds. For God is not a God of justice alone;
His mercy and grace encompass the whole creation.
The Olivet Discourse contains all the directives of the Master
to His faithful servants. What more could the Master say to
reveal the reality of His return? What more could the Master do
to awaken His beloved servants, to move them to investigate?
…behold, I have foretold you all things.
Christ (Mark 13:23)
Thus Jesus admonished His faithful followers and concluded
His prophetic discourse as He looked down over Jerusalem
from the Mount of Olives with a few hopeful and humble dis-
ciples; a discourse for whose fulfillment countless Christians
have been waiting and praying for nearly two thousand years.
The Olivet Discourse carries an urgent tone. It is at once a
command from a King and a plea from a compassionate and
loving Guardian. It is Jesus’ final directive. It is His will and
testament to all Christians:
What I say to you, I say to everyone: Watch!
Christ (Mark 13:37 NIV)
Jesus finished His discourse with these words:
You know that in two days’ time it will be Passover, and
the Son of Man is to be handed over for crucifixion.
Christ (Matthew 26:2 NEB)
The theme of the “thief in the night” is vast and vital. It is
explored further under Appendix III in this volume and again
in Volume V.

23Be Strong, Fear Not
Isaiah 35:4

24A ll through the Bible the faithful are asked to seek and
search, to investigate and inquire:
“Search the scriptures” (John 5:39); “Thou shalt meditate
therein day and night” (Joshua 1:8); “Those that seek me
early shall find me” (Prov. 8:17); “Seek ye the Lord while
he may be found” (Isa. 55:6) ; “You will find him, if
indeed you search with all your heart and soul” (Deut.
4:29 NEB); “unto them that look for him shall he appear
the second time” (Heb. 9:28).
What harm can come from looking, from inquiring? Avoidance,
apathy, and fear show a lack of faith:
Why are ye fearful, O ye of little faith?
Christ (Matthew 8:26)

2570 I Shall Come Again

26This book is an attempt to seek and find a truth that is the
ultimate goal and the crowning glory of human life on this
planet—a goal that is the wellspring of the deepest and most
enchanting joys, a glory that bestows a new life, abundant
and everlasting:
Then the King will say to those on his right, ‘Come, you
who are blessed by my Father; take your inheritance, the
kingdom prepared for you since the creation of the
world.’ Christ (Matthew 25:34 NIV)
It is a gift offered to those—
• Who thirst for truth:
Whoever is thirsty, let him come; and whoever wishes,
let him take the free gift of the water of life.
Christ (Revelation 22:17 NIV)
See also Isaiah 55:1

27• Who strive to sustain their souls with knowledge:
…through knowledge shall the just be delivered.
Proverbs 11:9
• Who are guided by an open mind and gifted “with a
noble and good heart:”
But the seed on good soil stands for those with a noble
and good heart, who hear the word, retain it, and by
persevering produce a crop. Christ (Luke 8:15 NIV)
• Who do not reject or judge a Redeemer by His name or
place of origin:
Judge not according to the appearance…
Christ (John 7:24)
• Who do not allow a known Name (Christ, Moses) to become
an obstacle between them and the new Name (Bahá’u’lláh):
He who is victorious [over obstacles]—I will make him
a pillar in the temple of my God…will write the name

28Chapter 3: Be Strong, Fear Not

29of my God upon him…and my own new name [em-
phasis added]. Revelation 3:12 NEB
• Who in their search for truth depend on proof and reason:
Prove all things… I Thessalonians 5:21
Come now, and let us reason together, saith the Lord…
Isaiah 1:18
• Who are not influenced by popularity or concerned with
the judgment of people:
…ye shall not be afraid of the face of man; for the
judgment is God’s… Deuteronomy 1:17
If I were still trying to please men, I would not be a
servant of Christ. Galatians 1:10 NIV
• Who have high regard for prophetic utterances, and a deep
desire to test their fulfillment:
…do not despise prophetic utterances, but bring them
all to the test… I Thessalonians 5:20-21 NEB
• Who do not allow others to decide the truth for them,
even if they are notable scholars or authorities:
…every man shall bear his own burden. Galatians 6:5
• Who in their search for truth are wakeful and watchful,
taking advantage of every opportunity that may lead them
to the object of their search:
Be always on the watch [investigate]…that you may be
able to stand before the Son of Man.
Christ (Luke 21:36 NIV)
Blessed—happy, fortunate and to be envied—are those
servants, whom the master finds awake and alert and
watching when he comes. Christ (Luke 12:37 AB)
• And, finally, those who say: it is possible! Perhaps
during “the night,” when people were “asleep,” He came:

3072 I Shall Come Again

31“That day is a day of…darkness and gloominess…” (Zeph.
1:15). And “every eye” that was awake during “the
night” caught a glimpse of His great Glory. For a sleeper
cannot see: “Awake, sleeper…and Christ will shine upon
you” (Eph. 5:14 NEB). For some eyes may be open and
still never see: “you may look and look, but you will
never see” (Acts 28:26 NEB). And “the eye” that can
“see” is always in the heart:
Blessed are the pure in heart: for they shall see God.
Christ (Matthew 5:8)
…without holiness no one will see the Lord.
Hebrews 12:14 NIV

• • •
Chapter 23

Requirements For Success

1Just as with any task, chances of success improve with prepa-
ration. Without acquiring the essential skills and attitudes, the
seeker of truth will find success unattainable. Among the
various requirements, the following deserve special attention:
Freedom from Fear
In the first paragraph of the preface to a book published
and distributed by one of the largest and most respected
evangelical groups in the world (Billy Graham Evangelistic
Association) appear these words:
We are living in a disordered age. Most people, including
Christians, are confused. They are bombarded by multi-
tudes of voices and no two of them are in agreement,
they are all saying different things. Which voice are we
to believe or depend on? [Emphasis added].1
Virtually the same message was uttered by Bahá’u’lláh about
a century earlier:
No two men can be found who may be said to be outwardly
and inwardly united. The evidences of discord and malice

2Chapter 3: Be Strong, Fear Not

3are apparent everywhere, though all were made for harmony
and union [emphasis added].2
The multitude of inharmonious voices that people hear destroys
their trust. Lack of trust leads them to fear, and fear to avoid-
ance and apathy.
Fear of falsehood is a justifiable concern. No one wants to be
deceived, especially on questions of conscience and belief.
We should, however, note that there is a clear difference
between fear and phobia, between observing caution and
magnifying caution to avoid making any search. The first
(reasonable caution) leads to protection from falsehood; the
second (intense fear or phobia) to separation from truth.
Unfortunately, most people allow their fear of falsehood to
overcome their love for truth.
Some Christians are so sensitized by fear of being deceived
that if they read a hundred verses on the necessity of inves-
tigating the truth and one verse on fearing falsehood, they
forget the hundred, but remember the one. The consequence
is inaction, indifference, and apathy—a belief that the best
defense is to avoid new ideas. They wonder why they
should take chances and venture into the unknown when
they already have something to depend on.
Since fear of falsehood directs the action and destiny of so
many believers—even the most sincere—we should test it in
as many ways as possible. We should put it to the test of the
Scriptures, examine it by the standards of reason, and view
it in the light of history:
• The Test of Reason and Science. In daily life we quickly
learn that to judge something is to test it. Scientists follow
the same course of action. To prove its effectiveness, a
drug or a diet must be tested. Experimentation is the chief
method of scientific search. Does not the same principle
hold true with religion? Reason demands that judgment
must come only after the “fruit” is examined.

474 I Shall Come Again

5…a tree is recognized by its fruit. Matthew 12:33 NIV
Thus, by their fruit you will recognize them.
Matthew 7:20 NIV
• The Lesson of History. Why did people deny Jesus?
Why did they deny Moses or Noah or Abraham, and all
the other Messengers? Partly because of fear. They were
so overcome by their fear of falsehood that they lost their
sense of adventure and thirst for truth. They preferred
apathy and inaction to concern and active involvement.
They conformed to prevailing views and shifted respon-
sibility from themselves. They allowed the prevailing
views to stifle their spirit of adventure and their longing
for truth. Were not the people of the time of Jesus also
paralyzed by fear and avoidance?
Have no fear…for your Father has chosen to give you
the Kingdom. Christ (Luke 12:32 NEB)
• The Testimony of the Scriptures. The following verse
from the Book of Revelation—a book that is primarily
concerned with the events of the end-times—portrays
clearly the consequences of being fearful to investigate:
He who overcomes will inherit all this, and I will be his
God and he will be my son. But the cowardly…their
place will be in the fiery lake of burning sulfur.
Revelation 21:7-8 NIV
The prophecy specifies “He who overcomes.” Overcomes
what? It is clear, overcomes “cowardliness or fear.” What
kind of fear? Fear of inquiry or investigation, fear of
being deceived. Can the severe punishment—to burn in
the fiery lake—be justified for any other fear? Can those
rewards—to inherit all things—be justified for overcoming
any fear other than the fear of the search for truth? Is
there any fear whose dire consequences can be as drastic
as ignoring the news of the coming of the Master? Has
there been and will there ever be news greater than the
news of the coming of the Lord?

6Chapter 3: Be Strong, Fear Not

7What should be feared is falsehood, not knowledge. What
should be feared is being deprived of the truth, not the
search for truth. To inspire the spirit of strength and
courage, Bahá’u’lláh quotes this biblical verse that is
addressed to the people of our time:
Say to them that are of a fearful heart, Be strong, fear
not: behold, your God will come…and save you.
Isaiah 35:4

8The following verse also inspires strength and courage in
those waiting for their Lord:
Wait for the Lord; be strong, take courage, and wait for
the Lord. Psalms 27:14 NEB

9The task of recognizing the divine Teachers is quite easy
if we use the true standards, the ones that God Himself
has specified. It is easy because when we examine human
beings, we encounter an infinite range of degrees of per-
fection and imperfection. But when we test a Redeemer
from God, we encounter only two degrees of choice. We
contrast the divine against human, not human against
human. A Redeemer is either divine or deceptive. This
makes our search quite simple. We are not called upon to
make fine discriminations between deceptively similar
choices.
“My yoke is easy, and my burden is light” (Christ; Matt.
11:30). “He will never deal unjustly with any one, neither
will He task a soul beyond its power” 3 (Bahá’u’lláh).
“The evidence set forth by God can never be compared
with evidences produced by any one of the peoples and
kindreds of the earth” 4 (The Báb). “Truth can in no wise
be confounded with aught else except itself…Nor can
error be confused with Truth, if ye do but reflect upon the
testimony of God” 5 (The Báb).

1076 I Shall Come Again

11Following the Light of Reason
This requirement is stated eloquently by noted Christian
scholar and leader, Dr. James Kennedy:
When we do not stand ready with a reason for our hope
and do not know why we believe what we believe, we
give others the impression that Christianity is a religion
based merely upon blind faith or emotional prejudice.
Nothing could be farther from the truth! We often accuse
those who reject Christianity without at least examining
the evidence for it of being prejudiced. Then is it not also
true that if a person accepts Christianity without examin-
ing the evidence, that too is nothing other than prejudice
or credulity?
Dr. Kennedy also encourages Christians to search for truth:
The Bible tells us to examine all things and to hold fast
to that which is good. Yet too frequently we are not
willing to do that just because it takes a little intellectual
effort on our part
Dr. Barry Chant and Winkie Pratney, Christian writers and
scholars, state:
[Jesus] intimates that His servants are not to be passive in
their waiting [for His return]. They must show enterprise
and investment, to use initiative with what has been given
them (even perhaps to take calculated risk)
Postponing Judgment
To prejudge is to decide before examining all the evidence.
Proofs of the validity of a divine Revelation are cumulative.
None of them should be judged apart from the others, for
each proof constitutes only part of the full profile. The
ultimate value of any given proof or precept must be judged
only in the light of the entire spectrum of evidence presented.
We should regard our role as that of a jury, seeking to find
all the facts before coming to a verdict.

12Chapter 3: Be Strong, Fear Not

13Does our law…permit us to pass judgment on a man un-
less we have first given him a hearing and learned the
facts? John 7:51 NEB
So pass no premature judgment… I Corinthians 4:5 NEB
Not everything can be fully explained at once. Questions of
concern are dealt with progressively in the course of these six
volumes. Therefore, if you find an idea objectionable, do not
come to a final conclusion; you may well find the issue
resolved later.
Nothing will ever be attempted if all possible objections
must be first overcome. Samuel Johnson
While pursuing the truth, it is essential to set aside all
traditional expectations or orthodox interpretations. If the
prevailing expectations enjoy the status of an absolute
standard, then how can any other standard, however reason-
able, be viewed with an open mind and tested impartially?
How can judgment be postponed?

14Persisting
Success in any endeavor requires persistence. To stop before
completing an investigation will give only an incomplete or
distorted picture of the prophetic profile. Nothing short of
seeing the whole profile can be a reliable basis for judging.
Jesus used the parable of the sower to demonstrate the
qualities essential for finding the truth. Among the qualities
He emphasized was perseverance:
But the seed on good soil stands for those with a noble and
good heart, who hear the word, retain it, and by persever-
ing produce a crop. Christ (Luke 8:15 NIV)
Dr. Robert Schuler, the renowned author, clergyman, and the
best-known advocate of positive and possibility thinking,
considers constancy one of the four essential qualities for
success in any endeavor. The other three are: curiosity,
confidence, and courage.

1578 I Shall Come Again

16What makes persistence or constancy so essential is the
interrelation of the proofs. For each proof leads to another,
like the critical parts of a delicately balanced bridge or a
rising tower. We must walk over the bridge and rise to the
height of the tower to gain a true vision of their glory and
grandeur. “Let us run with patience the race that is set before
us” (Heb. 12:1). “Only have faith, patience and courage—this
is but the beginning…surely you will succeed, for God is with
you!” 9 (‘Abdu’l-Bahá). “If you…know how to give good gifts
to your children, how much more will your Father in heaven
give good gifts to those who ask him!” (Matt. 7:11 NIV). “What-
soever ye shall ask in prayer, believing, ye shall receive”
(Matt. 21:22). “Watch ye therefore, and pray always” (Luke
21:36).

17Being Humble
In interpreting the Word of God we must be acutely aware
of our weaknesses and fallibility. This rule applies to both the
givers and receivers of knowledge. The freedom of the human
spirit necessitates a diversity of thinking and understanding.
We should welcome and even encourage this freedom, for
it leads us to new dimensions of knowledge, wisdom, and
truth. Yet the gains from diversity can come only if those
who impart knowledge are gifted with humility and those
who receive it are tempered with tolerance.
Let not the wise man glory in his wisdom… Jeremiah 9:23
Blessed are the meek: for they shall inherit the earth.
Christ (Matthew 5:5)
…the Lord has…sent me to bring glad tidings to the lowly
…To announce a year of favor from the Lord.
Isaiah 61:1-2 NAB
…he shall save the humble person. Job 22:29
Show me your ways, O Lord, teach me your paths; guide
me in your truth and teach me, for you are God my Savior,

18Chapter 3: Be Strong, Fear Not

19and my hope is in you all day long…He guides the humble
in what is right and teaches them his way.
Psalms 25:4-5, 9 NIV
The giver of knowledge should say to the receiver, “It is an
honor to offer you the gift of my labors. But please remember
that only the box is mine—the gift comes from heaven. Look
not at my flawed wrappings. Look at the perfect pearls of
truth within that are not mine.” To this acknowledgment, the
receiver of knowledge should reply, “I, too, am surrounded
by the wrappings of my own thoughts and fantasies that are
also of my own creation. I will put all the wrappings—yours
and mine—aside, so that only my spirit, as God gave it,
touches the pearl.”
The greatest friend of truth is Time, her greatest enemy
is Prejudice, and her constant companion is Humility.
Charles C. Colton
The spark of truth comes, as the Master observes, from a
clash of ideas. But the diverse ideas must be tempered with
humility and tolerance, lest their clash lead to a sudden out-
burst, lest they create a battleground in which people take the
place of ideas. This is how the great Gift of God has been
cut into many competing sects. This is why many have used
the sword to promote love, torture to preserve the truth, and
the prison to please God.
People have interpreted the Scriptures from the time Moses
revealed the Ten Commandments, and their interpretations
have differed. This is fine, as long as they do not insist that
their understanding of the words of God is the only truth. This
especially holds true with prophecies, because as a rule they
are concealed in codes. The Scriptures teach that no one has
the right to declare his interpretation of prophecies infallible,
for to no one is given full knowledge of their meaning:
…note this: no one can interpret any prophecy of Scripture
by himself. II Peter 1:20 NEB

2080 I Shall Come Again

21Therefore judge nothing before the appointed time; wait
till the Lord comes. He will bring to light what is hidden
in darkness… I Corinthians 4:5 NIV

22Which of the following positions fulfills the above exhorta-
tions and warnings?
• I have no doubt about what Jesus meant, when He said “He
would come from heaven.” I have no doubt that at His
coming, graves will open and the dead will rise…I have
no doubt that all the prophecies are literal.
• I will begin my search with an open mind, without any
preconceived notions. I will postpone my judgment con-
cerning all my expectations until I have examined all the
evidences presented by the One who claims to be the Lord.
If we truly accept the Word of God that “He saves the humble
person,” not the proud , then, who has presented himself
humbly before the Lord, the person who holds the first posi-
tion or the second?
The statement from Dr. James Kennedy, quoted in the
preface, reflects the true spirit of humility; it is a beacon of
enlightenment and awareness for every seeker of truth:
The great Princeton theologian of the last century, Dr.
Charles Hodge, said something which I have always
thought is worth remembering. He said that though
the Old Testament is filled with some 333 prophecies
concerning the first coming of Christ; in spite of that,
nobody got it right. And as you know, they crucified
Christ because of a misunderstanding about what the
Messiah was really coming to do. And we should because
of that be somewhat humbled and modest in our attempts
to interpret prophecies concerning the second coming of
Christ. It is quite possible that all of us [Christian
leaders] are wrong as well. [Emphasis added].10

23Chapter 3: Be Strong, Fear Not

24Praying
Self-reliance shows strength; leaning on others implies weak-
ness. Praying is turning to a higher source for help. Many
hesitate or refuse to accept such a dependency. By so doing,
they leave out the most reliable source of inspiration and
guidance. Perhaps nowhere does praying play as decisive
a role as it does in spiritual matters. Two conditions make
dependence on God absolutely imperative:
• When the choice is very complex and requires profound
wisdom.
• When the choice leads to long lasting or far-reaching
consequences.
Can any decision compare in its consequence with accepting,
ignoring, or denying a Messenger of God? Does a human
being need more wisdom concerning any choice, any decision
than in regard to recognizing a new Redeemer? When Jesus
spoke about His return, did He not say, “pray”?
Be always on the watch, and pray that you may be able
to escape all that is about to happen, and that you may
be able to stand before the Son of Man [emphasis added].
Luke 21:34-36 NIV
Do not Jesus’ words imply that for most people knowing
Him the second time may be as difficult as it was the first
time, that it may require more wisdom than a human being
can gain on his own? Did He not also in the prayer concern-
ing His return begin with, “Father…thy kingdom come” and
end with “do not bring us to the test [temptation KJV]” (Luke
11:2-4 NEB)? Did He not also declare:
…the hour of temptation, which shall come upon all the
world, to try them that dwell upon the earth.
Revelation 3:10
A test always implies the possibility of pursuing an improper
course of action. Even Jesus’ enlightened disciples needed to
pray to pass the tests or escape the temptations:

2582 I Shall Come Again

26Pray that you will not fall into temptation. Luke 22:40 NIV
The following verse is both a prophecy and a promise:
And everyone who calls on the name of the Lord will be
saved… Joel 2:32 NIV
The Báb and Bahá’u’lláh have also encouraged dependence
on God and written hundreds of prayers for the spiritual
needs of humankind. Several prayers from both the Bahá’í
and Hebrew Scriptures are offered in the next section. The
prayers are for those who by hearing the good news of the
coming of the kingdom enter the “Valley of Decision” (Joel
3:14 NEB), and suddenly see on the horizon the dawning of
the most critical choice a human being may ever be called
upon to make.
The prayers are suited especially for us, the people of this
age, who live in the evening of time (Zech. 14:7), in the
twilight of uncertainty and confusion (Micah 7:4 NIV), when
“the ways to God have multiplied.” “The light shines in the
darkness, but the darkness has not understood it” (John 1:5
NIV). “The Dawn hath broken, yet the people understand
not” 11 (Bahá’u’lláh).
Prayer begins where human capacity ends.

• • •
Chapter 24

Prayers For Divine Guidance

Norman Vincent Peal

1God dwells far off from us, but prayer brings Him down
to earth, and links His power with our efforts.
M. Gasparin

1me in your truth and teach me, for you are God my Savior,
and my hope is in you all day long. Psalms 25:4-5 NIV
You are God my stronghold. Why have you rejected me?
Why must I go about mourning…? Send forth your light

2your holy mountain, to the place where you dwell. Then
will I go to the altar of God, to God, my joy and my
delight. I will praise you with the harp, O God, my God.
Why are you downcast, O my soul? Why so disturbed
within me? Put your hope in God, for I will yet praise
him, my Savior and my God. Psalms 43:2-5 NIV

3May God be gracious to us and bless us and make his
face shine upon us; may your ways be known on earth,
your salvation among all nations…May the peoples praise
you, O God; may all the peoples praise you. Then the
land will yield its harvest, and God, our God, will bless
us. Psalms 67:1-2, 5-6 NIV

4Search me, O God, and know my heart; test me and know
my anxious thoughts. See if there is any offensive way in
me, and lead me in the way everlasting.
Psalms 139:23-24 NIV
O Thou Whose face is the object of my adoration, Whose
beauty is my sanctuary, Whose habitation is my goal, Whose
praise is my hope, Whose providence is my companion,
Whose love is the cause of my being, Whose mention is
my solace, Whose nearness is my desire, Whose presence
is my dearest wish and highest aspiration, I entreat Thee
not to withhold from me the things Thou didst ordain for
the chosen ones among Thy servants. Supply me, then,
with the good of this world and of the next.
Thou, truly, art the King of all men. There is no God but
Thee, the Ever-Forgiving, the Most Generous.12
Bahá’u’lláh

5O my God, my Lord and my Master! I have detached
myself from my kindred and have sought through Thee to
become independent of all that dwell on earth and ever
ready to receive that which is praiseworthy in Thy sight.
Bestow on me such good as will make me independent of

6Thy boundless favors. Verily, Thou art the Lord of grace
abounding.13 The Báb
Say: O my God! O Thou Who art the Maker of the
heavens and of the earth, O Lord of the Kingdom! Thou
well knowest the secrets of my heart, while Thy Being
is inscrutable to all save Thyself. Thou seest whatsoever
is of me, while no one else can do this save Thee. Vouch-
safe unto me, through Thy grace, what will enable me to
dispense with all except Thee, and destine for me that
which will make me independent of everyone else besides
Thee. Grant that I may reap the benefit of my life in this
world and in the next. Open to my face the portals of Thy
grace and graciously confer upon me Thy tender mercy
and bestowals.14 The Báb
Perhaps the following course of action may prove helpful to
many seekers of truth. After reading each chapter, you may
wish to pause, pray, and meditate as long as needed to
receive the inspiration you may need for the next step in
your spiritual journey. God has assured us that if we pray
sincerely and search with all our hearts and souls, the gift
of guidance will be ours:
Which of you, if his son asks for bread, will give him a
stone? Or if he asks for a fish, will give him a snake? If
you, then…know how to give good gifts to your children,
how much more will your Father in heaven give good
gifts to those who ask him! Christ (Matthew 7:9-11 NIV)
Call to me and I will answer you and tell you great and
unsearchable things you do not know. Jeremiah 33:3 NIV
…you will find him, if indeed you search with all your
heart and soul. Deuteronomy 4:29 NEB
Blessed are they who keep his statutes and seek him with

• • •
Chapter 25

I Shall Come Again

1T rust in God always; trust also in me. There are many
dwelling-places in my Father’s house…I am going
there on purpose to prepare a place for you. And if I go
and prepare a place for you, I shall come again and
receive you to myself, so that where I am you may be
also [emphasis added]… Christ (John 14:1-3 NEB)
Return, O Lord, how long?…Let thy work appear unto thy
servants, and thy glory unto their children. And let the
beauty of the Lord our God be upon us…
Psalms 90:13, 16,
Come back, O Lord; set my soul free, deliver me for thy
love’s sake. Psalms 6:4 NEB
The advent of the Lord, the Desire of all nations, the Prince

2Father, is the most recurring and emphatic promise of the
Scriptures. “The desire of all nations shall come” (Hag. 2:7).
“For the Son of man shall come in the glory of his Father”
(Matt. 16:27). “Behold, I am coming soon! Blessed is he who
keeps the words of the prophecy in this book” (Rev. 22:7
NIV). “I will not leave you as orphans; I will come to you”
(John 14:18 NIV). “I go away, and come again unto you”
(John 14:28).
Then I saw another angel flying in midair, and he had the
eternal gospel [good news] to proclaim to those who live
on the earth—to every nation, tribe, language and people.
He said in a loud voice, ‘Fear God and give him glory,
because the hour of his judgment has come.’
Revelation 14:6-7 NIV

3Dr. John White, in his book on Christ’s return Re-entry, states:
The teaching of the second coming of our Lord is dealt
with some 1,845 times in the Bible, 318 of these being in
the New Testament. The return of the Lord is the domi-
nant theme of 17 Old Testament books and one epistle in
the New. In fact, 7 out of every 10 chapters in the New
Testament make a reference to the second coming.1
Dr. Billy Graham in his foreword to Re-entry states:
The theme…of the second coming of Jesus Christ, is
urgently needed in the preaching of the Church today…
Probably no Gospel theme apart from ‘Ye must be born
again’ is more relevant today, and I preach on some facet
of this subject in virtually all of my crusades. Our world
is filled with fear, hate, lust, greed, war and utter despair.
Surely the second coming of Jesus Christ, His ‘re-entry,’
is the only hope of replacing these depressing features
with trust, love, universal peace and prosperity. For it the

4Chapter 4: I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 26

O Lord Show Thyself

1Come, Lord Jesus. Revelation 22:20 NIV
He, verily, is come with His Kingdom, and all the atoms
cry aloud: “Lo! The Lord is come in His great majesty!”
Bahá’u’lláh
Lo! He is come in the sheltering shadow of Testimony,
invested with conclusive proof…Blessed is the man who
turneth towards Him…4 Bahá’u’lláh
Followers of the Gospel…behold the gates of heaven are
flung open. He that had ascended unto it is now come.
Give ear to His voice calling aloud over land and sea,
announcing to all mankind the advent of this Revelation
Bahá’u’lláh
Behold how He hath come down from the heaven of His
grace, girded with power and invested with sovereignty. Is
there any doubt concerning His signs? 6 Bahá’u’lláh
By God! This is He Who hath at one time appeared in the
name of the SpiritE [Christ]…7 Bahá’u’lláh
The time foreordained unto the peoples and kindreds of
the earth is now come. The promises of God, as recorded in
the holy Scriptures, have all been fulfilled.8 Bahá’u’lláh
Bahá’u’lláh proclaims in the clearest, most certain, and most
emphatic terms His station as the supreme Savior and Re-
deemer of the World, the Promised One of all ages and
religions, the return of Christ to Christians, and the Glory of
the Lord to the followers of both the Torah and the Gospel.
He claims a station referred to throughout the Scriptures as
E
The Spirit and the Spirit of God are two common titles by which Bahá’u’lláh
refers to Christ. “The spirit of the Lord is upon me [Jesus] because he has
anointed me” (Luke 4:18 NEB). “He [Jesus] saw the Spirit of God descending

2the Return of the Son in the Glory of His Father, the Lord
of the vineyard, the King of Glory, the Desire of all Nations,
the Comforter, the Counselor, and the Prince of Peace.
Bahá’u’lláh proclaimed His Mission in Epistles (Tablets)
addressed to humanity in general and to the religious and
political leaders in particular. They are published by the
Universal House of Justice under the title The Proclamation
of Bahá’u’lláh to the Kings and Leaders of the World.9
The following quotations from those epistles and other
sources demonstrate the authority and mission of Bahá’u’lláh:
He who is the Desired One is come in His transcendent
majesty…Better is this for you than all ye possess.10
The Hour which We had concealed from the knowledge
of the peoples of the earth…hath come to pass.11
He that was hidden from mortal eyes is come! His all-
conquering sovereignty is manifest; His all-encompassing
splendor is revealed. Beware lest thou hesitate or halt.12
This is the changeless Faith of God, eternal in the past,
eternal in the future. Let him that seeketh, attain it; and
as to him that hath refused to seek it—verily, God is
Self-Sufficient, above any need of His creatures.13
Verily I say, this is the Day in which mankind can behold
the Face, and hear the Voice, of the Promised One…It
behoveth every man to blot out the trace of every idle
word from the tablet of his heart, and to gaze, with an
open and unbiased mind, on the signs of His Revelation,
the proofs of His Mission, and the tokens of His glory.14
The most grievous veil hath shut out the peoples of the
earth from His glory, and hindered them from hearkening
to His call. God grant that the light of unity may envelop

3In His Epistle to Christians, Bahá’u’lláh asks them why they
allow the name Bahá’u’lláh to stand as an obstacle in testing
His claim. He reminds them that the people to whom Jesus
was sent constantly prayed for their Redeemer’s advent.
They expressed the deepest desire to meet Him. Yet when He
came, only a few among them, mostly from the disadvan-
taged of society—the poor and the powerless, the simple and
the sinners—recognized His divine glory. Why did the deep
love of the others who were expecting their adored Redeemer
and Master not save them from denying Him? They read
their Scriptures day and night. Why was their knowledge of
no avail to them? Why did their repeated readings of the
prophecies not guide them to truth?
You study the scriptures diligently, supposing that in
having them you have eternal life; yet, although their
testimony points to me, you refuse to come to me for that
life. Christ (John 5:39-40 NEB)

4Bahá’u’lláh intimates that without asking these questions and
resolving them, we cannot learn from the example of those
who were once in our place, of those who thought that by
ignoring or opposing Jesus they were doing the right thing,
without ever realizing that they were depriving themselves
of the greatest gift that Heaven may bestow upon humans.
Without pondering these questions and resolving them, it is
extremely difficult, even impossible, to overcome the many
obstacles that our traditional beliefs place before us. We will
be as confused and perplexed as our forebears who time and
again rejected God’s Messengers:
You always resist the Holy Spirit! Was there ever a
prophet your fathers did not persecute? They even killed
those who predicted the coming of the Righteous One.
Acts 7:51-52 NIV
Great spirits have always encountered opposition from

5In The Book of Certitude, Bahá’u’lláh presents a brief history
of the past Messengers and shows that they all encountered
people unprepared to accept or appreciate them. His purpose
in citing this history is to indicate that in recognizing a new
Redeemer, absolute humility and open-mindedness are
required. The past exerts a profound influence on our lives.
The overwhelming influence comes not from what we learn
from the past, but from what we don’t.
Those who cannot remember the past are condemned to
repeat it. George Santayna

• • •
Chapter 27

Oliver Wendell Holmes

1What experience and history teach us is this—that people
and governments have never learned anything from history,
or acted on principles deduced from it. Georg Hegel
How can history help us? By separating us from our im-
mediate needs and concerns. How can we get a full picture
of a mountain? By standing at a distance. How can we see
the true meaning and significance of the events of our lives?
By patience, by allowing time to separate us from the events.
How often does it happen that at the time of making a vital
decision we see only part of the picture? Later we wonder
with amazement why we could not have seen more! How
many wars would have been prevented, how many lives
saved, if world leaders had read and heeded the lessons of
history? Bahá’u’lláh calls on Christians to take history as their
guide and inspiration, to pursue its light to the city of true
knowledge:
Say,E O followers of the Son [Jesus]! Have ye shut out
yourselves from Me by reason of My Name?…Day and
night ye have been calling upon your Lord, the Omnipotent,
but when He came from the heaven of eternity in His
great glory, ye turned aside from Him…
E
Here the word “Say” is equivalent to the biblical phrase: “Thus saith the Lord.”

2Chapter 4: I Shall Come Again

3Consider those who rejected the Spirit [Jesus] when He
came unto them with manifest dominion. How numerous
the Pharisees who had secluded themselves in synagogues
in His name, lamenting over their separation from Him,
and yet when the portals of reunion were flung open…
they disbelieved in God, the Exalted, the Mighty…No one
from among them turned his face towards the Dayspring
of divine bounty [Jesus] except such as were destitute of
any power amongst men…Moreover, call thou to mind the
one [the high priest] who sentenced Jesus to death. He
was the most learned of his age in his own country, whilst
he who was only a fisherman [Peter] believed in Him. Take
good heed and be of them that observe the warning.16
“The one who sentenced Jesus” may refer either to Annas or
Caiaphas, but more likely to Annas. Annas occupied the
highest spiritual position for the Jews, Caiaphas the highest
state position. They were both the most prestigious, influen-
tial, and learned Jewish religious leaders at the time of Jesus.
According to Nelson Bible Dictionary:
Annas was…the most influential of the priests…[and] was
officially succeeded by each of his five sons, one grand-
son, and his son-in-law Caiaphas, the high priest who
presided at the trial of Jesus (Matt. 26:3, 57; John 18:13-
14). During His trial, Jesus was first taken to Annas, who
then sent Jesus to Caiaphas (John 18:13, 24). Both Annas
and Caiaphas were among the principal examiners when
Peter and John were arrested (Acts 4:6).17
According to The Zondervan Bible Dictionary:
Jesus offered the Kingdom to Israel, for they were its
proper heirs…but the religious leaders, followed by most
of the people, not only refused to enter its blessings but
tried to prevent others from entering (Matt. 23:13).
Nevertheless, many tax-collectors [who occupied a low
position in people’s eyes] and harlots did enter the
Kingdom (Matt. 21:31).18

492 I Shall Come Again

5Is there a single one of our rulers who has believed in
him…? John 7:48 NEB
How vast the number of the learned who have turned aside
from the way of God and how numerous the men devoid
of learning who have apprehended the truth and hastened
unto Him, saying, ‘Praised be Thou, O Lord of all things,
visible and invisible.’19 Bahá’u’lláh
Seeing and knowing the truth—whether it is the recognition
of the Word of God or the very existence of God—does not
require scientific training, biblical scholarship, a master’s
degree in debate and logic, a doctorate in philosophy or
theology. It requires only a pure heart, only a sanctified
soul:
Blessed are the pure in heart; for they shall see God.
Christ (Matthew 5:8)
The understanding of His [God’s] words…are in no wise
dependent upon human learning. They depend solely upon
purity of heart…and freedom of spirit…20 Bahá’u’lláh
Sanctify your souls, O ye peoples of the world, that haply
ye may attain that station which God hath destined for
you…21 Bahá’u’lláh
Sanctify your souls from whatsoever is not of God, and
taste ye the sweetness of rest within the pale of His vast
and mighty Revelation, and beneath the shadow of His
supreme and infallible authority.22 Bahá’u’lláh
Every human being—even the least educated from the most
primitive culture—is able to recognize the existence of God
and distinguish His Word from others. The first clue to the
Word of God is its uniqueness. Its tone, its “voice,” its power
and authority clearly set it apart from the words of others.
My own sheep listen to my voice; I know them and they
follow me. Christ (John 10:27 NEB)

6Chapter 4: I Shall Come Again

7…he goes ahead and the sheep follow, because they know
his voice. Christ (John 10:4 NEB)
…I have perfected in every one of you My creation, so that
the excellence of My handiwork may be fully revealed
unto men. It follows, therefore, that every man hath been,
and will continue to be, able of himself to appreciate the
Beauty of God, the Glorified. Had he not been endowed
with such a capacity, how could he be called to account
for his failure? If, in the Day when all the peoples of
the earth will be gathered together, any man should, whilst
standing in the presence of God, be asked: “Wherefore
hast thou disbelieved in My Beauty and turned away from
My Self,” and if such a man should reply and say: “In-
asmuch as all men have erred, and none hath been found
willing to turn his face to the Truth, I, too, following their
example, have grievously failed to recognize the Beauty
of the Eternal,” such a plea will, assuredly, be rejected.
For the faith of no man can be conditioned by any one
except himself.23 Bahá’u’lláh
Bahá’u’lláh addresses Christians and declares to them the
return of that same Spirit that appeared in the name of
Christ:
…O concourse of Christians! We have, on a previous
occasion, revealed Ourself unto you, and ye recognized
Me not. This is yet another occasion vouchsafed unto you.
This is the Day of God; turn ye unto Him…The Beloved
One loveth not that ye be consumed with the fire of your
desires…Ye make mention of Me, and know Me not. Ye
call upon Me, and are heedless of My Revelation…O
people of the Gospel! They who were not in the Kingdom
have now entered it, whilst We behold you, in this day,
tarrying at the gate. Rend the veils asunder by the power
of your Lord, the Almighty, the All-Bounteous, and enter,
then, in My name My Kingdom. Thus biddeth you He Who
desireth for you everlasting life…We behold you, O children
of the Kingdom, in darkness. This, verily, beseemeth you

894 I Shall Come Again

9not. Are ye, in the face of the Light, fearful because of
your deeds? Direct yourselves towards Him…Verily, He
(Jesus) said: ‘Come ye after Me, and I will make you to
become fishers of men.’ In this day, however, We say:
‘Come ye after Me, that We may make you to become
quickeners of mankind.’24

10Bahá’u’lláh Glorifies Christ
Bahá’u’lláh glorifies Christ in the most moving and majestic
terms:
Know thou that when the Son of Man yielded up His
breath to God, the whole creation wept with a great
weeping. By sacrificing Himself, however, a fresh capacity
was infused into all created things. Its evidences, as wit-
nessed in all the peoples of the earth, are now manifest
before thee. The deepest wisdom which the sages have
uttered, the profoundest learning which any mind hath
unfolded, the arts which the ablest hands have produced,
the influence exerted by the most potent of rulers, are but
manifestations of the quickening power released by His
transcendent, His all-pervasive, and resplendent Spirit.
We testify that when He came into the world, He shed the
splendor of His glory upon all created things. Through
Him the leper recovered from the leprosy of perversity
and ignorance. Through Him, the unchaste and wayward
were healed. Through His power, born of Almighty God,
the eyes of the blind were opened, and the soul of the
sinner sanctified.25
Reflect how Jesus, the Spirit of God, was, notwithstand-
ing His extreme meekness and perfect tender-heartedness,
treated by His enemies. So fierce was the opposition
which He, the Essence of Being and Lord of the visible
and invisible, had to face, that He had nowhere to lay
His head. He wandered continually from place to place,
deprived of a permanent abode.26

11Chapter 4: I Shall Come Again

12The Báb and ‘Abdu’l-Bahá too glorify the station of Christ
and His teachings:
O Spirit of God [Jesus]!…Verily God hath inspired Thee
with divine verses and wisdom while still a child and hath
graciously deigned to bestow His favor upon the peoples
of the world through the influence of Thy Most Great
Name…27 The Báb
If you reflect upon the essential teachings of Jesus, you
will realize that they are the light of the world…They are
the very source of life and the cause of happiness to the
human race.28 ‘Abdu’l-Bahá
Bahá’u’lláh eulogizes the station of Jesus as one “which hath
been exalted above the imaginings of all that dwell on earth.”
‘Abdu’l-Bahá describes that station as one of absolute perfec-
tion.30 Here are some of the titles by which Bahá’u’lláh and
‘Abdu’l-Bahá refer to Christ:
The Lord Christ The Essence of detachment
The Lord of all being The Essence of the Spirit
The Lord of the visible The Word of God
and invisible That Peerless Beauty
The Spirit of God The Revealer of the
The Divine Spirit unseen Beauty
The Spirit The Daystar of the heaven
The Essence of Being of divine Revelation
Jesus did not destroy what was granted to the world before
Him:
Do not think that I have come to abolish the Law or the
Prophets…but to fulfill them. Matthew 5:17 NIV
Bahá’u’lláh too does not destroy what was given before. He
rather restores, fulfills, and glorifies it. Jesus declared:
And this is the will of him who sent me, that I shall lose
none of all that he has given me, but raise them up at the
last day. John 6:39 NIV

1396 I Shall Come Again

14The Origin of the Bahá’í Faith
This work is about proofs of the Bahá’í Faith, not its history
and teachings. Those not acquainted with the basics of the
new Revelation, will find it helpful to begin their search by
studying first its history and teachings, and then the evidences
of its validity. For proofs of a faith are most relevant when
one already knows its basic principles. The Message is the
goal, and proofs the means for reaching the goal.
For our purposes a brief reference or introduction to the
central figures and the supreme institution of the Bahá’í Faith
is in order:
• The Bahá’í Faith literally means The Glorious Faith—
the Faith that manifests the Glory of God.
• The Báb. On May 23, 1844, a young man entitled the
Báb (the Gate) declared the dawning of a new Day in the
religious history of the world. The young man came from
southern Persia. He announced that God would soon send
a World Teacher and Savior to bring peace and order
and to unify all humanity. Within the brief span of His
ministry (1844 -1850), the Báb attracted many followers,
thousands of whom were massacred, mostly by the order
of fanatical religious leaders of Islam. The Báb Himself
was imprisoned and finally executed in 1850.
• Bahá’u’lláh. In 1863, a nobleman entitled Bahá’u’lláh
(Glory of God) announced that He was the World Teacher
and Redeemer promised by the Báb and expected by
humanity since the dawn of history. Like His Herald, the
Báb, Bahá’u’lláh encountered relentless opposition and
oppression throughout His ministry. His imprisonment and
exile lasted for 39 years. He often refers to His sufferings
with a sense of submission and pride—submission because
He welcomed that which was ordained for Him, pride
because He suffered for the sake of others to bring hope
and love to the heart of humanity and peace and justice

15Chapter 4: I Shall Come Again

16to the world. Bahá’u’lláh's Writings equal a hundred vol-
umes. They offer teachings and unveil “all the truth” (John
16:13) needed by humanity for at least a thousand years.
• ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. Before His passing in 1892, Bahá’u’lláh
appointed His eldest son, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá (Servant of Glory),
to serve as the Interpreter and Exemplar of His teachings
and the Center of His Covenant. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá is also
known as the Mystery of God. His station is not that of
the Báb or Bahá’u’lláh, but of a Perfect Exemplar or Model
for all to emulate. ‘Abdu’l-Bahá traveled through many
countries to spread the teachings of the new Revelation.
• Shoghi Effendi. Shoghi Effendi did not consider himself
one of the central figures of the Bahá’í Faith, yet he
occupied a position of preeminence in the development of
the new faith. After the passing of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, he served
as the appointed Guardian of the Faith. His chief accom-
plishment was the building of the Administrative Order
of Bahá’u’lláh, which constitutes a pattern for the future
World Order—an Order called by Jesus the Kingdom of
God, and the Kingdom of heaven, meaning the coming of
the Kingdom of God or the Kingdom of heaven on earth.
• The Universal House of Justice. Shortly after Shoghi
Effendi’s passing, the responsibility for leadership in
the Bahá’í Faith was delegated to a supreme elected
institution designated by Bahá’u’lláh as The Universal
House of Justice. Its members represent and receive the
full support of the entire Bahá’í community living in over
two hundred countries and territories around the globe.

17The Goals of the Bahá’í Faith
When that time comes…I will gather all the nations
together… Joel 3:1-2 NEB

1898 I Shall Come Again

19And I…am about to come and gather all nations and
tongues, and they will come and see my glory…they will
bring all your brothers, from all the nations…
Isaiah 66:18-20 NIV
See also Isaiah 10:13-14

20Ye were created to show love one to another…Take pride
not in love for yourselves but in love for your fellow-
creatures. Glory not in love for your country, but in love
for all mankind.31 Bahá’u’lláh

21…the old order of things has passed away…I am making
everything new! Christ (Revelation 21:4-5 NIV)

22Soon will the present-day order be rolled up, and a new
one spread out in its stead.32 Bahá’u’lláh

23The Bahá’í Faith seeks to attain these goals:
• To transform our divided planet into a global community
crowned with harmony, peace, and justice
• To inspire the heart of humanity with a divine purpose,
and an immortal hope, and
• To raise the ethical standards to levels never before
achieved. (For a detailed study of these goals, see any in-
troductory book on Bahá’í teachings. See also Volume VI
of this work, By My Fruits Ye Shall Know Me.)
All these goals are pursued in fulfillment of this divine
prayer and purpose:
Our Father in heaven, thy name be hallowed; thy kingdom
come, thy will be done, on earth as in heaven.
Christ (Matthew 6:9-10 NEB)

24Many prominent figures of our time have testified to the
positive and dynamic influence of the Bahá’í Faith in lead-
ing the world toward these goals:

25Chapter 4: I Shall Come Again

26I sympathize with the Bahá’í Faith with all my heart
because it has the Spirit of Christ in it…You hold…the key
that will settle all of our difficulties
Dr. George Washington Carver
…the highest and purest form of religious teaching…I
know of no other [faith] so profound. Leo Tolstoy
The philosophy of Bahá’u’lláh deserves the best thought
we can give it… Helen Keller
In our times we can only survive, and our civilization can
only flower, if we reorient the conventional wisdom and
achieve the new insights…proclaimed by the Bahá’í Faith
and…now also supported by the latest discoveries of the
empirical sciences. Dr. Ervin Laszlo

• • •
Chapter 28

Minister

Editor Of The World Encyclopedia

1of Peace, Renowned Authority on

Systems Sciences And World Order

1Bahá’u’lláh was…without question one of the supreme
spiritual geniuses of history. Dr. John Holmes

1[The Bahá’í Faith] teaches the essential unity of mankind
under one God…That is a force which cuts across politics,
trade routes, racial groupings the world around.
It can be made a powerful force in the practical affairs of
the world. Hon. William O. Douglas
U.S. Supreme Court Justice

2…the greatest movement working today for universal
peace. Dr. Auguste Forel

• • •
Chapter 29

Renowned Swiss Scientist

1Why Do You Not Understand
My Language?
Christ (John 8:43 NEB)

2H e who is from the earth belongs to the earth and
uses earthly speech. John 3:31 NEB
Lack of communication is at the heart of many conflicts,
failures, and tragedies. It affects all spheres of human life,
including religion.
But why is there lack of communication? Many experts believe
the root cause is a tendency to act on unverified perceptions
and assumptions. The following story demonstrates the
point. A man who was hard of hearing wanted to visit a
patient in a hospital. He thought of several questions and
presumed the likely answers from the patient. For instance,
he thought to ask him, “How are you?” and assumed the
patient would say, “I am feeling fine,” etc. But this is actually

3Visitor: How are you my friend?
Patient: I feel terrible!
Visitor: Thank God. How is your heart?
Patient: It misses some beats and it may stop at any
moment.
Visitor: I am glad to hear that. Where are you going
from the hospital?
Patient: To my grave!
Visitor: That is the most restful place to be. When you
leave the hospital, who is going to take care of
you?
Patient: The angel of hell!
Visitor: You are lucky to have someone like her. What
will you be eating there?
Patient: Worms!
Visitor: That is my favorite food. Do you have any close
friends who will come to talk with you?
Patient: Yes, his name is the Devil.
Visitor: You are lucky to have friends like that. What
does your doctor say?
Patient: He says I will be dead in two weeks.
Visitor: Glad to hear it. Take care now.
The story may seem far-fetched, but it portrays vividly how
conflicts and tragedies often take root and spread. It is
believed that the atomic bomb was dropped on Hiroshima
because the political leaders assumed the translation of a
message conveyed by a Japanese news agency was accurate,
when it was not:
Unfortunately the translators at the Domei News Agency
could not know what Suzuki [the Premier] had in mind.
As they hastily translated the prime minister’s statement
into English, they chose the wrong meaning. From the

4world that the Suzuki cabinet had decided to “ignore” the
Potsdam ultimatum.1
The cabinet was furious at the Premier’s choice of words and
the poor translation of his message by the news agency, but
it was too late. “Tokyo radio had flashed it—to America! The
punishment came swiftly.”
What is religion? It is communication between God and man.
The problem is this: people assume that God speaks in their
language, which He does not. They also assume that God
sees things as they do, which He does not. No wonder people
find it easier to be grateful to God in times of comfort and
prosperity. When good fortune visits them, they say “God is
right! I deserve this.” But when trouble touches them they
say “I can’t understand why this is happening to me. Why
would God allow this. I never did anything to deserve it!”
These unverified assumptions, that God speaks as we do and
sees everything as we see, have caused immeasurable misery
and suffering throughout the ages. Such assumptions continue
to prevail in our time.
Why did people fail to understand Jesus whose marvelous
words are models of grace and beauty? Would He—and does
He—address the same words He addressed to the Jews (Why
do you not understand my language?) to the Christians who
are now interpreting His prophecies? Has the way people
understand religion changed since the time of Jesus?
This chapter presents a comparative study of the “symbolic
language” as used in both biblical and Bahá’í Scriptures. It
offers passages from both Scriptures to decode the meaning
of some of the most critical prophecies of the second advent.
It demonstrates the validity of statements such as the following,
which are made by an increasing number of Christian scholars:
Too often, we try to interpret literally what should be

5The examples presented here share this common feature: they
contain messages that imply miraculous and dramatic displays
of powers over the laws of nature, over the ordinary course
of events. The chapter shows:
• The remarkable similarity between the language of Christ
and Bahá’u’lláh.
• The astonishing similarity between how the Jews inter-
preted the prophecies in the first century A. D. and how
Christians interpret them today.
• The stark contrast between what people expect and the
ways prophecies have been fulfilled.
It concludes that the strongest obstacle in recognizing God's
Messengers and Redeemers is and has always been an
inability to discern the difference between how the Creator
speaks and what His hearers would like to hear, how He
acts and how people would like Him to act.
Man looks at the outward appearance, but the Lord looks
at the heart. I Samuel 16:7 NIV
…the letter killeth, but the spirit giveth life. II Corinthians 3:6
For my thoughts are not your thoughts, neither are your
ways my ways… Isaiah 55:8

• • •
Chapter 30

The Promise Of A King And Its Fulfillment

1throne of his ancestor David, and he will be king over
Israel for ever; his reign shall never end [emphasis added
throughout the chapter]. Luke 1:31-33 NEB
See also Luke 1:70-75
Art thou a king then?…To this end was I [Christ] born…

2The preceding verses are an affirmation of the Old Testament
prophecies and promises such as:
…I will raise up your offspring to succeed you, one of
your own sons…I will establish his throne forever. I will
be his father, and he will be my son…I will set him over
my house and my kingdom forever; his throne will be
established forever. I Chronicles 17:11-14 NIV
The Lord swore to David an oath which he will not break:
‘A prince of your own line will I set upon your throne.’
Psalms 132:11 NEB
But you, Bethlehem…out of you will come for me one
who will be ruler over Israel…E Micah 5:2 NIV
[The Fulfillment:] You cannot tell by observation when
the kingdom of God comes…in fact the kingdom of God
is among you. Christ (Luke 17:20-21 NEB)
My kingdom does not belong to this world.
Christ (John 18:36 NEB)
How did Jesus who was so poor as to say “Foxes have holes
and birds of the air have nests, but the Son of Man has no
place to lay his head” (Matt. 8:20 NIV), fulfill the Hebrew
prophecies that the promised Redeemer “will be ruler over
Israel”? How did Jesus receive “the throne of His ancestor
David”? Spiritually. How could the Jews in the time of Jesus
have acknowledged an interpretation contrary to their estab-
lished beliefs? By making wisdom the guiding lamp of their
lives, by being humble and open-minded. To them “carrying
a little extra oil” of wisdom did not seem urgent. Yet that one
small step would have led them to the presence of their Lord.
In spite of His seeming poverty and weakness, Jesus spoke
like a conquering king:
…Jesus Christ, who is…the ruler of the kings of the earth.
Revelation 1:5 NIV
E

3…I have conquered the world. Christ (John 16:33 NEB)
We find Bahá’u’lláh speaking the same way:
The Most Great Law is come, and the Ancient Beauty
[Bahá’u’lláh] ruleth upon the throne of David.5
Ye are but vassals, O kings of the earth! He Who is the
King of Kings hath appeared, arrayed in His most won-
drous glory
When Bahá’u’lláh announced the preceding words, He was
a captive—an exile and a prisoner of the Ottoman Empire,
under a most mighty and cruel king.
It is divine to judge by the heart:
…behold, a [King] greater than Solomon is here.
Christ (Matthew 12:42)
It is human to judge by appearance:
Is not this the carpenter’s son? Matthew 13:55
The King who was greater than Solomon showed His great-
ness not by pomp and pride, but by humility: “he poured
water into a basin, and began to wash his disciples’ feet and
to wipe them with the towel” (John 13:5 NEB). This is true
glory and greatness. The One who was God’s beloved Son
and the Lord of the visible and invisible declared: “whoever
wants to be first must be the willing slave of all—like the
Son of Man” (Matt. 20:27 NEB).
While Bahá’u’lláh was being taken to prison, a woman
“emerged from the midst of the crowd with a stone in her
hand, eager to cast it at the face of Bahá’u’lláh.” Bahá’u’lláh
asked the guards to let her fulfill her heart’s desire: “Deny
her not what she regards as a meritorious act in the sight of
God.” 7 The Master puts the servant’s need above His own.
This is true power.
Both Christ and Bahá’u’lláh ascended the throne of a

4people expected and are still expecting. Orthodox Jews after
two thousand years of expectation and disappointment have

• • •
Chapter 31

The Promise Of Freedom And Its Fulfillment

1by the lips of his holy prophets, that he would deliver us
[the Jews] from our enemies… Luke 1:70-71 NEB

2He [the Spirit of the Lord] has sent me…to release the
oppressed… Christ (Luke 4:18 NIV)

3[The Fulfillment:] Praise to the God of Israel! For he has
turned to his people, saved them and set them free, and
has raised up a deliverer [Jesus] of victorious power from
the house of his servant David. Luke 1:68-69 NEB
See also Matt. 11:28-30

4How did Jesus release the Jews who were the captives of the
Roman oppression? Spiritually. Even the Deliverer Him-
self was oppressed by both the Romans and the Jews. Those
who embraced His tidings of love, peace, and salvation
were released from their foremost enemies: unbelief, pride,
prejudice, selfishness, and hypocrisy. True liberty comes
from following what God, the divine Deliverer, prescribes:
Ye shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free.
Christ (John 8:32)
…where the Spirit of the Lord is, there is liberty.
II Corinthians 3:17
The liberty that profiteth you is to be found nowhere
except in complete servitude unto God, the Eternal Truth.
Whoso hath tasted of its sweetness will refuse to barter it

5He is indeed a captive who hath not recognized the Supreme
Redeemer, but hath suffered his soul to be bound…in the
fetters of his desires.9 Bahá’u’lláh

• • •
Chapter 32

Descending From Heaven Three Common Expectations Among The Christians Are That

1great glory,” (3) “be seen by every eye.” Comparing the
following passages from Christ and Bahá’u’lláh should cast
new light on the unique language of revelation, and the
intended meaning of Christ’s promises.
We know Jesus was born physically on earth, yet He made
statements that seem to indicate otherwise:
He who comes from heaven bears witness to what he has
seen and heard, yet no one accepts his witness.
Christ (John 3:31-32 NEB)
No one has ever gone into heaven except the one who came
from heaven—the Son of Man. Christ (John 3:13 NIV)
I have come down from heaven… Christ (John 6:38 NEB)
How did Christ come down from heaven? Spiritually.
Those who take literally “coming down from heaven” in
relation to the second advent can find their counterparts
among Jesus' contemporaries. For they also took literally the
above words in relation to Christ’s first advent:
Surely this is Jesus son of Joseph; we know his father and
mother. How can he now say, “I have come down from
heaven”? John 6:42 NEB
Why did the people not understand Jesus’ intention in saying
“I have come down from heaven”? They tried to translate

2…he who is from the earth belongs to the earth and uses
earthly speech. John 3:31 NEB
In the following passage, Bahá’u’lláh again speaks in the
language of revelation and declares that He has come from
heaven “even as He had come down from it the first time:”
…God is my witness! The Promised One Himself
[Bahá’u’lláh] hath come down from heaven, seated upon
the crimson cloud with the hosts of revelation on His
right, and the angels of inspiration on His left, and the
Decree hath been fulfilled at the behest of God, the
Omnipotent, the Almighty.10 Bahá’u’lláh
How did Bahá’u’lláh descend from heaven? Spiritually, even
as that Spirit descended the first time:
He [Bahá’u’lláh], verily, hath again come down from

• • •
Chapter 33

Power

1deliverer [Jesus] of victorious power… Luke 1:68-69 NEB
All power is given unto me in heaven and in earth.
Christ (Matthew 28:18)
See also Mark 9:1
God is my witness! He, the Ancient of everlasting days
is come, girded with majesty and power.12 Bahá’u’lláh
The All-Merciful is come invested with power and
sovereignty.13 Bahá’u’lláh
The following words testify to Bahá’u’lláh’s supreme power.
Has anyone ever spoken with such authority?
I am the One Whom the tongue of Isaiah hath extolled,
the One with Whose name both the Torah and the Evangel

2round the Day-Spring of this Revelation, while from the
heights of the Kingdom the voice of the Son of God is
heard proclaiming: “Bestir yourselves, ye proud ones of
the earth, and hasten ye towards Him.” Carmel hath in
this day hastened in longing adoration to attain His court,
whilst from the heart of Zion there cometh the cry: “The
promise of all ages is now fulfilled. That which had been
announced in the holy writ of God, the Beloved, the Most
High, is made manifest.”…By the one true God, Elijah
hath hastened unto My court and hath circumambulated in
the day-time and in the night-season My throne of glory.
Solomon in all his majesty circles in adoration around Me
in this day, uttering this most exalted word: “I have turned
my face towards Thy face, O Thou omnipotent Ruler of
the world! I am wholly detached from all things pertaining
unto me, and yearn for that which Thou dost possess.”
He, verily, is come with His Kingdom, and all the atoms
cry aloud: …“Here am I, here am I, O Lord, My God!”
whilst Sinai circleth round the House, and the Burning
Bush calleth aloud: “The All-bounteous is come mounted
upon the clouds!”
What kind of power did Christ and Bahá’u’lláh have?
Spiritual. This too was not what people valued and expected

• • •
Chapter 34

Glory

1The hour is come, that the Son of man should be glorified.
Christ (John 12:23)
Father, the hour has come. Glorify thy Son…
Christ (John 17:1 neb)

2I sorrow not for the burden of My imprisonment. Neither
do I grieve over My abasement, or the tribulation I suffer
at the hands of Mine enemies. By My life! They are My
glory, a glory wherewith God hath adorned His own Self.
Would that ye know it! 16 Bahá’u’lláh
And again:
I am not impatient in the troubles that touch me in my
love for Thee…Nay, I have, by Thy power, chosen them
for my own self, and I glory in them…17 Bahá’u’lláh
What kind of glory did Christ and Bahá’u’lláh have? Spiritual.
This too was not what the people expected and valued and

• • •
Chapter 35

Seeing

1…he [Jesus] came to dwell among us, and we saw his
glory… John 1:14 NEB
But we see Jesus…crowned with glory and honor…
Hebrews 2:9
Who saw Jesus crowned with glory and honor? Only those—
a few—who had insight. At first “even his brothers had no
faith in him” (John 7:5 NEB). It is the spirit and the heart that
see the Glory of God. Seeing the truth requires spiritual sight:
Except a man be born again, he cannot see the kingdom
of God. Christ (John 3:3)
…without holiness no one will see the Lord.
Hebrews 12:14 NIV
…your sins have hidden his [the Lord’s] face from you…
Isaiah 59:2 NIV
…whosoever sinneth hath not seen Him… I John 3:6
Blessed are the pure in heart: for they shall see God.
Christ (Matthew 5:8)

2112 I Shall Come Again

3…when a true seeker determineth to take the step of search
in the path leading to the knowledge of the Ancient of
Days, he must, before all else, cleanse and purify his
heart…18 Bahá’u’lláh

4…had these people… sanctified their eyes…they surely
would not have been deprived of beholding the beauty of
God…19 Bahá’u’lláh

5I counsel you to buy from me…salve to put on your eyes,
so you can see. Christ (Revelation 3:18 NIV)

6At His trial Jesus said:
…from now on, you will see the Son of Man seated at the
right hand of God… Christ (Matthew 26:64 NEB)

7Who saw Jesus from then on sitting at the right hand of
God? And how was He seen? With insight or eyesight? How
did those who heard Jesus—both believers and unbelievers—
interpret His words? Has anyone ever seen Him sitting at the
right hand of God?
He that was hidden from mortal eyes is come! His all-
conquering sovereignty is manifest; His all-encompassing
splendor is revealed. Beware lest thou hesitate or halt.20
Bahá’u’lláh
Behold Him [Bahá’u’lláh] manifest and resplendent as
the sun in all its glory.21 Bahá’u’lláh

8“Manifest and resplendent” to whom? Who saw Bahá’u’lláh’s
“all-encompassing” splendor? Only those who stayed awake
with watchful eyes:
Behold, I come like a thief! Blessed is he who stays
awake… Christ (Revelation 16:15 NIV)

9…do not let him find you sleeping…I say to everyone:
‘Watch!’ Christ (Mark 13:36-37 NIV)

10Chapter 5: Why Do You not Understand My Language?

11Did Jesus mean watching with physical or spiritual eyes?
Did He mean sleeping eyes or sleeping spirits? Did He mean
sleeping in the dark of the night or in the dark of unawareness?
Blessed the slumberer who is awakened…22 Bahá’u’lláh
…blessed are your eyes, for they see: and your ears, for
they hear. Christ (Matthew 13:16)
Blessed the ear that hath heard…and the eye that hath
seen and recognized the Lord…23 Bahá’u’lláh

12Life, Death, and Resurrection
I am the resurrection and I am life…no one who is alive
and has faith shall ever die. Christ (John 11:25-26 NEB)
Whoso hath been re-born in this Day, shall never die
Bahá’u’lláh
…if anyone keeps My word he shall never see death.
Christ (John 8:51 NKJ)
Who are those who never die? The spiritually alive. They are
resurrected through their faith and their love for God.
If there were no other example in the Bible, the next one
in itself would be adequate to teach us God’s unique way of
communicating. In the last part of this most instructive
passage Jesus promises to return “in His kingdom” during
the lifetime of His contemporaries:
For the Son of Man is going to come in his Father’s glory
with his angels, and then he will reward each person
according to what he has done. I tell you the truth, some
who are standing here will not taste death before they
see the Son of Man coming in his kingdom.
Christ (Matt. 16:27-28 NIV)
Was Jesus’ promise fulfilled literally or spiritually? Did some
of the people addressed by Him live to see “the coming of the

13114 I Shall Come Again

14Son of Man in his kingdom”? Then what did He mean by
glory, angels, reward, death, see, and kingdom? Can these
words be viewed in any light other than spiritual? Was the
prophecy fulfilled in any other way?
The lack of literal fulfillment of the prophecy at the due time
(the life-span of those addressed by Jesus), has made Chris-
tian interpreters recognize Jesus’ true intention in uttering the
prophecy. They believe it contains a spiritual rather than
literal message. For instance, a Christian scholar states that it
refers to “a spiritual coming of Christ, to an inner experience
of the soul in accordance with the inward nature of the king-
dom.” 25 Another Christian scholar declares that the people
who had insight could “behold with their inward eye those
wonderful words of God which Jesus calls His kingdom…”
To understand God’s word, we must think in His ways of
speaking. His language is unique:
Blessed the man who, assured of My Word, hath arisen
from among the dead to celebrate My praise.27
Bahá’u’lláh

15Suffering First, Glory Later
When the disciples asked: “Lord, are you at this time going
to restore the kingdom to Israel?” (Acts 1:6 NIV), Jesus did
not tell them what they wanted to hear. Instead of saying yes
or no, He simply pointed to the future, without giving a
definite date: “It is not for you to know the times” (Acts 1:7
NIV). On another occasion, the Jews asked Him a similar
question: “But we had been hoping that he [Jesus] was the
man to liberate Israel” (Luke 24:21 NEB). And this is the
answer they received: “How dull you are!…Was the Messiah
not bound to suffer thus before entering upon his glory?”
(Luke 24:25-26 NEB).
Just as Jesus said that the days of glory would come later,
so did Bahá’u’lláh:

16Chapter 5: Why Do You not Understand My Language?

17The day is approaching when God will have exalted His
Cause and magnified His testimony in the eyes of all who
are in the heavens and…on the earth.28 Bahá’u’lláh
The day is approaching when We will have rolled up the
world and all that is therein, and spread out a new order
in its stead. He, verily, is powerful over all things.29
Bahá’u’lláh
The universe is pregnant with these manifold bounties,
awaiting the hour when the effects of its unseen gifts will
be made manifest in this world…30 Bahá’u’lláh
The reign of an earthly sovereign endures for his lifetime.
The reign of a spiritual sovereign grows in His absence.
This is true power and glory. A poor, homeless man from
an obscure town is crucified with the utmost meekness, and
with no one to defend Him. Nineteen centuries later, one of
the most powerful monarchs of the earth says this about that
homeless man:
I wish He would come during my lifetime so that I could
take my crown and lay it at His feet.31 Queen Victoria
Ironically, Queen Victoria’s wish came true: both the Báb
and Bahá’u’lláh declared their Mission during her long reign
(1837-1901). She received Bahá’u’lláh’s message in an
epistle addressed to her, but did not recognize Him.
A man suffers persecution and humiliation for forty years. He
dies as a prisoner and exile in an obscure and desolate town.
Decades after He has passed away, a monarch says this about
Him and His teachings:
Indeed a great light came to me with the Message of
Bahá’u’lláh…It is a wondrous Message…It is Christ’s
Message…Some of those of my caste wonder at and
disapprove my courage to step forward pronouncing
words not habitual for Crowned Heads to pronounce, but
I advance by an inner urge I cannot resist. With bowed head

18116 I Shall Come Again

19I recognize that I too am but an instrument in greater Hands
and rejoice in the knowledge.32 Queen Marie of Rumania
(Granddaughter of Queen Victoria)
Edward Browne, the Cambridge scholar, who met Bahá’u’lláh,
said this about Him: “[Bahá’u’lláh is] the object of a devotion
and love which kings might envy and emperors sigh for in
vain!” 33 Humans desire crowns of jewels, Messengers crowns
of thorns. As Carlyle notes: “Every noble crown is, and on
Earth will forever be, a crown of thorns.” This is how
Bahá’u’lláh viewed Jesus’ poverty and abasement:
Thousands of treasures circle round this poverty, and a
myriad kingdoms of glory yearn for such abasement!
That a crucified homeless man could command the loyalty
of almost a third of the earth’s population for countless
centuries is a wonder far more astonishing than anything an
earthly sovereign can ever achieve. What else but the presence
of suprahuman power can explain such an achievement? This
is true grandeur and glory.
Which is true glory? To conquer by fire or by faith, by
power or by patience? Who is the true sovereign, the one
who fears the triumph of his own evil powers over himself,
or the One who triumphs over the evil powers of the world?
I have conquered an empire but have been unable to con-
quer myself. Peter the Great, Czar of Russia
Dr. James Kennedy, the renowned Christian orator who has
influenced millions by emphasizing the rational basis of
Christianity, makes this statement about the suprahuman
power of Jesus:
Suppose that today in the cities of Europe or America
missionaries were to appear telling us that just recently
some obscure peasant had been put to death in Persia and
was reputed to have risen from the dead and declared to
be the eternal Creator of the cosmos. What chance do you
think such missionaries would have in propagating such a

20Chapter 5: Why Do You not Understand My Language?

21religion? Can you not see that the probabilities against
such a faith ever taking hold would be staggering? But
this is precisely what the Apostles did in the Roman
Empire, and amazing as it is, they succeeded. They
succeeded in overthrowing that pagan empire. This feat
simply demonstrates that there must have been inherent
in this absurd and incredible declaration, some super-
natural power. It was indeed the very power of the spirit
of God, who reached down and drew unto Himself those
whom He would by irresistible power.35
Does the Bahá’í Faith meet the standard declared by Dr.
Kennedy?
The Bahá’í Faith…has spread to over 362 countries,
territories, and islands around the world. This worldwide
Bahá’í community includes believers from nearly every
race, background, nation, and culture. Indeed, the 1988
Britannica Book of the Year states that over 14 major
religious systems are each now found in over 80 countries.
[Among them], Christianity, Islam, and the Bahá’í World
Faith are the most global…”
The same source presents these figures to show the spread
of the Bahá’í Faith to various countries and territories in
comparison with other faiths:
• Christianity
• Bahá’í Faith
• Islam
• Hinduism
• Buddhism
Both Christ and Bahá’u’lláh declared that they had no desire
for the pomp and pageantry of this world, that earthly glory
would follow, after they had ascended to the heavenly realms.
This too was not what the people expected and are still
expecting.

22118 I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 36

The Second Advent Is Also Prophesied To Begin With Suffering

1But first he must suffer…Just as it was in the days of
Noah, so also will it be in the days of the Son of Man.
Christ (Luke 17:24-26 NIV)
For a detailed study of this prophecy, as well as many other
biblical passages that point to suffering, see Volume III, King
of Kings, which offers several chapters on the subject. As we
noted in Chapter 1, Jesus also predicted pain and suffering
for the followers of the new Revelation.
Bahá’u’lláh often refers to His motives for enduring pain, to
His purpose in suffering:
I have, all the days of My life, been at the mercy of Mine
enemies, and have suffered each day, in the path of the
love of God, a fresh tribulation.37 Bahá’u’lláh
Verily, He [Bahá’u’lláh] hath consented to be sorely abased
that ye may attain unto glory…He, in truth, liveth in the
most desolate of abodes for your sakes…38 Bahá’u’lláh
Behold Him [Bahá’u’lláh], an exile, a victim of tyranny,
in this Most Great Prison [‘Akká, in the Holy Land]. His
enemies have assailed Him on every side, and will
continue to do so till the end of His life. Whatever, there-
fore, He saith unto you is wholly for the sake of God, that
haply the peoples of the earth may cleanse their hearts
from the stain of evil desire…and attain unto the knowl-
edge of the one true God—the most exalted station to
which any man can aspire. Their belief or disbelief in My
Cause can neither profit nor harm Me. We summon them
wholly for the sake of God.39 Bahá’u’lláh
I yield Thee thanks, O my God, for that Thou has offered
me up as a sacrifice in Thy path, and made me a target

2Thy servants…Whoso hath quaffed the living waters of
Thy favors can fear no trouble in Thy path, neither can
he be deterred by any tribulation from remembering Thee

• • •
Chapter 37

The Right To Interpret

1Has God given us the right to interpret prophecies? Has He
also given us the right to consider our opinion the right
one?
Opinions differ very little on fundamentals of mathematics
and physics, but as we move to more subjective fields such
as psychology, sociology, education, philosophy, and religion,
we find a wide variation of views. Within religion we see
the greatest diversity of thought in the realm of prophecy,
for nothing is more mysterious. Of course, the mystery is
ingrained by choice, not by chance. Perhaps the only subject
comparable in complexity to prophecy is the interpretation
of dreams. (We should note that the greatest portion of
prophecies are also dreams and visions.)
As a Christian scholar notes “After reading some of the books
on the subject [of prophecy] it would be easy to suggest that
there are as many opinions as there are people.” For instance,
some Christians believe rapture is real; others deny it
vehemently; and still others disagree about how or when it
can happen.
How then can one find a path to true knowledge? First, the
sheer complexity of prophetic language should make every
interpreter of the Word of God utterly humble. Once a very
learned man was found crying. His students asked him why.
He said “For fifty years I believed something to be true. I
just discovered I was wrong. I am afraid everything else I
know is of the same kind.” Second, the interpreter of the
word of God should not look up to any “authority” or

2120 I Shall Come Again

3school as his guide, even as he would not close his eyes and
let someone lead him. And third, he should carefully observe
God’s own guidance, expressed in these verses:
But first note this: no one can interpret any prophecy of
Scripture by himself. II Peter 1:20 NEB

4The Amplified version of the same verse:
[Yet] first [you must] understand this, that no prophecy of
Scripture is [a matter] of any personal or private or
special interpretation (loosening, solving) [brackets and
parentheses belong to original source].
The main message of the verse is this: only God knows for
sure the true meaning of a prophecy. God is universal and
infinite; we are private and finite. People have a right to state
their opinions, as long as they do not insist that they are the
only right ones.
In spite of his superb wisdom, St. Paul acknowledged his
own limitations in understanding the Word of God:
For we know in part and we prophesy in part, but when
perfection [Christ] comes, the imperfect disappears.
I Corinthians 13:9-10 NIV

5The need for being open-minded and non-dogmatic is also
confirmed by some Christian scholars:
Whatever view we adopt, we should avoid dogmatism.
Many wise and godly people have studied the same
passages in the Bible and come up with differing inter-
pretations. It is obvious that they cannot all be right. Yet
they may not all be wrong, either.41
The next verse offers still more enlightenment. It says if
something is mysterious (“is hidden in darkness”), do not
attempt to interpret it:

6Chapter 5: Why Do You not Understand My Language?

7Therefore judge nothing before the appointed time; wait
till the Lord comes. He will bring to light what is hidden
in darkness and will expose the motives of men’s hearts.
I Corinthians 4:5 NIV
Then what right do we have over prophecies? The only right
we have is this: to expect all of them without any exception
to come true, all of them to come to pass. A prophecy is
uttered to be fulfilled. Otherwise, what purpose would it
serve? The right we do not have is this: to decide with
certainty which prophecy is literal and which is symbolic;
to insist that our interpretation is the right one.
The power that protects us from stumbling or falling, the
light that leads us to the true knowledge of God’s Word is
the recognition of our specific rights and responsibilities.
Overstepping the boundaries that God has specified for us can
lead us only to illusions and fantasies. For many faithful
believers, the full recognition or acceptance of their limited
powers, rights, and boundaries is extremely painful. Many
reasons account for this:
• Those in positions of leadership and authority must
project confidence and knowledge to the people they lead
and inspire.
• The people they lead and inspire tend to reinforce that
need. For they too need well-informed leaders on whom
they can lean for spiritual guidance and security.
• Most people, especially those in positions of authority, feel
uncomfortable with saying “I don’t know.” Acknowledging
one’s weaknesses is always painful.
• Coming up with new theories and insights is always
exciting. We all like to be in the forefront of discovery.
All these complex needs, relationships, and weaknesses that
affect all human beings, prompt many interpreters of the
Word of God to cross their boundaries, to claim more than
they are entitled to.

8122 I Shall Come Again

9Those who trust their Lord , always submit to and are
content with the limited rights He has given them. Those
unwilling to acknowledge their weaknesses, recognize their
boundaries, and stay within their rights are powerless to
pursue the path of truth, the path that leads to the light of
the Lord.
Separating the symbolic prophecies from the literal is not an
easy task. On the basis of biblical prophecies, many Christians
expect terrible wars between the forces of Christ and military
forces of the earth. The main reason for war is people’s
refusal to accept God’s plan of peace. It is a war the like of
which the world has never seen. According to a source
published and distributed by a Christian association,42 the
earthly side of the war is waged “by a fiendish army of
200,000,000.” This great war is expected to lead to the death
of many hundreds of millions of people, many times more
than have been killed in all wars since the dawn of history.
Hal Lindsey, perhaps the most popular interpreter of proph-
ecies in our time, states that as the result of such wars “blood
will stand to the horses’ bridles [over three feet] for a total
of 200 miles northward and southward of Jerusalem (Rev.
14:20).” (Astonishingly, one of the two major branches of
Islam entertains a similar expectation: that their promised
Redeemer will engage in battles in which blood will reach
the stirrups of His horse.)
Expecting Jesus and the host of His angels to wage war
against earthly people is very common. The following brief
example from Understanding End Time Prophecy, written by
Norman Robertson, assistant Dean of Rhema Bible Training
Center, offers more insight into literal interpretation. Examples
of this kind are found abundantly in books on Bible prophecy:
Jesus speaks the Word which releases a plague to smite
the vast armies of the Antichrist and the 200 million strong
Oriental army. They are immediately blinded; their eyes
are consumed away in their sockets. They are immediately

10Chapter 5: Why Do You not Understand My Language?

11dumb; their tongues are consumed away in their mouths.
In fright, they reach out and grab one another for security.
That only frightens them more, so they turn to fight
among themselves. Their flesh begins to consume away
from their bones. Their blood gushes to the earth, creating
the pool of blood described in Revelation 14. It stretches
over an area of about 185 miles in the valley of Megiddo
and the Plains of Jezreel.43
Would the divine, loving, gentle Savior of the world allow
or engage in such horrible wars? Who can be sure that such
terrible and titanic wars are to be waged with bullets, bombs,
and missiles on airfields and battle grounds, or if they are to
be carried out with an exchange of ideas and thoughts in
churches, temples, and on the airways of the world? Only the
One who knows “what is hidden in darkness” (I Cor. 4:5 NIV).
Unsheathe the sword of your tongue from the scabbard of
utterance, for therewith ye can conquer the citadels of
men’s hearts.44 Bahá’u’lláh
The Book of Revelation speaks of a sword that comes out
of the mouth of the One called the Word of God (19:13, 15).
Who can tell for sure if the sword is spiritual (the Word
of God) or literal? Only the One who has the knowledge of
all things.
The same book speaks of a city (a new Jerusalem) that
descends from heaven. Who can tell for sure if this city is
literal or spiritual (one based on God’s plan but built by
people)? Only the One gifted with divine guidance.
In Matthew 24:40- 41, Jesus declares that at His coming
some people will be taken away (the rapture). Who can tell
for sure if it is the believers’ hearts and souls that are lifted
into the realm of faith, or their flesh and bone? Only the
Lord, the One who as evidence of His divine power fulfills
each and every prophecy that God’s Messengers and
prophets have spoken; the One who fulfills them all—EITHER

12124 I Shall Come Again

13LITERALLY OR SYMBOLICALLY. The choice of resolving the
mysteries (what is literal, what is symbolic?) is all His. No
one has the right to present his private, personal interpreta-
tion as the truth. No one has the wisdom and the insight to
challenge His knowledge.
As we will see in the next chapter, even Jesus’ enlightened
disciples sometimes had to struggle to reconcile their thoughts
and desires with their Master’s. Despite their great wisdom,
they too could not always separate the symbolic from the literal.
Some Christian leaders and scholars are beginning to ac-
knowledge that the pendulum of interpretation supported
by most churches has gone too far toward literalism. For
instance, Dr. Barry Chant, who has written extensively on
Christian issues including prophecy, declares:
Too often, we try to interpret literally what should be
taken symbolically.45…symbolic language is quite typical
of prophecy. In the Old Testament, in fact, it is clearly
stated that prophets speak in visions, dreams and riddles
(Numbers 12:6). A ‘riddle’ was usually a saying that had
some hidden or subtle meaning that was not obvious at
first. In fact, sometimes its meaning would not be known
at all until the matter was fulfilled.46
The most critical message of this chapter should be repeated
once again: God has given us the right to expect the fulfill-
ment of all prophecies, but He has given us neither the right
nor the wisdom to separate with certainty all the literal
prophecies from the symbolic. Even one major mistake can
cause us to become blind to the reality before us.

14The Great and Terrible

• • •
Chapter 38

Day Of The Lord

1O ur age is one of extreme contrasts. Prophecies attribute
two potentials or possibilities to our age: the most awful
and terrible, and the greatest and most glorious. This brief
verse from Malachi portrays the paradox of our time:
…the great and terrible [dreadful NIV] day of the Lord
[emphasis added throughout the chapter]… Malachi 4:5 NEB
The two translations of the following verse cover the full
range of the potentials of our time:
Alas! For that day is great, so that none is like it…

2How awful that day will be! None will be like it.
Jeremiah 30:7 NIV
This chapter shows mainly the gloomy state of the present.
An entire chapter in Volume IV will cover prophecies about
the glory of the future, portraying a magnificent world, a
world wherein love, justice, and peace dominate the hearts
of humanity. A world radiant with the glory of God, for
everything will be under God’s rule.
…I saw the glory of the God of Israel…the land was
radiant with his glory. Ezekiel 43:2 NIV
This is the Day in which the earth shineth with the
effulgent light of thy Lord…1 Bahá’u’lláh
…the earth was illuminated by his splendor.
Revelation 18:1 NIV
The Lord their God will save them on that day…They will
sparkle…like jewels in a crown. How attractive and
beautiful they will be! Zechariah 9:16-17 NIV
Hallelujah! For our Lord God Almighty reigns. Let us
rejoice and be glad and give him glory! Revelation 19:7 NIV
The two portrayals of our time offer extreme contrasts, with
the overwhelming weight on the side of glory rather than
gloom. At this very instant we are experiencing the pangs of
a new birth—one that has been the hope of humanity since
the dawn of history and will be its crown of glory for
countless ages to come. It is the birth of a kingdom divine,
immortal, and everlasting; a kingdom patterned after the one
in heaven. The pains must be proportionate to the gains.
But the “pains” are mostly “mental,” as reachable and
changeable as our thoughts and desires. They can be removed
or lessened by a little change of attitude, by a desire to over-
come the fear of exploring new frontiers of knowledge. The
Book of Revelation promises the most exquisite gifts to those
who overcome their spiritual handicaps; gifts as glorious as

3I am coming soon…Him who overcomes (Rev. 3:11-12
NIV):

4• Will inherit all things (Rev. 21:7).
• I will be his God and he will be my son (Rev. 21:7).
• I will give the right to sit with me on my throne (Rev.
3:21).
• I will give the right to eat from the tree of life which is
in the paradise of God (Rev. 2:7).
• I will make a pillar in the temple of my God (Rev. 3:12).
• I will…give him the morning star (Rev. 2:28).
• I…will acknowledge his name before my Father… (Rev.
3:5).
• I will never erase his name from the book of life… (Rev.
3:5).
• I will write on him the name of my God… (Rev. 3:12).
• I will write on him…the name of the city of my God
(Rev. 3:12).
• I will also give him a white stone with a new name…
(Rev. 2:17).
• I will also write on him my new name. He who has an
[spiritual] ear, let him hear what the Spirit says to the

• • •
Chapter 39

The Standards Of Judgment

1looks at the outward appearance, but the Lord looks at the
heart. I Samuel 16:7 NIV

2To feel secure and at ease, human beings tend to accept
and conform to the status quo. According to the Book of

3assess the spiritual state of the nations. The assessors declare:
“We have gone throughout the earth and found the whole
world at rest and in peace” (Zech. 1:11 NIV). The Lord then
declares: “I am very angry with nations that feel secure [at
ease, NEB]” (Zech. 1:15 NIV).
Who is the true judge of human beings? The Creator or the
created? Our knowledge of our true potential for spiritual
growth and greatness is always limited and our assessment of
our attainments and failures subjective. To cope with difficult
conditions, we often compromise or alter our standards to
meet daily demands. Something that was unacceptable,
unethical, or even unthinkable for one generation may become
the norm for the next. “We don’t see things as they are, but
as we are.”
Do God’s standards also change? Only He knows the true
and absolute standards of being human; only He knows our
capacities for greatness and self-fulfillment; only He can
assess the worth of the missed opportunities, the magnitude
of His unclaimed blessings. Therefore, to know how well we
are doing, we must always depend on His standards.
Consider these examples. At the time of this writing, over
30,000 people on our planet die every day from malnutrition
and starvation. As Dr. Ervin Laszlo notes “one in every five
human beings goes permanently hungry and lives in abject
poverty.” If we did not have the resources to save them,
we would not be accountable. But we do. The accumulated
wealth of the world in our time is beyond imagination. The
rich ones of the earth could save all the hungry people of
our planet with a stroke of a pen, with virtually no change
in their wealth. They could also be saved with a fraction of
one percent of the world’s military budget. Our political
leaders search for the biggest and latest bombers but ignore
the rampant spread of blindness in little children, a terrible
handicap that can be prevented with a few pennies worth of

4To us the ignoring of such widespread death and disease in the
context of enormous wealth is the norm. But what about God?
Likewise, when we find many people around us depressed,
uninterested in knowledge, cynical, conforming, apathetic, or
suffering in quiet desperation, then we accept those conditions
as normal. Usually what is easy and what the majority follows
shapes and reshapes our standards, and statistics often write the
rules of living.
Making money often seems to be the prime motive and
having money the prime purpose of living. How does God
view wealth? A man of wealth came to Jesus and asked how
he could gain eternal life. Jesus told him to keep the
commandments (love thy neighbor, etc.). The man said he was
keeping them already. (That is what he thought.) Jesus then
tried his soul in the fiery crucible of testing: “If you want
to be perfect, go, sell your possessions and give to the poor”
(Matt. 19:21 NIV). Sadness overwhelmed the man’s soul. He
could not pass this test and walked away. He could give love
but not gold. God saw his perfection in giving away his
possessions. He saw his self-worth in keeping them.
O SON OF MAN!
Thou dost wish for gold and I desire thy freedom from
it. Thou thinkest thyself rich in its possession, and I
recognize thy wealth in thy sanctity therefrom. By My
life! This is My knowledge, and that is thy fancy; how

• • •
Chapter 40

The Spiritual State Of Our Time Jesus Predicted That At His Return Faithfulness To His Covenant Would Be Scarce:

1“But when the Son of Man comes, will he find faith on
earth?” (Luke 18:8 NEB). “At that time many will turn
away from the faith” (Matt. 24:10 NIV). “The love of most
will grow cold” (Matt. 24:12 NIV).

2130 I Shall Come Again

3What love will grow cold? The love of God, religion, and truth.
People will be lovers of themselves, lovers of money…not
lovers of the good…having a form of godliness but deny-
ing its power. II Timothy 3:2-5 NIV
Is religion today an accumulation of the ideas, illusions, and
precepts of people or an expression of the principles of God?
Is it based on true understanding or on rote learning?
…their religion is but a precept of men, learnt by rote…
Isaiah 29:13 NEB
See also Amos 8:12
In our time biblical scholarship has advanced beyond the
dreams of past generations. The number of books published
to help people understand the Bible is phenomenal. Many
new translations of the Bible have appeared. Hundreds of
colleges and universities offer degrees or courses in religion.
Never before have there been so many Bible scholars with
Ph. D.’s and D. D.’s. What kind of knowledge is being
discovered and shared? Is it the kind that mostly “begins and
ends in words,” or the kind that leads to action? Is it the kind
that promotes “rote learning” as Isaiah foretold (29:13), or
the kind that fosters enlightenment?
People [who live at the end of the age] will be…always
learning but never able to acknowledge the truth…
II Timothy 3:2-7 NIV
These prophecies should make anyone who reads them—no
matter how learned—as humble as a little child. They imply:
• Following the popular views of prophecies may be un-
justified.
• Openness of the mind and the heart to new ideas is
absolutely essential.
Do the countless theories on prophecies enlighten or becloud
the mind? Do they create insight or confusion? Why did
Jesus declare that He would come on the clouds?

4Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

5They will see the Son of Man coming on the clouds…
Matthew 24:30 NIV
What purpose do the clouds serve? They veil the heavenly
lights. The Hebrew prophets also predicted the gloominess of
our time:
“That day will be a day of…darkness and gloom, a day
of clouds…” (Zeph. 1:15 NIV). “Arise…your light has come,
and the glory of the Lord rises upon you. See, darkness
covers the earth…and thick darkness is over the peoples”
(Isa. 60:1-2 NIV).
Jesus warned the seekers of His Kingdom and showed them
how to lift the veils of gloom and darkness, so that the glory
of the Lord could become visible:
Keep a watch on yourselves; do not let your minds
[hearts, NIV] be dulled by dissipation and drunkenness
and worldly cares…Be on the alert, praying at all times…
Luke 21:34-36 NEB
Jesus asked His faithful followers to observe two actions:
• Watch or investigate
• Pray continuously
He also urged them to overcome three obstacles:
• Dissipation, which the dictionary defines as “indulging in
intemperate pursuit of pleasure”
• Preoccupation with worldly concerns, such as working,
going to school, and raising a family
• Drunkenness
What does Jesus mean by “drunkenness”? Many in our age
numb their souls with intoxicating drinks and drugs. But far
more critical is spiritual intoxication—with one’s own fantasies,
which leads to separation from reality; and self-satisfaction,
which leads to coldness, complacency, and apathy. The

6132 I Shall Come Again

7Scriptures declare that the spiritual handicap of the people of
our time is very serious; it is continual intoxication:
“They are drunken, but not with wine; they stagger, but
not with strong drink” (Isa. 29:9). “They grope in the
darkness without light and are left to wander like a
drunkard” (Job 12:25 NEB). “All the nations shall drink
continually” (Ob. 1:16 NEB). “Wake up, you drunkards,
and lament your fate…Alas! the day is near, the day of the
Lord” (Joel 1:5, 15 NEB). “The inhabitants of the earth
were intoxicated” (Rev. 17:2 NIV). “They will walk like
blind men” (Zeph. 1:17 NIV). (See also Rev. 18:3; Isa.
29:9-14; 49:26.)
To whom do these prophecies apply? Humility requires that
each individual, no matter how learned, admit this in his
heart: I too may have serious spiritual handicaps of which
I may be totally unaware. I too may be living in the clouds.
I too may be afflicted with spiritual intoxication. I too need
to remain sober:
Therefore let us not sleep, as do others; but let us watch
and be sober. I Thessalonians 5:6
Bahá’u’lláh repeatedly characterizes the spiritual state of
mankind in passages such as these:
Drunken are the eyes of those men that have openly refused
to behold the face of God, the All-Glorious, the All Praised.3
Their eyes are drunken; they are indeed a blind people.4
We behold it [the world], in this day, at the mercy of
rulers so drunk with pride that they cannot discern
clearly their own best advantage, much less recognize a
Revelation so bewildering and challenging as this.5
Thou beholdest, O my God, how bewildered in their
drunkenness are Thy servants who have turned back from
Thy beauty and caviled at what hath been sent down from
the right hand of the throne of Thy majesty.

8Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

9What is the consequence of “drinking”? The consequence is
spiritual unconsciousness; it is an inability to recognize the
signs of the times and the timely return of the Master:
But suppose that servant…says to himself, ‘My master is
staying away a long time,’ and he then begins…to eat and
drink with drunkards. The master of that servant will…
assign him a place with the hypocrites…
Christ (Matthew 24:48-51 NIV)

10Why is the servant placed with the hypocrites? Because he
considers himself a faithful follower, yet he fails to abide by
his Master’s wishes, he refuses to investigate the news of His
return. Hypocrisy always results from failure to put one’s
professed faith and belief into action.
This prophetic parable implies that many will continue to wait
and wish for their Master’s return, after the set time has
passed, and after the Master has returned because they
assume that their “master is delaying his coming” (NKJ). The
parable of the ten maidens clearly supports this. The five
maidens who took no oil, “slumbered and slept” (Matt. 25:5)
because they thought the Bridegroom would be late. While
they were dreaming about His late return, He came and left
them absorbed in their dreams.
This prophecy clarifies the point:
Suddenly, in an instant, the Lord Almighty will come…[it
will be] as it is with a dream, with a vision in the night—
as when a hungry man dreams that he is eating, but he
awakens, and his hunger remains; as when a thirsty man
dreams that he is drinking, but he awakens faint, with his
thirst unquenched. Isaiah 29:5-8 NIV

11Many people prefer to be dreaming than to be awake, espe-
cially if they can choose their dreams. But as the prophecy
declares, dreaming alone or feeling comfortable cannot satisfy
the hunger of the spirit.

12134 I Shall Come Again

13We may enjoy the dreaming part so much that we do not
even want to consider that there is much more available
if we awaken. Thus we choose to remain asleep, unaware
of the grandness that is there for us in awakening. When
we stay with the familiar we take no risks.7 Wayne Dyer
Would the Bridegroom ever be late to His banquet? How can
the One who calls Himself a faithful witness (Rev. 1:5) fail
to fulfill His most urgent and glorious promise to His servants?
No, the heavenly Host would never be late to His banquet.
He appears late only to His “slumbering and sleeping” guests
who are caught in their dreams.
He who is coming will come and will not delay.
Hebrews 10:37 NIV
The belief that the Master has delayed His return is not
uncommon. Noted Christian author and leader, George
Vandeman writes:
…Jesus could have returned to this earth any time after
1844…No time prophecy is holding Him back. Then why
hasn’t He returned?8
He then concludes that God is waiting to give people more
time to repent. Here are two more examples from other writers:
If we put all the information together we must reach the
inescapable conclusion that it [the time of the advent] will
take longer than we thought, but when it comes it will
happen sooner than we expect.9
God is holding back to give us that chance. It will not last
forever.10
The idea of the late coming of the Master is not new. It has
been held by the Jews for as long as 2000 years:
Rabbi Avrohom Feuer wrote, “The Talmud (Sanhedrin 97a)
lists numerous signs which herald the imminent arrival
of Messiah…all these signs have appeared, yet Messiah
tarries.”

14Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

15In the delay many have succumbed to drunkenness. Some
are drunk with the wonders of modern technology, others
with a specific ideology or theology, and still others with
success, wealth, power, prestige, pride, self-conceit, or self-
satisfaction. Any of these obstacles may preoccupy the mind
and becloud the spirit. Any one of them can conceal the
great glory of the Master, can make Him totally invisible.
Spiritual intoxication comes also from a stressful life. The
people of our time live under constant stress and distress:
“That day will be…a day of distress and anguish, a day
of trouble and ruin” (Zeph. 1:15-16 NIV). “There will be
a time of distress such as has not happened from the
beginning of nations until then” (Dan. 12:1 NIV). “It will
be a time of great distress” (Christ, Matt. 24:21 NEB). “There
shall be great distress in the land” (Christ, Luke 21:23).
The new wine dries up, the vines sicken, and all the
revellers turn to sorrow…No one shall drink wine to the
sound of song; the liquor will be bitter to the man who
drinks it…mirth is banished from the land…So shall it be
in all the world, in every nation… Isaiah 24:7-13 NEB
The spiritual state of human beings will grow so grave as to
affect the earth itself:
The earth reels to and fro like a drunken man…
Isaiah 24:20 NEB
To compensate for pain and to cope with pressure, people
have devised an assortment of escape routes. Some live from
weekend to weekend, from vacation to vacation. Others go
to bars, watch violent movies, rent scary videos, read romantic
novels, or seek new sexual encounters; they join cults, form
gangs, or practice voodoo and satanism; they resort to drugs,
alcohol, or astrology; they run away from their families, abuse
their children, or divorce their spouses; they escape from
reality, and as a last resort attempt suicide.
Suicide as a means of escape is on the rise and occurs especially
among young people. In the United States—one of the most

16136 I Shall Come Again

17prosperous countries in the world—every day over a thousand
young people try to take their own lives. (The latest statistics
place the figure at 500,000 a year.) At that rate there would
be over 27,000 attempts around the planet every day.
Some people depend in vain on their wealth as a means of
satisfying their spiritual hunger; others simply dream that if
only they had more, happiness would be theirs:
Their silver and gold will not be able to save them in the
day of the Lord’s wrath. They will not satisfy their hunger…
Ezekiel 7:19 NIV
Many people complain about being too busy, yet are afraid
of free time; they do not know how to cope with freedom.
The stress of freedom makes some workers workaholics and
sends many retirees to an early death.
According to a new Harris Poll, in a fifteen-year period the
number of leisure hours per week declined 37 percent, from
26.2 to 16.6. The sharing of “quality time” among family
members has reached its lowest point. Dr. Roberta Berns in
her book Child, Family, Community writes: “According to
Shaevitz working couples typically spend only 12 minutes a
week talking to each other.” 12 Another study indicates that
married couples speak about 4 minutes a day with each other
and 2 minutes a day with their children.
The unrelenting stress and distress of our time and the massive
energies devoted to defuse them create in most people a state
of spiritual exhaustion. A state of the mind such as this: “I
am tense, tired, anxious, and in need of escape. I have no
time for anything else.” They try to go from one high to
another before anxiety grips their soul. They take “nourish-
ment” all the time, yet remain hungry. They are constantly
on the run yet feel entrapped. This state of the mind often
causes spiritual slumber. It manifests itself as apathy, coldness,
and complacency, which are often concealed under a facade of
self-satisfaction, covered with a shallow sense of well-being.
The busy life, the constant search for a high, the demanding

18Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

19struggle for mere survival, leave no room for self-awareness,
reflection, curiosity, knowledge, and spiritual adventure.
But where are to be found earnest seekers and inquiring
minds?13 Bahá’u’lláh

20If you ask someone on the street “Have you heard that
Christ has come again?” His first thought may be, “This
person is weird,” and his first concern, “How can I escape
from this unfortunate encounter without wasting a minute?”
Not wanting any conflict or controversy, he may respond
briefly and courteously and walk away. If the person who
hears the message happens to be a “born-again” believer, he
may actually be offended by the question itself, and feel sorry
for the questioner. Before departing, he may simply say, “My
brother I will pray for you.” He runs away from this en-
counter without ever thinking “My Master has asked me to
watch for His coming and to be on the alert.” He departs
or runs away from the news without recognizing his role in
the unfolding of the divine drama, without suspecting that he
is running away from the news of the coming of the One
called “the Lion of the tribe of Juda” (Rev. 5:5), without
realizing that his untimely departure has been graphically
portrayed by the prophets:
It [the day of the Lord] will be as when a man runs from
a lion, and a bear meets him, or turns into a house and
leans his hand on the wall, and a snake bites him.
Amos 5:19 NEB
They will flee…from dread of the Lord and the splendor
of his majesty, when he rises to shake the earth [the
stagnant hearts; see Volumes IV and V]. Isaiah 2:21 NIV
The thing that must come hath come suddenly; behold
how they flee from it! 14 Bahá’u’lláh
Flee ye the One Who hath sacrificed His life that ye may
be quickened? 15 Bahá’u’lláh

21138 I Shall Come Again

22The receiver of the message has been told to crown his heart
with courage, yet he fears:
“Say to them that are of a fearful heart, be strong, fear
not: behold, your God will come” (Isa. 35:4). “Be strong,
take courage, and wait for the Lord” (Psa. 27:14 NEB).
The receiver of the message has been told to take advantage
of every opportunity to seek His Lord, to try to find Him
before “the silver cord is cut,” yet he fails to pursue the news:
Give ear and come to me; hear me, that your soul may
live…Seek the Lord while he may be found…
Isaiah 55:3, 6 NIV
Most of us are repelled by complacent people, those who
wear special blinders to conceal their surroundings, who just
mind their own business and do not get excited by any news
—whether it concerns pollution, poverty, or prejudice—who
starve for truth yet refuse to admit hunger, who live in dire
need of the spirit yet conceal their poverty with the mask of
self-satisfaction, who stand aloof from the world and respond
to a warm invitation as coldly as a snow-capped mountain.
In the next passage, Jesus shows His displeasure with them.
He appeals to His dearly beloved but unconcerned followers,
who stand unmoved by the news of His return. His message
portrays the divine discipline, uttered in the harshest yet
kindest words:
I know your deeds, that you are neither cold nor hot. I
wish you were either one or the other!…you are lukewarm
…You say, ‘I am rich; I have acquired wealth and do not
need a thing.’ But you do not realize that you are…poor,
blind and naked. I counsel you to buy from me gold refined
in the fire, so you can become rich; and white clothes to
wear, so you can cover your shameful nakedness; and
salve to put on your eyes, so you can see.
Those whom I love I rebuke and discipline. So be earnest,
and repent. Here I am! I stand at the door and knock. If

23Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

24anyone hears my voice and opens the door, I will come
in and eat with him, and he with me. To him who over-
comes [the fear of opening the door], I will give the right
to sit with me on my throne… Revelation 3:15-21 NIV

25The invitation and the counsel found in the preceding passage
(to open one’s heart to the news of the coming of the Master)
have been repeated once again in our time:
Say: We, in truth, have opened unto you the gates of the
Kingdom. Will ye bar the door of your houses in My
face?16 Bahá’u’lláh

26If ye choose to follow Me, I will make you heirs of My
Kingdom…17 Bahá’u’lláh

27Prophecies declare that among the masses of complacent and
stressed people, many remain alert and curious; they hunger
for truth, but they too are hampered. They do not know
where to turn. Who can help them?
The time is coming, says the Lord God, when…Men shall
stagger from north to south, they shall range from east to
west, seeking the word of the Lord, but they shall not find
it. Amos 8:11-12 NEB

28What “oppression” is more grievous than that a soul seek-
ing the truth, and wishing to attain unto the knowledge of
God, should know not where to go for it and from whom
to seek it? For opinions have sorely differed, and the ways
unto the attainment of God have multiplied.18 Bahá’u’lláh
Dr. John White in Re-entry (published by Billy Graham
Evangelic Association, with a foreword by Dr. Graham)
devotes an entire chapter, “The Church and the Coming
Christ” to the decline of faith and the confusion of a divided
church in our time. As evidence, the author offers numerous
quotations from a wide range of Christian leaders and writers.
These are two brief examples from that chapter:

29140 I Shall Come Again

30H. G. Wells, the historian [declared] “The world is now a
very tragic and anxious world…more people are asking
today (than ever before) and asking with a new intensity,
‘What must I do to be saved?’ The trouble with the Chris-
tian churches is that they give a confused, unconvincing
and unsatisfying answer.” 19 …Visser’t Hooft…the Secretary-
General of the World Council of Churches, characterizes
the Church today: “confusion reigns supreme—politically,
theologically, socially.”
Dr. White states that One of the most eloquent, if tragic
passages in the entire New Testament is where Jude forecasts
the state of the people in the last days.21 Here is part of that
prophecy as quoted in Re-entry:
“They are like clouds driven up by the wind…They are
like stars which follow no orbit, and their proper place
is…the regions beyond the light” (Jude 12, 13, Phillips
Version).22
According to a widely distributed Christian magazine:
Today, Christianity is fragmented more than any other
major religion. Already 25,000 different churches, denomi-
nations, sects and cults divide Christianity, and the World
Christian Encyclopedia suggests that number is growing
by five every week [260 a year]!…If Jesus were to return
to earth today, where would he go to worship?…How can
this tangle of ideas represent him?23
In a Christian publication called What Is the True Gospel?
appears this statement:
Why should there be such perplexity—such confusion—
in every phase of life today? It should be the function of
religion to point the way. Yet here, too, we find only
confusion of tongues—hundreds of religious denomina-
tions and sects, in a babylon of disagreement.24
This prophecy too confirms the prevailing confusion in
our time:

31Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

32…the day God visits you. Now is the time of their con-
fusion. Micah 7:4 NIV

• • •
Chapter 41

The Great Tribulation To Examine Further The Mental And Spiritual States Of The

1people of our time, let us take a frequently quoted prophecy
on this topic and view it in the light of both the Bahá’í
teachings and the various schools of thought supported by
Christian scholars. Let us take Jesus’ prediction that at His
return there will be great tribulation:
For then shall be great tribulation, such as was not since
the beginning of the world to this time, no, nor ever shall
be. Matthew 24:21
Daniel predicts the same ominous occurrence:
There will be a time of distress such as has not happened
from the beginning of nations until then. Daniel 12:1 NIV
If we look at specifics we find many variations of views, but
in principle, as theologians have discovered, we have four
schools of thought, each of them defended by hundreds of
competent scholars. This is how, according to a Christian
source, the four schools interpret “tribulation” and a list of
the verses they use to support their views:
Praeterist: the tribulation was centered at the fall of
Jerusalem in A. D. 70 (Luke 21:20-24).
Historicist: the tribulation represents the whole gospel age
(John 16:33; 1 Tim. 3:12).
Futurist: the tribulation will be a short time of intensive
trouble at the end of the age (Rev. 7:14; 13:5).
Idealist: there will always be tribulation and trouble for
the people of God, although it will vary in intensity from
time to time and from place to place (John 16:33; 2 Tim.
3:12; Rev. 1:9).25

2142 I Shall Come Again

3In the Bahá’í view “tribulation”—also translated as “distress”
(NIV), “misery ” ( ME ), “trouble” (EB), and “affliction and
oppression” (AB)—is already in progress and climbing. It
points to the sufferings and pangs of hunger that the people
of this age are enduring because of spiritual starvation. It
means the stress and anguish of being deprived of divine
guidance, of the joy and peace that come from knowing and
loving God. Its distress calls can be heard everywhere. Its
presence can be seen in the lives of people of all ages:
• In the widespread child abuse
• In the alienation of the youth
• In the crisis of the middle aged
• In the abuse and despair of the aged
Christian leaders often mourn the terrible distress and decline
of the people of our time. Dr. Billy Graham in preface to his
book Till Armageddon writes:
The whole world is sighing and suffering on a scale perhaps
not known in human history: the refugees, the starving,
the “new slaves,” the psychological woes, the emotional
turmoils, the broken marriages, the rebellious children, the
terrorism, the hostages, the wars, and a thousand other
troubles which beset every country in the world. There are
no people anywhere that are immune. The rich and famous
suffer as well as the poor and obscure. As the late actor
Peter Sellers said, “Behind the mask of all [of] us clowns
is sadness and broken hearts.” It seems that the human
race may well be heading toward the climax of the tears,
hurts, and wounds of the centuries—Armageddon!
Perhaps the best way to know the troubles and tribulations
of our time is to look at some statistics about the state of the
“mental” or psychological health of the world. As we shall
see later in this chapter, the Hebrew prophets, Christ, and
Bahá’u’lláh all predicted the diseased state of our world with
flawless accuracy.

4Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

5My purpose in presenting the distressing news is not to
dwell on the negative but rather to inform and awaken. The
first step to change is awareness. Few people realize the scale
of the prevalence of pain and suffering in our time. Perhaps
awareness will stir action. Furthermore, the information is
given here in the light of God’s judgment. What matters is
not the facts but the meaning behind the facts, and the
understanding that may come from the facts.
We can all tolerate so much bad news. When we pass the
threshold of our tolerance, we tune out. That may be good
for us but not for the world. We must be aware of the pain
and suffering of all members of the human race. We must try
to see everything as God would. Furthermore, hearing bad
news is futile only in the absence of hope. This book brings
the news of the greatest hope for humanity since the dawn
of history. The bad news must be judged only with an eye
on the good news.
Like cold water to a weary soul is good news from a dis-
tant land. Proverbs 25:25 NIV
The test of first-rate intelligence is the ability to hold two
opposed ideas in mind at the same time and still retain the
ability to function. One should, for example, be able to
see that things are hopeless and yet be determined to make
them better. F. Scott Fitzgerald
What is the state of mental and spiritual health of nations?
A poll taken in June 1994 by Newsweek shows that three-
fourths of Americans believe the United States is in moral
and spiritual decline.
The following are some figures mostly from the United
States, a country for which statistics are available. They
probably represent the state of mental and spiritual health
of all nations, except the least developed. They indicate that
the troubles and tribulations of our age—especially in the last
few decades—have been on the rise. (Unless indicated, the
data is from U.S. population studies.)

6144 I Shall Come Again

7• Psychiatric disorders are more prevalent today than ever
before. Percentage of the population afflicted with these
disorders at any given time: depression 17%; alcoholism
14%; social anxiety disorder 13%; simple phobia 11%;
drug dependence 8%.
• According to National Center for Health Statistics, in a
thirty-year period, the number of U. S. teenagers who
attempted suicide increased three to five times. Their
number has now climbed to about 500,000 a year.
• A Who's Who survey shows that one-third of outstanding
students have considered suicide to solve their problems.
• A recent survey indicates that, “More than 50% of young
adults between the ages of 16 and 24 say they have
thought about killing themselves.”
• In a four-year period, the number of adolescents admitted
to private psychiatric hospitals increased about 350 percent.
• In a three-year period, alcohol use among high-school
seniors increased 90 percent.
• In 1996, Columbia University reported that young women
are using illegal drugs 15 times more often than their
mothers did.
• In Canada suicide among all age groups doubled in
years. Among those 20 to 24 years, it increased threefold.
Among those aged 15 to 19, it increased fourfold.
• In the United States, suicide is the second highest cause
of death among college students.
• ABC television network recently reported that, for the first
time in the United States, more people aged 15 to 19 are
being killed by guns than by all other causes combined.
The number of all those killed by guns in the United States
stands at about 30,000 a year.

8Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

9• Fifty percent of high-school graduates have tried some
narcotic drugs. There has been 106 percent increase in
substance abuse among teenagers since 1992.
• Teenage pregnancy has increased more than 600 percent
in the last 40 years.
• Clinical depression in the United States costs 44 billion
dollars a year.
• Eighty-two percent of young people have sexual relations
before they marry.
• AIDS is spreading rapidly throughout the planet. It has
infected 22 million people, and is now spreading at the
rate of one victim every second. In Africa, every day
5,500 funerals are held for AIDS victims. One and a half
million people died from AIDS in one year. The cost of
treating those infected with HIV in the United States is
about $20,000 per victim.
• Violence is accepted as a way of life. In a recent study,
8 percent of high school students stated that if someone
insulted them, they had the right to kill him! Harris polls
indicate that 9 percent of school children have fired a gun
at someone, and 11 percent have been fired at. Three-
fourths of them feared being killed by a gun.
• President Clinton recently stated that 40 years ago homi-
cide was not even among the first ten causes of death for
young people. Today it is the second highest cause of
death for those between 15 and 25 years of age.
• Violence has also entered the workplace. Recently NBC
reported that one-fourth of employees report being harassed
or attacked, one-sixth of them with lethal weapons.
• Alcohol abuse kills 500 Americans every day. The cost
of drinking (due to treatment and loss of productivity)
stands at over $100 billion a year.
• Drunk driving is the number one killer of teenagers.

10146 I Shall Come Again

11• A recent study shows that, in the United States, Canada,
and many European countries, the rich have been getting
richer and the poor poorer.
• UNICEF reports that every hour 940 children die from five
infectious but preventable diseases.
• In recent years, the U.S. prison population has more than
doubled. For certain crimes, criminals are set free almost
as soon as they are arrested. Many prisons are already
overpopulated.
• Violent crimes in the United States since 1960 have increased
many times faster than the population. “Shortly after the
gulf conflict ended, [President Bush] made this sobering
observation at an anti-crime conference at the Justice
Department: ‘During the first three days of the ground
offensive, more Americans were killed in some American
cities than at the entire Kuwaiti front…One of our brave
National Guardsmen may have actually been safer in the
midst of the largest armored offensive in history than he
would have been on the streets of his own hometown.’”
Statistics from the FBI indicate that, in a given year, about
one in every 16 Americans is the victim of a violent crime.
• In recent years, unruly behavior or “air rage” among air-
line passengers has tripled. The news media reported that
a group of scientists representing various disciplines plan
to meet once a year for three years to study “the rising
tide of meanness and incivility” in the United States.
• Money spent on illegal drugs has reached an estimated
billion dollars per year, or about 136 million dollars a day.
In the United States 12 million people use narcotic drugs.
• Every 20 seconds a car is stolen. Some of the thieves are
young children. The police are so busy, they do not take
car theft seriously.
• White-collar crime is at an all-time high. Government
officials are preoccupied with so many problems and

12Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

13pressures, they don’t have the will or the power to prevent
white-collar crimes. They often go on unnoticed and un-
punished. American taxpayers lost about $200 billion in
the Savings and Loan scandal. Never before has a scandal
of such magnitude been discovered.
• Income not reported to the IRS is estimated at $175 billion.
• The total cost of fraud in the repair business is beyond
estimation. Experts maintain that 50 percent of repair bills
are fraudulent.
• Perhaps the most painful fraud is in the health services,
which, because of their huge cost—over one trillion a
year—have been investigated more than any other. In the
United States, the cost of fraud, overcharging, unnecessary
surgery, unnecessary services and tests by the health
profession is estimated at over $150 billion a year. This
is about two and a half times the cost of the Gulf War,
which was $61 billion.
Who, then, can people trust? What goes on in corpora-
tions, repair businesses, medical services, and many other
professions and institutions is not unique. It simply
reflects the value system of a world that has lost its
spiritual purpose. What would happen if these billions of
dollars were used year after year for the prevention of
disease, for daycare centers and education, for a better
quality of life for all people?
• Some countries carry enormous debts. The United States
borrows about $240 billion a year to pay the interest on
its debt, which is now over $5,500 billion ($5.5 trillion).
How much is five trillion? If converted into one dollar
bills and placed in a straight line, the line would extend
over five times the distance between the earth and the sun!
• In the last three decades the divorce rate has tripled. About
50 percent of children must cope with the separation of
their parents. Court battles for custody and alimony take

14148 I Shall Come Again

15a terrible toll on parents and children alike. Today's
newlyweds are likely to stay married for only 7.2 years.
• The traditional family is in grave danger. “More and more
American men and women are choosing to just live to-
gether instead of marrying. The number of cohabiting
couples increased by 740 percent between 1970 and
1989—with an 88 percent rise between 1987 and 1989
alone.” One authority estimated that about 40 percent of
first-born children are born out of wedlock. In a ten-year
period, the birth rate among unwed mothers increased
percent.
• According to one report, on average, parents hold positive
conversations with their children for about 12 minutes a
week.
• In the United States, every year 350,000 children are
abducted by their parents.
• In recent years rape has become the fastest growing
crime. According to a television documentary, one out of
every five women will eventually be raped. A recent study
of 4,000 women indicates that one out of eight has been
raped, and 25 percent of rapes occurred when the victim
was 11 or younger. Another study indicates that “One out
of every four American women is sexually abused before
she reaches 18. Girls are twice as likely to be sexually
abused as boys. Family members—fathers, stepfathers,
uncles, grandfathers, and brothers—are the most frequent
abusers of children under the age of 11.”
• Other kinds of abuse have also continued to increase. In
a ten-year period, the number of neglected and abused
children has doubled. Every year about 2,000 children die
from abuse and inflicted injuries. The number of both
abused and neglected children is about 10 million.
• Every year, about 2.5 million elderly people are abused.
• In Canada, violence against women has doubled in the last
few years.

16Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

17• Even unborn babies have not escaped the pains and
pressures of this age. Some of them are born addicted
(100,000 a year in U.S.) and about 50 million are aborted
every year around the globe. If we put these babies in a
line (one foot for each baby), they would stretch for 9,470
miles, nearly two and a half times the radius of the earth!
How has the school environment changed in the last
years? The following estimates seem quite reasonable:
Teachers’ Greatest Teachers’ Greatest
Concerns in 1940 Concerns Today
1. Talking out of turn 1. Drug abuse
2. Chewing gum 2. Alcohol abuse
3. Making noise 3. Pregnancy
4. Running in the halls 4. Suicide
5. Getting out of line
5. Rape
6. Wearing improper clothing
7. Not putting waste paper in 6. Robbery
basket
A disgruntled schoolteacher handed in her resignation with
the following comment: “In our public schools today, the
teachers are afraid of the principals, the principals are afraid
of the superintendents, the superintendents are afraid of the
board, the board members are afraid of the parents, the
parents are afraid of the children, and the children are afraid
of nobody.”
Perhaps the groups touched most by the onrush of the troubles
and tribulations of our time are our youth and children.
Psychiatrist Mary Giffin, author of A Cry for Help, writes:
The median age of depressed patients has been dropping
steadily. Today, more than half the patients in U.S. mental
institutions are under twenty-one…one in five children may
be suffering from symptoms of depression, outstripping
that for the middle-aged and exceeded only by the rate of
depression among the elderly.

18150 I Shall Come Again

19Among depressed children, suicidal wishes are extremely
common…among approximately 100 children referred for
outpatient treatment to a New York hospital, 33 percent
had threatened or attempted suicide. (Studies in the 1960s
indicated that no more than 10 percent…showed suicidal
behavior.)27
Long ago Bahá’u’lláh predicted the disease-stricken state of
our world:
Witness how the world is being afflicted with a fresh
calamity every day. Its tribulation is continually deepening
…Its sickness is approaching the stage of utter hopeless-
ness, inasmuch as the true Physician is debarred from
administering the remedy, whilst unskilled practitioners are
regarded with favor, and are accorded full freedom to act.28
What about the state of the physical health of the world? In
spite of the marvels of science and technology and the vast
resources devoted to maintaining health and fitness, a com-
bination of both mental and physical causes is contributing
to widespread disease and suffering. Stress, loneliness, despair,
fear, and a sense of emptiness and futility, on the one hand,
and adverse effects from a polluted environment, dependence
on alcohol, tobacco, and drugs of all kinds (both legal and
illegal), combined with a sedentary life, the spread of sexually
transmitted diseases (the most common infectious diseases
next to colds and flu), the consumption of unwholesome
foods (often to satisfy spiritual and emotional hunger), and
disregard for preventive medicine are all taking their terrible
toll, are all adding to the weight of suffering borne by this
generation.
Even the earth, which kept her health and vitality for eons,
is now diseased and suffering:
According to Worldwatch Institute, about 40 trillion pounds
[80 pounds per person] of waste around the globe make
their way into the sea each year.29

20Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

21According to Matthew Fox:
In the ordinary course of events one species disappears
about every two thousand years. Currently, however,
species are disappearing at the rate of one every twenty-
five minutes. At this rate humankind will eliminate ten
percent of the remaining species (one million of the re-
maining earth creatures) in the next ten years. If current
rates of destruction continue, within the next one hundred
years there will be no living species left on this planet—
including humankind, since we are totally interdependent
with all these other creatures.30
Why has the land become a dead land…? It is because
they forsook my law… Jeremiah 9:12 NEB
As our life span has increased, so has suffering from sick-
ness. Some authorities maintain that the proportion of people
afflicted with chronic diseases (arthritis, allergy, asthma,
AIDS, Alzheimer’s, alcoholism, diabetes, digestive problems,
irregular heart beats, backache, headache, herpes, fatigue,
cancer, and countless others) has increased substantially.
What can we expect when we pollute our environment, eat
processed foods, overfeed our bodies, and then keep them
unfit and under stress? What can we expect when 65 percent
of the calories we consume comes from fat and sugar?
Let us look at more evidence pertaining to other dimensions
of modern life to see if the citizens of our ancient planet have
ever before witnessed troubles and tribulations on the scale
endured by the people of this age:
• In the 20th century, more people have been killed in wars
than in all wars since the dawn of recorded history, a
period covering about 6,000 years.
• Similarly, in this century, more people have been killed by
their own government than in all wars in past centuries.
According to an editorial in The New York Times, “In no
previous age have people shown so great an aptitude, and

22152 I Shall Come Again

23appetite, for killing millions of other people for reasons of
race, religion or class.”
• Every 22 minutes someone is maimed or killed by land
mines—26,000 a year.
• In the United States alone about 100,000 people are
killed by accident every year. Every day 1,500 people are
seriously injured or disabled. The sufferings of survivors
who lose their loved ones as well as the pain and anguish
borne by millions among the injured are incalculable. One
in every six persons suffers from disability. Never before
have so many people succumbed to accidental death and
injuries as in our time.
In their textbook, Abnormal Psychology And Modern Life,
Drs. R. Carson, J. Butcher, and J. Coleman state:
On every side we see anxious, unhappy people who miss
the realization of their potential because they cannot find
adequate solutions or answers to problems that seem
beyond them. The hassles of modern life are reflected in
the massive amounts of tranquilizing chemicals—alcohol
or otherwise, prescription and nonprescription—we as a
society consume…
Despite the stressful nature of modern life, most of us
seem to muddle through, although probably not without
at least some psychological scars…Mental impairments of
one sort or another now afflict more people than all
physical health problems combined…
What will be the outcome of this jarring new reality? We
do not pretend to know the answer in any comprehensive
way, but prospects for an increasing rate of adaptational
failure, particularly in the psychological domain, seem
compelling…How shall we cope [emphasis added]?
How awful that day will be! None will be like it.
Jeremiah 30:7 NIV

24Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

25And there shall be a time of trouble, straitness [difficulty,
pressure, perplexity, and] distress, such as never was since
there was a nation until that time. Daniel 12:1 AB

26Oliver Holmes said, “I find the greatest thing in this world
not so much in where we stand, as in what directions we are
moving.” Unless the divine remedy is accepted and applied,
nothing indicates that the direction toward which the human
race is moving will change. On the contrary, the prevailing
trends will continue to intensify. This statement from a Chris-
tian publication expresses eloquently not only the mental and
spiritual state of our time but also the need for freedom from
the illusion of well-being as well as hopelessness:
Things are not as they seem. The thought keeps coming
around. Things are not as they seem…not as they seem.
Behind the faces, front doors, and casual relationships of
our neighborhoods, workplaces, and churches is an under-
world of personal pain and embarrassment. Untold stories
of alcoholism, anger, anxiety, addiction, abortion, affairs,
alienation, and abuse are epidemic. Under the surface we
are fast becoming a people like those of Isaiah’s day:
beaten and bruised in heart, mind, and body, from the top
of our heads to the bottom of our feet (Isa. 1:1-6)…The
Bible gives us every reason to believe that, yes, it’s true:
Things are not as they seem. Things are only as God says
they are. Father, don’t let us succumb either to the
illusion of well-being or to the illusion of hopelessness
[emphasis added].32
The scriptural and scientific evidence presented on the state
of the world indicates that the people of this age are not
enjoying the peace of mind and the spiritual pleasures and
blessings that God has designated for them. Their hearts do
not rejoice in the heavenly hope; their souls do not exult and
glory in God’s great blessings and bounties, but suffer and
mourn in quiet desperation:

27154 I Shall Come Again

28…all the nations of the earth will mourn.
Matthew 24:30 NIV
We can well perceive how the whole human race is
encompassed with great, with incalculable afflictions. We
see it languishing on its bed of sickness, sore-tried and
disillusioned.33 Bahá’u’lláh

29In our age (since the beginning of 19th century), two major
changes have been taking place side by side.
• The light of faith that bestowed eternal hope and gave
people the strength and enlightenment to deal with stress
and adversity has been steadily growing dimmer.
• Many of the old values, ties, and loyalties that created
consistency and certainty in the life of the individual and
made him an integral part of his family and community
have also been steadily waning and weakening.
Social scientists believe that what ails the people of our time
is the loss of a support system. What gave the individual
security and strength in the past has itself become a source
of stress and distress. Statistics show that most of the violence
against people comes from someone they know: a parent, a
spouse, a son or daughter, a neighbor, or a friend. An indi-
vidual is far more likely to be killed or abused by a friend
or family member than by a stranger. (The ratio for murder
is three to one.) Prophecies predicted this trend:
The godly have been swept from the land…the ruler de-
mands gifts, the judge accepts bribes…the day God visits
you…Do not trust a neighbor; put no confidence in a
friend. Even with her who lies in your embrace be careful
of your words. For a son dishonors his father, a daughter
rises up against her mother, a daughter-in-law against her
mother-in-law—a man’s enemies are the members of his
own household. But as for me, I watch in hope for the
Lord, I wait for God my Savior… Micah 7:2-7 NIV

30Chapter 6: The Great and Terrible Day of the Lord

31True, material comforts have given many people some peace
of mind, but this advantage is counteracted by still another
change: the decline in concern for basic physical needs has
led to a sharpened awareness of spiritual needs. The end
result of the titanic changes of our time has been a steady
rise in stress, and a steady decline in strength. The disease
carrying invaders have been allowed to advance, while the
immune system, which must protect people, has been left to
disintegrate and break down.
In His interpretation of “tribulation,” Bahá’u’lláh singles out
one aspect of the stressful life of the modern age. Suppose a
person decides to find a path to God. What confusion must
he face! How bewildered will he become! How can he tell
which path to pursue?
Clinging unto idle fancy, they [the interpreters of the word
of God] have strayed far from…divine knowledge…Though
they recognize in their hearts the Law of God to be one
and the same, yet from every direction they issue a new
command, and in every season proclaim a fresh decree…
What “oppression” [tribulation] is greater than that which
hath been recounted? What “oppression” is more grievous
than that a soul seeking the truth, and wishing to attain
unto the knowledge of God, should know not where to go
for it and from whom to seek it? For opinions have sorely
differed, and the ways unto the attainment of God have
multiplied. This “oppression” is the essential feature [at
the dawning] of every Revelation. Unless it cometh to
pass, the Sun of Truth will not be made manifest.34
The following quotations, one a prophecy, the other a
statement from a psychology textbook, confirm Bahá’u’lláh’s
assessment:
Men wander about like sheep in distress for lack of a
shepherd. My anger is turned against the shepherds…
Zechariah 10:2-3 NEB

32156 I Shall Come Again

33Human beings need to believe, even passionately, in things
abstract, moral, and “spiritual.” But there are so many
divergent “moralities” from which to choose today that the
choice itself can be a source of confusion.35

• • •
Chapter 42

Abnormal Psychology And Modern Life These Verses Further Confirm The Cloudy Confusion The People Of Our Time Must Face:

1…the day God visits…is the time of their confusion (Micah
7:4 NIV). It will be a unique day, without daytime or night-
time—a day known to the Lord (Zechariah 14:7 NIV).
My purpose in showing the “great tribulation” of our time is
not to dwell in darkness. Distressing news serves no purpose
unless it is presented in the light of “good news,” unless it is
linked to hope and action. Seeing the stark contrast between
the light and the darkness—the dire despair of humanity and
the bright and beautiful hand of Heaven—will provide the
most potent motivation for action. We stand accountable not
only for the avoidable pain and sufferings we endure, but
also for much of what others have to bear. Only by offering
to God an open and humble heart can we become an instrument
in His hand and remain loyal to His trust and our responsibility.

• • •
Chapter 43

To Summarize The Day Of The Lord And The Lord Himself Come Not Only As

1clouds and smoke (see Volume IV), and the people are con-
fused and intoxicated. The spirits that keep them intoxicated
are these:
• The wonders of modern science and technology
• Materialism
• The spread of theological theories, especially about the

2• Severe stress and distress (tribulation) that result from lack
of spiritual guidance
These four elements together create a sense of unawareness,
on the one hand, and self-satisfaction and self-conceit, on the
other. This is what intoxication means.
A veneer of self-satisfaction, complacency, apathy, and denial
prevents many from sensing the global pain and suffering
endured by the people of our time, from seeing the reality
and the urgent need for action. They must arise and raise
their voices in prayer and supplication, in seeking help from
the Provider:
Blessed are they that mourn: for they shall be comforted.
Christ (Matthew 5:4)
They mounted up to the heavens and went down to the
depths; in their peril their courage melted away. They
reeled and staggered like drunken men; they were at their
wits’ end. Then they cried out to the Lord in their trouble,
and he brought them out of their distress. He stilled the
storm to a whisper; the waves of the sea were hushed.
They were glad when it grew calm, and he guided them
to their desired haven. Let them give thanks to the Lord
for his unfailing love and his wonderful deeds for men.
Let them exalt him in the assembly of the people and
praise him in the council of the elders.
Psalms 107:26-32 NIV
When Jesus cried for Jerusalem, He could clearly see the
dark destiny of the people of Israel. He was aware and awake;
the Jews were in a state of spiritual drunkenness. Are there
not similarities between the state of Israel then and the state
of the world now?
As he approached Jerusalem and saw the city, he wept
over it and said, “If you, even you, had only known on
this day what would bring you peace—but now it is hidden

3enemies will…dash you to the ground…because you did
not recognize the time of God’s coming to you.
Christ (Luke 19:41-44 NIV)
God’s judgment of the people of the end-time is quite un-
favorable. People can always conceal their true identity from
themselves and others but not from God. At the end of the
age, our Creator declares “knowledge shall be increased”
(Dan. 12:4), but wisdom will decrease: “The wisdom of their
wise men shall perish ” (Isa. 29:14). Information shall
multiply but faithfulness will diminish: “many will turn away
from the faith” (Matt. 24:10 NIV). Multitudes go to school to
learn yet fail “to acknowledge the truth” ( II Tim. 3:2-8
NIV). What appeals to people most is self-love or pursuit of
pleasure (II Tim. 3:2-6) with an appearance of faithfulness.
And so they preserve and present “a form of godliness” (II
Tim. 3:5) to themselves and others.
The state of their mind, the Predictor declares, follows the
state of their soul. Their understanding of the Word of God
consists mostly of “a precept of men, learnt by rote,” (Isa.
29:13 NEB), of man-made ideas and illusions retained without
insight and awareness. In the midst of all this spiritual and
mental confusion, they need to decipher the true meaning of
God’s most mysterious words: prophecies. But how can they?
Are they humble enough to accept God’s harsh judgment
against them, set aside their own personal thoughts and
theories, and listen to the revealer of all mysteries?
What are our tendencies and weaknesses? How do our
choices and thoughts differ from God’s? These are explored

• • •
Chapter 44

You Judge By Worldly Standards

1John 8:15 NEB

2God’s Way Versus
the Human Way

3W hy is there such a disparity between people’s expectations
and reality, between what they want and what God
gives them? Human expectations are activated mainly by two
forces: the desire for a visible display of power and glory,
and the wish for instant rewards and remedies. Most people
like a positive message, especially if nothing is demanded of
them. Literal interpretation of prophecies accomplishes this
very purpose. This is the kind of message almost everyone
would like to hear:

4160 I Shall Come Again

5Think about that day when the Lord Jesus Christ breaks
through the eastern sky. Think about it over and over. Let
it give you something to live for. Could anything be more
exciting to contemplate?
Seeing first a small black cloud. Watching it move nearer
and nearer till it becomes white and glorious. A cloud like
none you’ve ever seen before—a cloud of angels, uncounted
angels. Hearing a sound like none you’ve ever heard
before—the sound of a trumpet echoing round the world.
Then a voice like none you’ve heard before. It’s the voice
of our Lord calling the dead to life.
The earth quivers. Tombs burst open. Angels everywhere
carry little children to their parents’ eager arms. Loved ones
long separated by death reunite with shouts of joy, never
to part again! And then, together with those resurrected
ones, we who have waited through earth’s long night are
caught up into that angel starship for the trip to our
heavenly home.1
Imagine the feeling! Defying gravity, we soar through the
sky. Without a spacesuit we sail through the stars up to
our heavenly home
Human imagination is stirred and excited by the images of
the supernatural. A Christian writer confirms this:
A person can really get excited about seven-headed
beasts, mysterious seals, a great red dragon, four ghastly
horsemen, vast armies and cosmic destruction. Such
dazzling and sensational images cannot help but arouse
interest and wonder, especially when in connection with
the end of the world.3
Those who proclaim the message of the coming of the Master
deserve the highest praise (Matt. 24:45-47), for they instill
faith, peace, and hope. What they fail to do is to transform
this hope from a state of complacency into alertness, into a
continuous searching for the Master. This prophecy was
undoubtedly spoken concerning the peoples of our time:

6Chapter 7: You Judge By Worldly Standards

7For the time will come when men will not put up with
sound doctrine. Instead, to suit their own desires, they will
gather around them a great number of teachers to say
what their itching ears want to hear. II Timothy 4:3 NIV
People love dramatic spectacles and instant transformation,
but God has a different plan and purpose for His creation.
He sees things differently:
…how can My way accord with thine? 4 Bahá’u’lláh
The Lord does not see as man sees; men judge by appear-
ances but the Lord judges by the heart. I Samuel 16:7 NEB
You judge by worldly standards. Christ ( John 8:15 NEB)
…man can never hope to attain unto the knowledge of the
All-Glorious…unless and until he ceases to regard the
words and deeds of mortal men as a standard for the true
understanding and recognition of God and His Prophets.5
Bahá’u’lláh
Say: O leaders of religion! Weigh not the Book of God
with such standards and sciences as are current amongst
you, for the Book itself is the unerring Balance established
amongst men. In this most perfect Balance whatsoever
the peoples and kindreds of the earth possess must be
weighed, while the measure of its weight should be tested
according to its own standard, did ye but know it.6
Bahá’u’lláh
…human standard of judgment is faulty, finite.

8‘Abdu’l-Bahá
The Spirit gives life; the flesh counts for nothing. The
words I have spoken to you are spirit and they are life.
Christ (John 6:63 NIV)
What is highly valued among men is detestable in God’s
sight. Christ (Luke 16:15 NIV)
Has human nature changed since those noble words were
spoken? History attests that human judgment has always been

9162 I Shall Come Again

10at variance with the divine. Jesus predicted that at the time
of His return, everything will be the same as it was in the
days of Noah. This indicates that the way people think and
act will not have changed at all.
God conceals His great power and glory in poverty, suffering,
and meekness:
…the kingdom of heaven is like unto treasure hid in a
field… Christ (Matthew 13:44)
Our Creator’s plan and purpose is that we should search for
truth by exercising our freedom of choice, and never be over-
whelmed by His transcendent might and majesty. He wants
us to acknowledge His Messengers through our own efforts,
our own love for truth, our own purity and sincerity. His
wish is that we should accept His guidance, and then by
patience and persistence create “a new earth and a new
heaven.” Instead of sending a perfect city from heaven, He
sends a perfect plan. Instant and easy remedies satisfy our
desire, but not His:
Shall a woman bear a child without pains?…Shall a nation
be brought to birth all in a moment? Isaiah 66:7-8 NEB
We must go through many hardships to enter the kingdom
of God… Acts 14:22 NIV
Our Creator has made us in His exalted Image, endowing us
with His own attributes, among them freedom of choice and
creativity. His vision of us is grand and glorious. He wants
us to participate in creating the world of our dream. If we
use His blueprint, the impossible becomes possible, the ideal
becomes real.
…all things are possible to him that believeth.
Christ (Mark 9:23)
Then the Lord…said, ‘Here they are, one people with a
single language…henceforward nothing they have a mind
to do will be beyond their reach.’ Genesis 11:6 NEB

11Chapter 7: You Judge By Worldly Standards

• • •
Chapter 45

Flaming Fire

1Let us examine one more sign linked to the second Advent.
It is predicted that when Jesus returns from heaven, He will
be accompanied not only by power and glory but also by
flaming fire.
…the Lord Jesus shall be revealed from heaven with His
mighty angels, in flaming fire taking vengeance on them
that know not God, and that obey not the gospel…
II Thessalonians 1:7-8
See also Matthew 13:41-42
If we take the “coming from heaven” literally, should we not
also take the “fire” in the prophecy literally? For the sake of
consistency, “fire” must also be taken literally. It appears
unreasonable to take one part (coming from heaven) of the
same prophecy literally, and the other part (fire) symbolically.
Painters through the ages have made majestic drawings of
Jesus descending from heaven with grace and glory, power
and peace. They have usually blended His image with
magnificent clouds touched with the glowing rays of the
sun. But they have as a rule left one element out of the
scene: the flaming fire. The painters must have instinctively
recognized that being seen with fire does not fit the profile
of a Man who was the very heart of mercy and forgiveness.
They must have sensed that the Exemplar who taught loving
one’s enemies and blessing one’s persecutors (Rom. 12:14),
who said to be perfect one must give his wealth to the poor
(Matt. 19:21), who was so tender that He wept for Jerusalem,
would not return for revenge. They must have known that the
Man, who out of His abiding love for people carried the cross
and crowned it with His body, who gave His own life to give
joy to the world, would not return to take life, to bring pain
and suffering to the distressed masses of humanity.
Which of these acts fits the profile and the supreme station
and mission of a Savior: carrying a torch that burns and
destroys, or one that gives light and life to the world? If a

2164 I Shall Come Again

3child rejects his loving parents, how should they respond to
his rejection? Is the natural consequence of his deed—
separation from his parents—not in itself a suitable and
sufficient punishment for him? God’s ways are different, but
always above—never below—human standards. Indeed our
Creator is our perfect Model whose lead we are asked to
follow:
I have set you an example that you should do as I have
done for you. Christ ( John 13:15 NIV)
Be perfect, therefore, as your heavenly Father is perfect.
Christ (Matthew 5:48 NIV)
God’s standards of treating His children have been and always
will remain changeless. As Dr. Norman Vincent Peale, the
prominent clergyman and author of The Power of Positive
Thinking notes:
Do you believe that the God who gives us such precious
experiences here [on earth] would suddenly become cruel?
Do you believe that God, whose every demonstration here
is life and creation, will suddenly change and make every
demonstration death and destruction? I have never seen
any sign that God is capricious. The orderliness of the
universe belies it. The seasons follow one another in
absolute regularity. The stars come out in the skies nightly
in the same old wonderful pattern. And those that show
only periodically return on the stroke of the minute.8
God’s love for humans always has been and always will be
supreme:
The Lord is…not willing that any should perish, but that
all should come to repentance. II Peter 3:9

4Who needs the divine remedy most?
It is not the healthy that need a doctor, but the sick.
Christ (Matthew 9:13 NEB)

5Chapter 7: You Judge By Worldly Standards

6Did not Jesus in His first advent express more interest in
saving the sinners (Matt. 18:11-12) than the saints who out-
wardly observed the law? The life and teachings of Jesus
testify to His infinite love even for the lowest and meanest
of humans (Luke 15:2-10). Would He not show the same
compassion again? Traditional expectations, based on literal
interpretation of prophecies, have led many Christians to
believe otherwise. Consider these examples from several
Christian leaders and writers:
So everyone who is ready to meet Jesus He will take up
to heaven. Anyone who is unprepared will remain here
dead—and tragically, left on the ground for vultures to
consume. No second chance!…If our unsaved friends and
relatives don’t make their decision before Christ comes,
they can never be saved. As God’s Word puts it, “Behold,
now is the day of salvation!” 2 Corinthians 6:2.9
At the end of the world, instead of the wicked all being
converted, they are to be cast into a furnace of fire, where
there will be wailing
In hell there is never the bliss of annihilation. You’d give
anything for annihilation, but it’s unavailable, only the
conscious continuation of emotional anguish, physical
anguish, relational anguish, and spiritual anguish forever.11
Those who have ignored him [Christ], denied him, pre-
tended but never really repented of their sins, shall be
consumed with everlasting destruction—in flaming fire.12
All of the non-Christians will be cast into the lake of fire.13
We should note that St. Paul’s prophecy (II Thess. 1:7-8)
includes Christians too. Literal interpretation of his prophecy
requires that any Christian who does not practice his beliefs,
who “does not obey the Gospel,” must also perish.
Both the principle of “no mercy, forgiveness, and repentance”
and the idea of “harsh punishment by fire” are the conse-
quences of a strong belief in the literal descent of Jesus from

7166 I Shall Come Again

8heaven. Those who deny any expression of mercy or forgive-
ness by Jesus at His second coming do so on this ground: if
people saw their Savior coming from the sky with His mighty
angels, they would all be moved to repentance. Everyone who
saw would wish to escape the fire. In that case there would
be no separation between the faithful and the unfaithful.
Good and bad would join the Lord. This would obviously
be unfair. Further, if people believed that an opportunity
for repentance would be offered to them, they would have
no incentive for living a good life before Christ’s coming.
Thus, the reasoning goes, at the very instant of the Savior’s
appearance on the clouds, every opportunity for repentance
or restoration must be terminated. As C. S. Lewis notes:
It will be too late then to choose your side. There is no
use saying you choose to lie down when it has become
impossible to stand up. That will not be the time for
choosing. It will be the time when we discover which side
we have really chosen whether we realized it before or
not. Now, today, this moment is our chance to choose the
right side. God is holding back to give us that chance. It
will not last forever. We must take it or leave it.14
Aside from being contrary to God’s infinite love for humans,
the literal interpretation of St. Paul’s prophetic words
suffers from other flaws as well. For instance:
• It allows no provision for lack of opportunities. (People
are either taken to heaven or left on earth to die.) This
is contrary to the words of Jesus that from those who
are given more, more shall be demanded (Luke 12:48).
• It does not take into account the degree of the individual’s
age or mental maturity. For instance, will children of “the
unsaved” also perish? And at what age or level of intelli-
gence are people accountable?
• It does not take into account the infinite variation of
character among the believers.

9Chapter 7: You Judge By Worldly Standards

10• It does not take into account the infinite variation of faith
among the believers.
• It offers no reward to those who are not Christian, but still
live by the law of love. Should they receive the same
harsh punishment as those who pursue a life of crime and
cruelty?
We are asked by our Creator to reason (Isa. 1:18). This is
exactly what Paul himself did in proving Jesus to the Jews:
And Paul…reasoned with them out of the scripture…
Acts 17:2
And this is what Peter asked us to do:
Always be prepared to give an answer to everyone who
asks you to give the reason for the hope that you have.
But do this with gentleness and respect, keeping a clear
conscience, so that those who speak maliciously against
your good behavior in Christ may be ashamed of their
slander. I Peter 3:15-16 NIV
If reason is disregarded or denigrated, then tradition, dogma-
tism, and emotionalism will fill the vacuum. Tradition is
perhaps the most powerful force in society. By itself it can
still the voice of reason as readily now as it did at the time
of the first advent.
Literal interpretation of divine language sometimes leads to
conclusions contrary to the very purpose for which God sends
His Messengers and Redeemers. How many have died because
they took these verses literally?
And these signs will accompany those who believe…they
will pick up snakes with their hands; and when they
drink deadly poison, it will not hurt them at all…
Mark 16:17-18 NIV
It is evident snake and poison symbolize negative forces
of the world. True faith safeguards the spiritual life of the
believer from the deadly influence of despair and deviation.

11168 I Shall Come Again

12Thus, to avoid danger—physical or spiritual—we must decode
the divine language, by thinking in heavenly terms.
To understand Jesus’ heavenly thoughts, we must first under-
stand Him. His words give us a glimpse of His identity, of
His boundless love, mercy, and gentleness:
Come to me, all whose work is hard, whose load is heavy;
and I will give you relief. Bend your necks to my yoke,
and learn from me, for I am gentle and humble-hearted;
and your souls will find relief. For my yoke is good to
bear, my load is light. Christ (Matthew 11:28-30 NEB)
Lord, how often am I to forgive my brother?…seventy
times seven. Matthew 18:21 NEB
How blest are those of a gentle spirit…How blest are those
who show mercy…How blest are the peacemakers…
Christ (Matthew 5:5-9 NEB)
Would the One who was “gentle and humble-hearted,” who
blessed the peacemakers, return to bring death to the masses
of humanity and destruction to the world? Would the One who
was the quintessence of love and forgiveness, who rejoiced
in leading one sinner to God, return without mercy? To
understand the divine words, we must elevate our thinking to
higher horizons, as close to God’s as possible. Even Peter, the
distinguished disciple, sometimes had difficulty doing so:
Then Jesus turned and said to Peter…‘You think as men
think, not as God thinks.’ Matthew 16:23 NEB
Was not Jesus’ first advent also engulfed in fire? The Son
of God carried no torch save that of knowledge, love, and
enlightenment. Yet He said:
I have come to set fire to the earth… Luke 12:49 NEB
What did He mean by setting fire? Every new Redeemer by
His teachings disrupts the old and entrenched order as He
uproots false beliefs and traditions. At the time of His com-
ing, people are so consumed with apathy and complacency
that only “fire” can move them and set them free.

13Chapter 7: You Judge By Worldly Standards

14A divine Redeemer always comes with a crucible filled with
flames! He offers people an opportunity to be tested and tried:
For that day dawns in fire, and the fire will test the worth
of each man’s work. I Corinthians 3:13 NEB
The day comes, glowing like a furnace; all the arrogant
and the evildoers shall be chaff, and that day when it
comes shall set them ablaze, says the Lord of Hosts…
Malachi 4:1 NEB
…the hour of trial that is going to come upon the whole
world to test those who live on the earth.
Christ (Revelation 3:10 NIV)
The testing separates the people:
When the Son of Man comes in his glory…he will separate
the people one from another… Christ (Matthew 25:31-32 NIV)
People respond to “the fire” in various ways. A few face the
challenge: they allow its flames to touch their hearts and
souls, to burn the veils of self and separation from God. By
its power they cleanse and transform themselves into a pure
light of love:
It is the warmth that these Luminaries of God generate,
and the undying fires they kindle, which cause the light of
the love of God to burn fiercely in the heart of humanity.15
Bahá’u’lláh
Love setteth a world aflame…16 Bahá’u’lláh

15…when the fire of the love of Jesus consumed the veils
of Jewish limitations…17 Bahá’u’lláh

16Those whose faith is tested and tried in God’s crucible attain
riches beyond measure:
…buy of me gold tried in the fire, that thou mayest be
rich… Christ (Revelation 3:18)

17170 I Shall Come Again

18Taking the heat of the crucible is not easy:
We must go through many hardships to enter the kingdom
of God… Acts 14:22 NIV
See how I tested you, not as silver is tested, but in the
furnace of affliction; there I purified you. Isaiah 48:10 NEB
Not everyone who says to me, ‘Lord, Lord,’ will enter the
kingdom of heaven, but only he who does the will of my
Father… Christ (Matthew 7:21 NIV)
Many, however, avoid the challenge of entering or even
approaching the crucible. They stand beyond its reach,
unaware that they too are afflicted by the heat of its raging
flames. They fail to recognize the burning desire of their
souls to attain Truth and Knowledge—one that continues to
smolder into the realms beyond. This fire usually is called
hell-fire, sometimes the unquenchable fire (Mark 9:44 NEB).
If anyone’s name was not found written in the book of
life, he was thrown into the lake of fire.
Christ (Revelation 20:15 NIV)
No one is spared from the raging flames of tests and trials:
…every one shall be salted with fire… Christ (Mark 9:49)
For our God is a consuming fire. Hebrews 12:29
See also Deuteronomy 4:24
These verses, clear and conclusive, are a token of the mercy
of thy Lord and a source of guidance for all mankind. They
are a light unto those who believe in them and a fire of
afflictive torment for those who turn away and reject
them.18 The Báb
…whatsoever was promised in the sacred Scriptures hath
been fulfilled. This is the Day of great rejoicing. It behoveth
everyone to hasten towards the court of His nearness with
exceeding joy, gladness, exultation and delight and to
deliver himself from the fire of remoteness [from God].19
Bahá’u’lláh

19Chapter 7: You Judge By Worldly Standards

• • •
Chapter 46

The Worm That Does Not Die

1symbol:
…hell…where their worm does not die, and the fire is not
quenched. Mark 9:44-48 NIV
Then I myself [the Lord] will come to gather all nations
and races, and they shall come and see my glory…as the
new heavens and the new earth…shall endure…so shall
your race…and they [the people of the new earth and
heavens] shall come out and see the dead bodies of those
who have rebelled against me; their worm shall not die
nor their fire be quenched… Isaiah 66:18, 22-24 NEB
What does “worm” in the preceding passages imply? A
literal or a symbolic reality? Would the loving Creator expose
human beings for ages and eons to worms that shall not die?
If not, then what does the word symbolize? It symbolizes that
which annoys the spirit, that which pesters the conscience. It
carries messages such as these: How did I get myself into
this predicament? When opportunity knocked, why did I not
open my heart? Why did I not love God more? Why did I
not live a nobler life? Why did I fail to pursue the truth?
Why did I fear to search? Why did I not trust my Lord to
protect me from falling? Why did I not take time to investi-
gate the news of the coming of my Master? Why? Why?
Why? Since the consequences of our deeds are eternal, the
wondering and questioning will likewise be eternal. No
analogy or metaphor could more aptly portray or dramatize
these concerns and questions than the pestering of human
conscience by an ever-living worm.
From the examples provided, it becomes clear that divine
language is different from human language, that traditional
expectations are sometimes erroneous. Therefore we should
not begin our search by insisting that a new Redeemer must
conform entirely to our standards. To understand the

2This is difficult to do, because we are used to earthly speech.
“He who is from the earth…uses earthly speech” ( John 3:31
NEB). History shows that the trap of tradition, designed and
maintained by human standards, is always tempting:
But you have no idea where I come from or where I am
going. You judge by human standards…
Christ ( John 8:14-15 NIV)
You neglect the commandment of God, in order to main-
tain the tradition of men. Christ (Mark 7:8 NEB)
You have a fine way of setting aside the commands of
God in order to observe your own traditions!

• • •
Chapter 47

Aldous Huxley

Comparing The First Century
With The Twentieth
That Men Do Not Learn Very Much From The Lessons Of

1history is the most important of all the lessons in history.

1A great poet has said “We need to live two lives: to acquire
wisdom in the first and apply it in the second.” The way to
turn this fantasy into reality is to study history. For others
have already lived the first life for us.
Remember the days of old, consider the years of many
generations… Deuteronomy 32:7
…Days should speak, and multitude of years should teach
wisdom. Job 32:7
To get a clear view of our spiritual position today, all we need
to do is to look at those who were in our position earlier.
Hal Lindsey, a widely read contemporary Christian author,
has already done some of the work for us. In his book,
The Promise, he has attempted to assess the spiritual state
of the people of Israel at the time of Jesus. Relevant to our

2Chapter 7: You Judge By Worldly Standards

3discussion is his analysis of the reasons the Jews, for the
most part, rejected their Redeemer, the very Object of their
heavenly hope. He asks:
…the question that continues to plague me and so many
other serious students of the Bible is, “Why wasn’t it that
obvious to the Jews of that day that this [Christ] was their
Messiah?” He continually pointed to the things he did and
said and declared that these were fulfillments of their own
prophetic Scriptures. Couldn’t they have checked this out
and seen the truth or error of it?
He calls the response of the people of Israel The Paradox of
Anticipation and Rejection, and then sets out to resolve the
paradox by studying the main causes of the response:
• Dependence on traditions. He asks:
…why didn’t the majority of religious leaders, who
knew the prophecies concerning Messiah, give Jesus
their support and proclaim him to the people as the
Promised One of God?
And then he answers:
One word sums up what has really held sway over
all Judaism since their last Prophet Malachi spoke to
them about 400 years before Christ and that word is
TRADITION! Tradition about God, tradition about His
Laws (Torah), tradition about how to live, eat, work,
worship, marry and even die.22
• Dependence on religious leaders. He states that the inter-
pretation of the Scriptures:
…was left primarily in the hands of the religious leaders.
The sages, teachers, scholars, rabbis, scribes, or what-
ever else they were called at any given time in Jewish
history, were the ultimate authorities on what God
had to say to man.23

4174 I Shall Come Again

5The religious leaders had made such a hedge around
the Word thinking to protect it, and in so doing, made
it so that no one could get near the true Word. Isaiah
predicted that this would happen. He said the time
would come when the people would draw near to God
with their words and honor Him with their lips, but
their hearts would be far from Him and their reverence
would consist of tradition learned by rote (Isaiah
29:13).24
• Total devotion to “minute interpretations of the Law.”
He points out that the Jews placed undue emphasis on the
letter or outward intent of the Word. They showed concern
for “external rituals and outward conformity.”
• Preoccupation with prophecies that pointed to a con-
quering King, and disregard for those that implied “a
suffering Servant.” He states that the people of Israel did
not understand that:
First, Messiah would have to deal with the root of men’s
problems, a nature and a heart of rebellion and sin, and
then he could set up a Kingdom where all men would
be prepared to live at peace with themselves, their
families and their neighbors. But until the first was
accomplished, the second could only be a dream, never
a reality.25
If Mr. Lindsey’s analysis is accurate, then it seems history
is repeating itself in our time with precision. Today, as in
the past:
• Most people still follow tradition, regarding it as the
authority. Only a few search independently for Truth.
• Much emphasis is still being placed on “external rituals
and outward conformity.” The division of religions into
many denominations is an evidence of this.
• Most people still prefer to leave the interpretation of the
Word to their religious leaders.

6Chapter 7: You Judge By Worldly Standards

7• Prophecies that point to the Redeemer of our age as a
suffering Servant (“first He must suffer” ) and to His
coming in an ordinary or undramatic way (“like a thief
in the night”), are given little if any attention. Yet frequent
reference is made to an all-powerful Savior who upon His
arrival transforms the world instantly.
William Miller, the leader of the Advent Movement in the
West, wrote:
The Jews were looking for a temporal king and kingdom.
And are not we looking for a temporal millennium—one
in which the Christians will have the rule of the world? Let
us see to it that we do not stumble at the same stumbling-
stone; possibly we may have carnal notions as well as
they. Therefore, let us inquire.26
He states that the people of Israel “claimed all the learning,
all the wisdom, and all the piety of that day” 27 yet could not
“discern the signs of the times.” 28 Why?
Even Jesus’ disciples, who were the wisest and most en-
lightened people of their time, could not face the reality of
receiving a suffering Savior. Despite their Master’s repeated
predictions of a dark future, they continued to dream of
victory. As Dr. George Ladd, professor of New Testament
at Fuller Theological Seminary, notes:
It is a sound psychological fact that we hear only what we
are prepared to hear. Jesus’ predictions of his suffering
and death fell on deaf ears. The disciples, in spite of his
warnings, were unprepared for it
This is also why his disciples forsook him when he was
taken captive. Their minds were so completely imbued
with the idea of a conquering Messiah whose role it was
to subdue his enemies that when they saw him broken
and bleeding under the scourging, a helpless prisoner in
the hands of Pilate, and when they saw him led away,

8176 I Shall Come Again

9nailed to a cross to die as a common criminal, all their
messianic hopes for Jesus were shattered.30
The disciples were not only endowed with wisdom, but gifted
with the unparalleled blessing of receiving knowledge directly
from their Master. If they, despite their awareness and
astuteness, preferred to disregard their Master’s predictions
of pain and suffering, could not the same frailty that
dimmed their perception of reality, dim ours as well?
When the residents of a village in Israel refused to welcome
Jesus, the disciples James and John felt that punishment by
a display of their Master’s miraculous powers was the
right response. So they suggested:
‘Lord, do you want us to call fire down from heaven to
destroy them?’ But Jesus turned and rebuked them, and
they went to another village. Luke 9:54-56 NIV
Even Peter, who is eulogized by many as Jesus’ greatest
disciple, the Rock of His Church, could not reconcile his
thoughts with those of his Master:
Jesus…rebuked Peter…“ you do not have in mind the
things of God, but the things of men.” Mark 8:33 NIV
Is it possible that the scholars and interpreters of our time
suffer from the same weakness for which James, John, and
Peter were rebuked? Then why do they insist that every
prophecy must be fulfilled in a predetermined way, accord-
ing to human standards?
The people of Israel expected their Savior to come from “an
unknown place.” Nazareth was not good enough to give birth
to such a supreme figure:
…can anything good come from Nazareth? John 1:46 NEB
Most of the people of our age also stumble on the same
stone: they refrain from examining Bahá’u’lláh’s claim partly
because of His name and birthplace. If people questioned the
worthiness of Nazareth in ancient times, now they question

10Chapter 7: You Judge By Worldly Standards

11the worthiness of the earth itself! They have their eyes
and hopes on heaven. Some people’s spiritual health is so
fragile that the sound of a name or label can break it!
If Jesus appeared among us today, exactly as He did among
the people of Israel, how many of us would welcome Him?
How many would rush to pass judgment on Him, without
ever testing His evidence? How would the religious leaders
behave? What would our evangelists say? Are the peoples of
our time more discerning than those who received Jesus? Are
they less bound by tradition?
[What] if Christ was here, as then?…I have much reason
to fear, that many may be found among the learned, the
great, and teachers of divine things, who would receive
from our divine Master, the same reproof [given to the
Jews], were he as then a teacher among us. “Let him that
thinketh he standeth take heed, lest he fall” (I Cor.
10:12).31 William Miller

• • •
Chapter 48

Spiritual Monotony Traditions Make Up The Spiritual Atmosphere In Which We Are

1ment, so do we to our spiritual environment. We are exposed
to our beliefs gradually, progressively, almost imperceptibly.
To us they do not seem out of place. That is why it is almost
certain that a child born to a Muslim family will grow up
to be a Muslim, a child born to a Christian, a Buddhist, a
Jewish, a Hindu, or an agnostic family will grow up to follow
and accept as the truth whatever his parents teach him.
The assumptions we accept, the convictions we defend,
even the prejudices we cherish, they all seem natural and
right to us:
Every way of a man is right in his own eyes…

2All the ways of a man are clean in his own eyes…
Proverbs 16:2
…every party rejoices in what is their own. Qur’án 30:31
The only way to escape from “spiritual monotony”—being
exposed only to one set of beliefs—and the danger of being
deprived of God’s abundant riches is to:
• Venture into new spiritual realms
• Learn to look with a new eye
Without a new eye:
You may look and look, but you will never see.

• • •
Chapter 49

Part Ii Proofs: Time Prophecies Surely The Sovereign Lord Does Nothing Without Revealing

1…behold, I have foretold you all things.
Christ (Mark 13:23)
Prove all things; hold fast that which is good.
I Thessalonians 5:21
Produce your cause, saith the Lord; bring forth your
strong reasons. Isaiah 41:21
Lo! He is come in the sheltering shadow of Testimony,
invested with conclusive proof… Bahá’u’lláh
This is the Day in which the testimony of the Lord hath
been fulfilled, the Day in which the Word of God hath
been made manifest, and His evidence firmly established.
All the signs have been revealed; every prophetic allusion
hath been manifested. Whatever hath been enshrined in
all the Scriptures of the past hath been made evident.

• • •
Chapter 50

The Wise Shall Understand

1T he mid-19th century witnessed the birth of a worldwide
movement unparalleled in history. Hundreds of thousands of
Christians, on all continents of the planet, awaited the return
of Christ. What prompted so many in so many lands to set
their hopes and hearts on heaven? And why did they face the
most bitter disillusionment and disappointment of all time?

2The “Sprouting” of Time Prophecies
During the first part of the 19th century, many seekers of truth
from diverse cultural and religious backgrounds recognized
that the time was ripe for the advent of a great Savior. The
basic reason for this awakening and revival in so many places

3from the Scriptures of several religions, especially the
Judeo-Christian and Muslim Scriptures. These prophecies had
remained “sealed” for centuries. Then, like the arrival of
spring, the advent of the 19th century imparted a new im-
petus to the unfolding of their potential, and the dormant
buds flowered simultaneously in many a seeking mind
around the globe.
The enthusiasm generated by this discovery—so definitive, so
decisive—grew beyond measure. People thought that at long
last they had found something on which they could depend.
The evidence pointing to the exact date was overwhelming.
Never before had the time of the advent of a Savior been so
explicitly and repeatedly predicted. The number of discovered

• • •
Chapter 51

The Number Of Prophecies

1pointing to 1844 ………………………………………………
• Prophecies in the New Testament
pointing to 1844 …………………………………………….
• Prophecies from other religions
pointing to 1844 ………………………………………………
• Prophecies from the Bible pointing
to the time of the advent of Bahá’u’lláh …………..
• Prophecies from other religions pointing
to the time of the advent of Bahá’u’lláh …………
• Total number of time prophecies …………………….
How could various religions be in such harmony about the
advent? And how could such a mystery have remained
“sealed” for so long and been declared at the same time by

2The expectation of the advent of Christ in the mid-19th
century ranks among the most dramatic episodes in the
history of religion, yet it is seldom brought out into the open
by religious leaders and scholars. It is veiled and ignored in
so many ways as to be reasonably called the most guarded
secret in the religious history of the world. It is a secret
forgotten, ignored, or hidden by those unable to tell the
masses of believers why God’s words—so emphatic, so

• • •
Chapter 52

The Failure To Decode The Symbolic Prophecies

1Bahá’u’lláh, have asked: how could God make a promise
that He knew He would not honor? In the mid-19th century
some believers were so uprooted, so puzzled and bewildered,
as to abandon their faith. The date—1844—that they had
thought would crown their heavenly hope, that would ful-
fill their fairest dreams, was reduced to a time of bitter
disillusionment. They called 1844 “The Year of the Great
Disappointment.”
A pertinent question that may arise is this: if the Báb and
Bahá’u’lláh were indeed the expected Redeemers, then why
did so many fail to recognize them? This question requires
a thorough examination, as detailed and specific as that
provided in Volume V, In the Clouds of Glory. Briefly, some
of the prophecies predicting the Advent are couched in
parables and symbols. Others, such as those pointing to the
appointed time, are relatively free from symbolism. Those
expecting the second Advent simply failed to decode the first
set of prophecies, namely, those veiled by symbols.
The Scriptures signaled the manner and condition of Christ’s
second advent by two sets of clues. The first set contained

2stars,” “the angels,” “lightning,” “heavenly descent,” “glory
and power,” “raging fire,” “resurrection,” and “trumpet
blast”—clues that implied action, triumph, drama, astonish-
ment, upheaval; events or signs that can be perceived by
every person, that should claim everyone’s attention.
The second set of clues offered in the Scriptures contained
words and expressions such as “thief,” “night,” “darkness,”
“sleep,” “smoke,” “clouds,” “ Noah’s days,” “unknown,”
“unaware,” “drunk,” “negligent,” “worldly,” “suffering,”
“mustard seed,” and “watch”—clues that implied obscurity,
secrecy, rejection, gradualism, and lack of drama. Exactly
the opposite of the first set of clues.
Most seekers in the mid-19th century only took note of the
first set of clues, and completely disregarded the second. If
they had not ignored the second set of clues, they would
certainly have been saved from crushing disappointment.
Bahá’ís believe that the first set of clues—those pointing to
dramatic events—were purely symbolic. Chapter 5—which
contains comparative examples from the Christian and Bahá’í

• • •
Chapter 53

The Advent Movement

1Froom calls the Advent Awakening and the Great Awakening,
was one of the greatest and most dramatic events in the
history of the world. Yet many now prefer to regard it as an
unfortunate misjudgment that is best buried or forgotten. To
do justice to history we should revive it.
During the first half of the 19th century the expectation of
the return of a great Redeemer swept across the world,
especially among Christians:
Like a tidal wave the movement swept over the land.
From city to city, from village to village, and into remote

2The advent movement of 1840-44 was…carried to every
mission station in the world, and in some countries there
was the greatest religious interest which has been witnessed
…since the Reformation of the sixteenth century.2
In Great Britain it was reported that:
…the Advent doctrine is chiefly the talk in this country
now…Thousands are now looking for the coming of the
Lord, and believe it is at the door.3
The chief reason for the widespread expectation was the
sudden unfolding of the time prophecies in the Scriptures of
several of the great religions. In the Christian world many
seekers of truth came to the same or similar conclusions.
They found the mid-19th century to be the appointed time of
Christ’s return.
In Dieux d’homme, Dictionnaire des Messianismes et
Milleranismes, the French scholar, Henri des Roche, presents
brief biographies of more than a thousand seekers who
proclaimed the nearness of “the time of the end,” and in
many cases the exact time of its termination when the
promised Redeemer was to come.4
Leroy Froom, a Christian scholar and author of one of the
most extensive works on the Advent Awakening of the 19th
century, writes:
…beginning about 1810, just after the French Revolution…
a simultaneous study of the 2300 years and the impend-
ing judgment hour broke out in the various countries of
Christendom. On both sides of the Atlantic, and in different
lands, men were led independently to similar conclusions.
Not one or two voices, but a swelling chorus of men…
proclaimed the approaching terminus of the 2300 years as
the message of prophecy for the hour.5
Many prominent figures of that period discovered or proclaimed
the exact or approximate “time of the end,” when God would

3history (See Table I). The prevailing view among them was
that Christ Himself would appear to lead the believers to
the expected millennial kingdom.
Among all the prophecies pointing to the time of the second
advent, the prophecy of 2300 days had a special attraction for
the seekers in the mid-19th century. It served as the chief
guiding force in their discovery of the appointed time. By far
the most popular dates selected were 1843, 1844, and 1847.
The reason for this variation will be discussed later.
Table I lists some recognized figures of the 19th century who
discovered or proclaimed the time of the advent. Table II lists
some publications of that period that predicted the time of

• • •
Chapter 54

Table I Some Prominent Figures Who Discovered Or Proclaimed The Time Of The Second Advent Of Christ Or The Cleansing Of The Sanctuary E Name Expected Date Of Advent

1Alfred Addis 1806-? 1843-1844
William Anderson 1799-1873 1843
David Arnold 1805-1889 1844
Joseph Bates 1792-1872 1844
David Bernard 1843
Thomas Birks 1810-1883 1843
Joshua William Brooks 1790-1882 1844
Freeman Brown 1843
John Aquila Brown 1844
Charles Buck 1771-1815 1844
Alexander Campbell 1788-1866 1847
John Cook 1804-1874 1843
William Cuninghame 1843

2E
For specific references, please see Table II in this chapter and The Prophetic
Faith of Our Fathers, Volumes II, III, and IV.

• • •
Chapter 55

Table I Continued Name Expected Date Of Advent

1William C. Davis 1760-1831 1843-1847
William Digby 1783-1866 1843+
Henry Drummond 1786-1860 1847
George Duffield 1794-1868 1844-1847
Hiram Edson 1806-1882 1844
Edward B. Elliott 1793-1875 1844
Charles Fitch 1805-1844 1843
Lorenzo Fleming 1808-1867 1843
Calvin French ?-1844 1843
James H. Frere 1847
John Fry 1775-1849 1844
Elon Galusha 1790-1856 1843
Matthew Habershon 1789-1852 1843-1844
Appollos Hale 1843
William W. Hales 1844
Silas Hawley 1815-1888 1843
N. Hervey 1843-1844
Joshua Himes 1805-1895 1843
Edward Hoare 1802-1877 1843
Ph. Homan 1843-1844
John Hooper 1847
Richard Hutchinson 1843
Edward Irving 1792-1834 1847
Henry Jones 1804-1880 1843
L. H. Kelber 1843
Thomas Keyworth 1782-1852 1843
Josiah Litch 1809-1886 1843
Joseph Marsh ?-1863 1843
Archibald Mason 1843
David Millard 1843
William Miller 1782-1849 1843
Alphonse Nicole 1789-1874 1846-1847
William W. Pym 1792-1852 1843-1847
Jahann H. Richter 1799-1847 1847
James Sabine 1774-1845 1843
J. F. E. Sander 1843-1847
Robert Scott 1760-1834 1843-1844
Samuel Snow 1844

• • •
Chapter 56

Table I Continued Name Expected Date Of Advent

1Nathan Southard ?-1852 1843
George Storrs 1796-1879 1843
Edward Vaughan 1777-1829 1843
Henry Dana Ward 1797-1884 1839-1843
Thomas White 1843-1844
Nathan Whiting 1794-1872 1843-1844
Daniel Wilson 1778-1858 1847
Joseph Wolff 1795-1862 1847

• • •
Chapter 57

Table Ii Continued Author Title Publication Date

Table Ii

Some Works Of Scholars Or Writers Of The

119th Century With Publications on
the Expected Time of the Advent
Author Title Publication

Essays On The Advent And Kingdom

1of Christ 1840
Freeman Brown Views and Experiences in Relation to

Entire Consecration And The Second

1Advent 1843
John Aquila Brown The Even-Tide… 1823

1Charles Buck Theological Dictionary 1811
John Cook A Solemn Appeal to Ministers And
Churches, Especially to Those of the
Baptist Denomination, Relative to
the Speedy Coming of Christ 1843
William Cuninghame The Pre-Millennial Advent of Messiah
Demonstrated from the Scriptures 1836
William C. Davis The Millennium 1811
A Treatise on the Millennium 1827
William Digby A Treatise on the 1260 Days of Daniel
and St. John 1831
Henry Drummond Introduction to the Study of the
Apocalypse 1830
George Duffield Dissertation on the Prophecies Relative
to the Second Coming of Jesus Christ 1842
Millenarianism Defended 1843
Edward Elliott A Commentary on the Apocalypse 1837
Charles Fitch Letter to Rev. J. Litch, on
the Second Coming of Christ 1843
James H. Frere A Combined View of the Prophecies of
Daniel, Esdras, and St. John 1815

• • •
Chapter 58

Eight Letters On The Prophecies

1Relating to the Last Times 1831
John Fry The Second Advent 1822
Elon Galusha Address of Elder Elon Galusha, With
Reasons for Believing Christ’s
Second Coming… 1844
Matthew Habershon A Dissertation on the Prophetic
Scriptures, Chiefly Those of a
Chronological Character 1834
Silas Hawley The Second Advent Doctrine
Vindicated… 1843
N. Hervey Prophecies of Christ’s First and
Second Advent 1843

• • •
Chapter 59

Table Ii Continued Author Title Publication Date Joshua Himes Views Of The Prophecies And Prophetic

1Chronology 1842
John Hooper The Doctrine of the Second Advent 1829
Richard Hutchinson The Abrahamic Covenant 1843
Edward Irving The Coming of Messiah in Glory and
Majesty 1827
Exposition of the Book of Revelation,
in a Series of Lectures 1831
Henry Jones Principles of Interpreting Prophecies 1837

• • •
Chapter 60

A Scriptural Synopsis Of The Doctrine

1in General, of Christ’s Second
Advent, “at Hand” 1842
L. H. Kelber Das Ende Kommt 1842
Thomas Keyworth A Practical Exposition of the
Revelation of St. John 1828
Josiah Litch Prophetic Exposition 1842
Archibald Mason Appendix to an Inquiry Into the

• • •
Chapter 61

Number Of Two Thousand Three

Prophetic Numbers Contained In The

11335 Days 1818
Two Essays on Daniel’s Prophetic

1Hundred Days; and on the
Christian’s Duty to Inquire Into the
Church’s Deliverance 1820
William Miller Evidence From Scripture and History
of the Second Coming of Christ,
About the Year 1843 1836
William Pym Thoughts on Millenarianism 1829
Johann Richter Erklarte Haus-Bibel (6 vol.) 1834-
1840
James Sabine The Relation of the Present State of
Religion to the Expected Millennium 1823

• • •
Chapter 62

Table Ii Continued Author Title Publication Date

The Appearing And Kingdom Of Our

1Lord Jesus Christ… 1842

1J. F. Sander Versuch einer Erklarung der
Offenbarung Johannis 1829
Robert Scott Free Thoughts on the Millennium 1834
Edward Vaughan The Church’s Expectation: A Sermon
on the Second Advent of the Lord
Jesus Christ 1828
Henry Dana Ward Glad Tidings. “For the Kingdom of
Heaven is at Hand” 1838

2The 19th century Advent Awakening embraced a cross-
section of almost all Christian denominations, and contained
within its ranks some of the most distinguished leaders and
scholars of the time. As Froom writes:
These men were accomplished in Biblical languages,
Latin, and history, and were well acquainted with the
principles of sound exegesis. They were not inclined to
catch up some fanciful or irrational theory. On the contrary,
they were rather matter of fact and exacting in their
scholarship. They had come to their conclusions on the
basis of substantial evidence, after painstaking study
consuming years and sometimes decades.6
Charles Meister, a modern Christian author, has recently
published a book on the events of 1844: Year of the Lord,
A. D. Eighteen Forty Four. He chose 1844 among all the years
in history because he found it unique, a very special year.
His book contains chapters on both the Advent Movement
and the Bahá’í Faith. He writes:
In 1812 a Catholic priest born in Chile, Manuel de Lacunza,
published a book called The Coming of Messiah in Majesty
and Glory. By 1820 about 300 Anglican and 600 Noncon-
formist clergymen in England were preaching Christ’s

3192 I Shall Come Again

4early return…Joseph Wolff spread the advent doctrine to
more than twenty countries in the Middle East and Asia
between 1831 and 1845. In 1820 Archibald Mason in
Scotland predicted that 1844 would be the year of Christ’s
return. Alexander Campbell, in a famous debate with
Robert Owen in 1829, also selected 1844 as the year.7
The uniqueness of 1844 motivated still another modern
author, Jerome Clarke, a Christian scholar and professor at
Southern Missionary College, to write three volumes entitled
simply: 1844.8
The year 1844 was also a time of awakening in the East. It
is indeed astonishing that when multitudes of Christians were
awaiting the advent of Christ, many Muslims were cherishing
an identical hope. The Sunni sect (Sunnites), who constitute
the majority of Muslims, expect the return of Christ in the
last days. Some Muslims expected, independently of the
Christians, the advent of their Redeemer in that same year of
1844. John Fry, one of the figures of the Advent Movement
in the mid-19th century, in his book on prophecies (published
in 1835) states:
…the Mohammedans in various parts of the world, have
their expectation fixed on the same year, A. D. 1844
Fry then states that such agreement between the prophecies
of Christians and Muslims (who constitute a large portion of
humanity) concerning the date of the advent of the expected
One should not be taken lightly.
It is indeed remarkable that so many seekers and scholars
from so many lands came to such similar conclusions. Minor
variations, however, can be noted in their findings. One reason
for such variations was a failure to move correctly from B. C.
to A. D. Still another reason was an inability to locate and
use the same starting point (day or month). It seems evident
that if the units of time are years and not months or days,
one should expect some margin of error, not exceeding one
year below or above the intended figure.

5Chapter 8: The Wise Shall Understand

6Those who selected 1847 instead of 1843 or 1844 did so
because they depended on a manuscript preserved in the
Vatican. The manuscript included a copying error that dis-
torted the correct and now accepted prophetic figure of 2300.
As far as is known, no one was able to discover the day
(May 23) and the hour (two hours and eleven minutes past
sunset) in which, according to Bahá’ís, the appointed time did
arrive. As foretold in the Scriptures, the knowledge of the
hour remained a mystery until the last instant when, suddenly
and unexpectedly, it was disclosed and declared by the Báb.
The dawning of the new day was also declared to people
through dreams and visions. The Scriptures prophesied:
In the last days, God says, I will pour out my Spirit on
all people. Your sons and daughters will prophesy, your
young men will see visions, your old men will dream
dreams. Acts 2:17 NIV
See also Joel 2:28

7In 1842 William Foy, a Baptist preacher, told of two
visions he had of Christ’s second coming. In 1844 he
reported a third vision of three mysterious platforms.
Hazen Foss in the fall of 1844 told of a vision he had of
the second coming, in which three steps were depicted.
Twice more he reported receiving this vision.10
(See also William Miller’s dreams—one of them cited later
in this chapter and another in Appendix II. See also Joseph
Wolff ’s visions, and the remarkable story of the child
preachers of the mid-19th century in Chapter 19.)
Although some of those who proclaimed the imminent return
of Christ were mocked, harassed, regarded as heretics, and
even imprisoned, they succeeded nonetheless in attracting
thousands of followers.
This awareness of the dawning of a new age did not come
too early, when it would have been of little if any use. Those
who discovered or confirmed the time of the advent lived in

8194 I Shall Come Again

9the late 18th and early 19th century. Only when the people
needed to know the date were they able to break the seal of
concealment. That is why Daniel, who was inspired to predict
the date, was also informed of the need for secrecy:
But you, Daniel, keep the words secret and seal the book
till the time of the end. Daniel 12:4 NEB
Go your way, Daniel, for the words are kept secret and
sealed till the time of the end. Daniel 12:9 NEB
This revelation which has been given of the evenings and
the mornings is true; but you must keep the vision secret,
for it points to days far ahead. Daniel 8:26 NEB
Before the ripening of the time, even Daniel could not
understand the vision:
I [Daniel] was perplexed by the revelation and no one
could explain it. Daniel 8:27 NEB
Among those intimately involved in the study of biblical
prophecies was Sir Isaac Newton, who believed that
“prophecies remain veiled until their time of near fulfillment,
and then God raises up a prophet to interpret their meaning.”
He said, “I seem to gather that God is about to open these
mysteries.”
Those studying the prophecy of 2300 days, the prophecies of
1260 days (to be examined later), and scores of other clues,
were certain that the advent would surely take place as
promised. But when the year 1844 came and passed with no
sign of the descent of their Savior, they were baffled,
bewildered, and disillusioned to find that the explicit
prophecies of the Bible had remained unfulfilled. Their
disillusionment is well reflected in the title some of them
gave to 1844, the year of the “Great Disappointment.”
Despite the disappointment, some Christian scholars have
continued to uphold their belief in the accuracy of the year.
They maintain that 1844 marked a turning point in the history
of the human race.

10Chapter 8: The Wise Shall Understand

• • •
Chapter 63

The Year Of Fulfillment

1Bahá’ís believe that 1844 was not the time of “Great Dis-
appointment.” Instead, 1844 marked the onset of the Age of
Fulfillment, because it was in that same year that a new
Revelation came into being when the Báb declared Himself
as the promised one of all ages and religions.
The Báb, the Herald of Bahá’u’lláh, possessed a station equal
to that of all the great Messengers and Redeemers of the past.
He declared:
I am the Primal Point from which have been generated all
created things. I am the Countenance of God Whose
splendor can never be obscured, the Light of God Whose
radiance can never fade.12
I am the Flame of that supernal Light that glowed upon
Sinai…and lay concealed in the midst of the Burning Bush.13
Verily He [the Báb] is the One Who holdeth, by Our
[God's] leave, the kingdoms of earth and heaven in His
grasp
Therefore, Bahá’ís believe that the advent of the Báb fulfilled
all the prophecies pointing to 1844.

• • •
Chapter 64

The Millerite Movement

1Any discussion of the Great Awakening of the 19th century
is incomplete without a brief review of the life of the man
who was its central figure: William Miller (1782-1849). This
man of great vision was by far the best-known pioneer,
teacher, and leader among all those discovering and proclaim-
ing the time (1844) of the return of the expected Redeemer.
In the United States alone he gained, over a period of 13 years,
as many as two hundred thousand followers. They were
called Millerites, after his name. The Millerite Movement
later gave rise to the Seventh-day Adventist Church and a
few other denominations.

2196 I Shall Come Again

3Miller was a selfless and dedicated seeker of truth. He
devoted all he had to proclaiming the dawn of what he
deemed the greatest Day in human history, a Day whose
arrival he had discovered after many years of ceaseless search.
Miller’s integrity and honesty were such that even his enemies
acknowledged them. Unlike those who seek leadership for
the sake of power, who compromise their beliefs to win
favors, Miller taught his views with the utmost humility and
devotion. When he found that, according to his expectations,
his predictions had not come true, he refused to accept any
unreasonable explanations or rationalizations that would have
pacified his disappointed and outraged followers.
Miller started his search into prophecies with no specific
expectations or preconceived notions. He wrote:
I commenced their study with no expectation of finding
the time of the Saviour’s coming, and I could at first
hardly believe the result to which I had arrived; but the
evidence struck me with such force that I could not resist
my convictions. I became nearly settled in my conclusions,
and began to wait, and watch, and pray for my Saviour’s
coming.15
After finding the appointed date, Miller decided not to
disclose it. He wanted to make sure that it was accurate. On
November 4, 1826 he had an unusual dream that gave him a
glimpse of his future destiny. In his dream:
…he saw the blood of Jesus running from a rail-fence.
He saw the cross, with garments drenched in blood. He
received a book, which he was told would direct him.
When he opened it, his eyes came to Isaiah 48:17: “I lead
thee by the way thou shouldst go.” He then had a vision
of a paradise beyond description, and then he awoke. He
began to feel that God could use even a humble farmer
to awaken the world to biblical prophecy.16
Miller had discovered the date after years of research, and
his dream seemed to lend credence to his findings. Yet he

4Chapter 8: The Wise Shall Understand

5could not muster enough confidence to unveil to others his
awesome and incredible message.
One Saturday morning in August 1831 Miller felt the call
to tell the world about Christ’s imminent return. Still some-
what reticent, he made an apparently safe bargain with
God: he promised God that if he was ever called upon to
preach, he would preach Christ’s second coming. Since he
had never had such an invitation, the bargain seemed safe
enough. But that very day a young man arrived from nearby
Dresden, inviting him to preach the following day. Angry,
Miller refused. But his conscience bothered him. His six-
year-old daughter Lucy told her mother: “Something’s
the matter with Daddy.” Miller had gone into a grove to
pray about the invitation to preach. As Francis Nichol
summarized: “He went into the grove a farmer, and came
out a preacher.” He could not go back on his word to
God. So he hitched up his horse, and traveled the sixteen
miles to Dresden.17
From then on his life was a continual climb. Proclaiming the
imminent return of Christ dominated his life. He who had
been hesitant to face the crowds and present his urgent
message, gained such confidence as to deliver, by 1844,
some 4,500 talks to over 500,000 people. As the set time
approached, his certainty concerning the advent continued to
climb. In August 1834, he said:
The evidence is so clear, the testimony is so strong, that
we live on the eve of the present dispensation, towards the
dawn of the Glorious Day, that I wonder why ministers
and people do not wake up and trim their lamps.18
From the outset Miller’s message was controversial. Though
some admired him, others attacked him. “On some occasions
Miller’s message so enraged certain people that they planned
to take his life as he left the auditorium.”
But threats, ridicule, or censure could not turn him away
from the cause to which he devoted his whole life and honor.

6198 I Shall Come Again

7In fact, opposition simply strengthened Miller’s message of
hope. People could ridicule him, but they could not refute
his reasoning. Many were so moved by his appeals, so con-
vinced by his evidence on the appointed time of the advent,
as to count the remaining days with joyful anticipation and
preparation. Some farmers declined to plant their crops in the
spring. Others refrained from reaping their harvest in the
fall. 20 If taken to heaven, they would need heavenly, not
earthly, food.
Restoration of stolen property and payment of debts became
unusually common. A man who identified himself only as
a believer in Millerism mailed five dollars in conscience
money to the United States Treasury. Another man sent a
larger sum to a New York insurance company with a note
saying, “The Lord is at hand. This was unlawfully taken
from you, and I ask forgiveness, for the Lord has forgiven
me much.” Even the editor of the Midnight Cry, to be
sure that every obligation was taken care of, placed this
notice above his signature: “If any human being has a just
pecuniary claim against me, he is requested to inform me
instantly.”
Jesus had prophesied that before His coming the stars of
heaven would fall (Matt. 24:29). During the years of Miller’s
teaching, two heavenly events of the greatest magnitude did
occur. Dr. Robert Gale writes:
Few things did more to attract attention to the fulfillment
of Bible prophecy and thus to give impetus to Miller’s
cause than two astronomical phenomena that occurred
during the 1830’s and 1840’s…
In the early morning hours of November 13, 1833, an
unusually large meteoric shower covered much of North
America…This was the most extensive and wonderful
display of fallen stars that has ever been recorded. Thou-
sands of people viewed this event as a direct fulfillment

8Chapter 8: The Wise Shall Understand

9of Bible prophecy, a sign of the nearness of the second
coming of Christ.
The second phenomenon occurred about ten years later,
when from February 28 to April 1, 1843, the night sky
was lighted with the most brilliant comet to appear in the
nineteenth century.22
Miller expressed his views with confidence and devotion. He
totally depended on the Scriptures as his guide and inspira-
tion. Here is a summary of his main beliefs in his own words
with the biblical references on which they rest:
I believe God has revealed the time. (Isa. 44:7, 8; Dan.
12:10; Amos 3:7; I Thess. 5:4.)
I believe many who are professors and preachers will
never believe or know the time until it comes upon them.
(Jer. 8:7; Matt. 24:50; Jer. 25:34-37.)
I believe the wise, they who are to shine as the bright-
ness of the firmament, Dan. 12:3, will understand the time.
(Eccl. 8:5; Dan. 12:10; Matt. 24:43-45; 25:6-10; I Thess.
5:4; I Peter 1:9-13.)
I believe the time can be known by all who desire to
understand and to be ready for his coming. And I am
fully convinced that some time between March 21st,
1843, and March 21st, 1844, according to the Jewish
mode of computation of time, Christ will come, and bring
all his saints with him; and that then he will award every
man as his works shall be (Matt. 16:27; Rev. 22:12).23
Based on the Jewish computation of time, the revelation of
the Báb occurred on May 23, 1843, ten months before the
closing of Miller’s deadline. Based on the Christian calendar,
His revelation occurred on May 23, 1844. (More about this
later.)
Miller discovered the appointed time by making extensive
studies of prophecies throughout the whole Bible, from
Leviticus to Revelation, and they all pointed to the same date.

10200 I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 65

The Great Disappointment

1years. He had endured the most severe trials all for the
reward of seeing his Lord and of awakening others. Only the
hope of meeting his Lord could give him the strength and
the courage to continue. In his own words:
What then will be my feelings, when faith will end in
sight, and hope in fruition?…No more a stranger in this
giddy world…no more to meet the scoffs of friends or
foes…My soul rejoices when I think a few more days, at
most, and all these scenes will be forgotten in the eternal
sunshine of his glory. Why not begin the song of everlast-
ing gratitude to God for this blessed hope.24
This is how the Millerites approached the hour of their
expectation:
Those who truly believed Christ was going to come had
made a heart preparation for the event that they expected
to be theirs throughout all eternity. Their worldly cares
were largely forgotten during the weeks immediately pre-
ceding the expected Advent, and they examined closely
every thought and emotion as if it were to be their last.
According to Miller’s reckoning, March 21, 1844, was the
last day of the prophetic period within which Christ must
come. At last the great day arrived! The Lord could come
during the early-morning hours. But the sun crossed the
meridian, the morning passed, and He did not come.
Only the afternoon remained. It too passed. The evening
came, and still the believers waited—waited and hoped
and prayed. He must come before midnight! But, alas,
midnight too passed. The next morning came, and still Christ
had not come.
The bitterness—the galling bitterness—of that disappoint-
ment can be fully appreciated only by those who experi-

2their Lord was added the ridiculing and scoffing of the
unbelievers who now reveled in their seeming triumph.25
What of Miller? “Few men have been called to endure so
great an amount of reproach…and few could have endured it
as he did.” 26 But Miller’s disappointment had not yet reached
its climax. The galling, climactic disappointment came a few
months later, on October 22. After his first disappointment,
Miller reluctantly consented to move his deadline a few
months forward to October 22, 1844. Again to his utter
astonishment, the heavenly descent of the expected Savior did
not materialize.
Early on the morning of October 22, 1844, most Millerites
gathered in their churches to await the Advent. In com-
munities where there were no church buildings the people
met in the homes of various believers…Many Adventists
gathered in the large auditorium in Cincinnati…there were
1,200 inside the building, with another 300 outside. The
people were “very orderly,” and there was “less excitement”
than the reporter had expected. The minister…preached
…his last warning to a sinful world. The meeting was
closed before nine o’clock, and the people were advised
to go to their homes, there to await the expected Advent
that many felt would occur at midnight.27
What was the drama in store for the remaining hours of
that unforgettable day? Would the adored Redeemer at last
descend from behind the clouds of glory?
…the sun passed its zenith, and declined toward its setting.
The cloud of shining glory for which they strained their
eyes, and which they believed would bring their Lord,
did not appear. No lightning rent the sky, no earthquake
shook the land, no trumpet smote the ear. The westering
sun went down silently but relentlessly upon their dis-
appearing hopes. Darkness covered the land, and gloom—
irrepressible gloom—settled down upon the waiting,

3Men and women wept unashamedly, for their Lord had
not come.28
After the Disappointment, Hiram Edson, who had constantly
proclaimed “the year of the Lord,” expressed the overwhelming
despondency and sadness of the people in these words:
Our fondest hopes and expectations were blasted, and such
a spirit of weeping came over us as I never experienced
before. It seemed that the loss of all earthly friends could
have been no comparison. We wept, and wept.29
Then he asked:
If this, the richest and brightest of all my Christian expe-
riences, had proved a failure, what was the rest of my
Christian experience worth? Has the Bible proved a failure?
Is there no God, no heaven, no paradise? Is all this but a
cunningly devised fable?
Another Adventist, Washington Morse, described that unfor-
gettable day in these terms:
That day came and passed, and the darkness of another
night closed in upon the world. But with that darkness
came a pang of disappointment to the Advent believers
that can find a parallel only in the sorrow of the disciples
after the crucifixion of their Lord. The passing of the time
was a bitter disappointment…And now, to turn again to the
cares, perplexities, and dangers of life, in full view of
jeering and reviling unbelievers who scoffed as never

• • •
Chapter 66

Explanation For The Disappointment

1After the disappointment, people tried to reexamine the
prophecies. They could have erred, they thought, in two ways:

2Chapter 8: The Wise Shall Understand

3• By miscalculating the date
• By misjudging the event
First they reexamined their calculations and could find no
error:
…they could detect no error in their reckoning of the
prophetic periods. The ablest of their opponents had not
succeeded in overthrowing their system of prophetic inter-
pretation. They could not consent, without Bible evidence,
to renounce positions which had been reached through
earnest, prayerful study of the Scriptures…positions which
had withstood the most searching criticism and the most
bitter opposition of popular religious teachers
Then they reexamined the prophecies to see if they could
have erred in judging the event. Here they found themselves
divided. Some of them lost their faith and hope altogether.
They could not believe in a God whose promises could fail:
In a letter to a friend, Miller said that on the day after the
Disappointment it seemed as though all the demons in the
bottomless pit had been turned loose upon the believers.
Some, who had been begging for mercy two days before,
were now mixing with the rabble, mocking and scoffing
in a most blasphemous way.33
Others found the belief in an invisible return most plausible.
So they said that Christ did come as promised, but no one
was able to see Him. But if no one could see Him, people
wondered, for what purpose did He come?
Still others—perhaps the largest group—supported Hiram
Edson’s view that the advent was heavenly, not earthly. They
claimed that in 1844 Christ entered “the most Holy place of
the Heavenly Sanctuary to carry on His work as high priest.”
Edson’s explanation left many questions unanswered (see
Chapter 10, and Appendix I), but it served a vital purpose in
saving many believers from rejecting their faith. It bestowed

4204 I Shall Come Again

5hope on those who could not deny the accuracy of the date.
The Seventh-day Adventist Church is a living proof of that
hope. By accepting this new interpretation, they could still set
their faith in the Scriptures and their eyes on heaven. After
“the Great Disappointment,” the Adventists kept alight the
lamp of hope, but unfortunately quenched the flaming fire of
search. The Seventh-day Adventists have continued to believe
to this day that 1844 marked the earliest time that Christ
could have come.34
Many did not accept Edson’s explanation, including Miller.
To the end he believed that all the date-prophecies, including
the prophecy of 2300 days, point to the physical return of
Christ to our planet. Fifteen reasons are presented in Appendix
I to prove Miller’s sound judgment.
Miller never gave up the hope of seeing Christ return. In spite
of the Disappointment, he continued to teach the imminent
advent of the Lord. He never wavered in his beliefs, because
he had full confidence in God’s promises. Towards the end
of his life he wrote:
Were I to live my life over again, with the same evidence
that I then had, to be honest with God and man I should
have to do as I have done.35
And again:
Although I have been twice disappointed, I am not yet
cast down or discouraged…My hope in the coming of
Christ is as strong as ever. I have done only what, after
years of solemn consideration, I felt it my solemn duty to
do. If I have erred, it has been on the side of charity, love,
to my fellow men, and conviction of duty to God.36
Miller’s final admonition was:
Avoid everything that shall cause offenses. Let your lives
be models of goodness and propriety. Avoid unnecessary
controversy. God will raise up those to whom He will
commit the direction of His cause.37

6Chapter 8: The Wise Shall Understand

7In the spring of 1845, he wrote:
I have reckoned all the time I can. I must now wait and
watch until he is graciously pleased to answer the 10,000
prayers that daily and nightly ascend his holy hill, ‘Come,
Lord Jesus, come quickly.’
Again he wrote:
The fatigue of body and mind has almost unnerved this
old frame, and unfitted me to endure the burdens which
Providence calls upon me to bear…this frail life will soon
be over. My Master will soon call me home, and soon
the scoffer and I shall be in another world to render
our account before a righteous tribunal.39
Four years after the Disappointment, Miller’s sight failed and
his health took a sharp decline. Still full of hope that he
might see his adored Redeemer, he died in 1849, at the age
of 68. The inscription on his gravestone reads: “At the time
appointed the end shall be.”
Why did Miller and the multitude of his followers ultimately
fail in their search for Truth? They failed primarily because
of their extreme literalism. Had they not taken literally the
prophetic passages that point to the heavenly descent of their
Savior, they would have kept their minds open to other
possibilities, well supported in the Scriptures. For instance,
possibilities conveyed by prophecies such as:
That is the day when I come like a thief! Happy the man
who stays awake and keeps on his clothes…
Revelation 16:15 NEB
Be dressed ready for service and keep your lamps burn-
ing… Luke 12:35 NIV
…the day of the Lord will come like a thief in the night.
I Thessalonians 5:2 NIV
“Keeping one’s clothes on” and “being dressed” symbolize
qualities that adorn and elevate our spirit and prepare us to

8206 I Shall Come Again

9see and recognize the truth, qualities such as: sincerity,
open-mindedness, purity of heart, patience, persistence, self-
sacrifice, self-confidence, thirst for truth, justice, courage,
faith, humility, and trust in God.
If hundreds of thousands expected the Redeemer’s advent on
a given day, and He appeared literally with earthly glory,
how would a prophecy like the following be fulfilled?
But understand this: If the owner of the house had known
at what hour the thief was coming, he would not have let
his house be broken into. You also must be ready, because
the Son of Man will come at an hour when you do not
expect him. Luke 12:39-40 NIV
Many Christians have kept their hopes aflame. Some of them
are getting impatient as they instinctively sense a delay in the
return of their Lord. They see the crops of faith and hope
becoming overripe and perishing, and wonder why they are
not being harvested. A few of them explain the delay this
way: the Harvester wants to give His servants more time to
repent, to grant them further opportunities for escape from
unbelief.
God’s delay of this event [the second Advent] is for the
purpose of giving people a chance to escape
Dr. Ray Stedman
God is holding back to give us that chance. It will not last
forever.41 C. S. Lewis
George Vandeman, perhaps the best-known contemporary
spokesman in the Seventh-day Adventist church, states:
…so far as any time prophecy is concerned, Jesus could
have returned to this earth any time after 1844. He is not
waiting for any prophetic time period to end. No time
prophecy is holding Him back. Then why hasn’t He
returned? For nearly two hundred years we have been
living in the time of the end. Why isn’t He here?
Then he responds:

10Chapter 8: The Wise Shall Understand

11Our wonderful Lord, our compassionate, loving Saviour,
doesn’t want anyone to be lost. And so He holds up the
final flight of time, He slows the march of history—
because some have not yet made a decision. And He
doesn’t want one to be lost!
Is such a view supported by the Scriptures? Both the Old and
the New Testaments teach otherwise. They declare that the
time is fixed and unchangeable, and delay is impossible. (For
details see Chapter 17.)

• • •
Chapter 67

The Subtle And Sealed Language Of Prophecy

1Most of those who declared that 1844 was the appointed time
of Christ’s advent came to that conclusion on the basis of
Daniel’s prophecy of 2300 days. They remained unaware of
the meaning of many other time prophecies, not only in
Daniel but in the Book of Revelation as well. Had they
known the true meaning of those other prophecies, their
anticipation and their disappointment would have reached
almost unbearable proportions; therefore, their ignorance
saved them from an even greater agony. The meaning of the
other time prophecies was destined to be unveiled decades
later by Bahá’u’lláh’s son, ‘Abdu’l-Bahá.
Further, if more information had been unveiled to the people
before the arrival of the appointed time, it could have led to
several other consequences. First, it would have incited many
false claims to divine Revelation. Second, it would have
interfered with people’s freedom of choice. Many would
be forced to accept their Redeemer out of fear, and the
insincere would have forcefully claimed faith and fidelity.
God in His Wisdom gives us as much evidence as He knows
we need to make a decision; no more, no less. This is one
reason why in spite of its clarity, Daniel’s vision appears
partly in the garment of signs and symbols. Instead of

2208 I Shall Come Again

3prophesying that after 2300 years the Redeemer shall come,
it simply says that after this period “the sanctuary shall be
cleansed.”
Verily the Hour is coming—My design is to keep it
hidden—for every soul to receive its reward by the
measure of its endeavor. Qur’án, 20:15 Y
We see the veil of symbolism clothing other prophecies
(those not related to time) as well. One reason the Gospel
pointed to the heavenly descent of Christ was to discourage
false claims at the appointed time.
What would happen if it were known that Christ would come
in an ordinary way? Many people among both the devout and
the deniers would try to fulfill the prophecies in their own
or their children’s lives; some of them with the intention of
invalidating the prophecies, others with the hope of playing
a decisive role in the divine drama of the advent. It is con-
ceivable that some parents and grandparents would try to
have their offspring be born at the right time, in the right
place, and with the right name. Many mockers would advance
their claims at the designated date. Countless impostors and
false prophets would emerge at the appointed time. Many
sincere seekers of truth would be bewildered as they would
not know to whom they should turn. Prophecies would lose
their guiding power and indeed serve the opposite purpose
for which they are intended.
We see an application of this same principle in the first
advent of Christ. If the Jews knew what was meant by
“king,” some of them would try to compete with Jesus in
fulfilling the Old Testament prophecies. Again the guiding
power of those prophecies would diminish.
People were sure—and still are—that if Christ ever came, it
would be “on” the clouds. They knew that His miraculous
descent from heaven was a feat no one else could copy.
Therefore, when the appointed Hour dawned, no one except
a humble young Man in Persia—the Báb—claimed to be the

4Chapter 8: The Wise Shall Understand

5Promised One of all ages, even though hundreds of thousands
were well aware of the date. Once the date passed, the
Mystery gradually became known. After the appointed year,
deceivers could not misuse the time prophecies. For there
was—and there will always be—only one 1844 A. D.
This is an astonishing achievement in God’s kingdom, one
that a human mind never could have conceived. In each of
the two advents, two monumental goals were attained by one
word. In the first advent, that word was “king”; in the
second, that word was “heaven.” By each of them, not only
did God protect the prophecies from misuse, He tested the
hearts of His servants as well. In the first advent, that
word loomed so large as to conceal Jesus, the light of the
world, from the literal-minded Jews. Today another magical
word is presenting Christians with a challenge of a similar
magnitude.

6Cause Thy Face to Shine
Upon Thy Sanctuary
Daniel 9:17

• • •
Chapter 68

Time Prophecies Of The First Advent T He Most Remarkable Time Prophecy In The Bible Is Found

1in the Book of Daniel. It is a prophecy without peer: it
predicts the times of both the first and second advents of
Christ, under the same continuing vision. In order to study
the relevance of this vision to the time of the second advent,
we need to study its fulfillment by the first.
The Jews have been blessed with a succession of prophets
who have enriched their Scriptures with an abundance of

2212 I Shall Come Again

3prophecies, among them those that point to the advent of
their Redeemer, Jesus. It seems improbable that they would
be informed by their prophets of some of the most detailed
accounts of future events, yet be denied the knowledge of the
most critical event in their history: the time of the advent of
their Messiah:
Surely the Sovereign Lord does nothing without revealing
his plan to his servants the prophets. Amos 3:7 NIV
The Scriptures indicate that Jesus often appealed to Old
Testament prophecies to substantiate His claim:
Then he [Jesus] began with Moses and all the prophets,
and explained to them [the Jews] the passages which
referred to himself in every part of the scriptures.
Luke 24:27 NEB
If you believed Moses, you would believe me, for he
wrote about me. Christ (John 5:46 NIV)
These are the Scriptures that testify about me, yet you
refuse to come to me to have life. Christ (John 5:39-40 NIV)
See also Acts 28:23
Daniel’s time prophecy of the first advent stands out clearly
among all those pointing to the advent of Christ. Dr. and
Mrs. Guinness in their book on chronological prophecy
describe it as:
…a prophecy which is perhaps more fundamental than any
other in the Bible, as evidence that Jesus of Nazareth was
the promised Messiah of Israel.1
Dr. Gleason Archer in Encyclopedia of Bible Difficulties writes:
The prophecy of the Seventy Weeks in Daniel 9:24-27 is
one of the most remarkable long-range predictions in the
entire Bible. It is by all odds one of the most widely
discussed by students and scholars of every persuasion
within the spectrum of the Christian church. And yet when
it is carefully examined in the light of all the relevant data

4Chapter 9: Cause Thy Face to Shine Upon Thy Sanctuary

5of history and the information available from other parts
of Scriptures, it is quite clearly an accurate prediction of
the time of Christ’s coming advent and a preview of the
thrilling final act of the drama of human history before
that advent.2
Only God could have predicted the coming of His Son
with such amazing precision; it defies all rationalistic
explanation.3
Declaring Daniel’s prophecy a clear evidence of the validity of
Jesus’ claim is not new. Its relevance to the promised Messiah
of the people of Israel has been verified by countless Christian
scholars and writers, some of them as classic as Sir Isaac
Newton, others as contemporary as Hal Lindsey.
In the first half of the 19th century, a conference was held
in New York city between Christian and Jewish leaders and
scholars. One of the prophecies presented by Christians in
that conference to prove that Christ was indeed the expected
Savior of the people of Israel was Daniel’s time prophecy.
According to William Miller, the Christian scholars “explained
the 70 weeks…and asked the Jews how they could avoid the
conclusion.” The Jewish leaders and scholars could not refute
their argument.4

6Daniel’s Prophecy of 69 Weeks
The time prophecy of the first advent is revealed in a vision
to Daniel in four consecutive verses (9:24-27). Let us begin
with verse 25:
Know therefore and understand, that from the going forth
of the commandment to restore and to build Jerusalem
unto the Messiah the Prince shall be seven weeks, and
three score and two weeks [7 + 62 = 69]: the street shall be
built again, and the wall, even in troublous times.E
E
The figures in the first part of this chapter are based on the traditional dates of
the ministry and crucifixion of Jesus; the figures in the latter part on the revised
dates.

7214 I Shall Come Again

8Since Messiah and Christ have the same meaning (anointed),
we could reword the prophecy this way: “From the time the
commandment concerning the restoration and rebuilding of
Jerusalem is issued until Christ the Prince, there shall be
weeks and 62 weeks” (a total of 69). Why is 69 not given
as a whole number, but divided into parts? This is done for
a definite purpose, to be examined later. Prince is also one
of Christ’s titles:
Him hath God exalted…to be a Prince and a Savior…
Acts 5:31
To decode Daniel’s vision, we need to resolve two questions:
• The length of the 69 prophetic weeks.
• Their starting point.
How long is 69 prophetic weeks? Sixty-nine weeks equals
483 days, which in Biblical prophecies equals 483 years, for
in the Scriptures each “prophetic day” equals a year:
I have appointed thee each day for a year. Ezekiel 4:6
See also Num. 14:34; Gen. 29:27-28
As Adam Clarke, a noted scholar states:
The Jews had Sabbatical years, Lev. xxv: 8, by which their
years were divided into weeks of years…each week con-
taining seven years.5
Count off seven sabbaths of years—seven times seven
years—so that the seven sabbaths of years amount to a
period of forty-nine years. Leviticus 25:8 NIV
Dr. Gleason Archer in Encyclopedia of Bible Difficulties writes:
The word for week is “sabu,” which is derived from
“seba,” the word for “seven”…There is no doubt that in
this case we are presented with seventy sevens of years
rather than days. This leads to a total of 490 years.6
William Biederwolf in The Second Coming Bible Commentary
writes:

9Chapter 9: Cause Thy Face to Shine Upon Thy Sanctuary

10It is conceded by all [commentators] that these are weeks
of years
Leroy Froom, a Christian writer, points out that the principle
of “weeks of years” was “discerned by the Jews, at least by
the third century B. C. E. [before Common, or Christian,
Era].8 He then adds:
This principle of a day for a year was tenaciously held by
the Jews in the succeeding centuries, and came to be well-
nigh universally accepted by Christian expositors.9
Froom provides many historical references showing the
universal application of “the year-day principle” to time
prophecies by Bible scholars since biblical times. See The
Prophetic Faith of Our Fathers, Volume 4, pp. 204-207.
In translating the preceding prophecy from Daniel, The
Amplified Bible actually adds the word years to the verse, but
in brackets:
Know therefore and understand that from the going forth
of the commandment to restore and to build Jerusalem
until [the coming of] the anointed one, a prince, shall be
seven weeks [of years], and sixty-two weeks [of years]…
Daniel 9:25 AB
The second question: when is the starting point for the
prophecy? The starting point corresponds to the time when
the decree for the rebuilding of Jerusalem was issued. But
since four such decrees were issued, we must first determine
which of the four was meant by Daniel’s prophecy. Uriah
Smith, a Christian scholar, in his commentary on the book
of Daniel introduces the four decrees:
• First decree: issued 536 B. C. by Cyrus. (Ez. 1:1-4).
• Second decree: issued 519 B. C. by Darius. (Ez. 6:1-12).
• Third decree: issued 457 B. C. by Artaxerexes. (Ez. 7).
• Fourth decree: issued 444 B. C. by Artaxerexes. (Neh. 2).10

11216 I Shall Come Again

12Concerning Daniel’s prophecy of 69 weeks, Uriah Smith states:
The command [referred to in the prophecy] was to include
more than mere building. There was to be restoration; by
which we must understand all the forms and regulations
of civil, political, and judicial society. When did such a
command go forth?
Then he explains that the first two decrees:
…had reference principally to the restoration of the temple
and the temple-worship of the Jews, and not to the resto-
ration of their civil state and polity, all of which must be
included in the expression, “to restore and build Jerusalem.”
These made a commencement of the work. They were
preliminary to what was afterward accomplished. But of
themselves they are altogether insufficient
Uriah Smith then presents several reasons to show that the
edict intended by the prophecy was the third, granted to Ezra;
not the fourth, granted to Nehemiah. (The third and the fourth
edicts were issued by the same king within the span of
years.) These are two of the reasons he cites:
• The grant to Nehemiah cannot be called a decree. It was
necessary that a Persian decree should be put in writing,
and signed by the king (Dan. 6:8). Such was the document
given to Ezra; but Nehemiah had nothing of the kind, his
commission being only verbal…
• There was nothing granted to Nehemiah, which was not
embraced in the decree to Ezra; while the latter had all
the forms and conditions of a decree, and was vastly more
ample in its provisions.13
George Vandeman, a noted Christian writer and orator states:
This date [457] has been confirmed by modern discoveries
in archaeology, a fact recognized by many Bible scholars.
The widely-acclaimed Encyclopedia of Bible Difficulties,

13Chapter 9: Cause Thy Face to Shine Upon Thy Sanctuary

14for example, endorses the year 457 B. C. as the date for
the fulfillment of Daniel 9.14
Zondervan NIV Bible Commentary also confirms 457 as the
most likely date:
The most likely fulfillment is the decree issued to Ezra in
the seventh year of Artaxerxes I (i.e., 457 B. C.)
Aside from the reasons given, we can find a special clue in
the wording of the prophecy, pointing to the intended edict.
The restoration and building of Jerusalem, as the result of the
third edict, lasted 49 years,E or seven weeks of years. We find
the prophetic figure pointing to the advent of Jesus to be
divided in such a way as to correspond to this period:
Know therefore and understand, that from the going forth
of the commandment to restore and to build Jerusalem
unto the Messiah the Prince shall be seven weeks [49
years], and threescore and two weeks [434 years]…
We may ask: why was the prophetic figure divided, and at
the precise point? Now if we take as the starting point the
time when the third decree was issued, we find that the
promised period of 69 weeks or 483 years culminates in the
year 27 A. D., which corresponds to about the beginning of
the last prophetic week (seven years) of Christ’s life. Here are
the calculations:

15Twenty-six years from 1 A. D. brings us to the year 27, and
not 26 A. D. For details, refer to the next chapter.

16E
See Some Answered Questions, 1981 ed., p. 41, Encyclopedia of Bible Difficulties,
1982 ed., p. 291, and The Second Coming Bible Commentary, p. 219.

17218 I Shall Come Again

18The Prophecy of 70 Weeks
In addition to the 69 weeks already discussed, Daniel’s vision
contains other figures:
Seventy weeks are determined upon thy people and upon
thy holy city, to finish the transgression, and to make an
end of sins, and to make reconciliation for iniquity, and
to bring in everlasting righteousness, and to seal up the
vision and prophecy, and to anoint the most Holy.
Daniel 9:24
The preceding prophecy provides us with two definitive
clues: to anoint, and the most Holy. The word Christ comes
from the Greek christos, meaning anointed (the Anointed
One). Similarly, Messiah in Hebrew means anointed. Thus
this prophecy not only refers to the date of the advent of Jesus,
but also to His title Christ. Jesus fulfilled the prophecy both
literally when He was baptized (anointed) by water, and
symbolically when baptized by the Holy Spirit. Moreover, He
confirmed the fulfillment of the preceding prophecy in His
own advent: “The spirit of the Lord is upon me because He
has anointed me…” (Luke 4:18 NEB; Isaiah 61:1-2).
Still another clue: in Daniel’s prophecy, the anointed One is
also called the most Holy. Who else but the divine Redeemer
is deserving of such an exalted title and honor?
What do the words seal up imply? A seal is a sign of con-
firmation or approval. Two of the modern translations of the
Bible use other substitutes for this word. The New American
Bible uses ratify, the Modern Language Bible uses confirm.
The following verse further clarifies the point: “He that hath
received his testimony hath set to his seal that God is true”
(John 3:33).
The prophecy of 69 weeks points to the beginning of the
time of redemption; the prophecy of 70 weeks designates the
end of that opportunity. The prophecy of 70 weeks reminds

19Chapter 9: Cause Thy Face to Shine Upon Thy Sanctuary

20Daniel’s people (called “thy people”) that God allows them
a specific period of grace during which they must put an end
to their transgressions, make amends for their wrongs, and
thus be able to attain everlasting righteousness. They were
given a designated amount of time to prove themselves by
“sealing up the vision,” that is, by accepting its message.
The sign of acceptance was the anointing of the One called
the most Holy, entitled the Messiah, the Christ, or the
Anointed One.
According to the prophecy of 70 weeks and several others
expressing the same theme, the Jews could prevent self-
punishment by avoiding “the abominable acts or transgressions
that cause desolation.” They could attain peace and prosperity
by following God’s commandments and accepting their
promised Savior. The allotted time was to continue until the
advent of the Messiah; His appearance at the appointed time
would constitute the crowning of all the hopes and aspirations
of the chosen people. If they failed to take advantage of
the opportunity accorded them, they would have to face the
consequences. The allotted time reached its last moment
when Christ was crucified.
Now, if we again take as the starting point of the prophecy
the time when the third decree was issued, we find the full
realization of the prophecy in Christ’s crucifixion, believed
to have occurred in the 33rd year of His life, corresponding
to 34 A. D. For according to verse 24, the time allotted to
the Jews was to last seventy prophetic weeks or 490 years.
And this is what happened; after about 490 years, Christ was
crucified:

21Here is how William Miller discovered the beginning point
of Daniel’s prophecy. He knew that Christ was crucified at

22220 I Shall Come Again

23age 33. He subtracted 33 from 490, and got 457. To his
surprise, he found that 457 B. C. was the exact year in which
a decree for the rebuilding of Jerusalem has been issued.
Both dates (69 and 70), however interpreted, bring us re-
markably to the exact time of Christ—the last prophetic week
or seven years of His life. If we do not acknowledge the
fulfillment of Daniel’s prophecy in the advent of Jesus, then:
• We must search for someone other than the Son of God
who would deserve the unsurpassed and exalted title of
the Most Holy as well as the honor of being called the
Anointed or the Messiah.
• We must search for a figure who laid claim to these titles.
The time of the coming of this figure must have been
either less than two years (490 days) after the edict for the
rebuilding of Jerusalem was issued, or at the exact time
of the advent of Christ. Since such a figure does not exist,
denying the relevance of this prophecy to Jesus under-
mines the very purpose and meaning of Daniel’s vision.
The remaining verses of Daniel’s time prophecies present us
with a further indication of their fulfillment in the advent of
Jesus. They predict that the last, or 70th, week will be very
special. During that week the Messiah will confirm God’s
covenant with His people. “And he [the Messiah] shall
confirm the covenant with many for one week” (Daniel 9:27).

24Confirming God’s Covenant

• • •
Chapter 69

With People

1between God and humanity. It describes what the Creator
does for people, and what they must do in return. A Biblical
term that shares an identical meaning with covenant is
testament. Thus the New Testament was a renewal of God’s

2can find many references to a covenant between God and
His creation.
I have set my rainbow in the clouds, and it will be the
sign of the covenant between me and the earth. Whenever
I bring clouds over the earth and the rainbow appears in
the clouds, I will remember my covenant between me and
you and all living creatures of every kind.
Genesis 9:13-15 NIV
One term of God’s covenant is that He will always provide
His children with guidance:
He sent and redeemed his people; he decreed that his
covenant should always endure. Psalms 111:9 NEB
Since humans evolve, the guidance that they need must also
evolve. In the Old Testament, the people of Israel were told
that God would renew His old covenant with them:
Behold, the days come, saith the Lord, that I will make a
new covenant with the house of Israel… Jeremiah 31:31
The coming of Jesus was based on a covenant, confirmed by
an oath; this is called the Divine covenant.
The Lord swore to David an oath which he will not break:
‘A prince of your own line will I set upon your throne.’
Psalms 132:11 NEB
When a new Messenger comes, He always mediates a new
covenant:
…Jesus the mediator of a new covenant…
Hebrews 12:24 NIV
What happens when a new covenant or testament goes into
effect?
By calling this covenant [New Testament] “new,” he
[Jesus] has made the first one obsolete… Hebrews 8:13 NIV
What became obsolete were nonessential laws and rituals,

3sacrifices at the altar. Spiritual laws—love, forgiveness,
and honesty—never become obsolete.
Another reason for renewing the covenant is the increasing
capacity and curiosity of humans for new knowledge. Our
Creator’s response to our increased capacity is called: the
progressive revelation of truth. God in His wisdom selects for
us the spiritual food we can best digest and assimilate.
I gave you milk, not solid food, for you were not yet
ready for it. I Corinthians 3:2 NIV

4Jesus knew far more than He revealed, and He promised that
more knowledge and truth would be disclosed in the future:
I have much more to say to you, more than you can now
bear. But when he, the Spirit of truth, comes, he will
guide you into all truth. John 16:12-13 NIV

5The next prophecy also speaks of mysteries that will be
unveiled:
Therefore, judge nothing before the appointed time; wait
till the Lord comes. He will bring to light what is hidden
in darkness and will expose the motives of men’s hearts.
I Corinthians 4:5 NIV
See also Isa. 28:9-10
The preceding verses clearly point to a new covenant that
will bring to light new truths.
A covenant, like a contract, has more than one side. The
receivers of guidance are always expected to honor the terms
of the agreement:
Then he [Moses] took the book of covenant and read it
aloud for all the people to hear. They said, ‘We will obey,
and do all that the Lord has said.’ Exodus 24:7 NEB
See also Genesis 9:12-17; 17:1-14
Every Messenger and Redeemer promises and predicts the

6The Lord of the universe hath never raised up a prophet
nor hath He sent down a Book unless He hath established
His covenant with all men, calling for their acceptance of
the next Revelation and of the next Book…16 The Báb
Bahá’u’lláh asks us to be loyal to God’s covenant:
…violate not the Covenant of God, nor break your pledge
to Him.17 Bahá’u’lláh
We should now be able to decode Daniel’s prophecy:
And he [the Messiah] shall confirm the covenant with
many for one week… Daniel 9:27
As we noted in verse 24, the people of Israel were given
weeks to “seal up” or “confirm” the vision. That pointed to
their side of the covenant or contract. Verse 27 points to the
other side. According to this verse, the last week of the
weeks is the interval during which the Messiah confirms or
fulfills God’s side of the covenant. (In reference to both sides
of the covenant, words with similar meanings are used: “seal
up,” and “confirm.”) And this is exactly what happened:
during the last week, John the Baptist and Jesus appeared to
fulfill or confirm God’s side of the covenant. Since John the
Baptist was Jesus’ forerunner, He confirmed the covenant
during the first part of the 70th week. The second part of
the verse declares the middle of the 70th week to be a
critical juncture:
…and in the midst of the week he [the Messiah] shall
cause the sacrifice and the oblation [offering] to cease…

• • •
Chapter 70

The Symbolism Of Sacrifice And Oblation

1What do the prophetic words “causing the sacrifice and
oblation [offering] to cease” signify? The rise of a Redeemer
signals the advent of a new Age in the spiritual evolution of

2humanity. It constitutes the dawning of a new dispensation
with a new Sun (Redeemer) through whose radiance the stars
(temporary laws, rites, and rituals) of the previous Faith dis-
appear, to rise again in a new cycle, and with a new splendor.
Among the Jews, the ceremonies of the sanctuary constituted
the basis of all their rituals. They provided a fitting symbol
to signal the dawning of a new age and the need for a new
covenant. For although every divine Teacher reaffirms the
moral-spiritual laws (love, honesty, etc.) of previous Teachers,
He alters some of their temporary laws and practices (ways
or days of worship, forbidden foods, baptism, etc.). Thus the
advent of Jesus signaled the abrogation of previous rites and
rituals, including the making of sacrifices or offerings in the
sanctuary.
The prophecy indicated that “in the midst of the week” the
Messiah “shall cause the sacrifice and oblation to cease.” The
advent of Jesus during the last week (the 70th week) caused
the Jewish ceremonial practices to lose their luster, to become
empty rituals.
Although Jesus by His advent symbolically terminated the
sacrifice and oblation, the literal fulfillment of the prophecy
did not come until sometime later—about 36 years after His
crucifixion when the Romans attacked and destroyed the
temple. The ceremonies of the sanctuary seemingly continued,
but as mere enactments deprived of the spirit.
There is as yet another meaning to the symbol of “causing
the sacrifice and oblation to cease.” The perfect sacrifice
made by the Messiah (His crucifixion) eliminated the need
of making other sacrifices at the altar. (See Heb. 10:12-14.)
Thus we can see that the last, or 70th week, was a unique
interval, replete with many momentous events: first the
reaffirmation and fulfillment of God’s covenant; second the
offering of an opportunity to the people of Israel to end their

3or consecrate their Savior; third the abrogation of Jewish
rituals in the midst of the week (signaling the birth of a new
Day); and finally, at the end of the week, the crucifixion of
Jesus, the literal and perfect sacrifice of the Messiah.
The crucifixion of Jesus was the consummation of the
prophecy, an event that signaled the termination of the op-
portunity granted to Daniel’s people, their last chance to turn
to God’s gift of guidance, to acknowledge the Anointed One.
When Christ uttered His last words on the cross: “It is
finished” (John 19:30), He meant not only the closing of His
earthly life and the fulfillment of His Mission, but also the
end of opportunity for those who had awaited and anticipated
His advent, but failed to awaken from their fantasies. The
words declared the culmination of the 70th week. For Jesus,
death was not the end, but the beginning of a far more
abundant life in paradise. What was “finished” was not His

• • •
Chapter 71

Other Time Prophecies Of The First Advent

1interrelated predictions. In verse 26, immediately after
referring to the martyrdom of the Messiah, the vision points
to “the people of the prince” who shall come and destroy the
city and the sanctuary. Following this the vision describes
further wars and desolations pouring upon the holy city.
Although the allotted time assigned to the people of Israel
expired at the end of the last or 70th week, the outward
consequences of their denial did not immediately ensue. They
received further respite to end “their transgressions and to
bring everlasting righteousness upon themselves.” But they
refused, and because of this, desolations poured upon them
one after the other. The first desolation was wrought by the

2A. D.). They invaded Jerusalem and destroyed the sanctuary,
literally fulfilling Daniel’s prophecy by putting an end to the
ritual of oblation or daily sacrifice.
The last two verses of Daniel’s vision indicate that wars and
desolations will continue until the end of the age. For He
who revealed the prophecy to Daniel knew that the Jews
would not welcome their Savior and therefore would have to
face the consequences. Such a dire and dark destiny for the
people of Israel was also distinctly foretold by Moses.
But if you will not listen to me and…you reject my
decrees…I will bring upon you sudden terror…If after all
this you will not listen to me, I will punish you for your
sins seven times over. I will break down your stubborn
pride…I will turn your cities into ruins and lay waste your
sanctuaries…I will scatter you among the nations…
Leviticus 26:14-33 NIV
The same destiny for the people of Israel was also foretold
by Jesus:
They will fall by the sword and will be taken as prisoners
to all the nations. Jerusalem will be trampled on by the
Gentiles until the times of the Gentiles are fulfilled.

• • •
Chapter 72

Time Prophecies Of The First Advent Based On The Revised Dates

1The calculations offered so far on Daniel’s vision of 69-70
weeks are based on the conventional dates of the birth,
ministry, and crucifixion of Jesus. The exact time of the advent
is believed to have been a few years earlier than commonly
assumed, but has not been definitely determined. Let us see
how the vision proves itself against the revised or corrected
dates.

2Chapter 9: Cause Thy Face to Shine Upon Thy Sanctuary

3The variations brought about by revised dates do not in any
way diminish the accuracy of the prophecy. The reason is that
Daniel’s prophetic dates are stated in units of “seven-year-
periods” (weeks), rather than years. Hence even if we set the
date of the birth, ministry, and crucifixion a few years earlier
than conventionally assumed, the predictions are still valid
because they undoubtedly correspond to the last seven years
(week) of Jesus’ life.
If we base our calculations, for instance, on one of the most
commonly accepted dates of birth and crucifixion, namely,
4 B. C. and 29 a A. D., we find the beginning of Jesus’
ministry to have coincided with 26 A. D.✜ (at age 30), nearly
three years before the crucifixion. Now if we add 457 (the
starting point of the 69-week period) to 26, we get the exact
predicted figure of 483, equaling precisely 69 weeks:
457 + 26 =
69 × 7 =
The above calculation places the crucifixion somewhere
within the 70th week, exactly as foretold.
The relationships between the figures resulting from Daniel’s
prophecy of 69-70 weeks appear quite astounding. For if we
base our calculations on conventional dates, the prophecy of
70 weeks brings us to the exact year of crucifixion and the
exact week (seven-year period) of the ministry. But, if we
base our calculations on the revised dates, the prophecy of
69 weeks brings us to the exact beginning point of the ministry
and the exact week (seven-year period) of the crucifixion.
This may be one reason the prophecies, in this instance, are
stated in units of weeks rather than days. Had they not been
stated in week intervals, they could have confused those
unaware of the revised dates. For they could not have seen
the exact fulfillment of the prophecy of 69 weeks.
a
Although not as yet settled, 4 B. C. and 29 A. D. are among the dates most
commonly confirmed by the scholars.

Encyclopedia Britannica sets the date at 26 or 27 A. D.

4228 I Shall Come Again

5The Prophecy of 62 Weeks
So far, Daniel’s prophetic dates seem to have corresponded
with the events of the advent of the Messiah with marvelous
precision. But Daniel, in addition to 69 and 70 weeks, refers
also to another prophetic figure:
And after threescore and two weeks [62 weeks] shall
Messiah be cut off… Daniel 9:26

6The verse states that after 62 weeks, the Messiah’s physical
connection with the world shall be cut off (He shall be
crucified). The following prophecy from Isaiah links the
meaning of cut off to death:
…how he was cut off from the world of living men,
stricken to the death for my people’s transgression?
Isaiah 53:8 NEB
The relationship between the prophecy of 62 weeks and the
previous ones (69-70 weeks) appears quite puzzling. The
figures 69 and 70 work hand in hand with remarkable
precision. What about the figure of 62? ‘Abdu’l-Bahá explains:
The second period, which is found in the twenty-sixth
verse, means that after the termination of the rebuilding
of Jerusalem until the ascension of Christ, there will be
sixty-two weeks: the seven weeks are the duration of the
rebuilding of Jerusalem, which took forty-nine years.
When you add these seven weeks to the sixty-two weeks,
it makes sixty-nine weeks, and in the last week (69-70)
the ascension of Christ took place. These seventy weeks
are thus completed, and there is no contradiction.18
In other words, the first two verses refer to the beginning
date of the construction of the sanctuary, the last one to the
termination date of the construction. If viewed this way, verse
27 confirms both of the preceding verses (25 and 26), and
as ‘Abdu’l-Bahá states, no contradiction arises. For, as the

7Chapter 9: Cause Thy Face to Shine Upon Thy Sanctuary

8prophecy foretold, after the termination of 69 weeks (namely
in the 70th week) the Messiah’s earthly connection with the
world was cut off.
We can find, with a little scrutiny, a clue in verse 26 confirm-
ing the accuracy of this interpretation. In verse 26, the
figure 69 is given in two parts (62 and 7). This implies that
it is a composite figure pointing to two separate events or
facts; otherwise, one might ask, why was it given in two
segments, and divided at that precise point?
Still another way to decode the mysterious use of 62 in
Daniel’s vision is to see it in its relationship to, and in the
context of, the previous verse:
Verse 25:
Know therefore and understand, that from the going forth
of the commandment to restore and to build Jerusalem
unto the Messiah the Prince shall be seven weeks, and
threescore and two weeks…
Verse 26:
After threescore and two weeks shall Messiah be cut off…
What verse 26 is communicating is that after the designated
period of threescore and two weeks (referred to before) has
passed, the Messiah will be crucified. In other words, the
figure 62 (threescore and two) in verse 26 should not be
regarded as standing alone. It is the repetition of the figure
62 in the preceding verse, which itself is assumed to start
after the termination of a 49-year (seven weeks) period. From
this perspective, all the segments of the vision stand in
perfect accord not only with each other but with the life of
the Messiah (Jesus) as well.
If we add “the” before the phrase “threescore and two
weeks” in verse 25, the meaning becomes clearer. Let us
review these two verses as translated in New American
Standard, with the added the:

9230 I Shall Come Again

10So you are to know and discern that from the issuing of
a decree to restore and rebuild Jerusalem until Messiah the
Prince there will be seven weeks and sixty-two weeks.
Then after the sixty-two weeks the Messiah will be cut off.
The Amplified Bible uses a similar translation:
And after the sixty-two weeks [of years] shall the anointed
one be cut off or killed…[brackets as in source].

• • •
Chapter 73

The Coded Language Of Prophecy The Use Of Seemingly Inconsistent Figures And The Selection Of Signs Or Clues For Signaling The Time Of The First Advent

1other prophecies, especially those pointing to the time of the
second advent. They exemplify the intricacy and complexity
of prophetic language. They indicate how the decoding of
prophecies bears likeness to the solving of complicated puzzles
or the deciphering of ancient and forgotten scripts, requiring
both sustained efforts and a vision free and unhampered.
If it were in harmony with divine Wisdom, Daniel could have
plainly revealed the precise moment of the advent of Christ
in such a way that no one could have entertained the slightest
doubt regarding the event and the circumstances surrounding
it. But as can be noted from the language used in the vision,
divine Wisdom ordained that the bare facts be clothed with
signs and symbols. To review two of the major functions of
symbolic language:
• The armor of symbolism safeguards one of God’s choicest
gifts to His children: their freedom of choice. Those un-
bound by selfish motives or desires can see through the
mists of signs and figures, discerning with awe and won-
der the beauty of the Beloved. Those bound by tradition
stand veiled within their own desires, unable to rise above

2they have the choice—the freedom—to bow to their own
desires, a “reason” to exalt their own fantasies.
At the dawning of every dispensation, people are put to
the test, are given a chance to “expose the motives of their
hearts,” thereby receiving their deserved and due share of
divine bounties:
Therefore, judge nothing before the appointed time;
wait till the Lord comes. He will bring to light what
is hidden in darkness and will expose the motives of
men’s hearts. I Corinthians 4:5 NIV

3• Symbolism protects the prophecies from misuse. Had the
time of the advent of Jesus been plainly foretold, how
many false saviors, one wonders, would have appeared on
the exact appointed day and hour, all claiming divine
inspiration; and how difficult it would have been for the
sincere seekers to benefit from the time prophecies.
As we shall see later, with the exception of the “fruits” of
the divine Messengers, namely their noble words and deeds
and their transforming influence on the world, no proof can
stand fully on its own. Prophecies play a supportive role;
they reinforce other proofs. No one can be expected to ac-
knowledge a Messenger by two or three prophetic dates that
may have come true. Prophecies should always be viewed
and judged in the context of the whole panorama of proofs.
Of course, the greater the number of prophetic dates given
for an event, the greater their persuasive power. Had there
been ten other references confirming the appointed time of
the advent of Jesus, the strength of the prophecy would have
been enormously increased.
If reason and justice dominated the human mind, the recog-
nition of a Redeemer would be a simple task indeed. Because

4ways that He cannot be misjudged or mistaken. But alas, the
clouds of misjudgment often obscure the human vision. This
is why the radiant Sun of righteousness—the glorious Son—
in spite of His transcendent splendor, remained unrecognized
save by a handful of sensitive and devoted disciples to whom
He confided:
For this people’s heart has become calloused; they hardly
hear with their ears, and they have closed their eyes.
Otherwise they might see with their eyes, hear with their
ears, understand with their hearts and turn, and I would
heal them. But blessed are your eyes because they see, and

5Unto Two Thousand and
Three Hundred Days
Daniel 8:14

• • •
Chapter 74

Part I The Date Of The Second Advent In Relation To The First T He Chief Advantage Of Time Prophecies Over Other Prophecies

1least subject to disagreement or misjudgment. For instance,
it is prophesied that during the last days “evil shall abound.”
Such a sign simply points to the character of the age and
cannot constitute a conclusive proof, for the rise and fall of
evil often follows a curve—subtly, imperceptibly. To refute

2been evil in the world, and there always will be. But numbers
are not subject to such objections. They stand on their own.
Furthermore, since time is a passing entity, once a certain
date has passed, it can never return. Hence, an unfulfilled
time prophecy will forever be unfulfilled. The skeptic cannot
explain away the evidence by saying that there have always
been 1844’s, and there always will be.
We must first establish beyond any doubt that God made a
firm covenant with His people that He would send His
Chosen One, Christ, in 1844. If He did, then we face two
alternatives: either He did send Him (even though undetected
by the masses); or He failed to honor His covenant. It is clear
and certain that God fulfills His covenant with us. Hence, the
second alternative is impossible and we are left to consider
only the first. That God fulfills His covenant is a fact clear
and certain:
Heaven and earth will pass away; my words will never
pass away. Christ (Luke 21:33 NEB)
Also Mark 13:31
He who is coming will come and will not delay.
Hebrews 10:37 NIV
Once it is established that the advent is inevitable, our next
step is to seek and identify those who have actually made the
claim at the appointed time. If several are found to have
made the claim, then we must test them by other proofs as
well. And if, from among those tested, one is found to meet,
in addition to the requirement of time, all the other proofs,
then, to be true to God’s covenant and our own convictions,
we have no choice but to acknowledge Him.
Fortunately, our task is made easy for us. The only person
known to have declared Himself the Promised One of all
religions, at the appointed time of 1844, was the Inaugurator
of the New Age, the Báb.
In addition to meeting the prophetic signs (the time, the place,

3to the fullest extent, all the other requirements as well. If this
is true, then, denying their Word and their Mission means
denying the Word of God and ultimately God Himself.
This chapter provides the first link in the long chain of time
prophecies on the second advent. No one is asked to judge
the Báb or Bahá’u’lláh on the basis of a few pieces of
evidence. What matters ultimately is the overall picture of the
prophetic Profile, consisting of hundreds of facts and figures
that fit with marvelous precision.
Because of the number of codes involved in this and the next
chapter, greater effort and patience are needed in examining
their contents. An understanding of these codes provides a
background for the points covered later in the text.

• • •
Chapter 75

Time Prophecies

1remarkable in all history. First, they reveal not only the
exact time of the first advent, but that of the second as well.
Second, he is the only biblical prophet to predict the precise
year of the coming of both the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh. Third,
he reveals the time of the second advent in relation to two
great religions—Christianity and Islam.
The focus of the present chapter is on a time prophecy link-
ing the first advent to the second. Daniel’s other prophecies,
namely those based on the Islamic calendar and history, will
be covered in succeeding chapters.
A distinct feature of Daniel’s time prophecies of the second
advent is their unusual frequency: they appoint the time not
once, but at least five times. Hebrew Scriptures contain fewer
references to the time of the advent of the Promised One of
the people of Israel (Christ’s first coming) than to the time
of the advent of the Promised One of our age. Likewise the

2advent of Islam (next in time to Christianity) than the advent
of the Bahá’í Revelation.
Such a practice holds true of all the other sacred Scriptures.
They all seem to point to a particular Era, and a particular
Messenger—a world Teacher and Savior who brings a new
order and establishes an everlasting peace.

3The Prophecy of 2300 Days
As we noted, many people expected the return of Christ to
occur around 1844. Daniel’s prophecy of “abomination of
desolation” (specifically confirmed by Jesus) was their chief
guide to the discovery of the date. Daniel’s was the prophecy
that initiated the Great Awakening of the mid-19th century,
that moved tens of thousands around the globe to anticipate
the return of their Redeemer. No prophetic message has ever
stirred such excitement, displayed such power, and moved so
many to set their hearts and hopes on heaven. No prophecy
has ever resulted in such high anticipation and bitter dis-
appointment, brought so many tears of joy and grief, inspired
such visions of glory and instilled such fear of gloom in
the hearts of so many. To know what convinced so many
people—among them some of the most conservative and
well-established members of society—to risk their livelihood,
their careers, their reputation, and even their faith, is as
fascinating as it is instructive in understanding history. This
chapter demonstrates whether those who undertook a risk of
such magnitude were stirred by fantasy or moved by reason;
whether their hope was merely a fond dream or the fruit of

• • •
Chapter 76

The Cleansing Of The Sanctuary

1The tabernacle symbolizes all that is holy in religion. It is the
very heart and home of divine revelation, where the Spirit
of God abides. The Jews were often told that by their

2Chapter 10: Unto Two Thousand and Three Hundred Days

3transgressions they defiled and desecrated the seat of God’s
presence among His people:
By your many sins and dishonest trade you have desecrated
your sanctuaries. Ezekiel 28:18 NIV

4Therefore as surely as I live, declares the Sovereign Lord,
because you have defiled my sanctuary with all your vile
images and detestable practices, I myself will withdraw
my favor; I will not look on you with pity or spare you.
Ezekiel 5:11 NIV
See also 23:39

5Her priests profane the sanctuary and do violence to the
law. Zephaniah 3:4 NIV

6The Jews were also told that at the appointed time their Re-
deemer would come to cleanse them of all their transgressions:
I will make them one nation in the land upon the mountains
of Israel…Neither shall they defile themselves any more…
with any of their transgressions: but I will save them…and
will cleanse them: so shall they be my people, and I will
be their God…and they all shall have one shepherd…
Ezekiel 37:22-24
Expressions such as “they shall be my people, and I will be
their God” appear several times in both the Old and New
Testaments in relation to the advent of the Redeemer of our
time. The following prophecy, which relates to our time,
indicates that God comes with His tabernacle to dwell among
His people. He cleanses or restores His tabernacle by bring-
ing a new one:
And I heard a great voice out of heaven saying, Behold,
the tabernacle of God is with men, and he will dwell with
them, and they shall be his people, and God himself shall
be with them, and be their God…the former things are
passed away…I make all things new… Revelation 21:3-5

7238 I Shall Come Again

8…he who sits on the throne [the Redeemer] will spread his
tent [tabernacle] over them [the believers]…the Lamb at
the center of the throne will be their shepherd…
Revelation 7:15,17 NIV

9When Shall These Things Be?
When Jesus was on the Mount of Olives, He spoke of the
dark future, of the desolation of the temple or sanctuary. The
disciples recognized their Master’s intent, so they asked Him
about both the time and the signs of His return. In response
to their question, Jesus offered many instructions, among
them two clues to the time of His advent. This chapter will
examine one of them. Here is the question asked by the
disciples:
And as he sat upon the mount of Olives, the disciples
came unto him privately, saying, Tell us, when shall these
things be? And what shall be the sign of thy coming, and of
the end of the world [the end of the age]? Matthew 24:3
To this Jesus responded:
When ye therefore shall see the abomination of desolation,
spoken of by Daniel the prophet, stand in the holy place,
(whoso readeth, let him understand)… Matthew 24:15
See also Mark 13:14

10There are two prophecies in Daniel that not only contain the
key expression the abomination of desolation used by Jesus,
but also a prophetic number. One of them is the prophecy
of 1290 days (to be examined in Chapter 17); the other is
the prophecy of 2300 days. The latter is the subject of this
chapter:
Then I heard one saint speaking, and another saint said
unto that certain saint which spake, How long shall be the
vision concerning the daily sacrifice, and the transgression
of desolation, to give both the sanctuary and the host to

11Chapter 10: Unto Two Thousand and Three Hundred Days

12be trodden under foot? And he said unto me, Unto two
thousand and three hundred days; then shall the sanctuary
be cleansed…So he came near where I stood: and when
he came, I was afraid, and fell upon my face: but he said
unto me, Understand, O son of man: for at the time of the
end shall be the vision. Daniel 8:13, 14,
This prophecy is so critical we should see it in another
translation:
Then I heard a holy one speaking, and another holy one
said to him, “How long will it take for the vision to be
fulfilled—the vision concerning the daily sacrifice, the
rebellion that causes desolation, and the surrender of the
sanctuary and of the host that will be trampled underfoot?”
He said to me, “It will take 2300 evenings and mornings;
then the sanctuary will be reconsecrated [cleansed and
restored AB]”…“Son of man,” he said to me, “understand
that the vision concerns the time of the end.”
Daniel 8:13, 14, 17 NIV
The prophecy concerns the destiny of the people of Israel. By
the time Daniel had his vision, the Jews had been suffering
humiliation for many centuries. Their sanctuary, which
symbolized their glory, had been made desolate. The loss of
their glory came about because they broke their covenant
with God; they transgressed against His Commandments.
The saint was concerned about the desecration and pollution
of the sanctuary and wanted to know when they would end.
He was also concerned about the adversities and humiliations
the people of Israel had been enduring, and he wanted to give
them some knowledge of their bright future. He, therefore,
asked: how long will “the transgression that causes desolation”
continue? “How long will this misfortune, this ruin, this abase-
ment and degradation last? ” 1 How long will the sanctuary
(the symbol of God’s presence among His people and of
spiritual honor and survival of the Jews) and those who
protect and serve it (the host) receive humiliation and “be

13240 I Shall Come Again

14trampled under foot?” The other saint responded that the
desolation and pollution and dishonoring of the sanctuary
will last for 2300 days. After that period, it will be cleansed
and made holy.
The overall message of the prophecy is simple, yet it is
concealed in codes. It contains these coded expressions:
• The daily sacrifice.
• The rebellion or transgression that causes desolation
(abomination of desolation).
• The humiliation of the sanctuary and its host (being
trampled under foot).
• 2300 days.
• The cleansing of the sanctuary.
Two of the preceding codes have already been deciphered. To
repeat:
• The daily sacrifice symbolizes the setting and the dawning
of religious cycles. (See the preceding chapter.)
• “Abomination of desolation” points to the abominable acts
or transgressions performed by the people of Israel; acts
that led to desolation of the sanctuary and the humiliation
of its host (the Jews).
Three codes remain to be clarified: (1) the cleansing of the
sanctuary, (2) the beginning point of 2300 days, and (3) the
length of the 2300 days.
What does the cleansing of the sanctuary symbolize? This
question is so critical, it will be examined later in great depth.
Briefly, it symbolizes any or all of the following:
• Rebuilding and reviving the desolate centers of worship;
purifying them from human innovations and deviations
• Restoring the divine power to the world
• Reviving and cleansing the very heart and home of religion
• Preparing the ground for the seat of God’s Kingdom

15Chapter 10: Unto Two Thousand and Three Hundred Days

16• Cleansing the “temples” of the human heart
• Restoring spiritual health to the distressed spirit of humanity
Note this promise from Jesus:
I will not leave you desolate; I will come to you.
John 14:18 RSV
To simplify the interpretation of the vision, it seems best to
study this symbol first quite briefly and then examine it in
greater depth later in the chapter. As we noted, the prophecy of
the first advent declared that the Jews’ first opportunity to
restore themselves spiritually would arrive after 69 prophetic
weeks and terminate at the end of the 70th week (490 years).
This knowledge was revealed in response to Daniel’s prayer
for the restoration of God’s holy place, Jerusalem, and its
sanctuary:
…O Lord, make thy face shine upon thy desolate sanc-
tuary…and look upon our desolation and upon the city
that bears thy name [Jerusalem]… Daniel 9:17-18 NEB

17The segment of Daniel’s vision we are now studying gave
the people of Israel the tidings of a second opportunity,
which would arrive after 2300 prophetic days (years). If they
refused their first opportunity, the vision predicted, if they
failed to anoint their first Messiah, they would have to wait
for a second time. This knowledge was revealed after an
angel expressed concern about the fate of the Holy Place:
…how long will…impiety cause desolation, and both the
Holy Place and the fairest of all lands [Jerusalem] be
given over to be trodden down? Daniel 8:13 NEB
As in the prophecy of the first advent, the response given
concerned the restoration of the Holy Place:
For two thousand three hundred evenings and mornings;
then the Holy Place shall emerge victorious.
Daniel 8:14 NEB

18242 I Shall Come Again

19…then the sanctuary shall be cleansed and restored.

• • •
Chapter 77

The Amplified Bible

1and second Advents, the beginning of the timetable given is
linked to the physical restoration of Jerusalem, and its termi-
nation to its spiritual restoration. This was a key code through
which the prophecy was concealed. Since the cleansing of
the sanctuary plays perhaps the most critical role in the
prophecy, it is explored in great depth in Appendix I. It
presents fifteen reasons, based on scriptural evidence, to
prove conclusively that the phrase points to the coming of
the expected Redeemer of the world.
Next we should decode the date. What is the starting point
of the prophecy? The starting point of the prophecy of 2300
days is the same as that of 69-70 weeks. Why? First, both
of the prophetic figures, namely 69-70 weeks and 2300 days,
are parts of the same continuing vision. (See the section
entitled The Similarities Between Daniel’s Vision of the First
and Second Advents, later in this chapter.) Second, when
Jesus referred the seekers to Daniel’s vision of abomination,
He said:
…whoso readeth, let him understand… Matthew 24:15
If it were not possible to identify all the essential facts for
the decoding of the vision, Jesus would not have made such
a statement. Both the vision and Jesus’ confirmation of the
vision would have been totally useless. Third, we find
hundreds of seekers and scholars from many cultures using
the same starting point and arriving at almost the same
conclusion. These seekers were so sure of their findings that
even after they failed to find their Redeemer in the clouds,
they still maintained that their calculations were correct. For
instance, William Miller, the greatest figure in the Advent
Movement wrote:
Were I to live my life over again, with the same evidence
that I then had, to be honest with God and man I should

2Fourth, the prophecy of 2300 days is only one of at least
biblical prophecies (see chapters 11 through 17) pointing to
the year 1844. Therefore, we have 15 others that confirm this
one to the exact year.
As we noted in the preceding chapter, the beginning of the
time period for Daniel’s vision dates back to 457 B. C., when
the third edict for the rebuilding of Jerusalem was issued.
That figure was the beginning point for determining the time
of the first advent. To discover the intended date of the
second advent we need to find two intervals of time on both
sides of 1 A. D. that would add up to 2300. We already
know the interval that precedes the birth of Jesus, namely,
457. The other figure is 1843.

3457 + 1843 = 2300
Since the Christian calendar began with the year one instead
of zero, whenever we move from B. C. to A. D., we need to
make a correction, otherwise we will have one uncounted
extra year. An example will clarify the point. When a baby
is born, we do not say he is one year old. Yet this is exactly
what happened to Christianity. It was considered one year old
at its birth. Thus 1844 A. D., when the Báb declared His
Mission, was in fact 1843 A. D.!
Daniel’s vision points to two time intervals:
• 69-70 weeks, which ended with the crucifixion of Jesus.
• 2300 days, which ended in 1844.
Its numerical message is that there will be two prophetic
periods: a long stretch of time (2300 years), and a short one
(490 years), which would be “determined” or cut off from the
2300 years. According to a Christian source:
The Hebrew word for determined is “chathak” and literally
means “cut out” or “marked off ”…Therefore, what God is

4is cut out or marked off for the Jewish people until the
beginning of the Millennium.3 a
The first part of the 2300-year period (which was to last
years) ended in 34 A. D., the conventional date when Christ
was crucified at the age of 33.✜ (Thirty-three years beyond
1 A. D. brings us to 34 A. D.) The second part of the 2300-
year period should therefore begin in 34 A. D. and continue
for 1810 more years, which would bring us to 1844 A. D.
That was the second appointed time for the restoration of the
sanctuary, when the expected Savior was promised to come.
Tables I and II portray the prophecies predicting the dates of
Christ’s first and second comings together.
To summarize the calculations:
• The duration of both prophetic periods = 2300 years.
• The duration of the first prophetic period = 70 prophetic
weeks, or 490 years (ending in 34 A. D.).
• The duration of the second prophetic period (or the re-
mainder of 2300 years) = 2300 – 490 = 1810.
• The year in which the 2300-year period terminated =
1810 + 34 = 1844.
If we use the prophecy of 69 weeks, we will come once
again to the same conclusion:
• The duration of the first prophetic period = 69 prophetic
weeks, or 483 years (ending in 27 A. D.).

5a
Leroy Froom writes: “the 70 weeks are the first segment of the 2300 days. And
Gabriel was instructed to make plain the vision, from which the 70 weeks were
determined, or cut off. No Hebrew scholar has denied it; the best scholars admit
it should read ‘cut off ’—the remaining years extending beyond the 490.” The
Prophetic Faith of Our Fathers, Vol. 4, p. 873.
✜ The dates of the birth and crucifixion of Christ do not affect the length of time

6• The duration of the second prophetic period (or the re-
mainder of 2300 years) = 2300 – 483 = 1817.
• The year in which the 2300-year period terminated =

• • •
Chapter 78

Table I

1Prediction of Christ’s Prediction of Christ’s
first coming: second coming:
70 weeks or 490 years 2300 days

2490 + 1810 = 2300

3456 + 1844 = 2300✜

4246 I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 79

Table Ii

169 Weeks and 2300 Days

2The first prophetic The second prophetic
period: the length of period: the length
time between the of time between the
rebuilding of Jerusalem first and second
and the beginning of advents
Christ’s first advent:
69 weeks or 483 years

• • •
Chapter 80

The Length Of Time Between The Rebuilding Of Jerusalem And The Second Coming Of

1The figure 1817 coincides with the year in which Bahá’u’lláh
was born; in other words, the length of time between the first
advent and second advent of Christ equals the birth-date of
Bahá’u’lláh.
Beyond the date, the prophecy offers two other clues. First,
the edict for rebuilding the Holy City was issued in Persia, the
same country where 2300 years later the promised Redeemer
was to appear. Second, Daniel received his vision of 2300
days in Elam, an area near Shíráz, the city in which the Báb
was born and then declared His Mission in the appointed year
(1844)—precisely 2300 years after the issuing of the third
edict to rebuild the Holy City. Here is the part of Daniel’s

2…while I was in Susa the capital city of the province of
Elam, a vision appeared to me, Daniel, similar to my
former vision. Daniel 8:1-2 NEB
Another prophecy designates Elam as the place where God’s
Throne—a symbol of His Kingdom—will be set:
I will set my throne in Elam… Jeremiah 49:38
This verse links throne with sanctuary:
A glorious throne [throne of glory, NEB], exalted from the
beginning, is the place of our [God’s] sanctuary.
Jeremiah 17:12 NIV
And finally, the decree to rebuild Jerusalem was issued in
the spring of 457 B. C., the same season in which the Báb
declared His Mission (May 23). Once again we see how
precisely the prophecy is fulfilled. For from the spring of
B. C. to the spring of 1844 A. D. there are exactly 2300 years.
Perhaps when Jesus used a parable to show that the seekers
could tell the season of His return (Matt. 24:32), He enclosed
a literal message in the parable. Both the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh
declared their Mission in Spring, a time coinciding with the

• • •
Chapter 81

The Law Of Double Fulfillment

1A principle that’s absolutely necessary to understand in
interpreting prophecy is a law called “The law of double
fulfillment.” Simply stated, this involves any two or more
predicted events widely separated in times as far as their
fulfillment is concerned, but they are brought together
within the scope of one prophecy. The first, partial fulfill-
ment, becomes a further assurance of the second, more

2Uriah Smith, a Christian scholar, confirms the relevance of
the preceding principle to Daniel’s prophecy:
By the events given to transpire in the seventy weeks, the
prophecy is tested. By this the application of the whole
vision is determined. If the events of this period are
accurately fulfilled, the prophecy is of God, and will all
be accomplished; and if these seventy weeks are fulfilled
as weeks of years, then the 2300 days of which these are
a part, are so many years. Thus the events of the seventy
weeks furnish a key to the whole vision.5
That was the key that inspired William Hales, a Christian
writer, to declare:
…there is no other number in the Bible, whose genuine-
ness is better ascertained than that of 2300 days.6
That was the key that led the seekers in various parts of
the globe to discover the same date. In the words of Leroy
Froom:
It was this grand clue—of the seventy weeks as the first
segment of the 2300 years, cut off for the Jews and cli-
maxing with the Messiah—that burst simultaneously upon
the minds of men in Europe and America, and even in
Asia and Africa. This was the great advance truth that led
to the emphasis upon the 2300 years from 457 B. C. to
A. D. 1843 or 1844 which we have surveyed. Clearer and
clearer became the perception in the first four decades
of the nineteenth century, until it reached its peak in
America in the summer and autumn of 1844, contempo-
raneously with the predicted time of the prophecy.7
That was the clue that convinced William Miller, the leader
of the Advent Movement in the West, of his discovery:
Therefore the death of Christ would make Daniel’s vision

3as to time and manner, then the remainder of the vision
would be accomplished in manner and time, as literally as
the seventy weeks had been.8
And again:
I then begged the privilege, and do now, for any person
to show me any failure of proof on this point, or where,
possibly, according to Scripture, there may be a failure in
the calculation I have made on this vision. I have not yet,
by seventeen years study, been able to discover where I

• • •
Chapter 82

To Conclude

116 biblical prophecies designating the exact year of the
second advent of Christ. Since it predicts both advents in
the context of the same continuing vision, it occupies a
position of preeminence among all the other time prophecies.
Not only that, it receives Jesus' own seal of approval, for He
directed His inquisitive disciples to this vision, admonishing
them as well as other seekers to use discernment in unravel-
ing its meaning:
…let the reader understand… Matthew 24:15 NEB

2…let the reader take notice and ponder and consider and
heed [this]… The Amplified Bible

3For these reasons, it may be timely, even at such an early
stage of our search into time prophecies, to pause and
ponder. Would God in His infinite wisdom, only partially
fulfill His covenant with us by sending His promised
Redeemer at the first appointed time, but not at the second?
After all the assurances that God gives us through His chosen

4in the vision, and in spite of the undeniable fulfillment of one
segment of the vision (that designates the time of the first
advent and by its realization confirms the remaining segment),
can we still doubt the divine words?
My covenant will I not break, nor alter the thing that is

5Unto Two Thousand and
Three Hundred Days
Daniel 8:14

• • •
Chapter 83

Part Ii The Tarrying Time

1it appears that Jesus should have come in 1843, and not
1844. But as mentioned, there is a problem with this calculation.
The Christian calendar began with year one, instead of year
zero. There never was a year zero. This caused a discrepancy
of one year between the actual time intervals and the calendar.
The calendar, as adopted, is one year ahead of time. Failure
to take this point into account caused some seekers to set the

2God in His infinite wisdom encouraged all seekers not to give
up hope too soon. They were told that “even if it delays, wait
for it:”
Then the Lord made answer: Write down the vision,
inscribe it on tablets, ready for a herald to carry it with
speed; for there is still a vision for the appointed time. At
the destined hour it will come in breathless haste, it will
not fail. If it delays [seems to tarry NRSV], wait for it; for
when it comes [there] will be no time to linger.
Habakkuk 2:2-3 NEB
So do not throw away your confidence; it will be richly
rewarded. You need to persevere so that when you have
done the will of God, you will receive what he has
promised. For in just a very little while, “He who is com-

• • •
Chapter 84

The Exact Time Never Revealed

1the hour—of the dawning of His revelations remains concealed.
He clothes even the year of their appearance with mystery
until its appointed time approaches. Jesus said that He was
sent to proclaim “the acceptable year of the Lord” (Luke
4:18-19), yet He refrained from specifying the exact time:
No one knows about that day or hour, not even the angels
in heaven, nor the Son, but only the Father. Be on guard!
Be alert! You do not know when that time will come. It’s
like a man going away: He leaves his house in charge of
his servants, each with his assigned task, and tells the one
at the door to keep watch. Therefore keep watch because
you do not know when the owner of the house will come
back—whether in the evening, or at midnight, or when the
rooster crows, or at dawn. If he comes suddenly, do not
let him find you sleeping. What I say to you, I say to

2From this verse alone the seekers in the mid-19th century
should have discovered that the advent was not to be a literal
descent from heaven. Otherwise, why would they need to
stay awake? They would know anyway.
Another passage relevant to the present theme is this:
So when they met together, they asked him, “Lord, are
you at this time going to restore the kingdom to Israel?”
He said to them: “It is not for you to know the times or
dates the Father has set by his own authority. But you will
receive power when the Holy Spirit comes on you…”
Acts 1:6-8 NIV
Again we see Jesus declining to give more information than
that which was already destined to be known. He stated that
it served them no purpose to know the date of the advent,
and that in due time the Holy Spirit would give the people
the power to unseal the mystery.
We find the same rule followed in the Qur’án. The exact year
(1844) of the return of Christ—as we shall see in Volume
IV—is specified at least four times in the Qur’án. Yet when
people asked about the time, they received an answer almost
identical with that given by Jesus:
They will ask thee of the Hour…Say [thus sayeth the
Lord]: The knowledge of it is only with my Lord; none
shall manifest it in its time but He; it is the burden of the
Heavens and of the Earth…on a sudden will it come on
you. Qur’án 7:186
See also Qur’án 33:63a
The same rule also holds true in relation to the first advent
of Christ. In that case, the question was even more com-
plicated. For from Daniel’s time prophecy alone even the

3a
Selections from the Qur’án are mostly from Rodwell’s translation. Two other
translations used are those of Yúsuf ‘Alí, identified as “Y” and A. J. Arberry,
identified as “A”. The numbering of the verses of the Qur’án varies from

4year of Jesus’ advent could not be calculated with certainty.
People could have wondered: “Which of the last two decrees
should serve as the starting point of the prophecy?” (The first
two were already outdated.) Once again we see that the people

• • •
Chapter 85

Proclaiming The Year Of The Lord Those Who Believe That The Knowledge Of The Year Of The Advent

1of Christ is a well-kept secret, unknown and unknowable,
should ponder these points:
• Jesus said “no one knows about that day or hour” (Matt.
24:36 NIV). He did not say that “No one will know,” or
that in due time “God will not inspire the wise to know.”
• As we just noted (Acts 1:6-8), Jesus told His disciples that
they did not need to know the date of the expected king-
dom, but that in due time they will receive power to gain
such a knowledge.
• Daniel confirmed the same fact by pointing to the unseal-
ing of the Book in the future, namely at the time of the
end (Daniel 12:4; 12:9; 8:26-27). Daniel received several
time prophecies whose meaning he could not understand.
He was then told that they will remain sealed until “the
time of the end.”
The verse quoted earlier from the Qur’án (7:186) confirms
both the Old and the New Testaments. When people asked
about “the Hour,” they were told “none shall manifest it
in its time but He.” And again:
To every prophecy is its set time, and bye-and-bye ye
shall know it! Qur’án 6:66
• Just before saying that “no one knows about that day or
hour,” Jesus used an analogy (Matt. 24:32-33) to imply
that from His prophecies (some of which point to the year
of His return) the seekers will be able to discover “the
season” of His return, even as they would detect the

2Chapter 11: Unto Two Thousand and Three Hundred Days

3approach of the summer from the new leaves. Like “day or
hour,” season is a time word, but it is less precise.
• If the date-prophecies were not to be unsealed in due
time, what purpose would they serve? The chief purpose
of prophecy is to prepare the seekers of truth.
• Jesus declared that He had come to preach the acceptable
year of the Lord; “to proclaim the year of the Lord’s favor ”
(Luke 4:19 NIV).
Surely the Sovereign Lord does nothing without reveal-
ing his plan to his servants the prophets. Amos 3:7 NIV
…behold, I have foretold you all things.
Christ (Mark 13:23)
• Our purpose now is to prove that the advent has taken
place. We are no longer referring to the future.
• We are asked not to “despise prophetic utterances, but
bring them all to the test” (I Thess. 5:20-21 NEB). To
ignore the time prophecies is to despise them.
• The date of the advent forms only a part of the proofs. It
should be viewed in the context of all proofs.
Whether we seek earthly or heavenly food, to produce a crop,
we must persist. How many millions, through the ages, were
deprived of the heavenly harvest of Jesus because they dis-
regarded this divine law—that without effort and patience
nothing great can be accomplished, that the honor of know-
ing the truth is bestowed only on those who strive with
hope, faith, and courage. As Bahá’u’lláh suggests, constantly
ask yourself: why did so many Jews—scholars and laymen
alike—deny the very Messiah for whose Advent they were
praying day and night?
But the seed in good soil represents those who bring a
good and honest heart to the hearing of the word, hold it
fast, and by their perseverance yield a harvest.
Christ (Luke 8:15 NEB)
See also Heb. 10:36; Matt. 24:13

4256 I Shall Come Again

5Similarities Between Daniel’s Vision
of the First and Second Advents
Sometimes the prophecies of the first and second advents are
intertwined. Sir Isaac Newton recognized this link:
There is scarcely a prophecy of the Messiah in the Old
Testament which does not to some extent at least refer to
His second coming.1
The similarities and relationships between the two segments
of Daniel’s visions—namely the one designating the time of
Christ’s first advent (69-70 weeks) and the one specifying the
time of His second advent (2300 days)—are remarkable. Both
constitute part of a continuing vision dreamed by Daniel and
recorded in succession in two consecutive chapters of his
book (8 and 9). Both refer to the illumination, restoration,
or purification, and both speak of the termination of the
daily sacrifice or offering. In both parts of the dream Daniel
experiences astonishment and wonder as to the meaning or
significance of his spiritual encounters, and in both cases the
same angel, Gabriel, comes to his aid. In one case he hears
someone saying: “Gabriel, make this man [Daniel] to under-
stand the vision” (Dan. 8:16). In another instance he hears
Gabriel himself speaking: “O Daniel, I am now come forth
to give thee skill and understanding” (Dan. 9:22).
Verse 21 clearly indicates the continuity of the dream and
the inseparable link between the two time intervals. Let us
review this verse along with the three interrelated verses
following it:
…while I was still in prayer, Gabriel, the man I had seen
in the earlier vision, came to me in swift flight about the
time of the evening sacrifice. He instructed me and said
to me, “Daniel, I have now come to give you insight and
understanding. As soon as you began to pray, an answer
was given, which I have come to tell you, for you are
highly esteemed. Therefore, consider the message and

6Chapter 11: Unto Two Thousand and Three Hundred Days

7understand the vision: Seventy ‘sevens’ are decreed for
your people and your holy city to finish transgression, to
put an end to sin, to atone for wickedness, to bring in
everlasting righteousness, to seal up vision and prophecy
and to anoint the most holy.” Daniel 9:21-24 NIV
When Daniel states: “Gabriel, the man I had seen in the
earlier vision,” he is indeed referring to his vision of 2300
days (which had immediately preceded that of the 70 weeks).
For it was Gabriel himself who had, a short while earlier,
appeared to him and informed him of the 2300-day interval.
And since Daniel could not fully comprehend what 2300 days
signified, Gabriel came to his aid by offering him further
facts: that far in advance of 2300 days, his people would
have another opportunity to restore or redeem themselves.
If they refused to turn to their expected Savior at the first
appointed time, then they would have to wait for the time of
the end, the dawn of the promised Kingdom, which would
arrive centuries later.
The similarities between the two parts of Daniel’s vision are
remarkable. Yet in spite of their many common elements,
they differ in one significant way. The part of the vision
concerning the first advent makes no mention of “the time
of the end”; but the part concerning the second advent points
to “the time of the end” in different ways:
“Son of man,” he said to me, “understand that the vision
concerns the time of the end.” Daniel 8:17 NIV
…the vision concerns the appointed time of the end.
Daniel 8:19 NIV
So that no one will doubt the truth of the divine testament
and the realization of God’s eternal and unswerving covenant
with man, Daniel, in the course of the dream, is assured that:
The vision of the evenings and mornings that has been
given you is true, but seal up the vision, for it concerns
the distant future [emphasis added]. Daniel 8:26 NIV

8258 I Shall Come Again

9And this is precisely what happened; the vision remained
sealed. For over two millennia no one was allowed to unseal
its mysteries, until the dawn of the advent of the Báb and
Bahá’u’lláh drew near.
The phrase “distant future” presents us with one more
evidence that the days intended in the vision are “prophetic,”
not literal. Literally, 2300 days equals about six years and
four months, an interval well within the life span of Daniel
and his contemporaries.

• • •
Chapter 86

Stand In The Holy Place

1One more code remains to be deciphered. When Jesus re-
ferred His disciples to Daniel’s prophecy, He said:
When ye therefore shall see the abomination of desolation,
spoken of by Daniel the prophet, stand in the holy place,
(whoso readeth, let him understand) [emphasis added].
Matthew 24:15
What does “stand in the holy place” imply? It carries a clue
or coded message that holds the key to understanding the
purpose of Daniel’s prophecy. The clue can be decoded by
these prophetic verses that pertain to our time:
Who may go up the mountain of the Lord [Mt. Carmel]?
And who may stand in his holy place? He who has clean
hands and a pure heart, who has not set his mind on false-
hood, and has not committed perjury. He shall receive a
blessing from the Lord, and justice from God his savior.
Such is the fortune of those who seek him, who seek the
face of the God of Jacob [emphasis added].
Psalms 24:3-6 NEB
As we shall see, these verses as well as those that follow them
point specifically to the advent of the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh.
They also contain the key that unlocks Jesus’ intention in

2Chapter 11: Unto Two Thousand and Three Hundred Days

3using the critical passage. He asks those who wish to under-
stand Daniel’s prophecy to “stand in the holy place.” How
can we do this? As the Psalmist declares, we can do this by
purifying our hearts and deeds (hands) from that which stands
between us and our Creator—the veils of separation.a Our
efforts in this spiritual venture, as the Psalmist declares, will
cause the outpourings of divine blessings and bounties.
The following verses also declare the same message:
Lord, who may dwell in your sanctuary? Who may live
on your holy hill? He whose walk is blameless and who
does what is righteous… Psalms 15:1-2 NIV
Our experience as well as the Scriptures testify that knowl-
edge does not always in itself result in a change of heart,
habits, or attitudes. Examples are many. Millions regard
prejudice as an evil, yet they practice it. Millions with sound
minds and full knowledge of the consequences of habits
harmful to their health, continue to disregard this knowledge
even though their very lives may be at stake. Wars have been
waged and cruelties inflicted on the innocent by some of the
best educated societies.
For most people it is the heart—not the mind—that decides
what they should believe. For instance, after 2,000 years of
missionary work, Christians are still a minority on our planet.
Dr. James Kennedy notes:
The Bible never calls us to blind faith but always to a
faith in that which has been established by evidence. The
evidence for Jesus Christ is absolutely overwhelming. No
one disbelieves in Christ because of a lack of evidence…
For those who are honest seekers after the truth there is
abundant evidence.2

4a
Most new translations of the Bible use the phrase, “standing in the holy place”
instead of “stand in the holy place.” In this case, the verse would imply that,
“when you see desolation is standing in, or occupying, the holy place.” Both
meanings are possible.

5260 I Shall Come Again

6Knowledge in itself is not, as it may seem, the key that can
open the heart to truth. The heart commands powers and
conceives schemes of which the mind knows nothing.
When the Psalmist asks: “Who may go up the mountain of
the Lord? And who may stand in his holy place?” What does
he mean by “the mountain of the Lord”? He means Mt.
Carmel (see Volume II). That is where Bahá’u’lláh pitched
the tabernacle of Glory. And what does he mean by “his holy
place”? He means the domain of the new Redeemer’s sanc-
tuary, the tabernacle of His Glory. The third message in the
following verse also declares purity of heart to be the light
that reveals the Master’s identity:
That is the day when I come like a thief! Happy the man
who stays awake and keeps on his clothes…
Revelation 16:15 NEB
What does Jesus mean by “keeps on his clothes”? It is
evident He refers to the person who protects and adorns his
heart with heavenly virtues, among them purity:
Fine linen stands for the righteous acts of the saints.
Revelation 19:8 NIV
By saying “when you see the abomination of desolation
spoken by Daniel, stand in the holy place,” Jesus communi-
cates these messages:
• When you see the time has come for the fulfillment of
Daniel’s prophecy in which the key phrase “abomination
of desolation” is used, strive to stand in the new sanctuary
that has been raised, cleansed, and consecrated by the new
Redeemer.
• Purity of heart and mind is the only standing from which
you can enter the new sanctuary. If you approach that
holy and hallowed place with a mind set by tradition,
a heart stained by preconceived notions or personal de-
sires, and with hands attached to the world, you cannot
enter therein.

7Chapter 11: Unto Two Thousand and Three Hundred Days

8O SON OF SPIRIT !
My first counsel is this: Possess a pure, kindly and radiant
heart, that thine may be a sovereignty ancient, imperish-
able and everlasting.3 Bahá’u’lláh

9Blessed are the poor in spirit, for theirs is the kingdom of
heaven…Blessed are the pure in heart, for they will see
God. Christ (Matthew 5:3,8 NIV)

10What does Jesus mean by “the poor in spirit”? To attain the
presence of God, the soul must travel through seven stages
or “valleys.” The final stage is:
The valley of true poverty and absolute nothingness. This
station is the dying from self and the living in God, the
being poor in self and rich in the Desired One. Poverty
as here referred to signifieth being poor in the things of the
created world, rich in the things of God’s world.4
Bahá’u’lláh
The evidence presented in this chapter clearly indicates that
“the cleansing of the sanctuary” in Daniel’s prophecy signi-
fies nothing short of the advent of the divine Redeemer;
nothing short of the coming of the One in whose hands lies
the power to purify the defiled “temples” of the human spirit,
and to restore the glory of God and the power of faith to the
Centers of Worship.
Restore us, O God, and make thy face shine upon us that
we may be saved. O Lord God of Hosts, how long wilt
thou resist thy people’s prayer? Psalms 80:3-4 NEB

11…do not withdraw from the sanctuary of His presence, for,
by the righteousness of the One true God, He is none
other than the sovereign Truth from God…5 The Báb

12Do not be stubborn as your forefathers were; submit your-
selves to the Lord and enter his sanctuary…
II Chronicles 30:8 NEB

13262 I Shall Come Again

14O thou who art waiting, tarry no longer, for He is come.
Behold His Tabernacle and His Glory dwelling therein.
It is the Ancient Glory, with a new Manifestation.6
Bahá’u’lláh

• • •
Chapter 87

The Times Of The Gentiles

1T he Bible foretells the advent of a religion between Christ’s
first and second comings, referring to its followers as the
Gentiles (non-Jews). The biblical prophecies on this faith find
their fulfillment in Islam, the only independent religion born
between the rise of Christianity and 1844 A. D.
It is intriguing that the voice of prophecy should have specified
the date of Christ’s second coming not only in relation to the
date of His first coming, but also in relation to the calendar
of the next religion, Islam, destined to appear about 600 years
after Christ’s first coming and 1200 years before His second
coming. This might have been done for a number of reasons.
First, the promised Savior was to appear among the Muslims,

2Islam was the only independent religion to appear between
the first and the second advents, a religion destined to estab-
lish a great civilization, and to gain over the course of its
history many millions of followers. How could a religion of
such stature remain out of the scope of biblical prophecy? As
we shall note in this chapter, the Book of Revelation predicts
not only the advent of the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh but that of

• • •
Chapter 88

The Times Of The Gentiles

1time of the advent to “the times of the Gentiles.” As stated,
when Jesus was on the Mount of Olives, He spoke of the
desolation of the temple and the dark future in store for
the Jews. The disciples discerned the intent of their Master,
and so they asked about both the signs and the time of His
return:
‘Tell us,’ they said, ‘when will this happen? And what
will be the signal for your coming and the end of the
age?’ Matthew 24:3 NEB
The same question is recorded in Luke but with minor
variations:
‘Master,’ they asked, ‘when will it all come about? What
will be the sign when it is due to happen?’ Luke 21:7 NEB
Jesus responded to both questions. (His response to the
second question, namely the signs of the time, will be
covered in Volumes II and III.) As for the time, He made two
references. The first reference He made was to “the abomi-
nation of desolation spoken of by Daniel.” (This prophecy
was examined in detail in the preceding chapter.) The other
reference He made was to “the fulfillment or completion of
the times of the Gentiles:”
…and Jerusalem shall be trodden down of the Gentiles,

2To enhance clarity, let us review the question and Jesus’
response in two modern translations:
And they asked Him, Teacher, when will this happen, and
what sign will there be when this is about to occur? And
He said…Jerusalem will be trodden down by the Gentiles
until the times of the Gentiles are fulfilled—completed…
And then they will see the Son of man coming…
Luke 21:7, 8, 24, 27 AB

3‘Master,’ they asked, ‘when will it all come about? What
will be the sign when it is due to happen?’ He said…
Jerusalem will be trampled down by foreigners until their
day has run its course…And then they will see the Son of
Man coming… Luke 21:7, 8, 24, 27 NEB

4The key phrase in Jesus’ prophetic words is: “until the times
of the Gentiles are fulfilled,” or completed. The questions we
should now turn to are these: what did Jesus mean by “when
the times of the Gentiles are completed?” And how and when
were they completed?
The history of the Holy Land shows that the Gentiles, or non-
Jews, attacked, destroyed, and trampled on Jerusalem and its
holiest center, the Sanctuary, several times and over many
centuries. Therefore, Jesus’ words, “Jerusalem will be trampled
on by the Gentiles until the times of the Gentiles are fulfilled”
(NIV), point to the various periods in history when non-Jews
(Romans, Christians, and Muslims) dominated Jerusalem,
humiliated it, dispersed the Jews, or prevented them from
returning to their holy and beloved city.
The most critical “trampling of Jerusalem by the Gentiles”
occurred in 637 A. D. by the Arabs, under ‘Umar, an ambitious
leader who had usurped power from Muhammad’s lawful
successor, ‘Alí, known as the Commander of the Faithful. As
a result of ‘Umar’s conquest, the people of Israel lost almost

5The following Hebrew prophecy, as translated in The New
King James Version, also links “the times of the Gentiles” to
the day of the Lord:
Son of man, prophesy and say, ‘Thus says the Lord God:’
Wail, ‘Woe to the day!’ For the day is near, Even the day
of the Lord is near; It will be a day of clouds, the time

• • •
Chapter 89

A Call For The Creation Of Israel

1The advent of great Messengers is like the coming of spring.
It creates a spiritual environment that stimulates change.
Their dawning releases new and mysterious powers that
pervade the entire planet. New ideas begin to germinate
everywhere, even though we may be unaware of their original
source. The spiritual springs always set in motion profound
changes in human history, and little by little they lead to the
birth of new civilizations. The story of the world's great
religions confirms this.
As we noted earlier, the mid-1800’s served as a pivotal point
for the birth of new ideas and social transformations. As
evidence of this, refer to the three-volume series entitled
simply 1844, by Christian scholar Jerome Clarke, from
Southern Missionary College.
An example of the social transformation in the new age is
the gradual replacement of dictatorships by democracies, and
an awareness of human rights and freedoms everywhere on
our planet.
Of special interest to us in this chapter are the recognition
of human rights in general and the efforts and reformations
that culminated in the conception and birth of the State of
Israel. The birth of Israel has a long history. “Orthodox Jews
had traditionally invoked the return to Zion in their daily

2Chapter 12: The Times of the Gentiles

3prayers. In 1799 Napoleon had thought of establishing a
Jewish state in the ancient lands of Israel.”
The dawning of the 19th century stirred the idea of the birth
of Israel as a nation in many minds and many places more
intensely than ever before. The Encyclopedia Britannica
refers to social and religious conditions that set in motion
the conception of the idea of a Jewish state in the 18th and
the 19th century. It singles out 1844 as a critical year:
The age of the Enlightenment in the second half of the
18th century, with its growth of religious toleration and
universal and liberal ideals, laid the foundation in western
Europe and North America for the emancipation of the
Jews and their participation as citizens in the life of the
nations in the midst of which they lived and whose members
they became…For reasons of religious piety, a small
number of Jews, supported by donations from outside,
settled in Palestine.
The interest in a return of the Jews to Palestine was kept
alive in the first part of the 19th century more by Chris-
tian millenarians, especially in Great Britain, than by Jews
themselves. Among the few Jews pleading then for a
Jewish settlement or state was the American Mordecai
Manuel Noah (1785-1851), who in 1813 became U.S.
consul in Tunis and later high sheriff and surveyor of the
port of New York. In 1825 he acquired Grand Island in
the Niagara River and invited the Jews of the whole
world to create a Jewish state…In 1844 he pleaded with
the Christian world in Discourse on the Restoration of the
Jews to help the Jews resettle in Palestine [emphasis
added throughout].2
The mid-19th century marked a critical point in the shift of
the Jewish destiny. Noah’s call is a prime example of this
shift. In his preface to his discourse delivered in 1844, he
declared:
In the political, as well as the religious world, there
are singular commotions which point to the East as the

4268 I Shall Come Again

5theatre of approaching revolutions of great and absorbing
interests….
I confidently believe in the restoration of the Jews, and in
the coming of the Messiah; and believing that political
events are daily assuming a shape which may finally lead
to that great advent.3
For his great adventure, Noah had the moral support of such
distinguished figures as Thomas Jefferson and John Adams,
who had in earlier years served as United States presidents.
In a letter to him, Adams wrote:
I wish your nation may be admitted to all the privileges
of citizens in every part of the world. This country has
done much; I wish it may do more…Let the wits joke,
the philosophers sneer! What then? It has pleased the
Providence of the “first cause,” the universal cause, that
Abraham should give religion not only to the Hebrews,
but to Christians and Mohammedans, the greatest part of
the modern civilized world…I really wish the Jews again
in Judea, an independent nation…your Jehovah is our
Jehovah, and your God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob is
our God.4
Here is a passage from Noah’s appeal made before thousands
of “the most distinguished [American] citizens and the highest
dignitaries of the Church.” 5 Note how skillfully he blends
reason and emotion to touch the hearts of his audience:
I have long desired, my friends and countrymen, for an
opportunity to appear before you in behalf of a venerable
people, whose history, whose sufferings, and whose extraor-
dinary destiny have, for a period of 4000 years, filled the
world with awe and astonishment, a people at once the
most favored and the most neglected, the most beloved,
and yet the most persecuted; a people under whose salutary
laws all the civilized nations of the earth now repose; a
people whose origin may date from the cradle of creation,

6Chapter 12: The Times of the Gentiles

7and who are likely to be preserved to the last moment of
recorded time.
I have been anxious to appeal to you, citizens and Chris-
tians, in behalf of the chosen and beloved people of
Almighty God, to ask you to…feel for their sufferings and
woes, to extend to them your powerful protection and
undivided support in accomplishing the fulfillment of their
destiny, and…to restore them to the land of their fore-
fathers and the possession of their ancient heritage. It
is, I acknowledge, a novel…appeal…for the first time to
Christians since the advent of Christianity; but the period
I believe has arrived for this appeal: Extraordinary events
shadow forth results long expected, long prophesied, long
ordained…and the political events in Syria, Egypt, Turkey,
and Russia indicate the approach of great and important
revolutions which may facilitate the return of the Jews to
Jerusalem, and the organization of a powerful government
in Judea, and [will] lead to that millennium which we all
look for, all hope for, all pray for.6
After referring to America’s support of several nations and
peoples to gain independence, Noah concludes:
If these nations were entitled to our sympathies, how
much more powerful and irrepressible are the claims of
that beloved people before whom the Almighty walked
like a cloud by day and a pillar of fire by night; who
spoke to them words of comfort and salvation, of promise,
of hope, of consolation, and protection; who swore they
should be his people and he would be their God; who, for
their special protection and final restoration, dispersed
them among the nations of the earth
Noah shows his audience the first step toward an independent
Israel:
The tree must be planted…The first step is to solicit
from the Sultan of Turkey permission for the Jews to

8270 I Shall Come Again

9purchase and hold land, to build houses, and to follow
any occupation they may desire, without molestation and
in perfect security. There is no difficulty in securing this
privilege for them. The moment the Christian powers feel
an interest in behalf of the Jewish people, the Turkish
government will secure and carry out their views, for it
must always be remembered that the one hundred and
twenty millions of Mussulmen [Muslims] are also the
descendants of Abraham.8
Like William Miller, who stirred interest in the second advent,
Noah’s efforts awakened the dormant dreams of an independent
Israel in many receptive minds.
The English statesman Benjamin Disraeli, a Jew, [wrote] a
Zionist novel, Tancred. Moses Hess, a friend and co-worker
of Karl Marx, published an important book, Rom und
Jerusalem (1862), in which he declared the restoration of
a Jewish state a necessity both for the Jews and for the
rest of humanity. Among the Jews of Russia and eastern
Europe, a number of groups were engaged in trying to
settle emigrants in agricultural colonies in Palestine.9
Another noteworthy figure influenced by Noah was Laurence
Oliphant, who in 1882 moved to the Holy Land and settled
in Haifa:
In 1878 he proposed to Disraeli and Robert Cecil, 3rd
marquess of Salisbury, a plan for the Jewish colonization
of Palestine (he was not Jewish himself ). The plan was
well received by Salisbury and by eastern European Jews
but was refused by the sultan of Turkey, ruler of Palestine.10
Still another prominent figure who followed the example of
Noah was:
Theodore Herzl, founder of the political form of Zionism,
a movement to establish a Jewish homeland. His pamphlet

10Chapter 12: The Times of the Gentiles

11The Jewish State (1896) proposed that the Jewish question
was a political question to be settled by a world council
of nations. He organized a world congress of Zionists that
met in Basel, Switz, in August 1897 and became first
president of the World Zionist Organization, established by
the congress…He negotiated unsuccessfully with the Sultan
of Turkey to the grant of a charter that would allow Jewish
mass settlement in Palestine on an autonomous basis. He
then turned to Great Britain
The efforts put forth by Noah and his supporters in the
mid-19th century did not lead immediately to the birth of
a nation, but they served their purpose. They created a
momentum that culminated a century later in that birth. They
signaled a new beginning for the scattered and persecuted
people of Israel. They symbolized the dawning of a new day
in their destiny. As Anthony Robbins notes:
In pursuit of our goals, we often set in motion far-reaching
consequences. Does the honeybee deliberate on how to
propagate flowers? No, but in the process of seeking sweet
nectar, the bee unknowingly gathers pollen on its legs,
flies to the next flower, and sets in motion a wondrous
chain reaction that results in a hillside awash in color.12

• • •
Chapter 90

The Edicts Of Submissione The Stirrings Of The Recognition Of Human Rights And Freedom

1in the 19th century spread gradually from the West to the East.
A nation that could not withstand the winds of change was
the Ottoman Empire, the very heart of the Islamic world—
the nation that ruled over the Holy Land.
e
These edicts have been called the Edicts of Toleration, but the word “submission”
seems more appropriate. The dictionary defines “toleration” as “willingness to
allow freedom of thought and action to others, and the practice of allowing such
freedom especially in religion.” As the evidence shows, the edicts represented
only a symbolic act of submission—out of desperation—to greater powers, rather
than noble acts of toleration, understanding, and compassion.

2272 I Shall Come Again

3In the mid-19th century, a few Sultans of the Ottoman
Empire were forced to issue several edicts of reformation and
toleration. Among them were Noble Edict of Rose Chamber
(November 3, 1839), and The Imperial Edict (February 18,
1856). These edicts were aimed at creating a new social
order for all citizens of the Empire, including minorities. But
the prime motive behind them was political:
To the Ottomans…the purpose of reform was to preserve
the Ottoman state. Although the Ottomans found it nec-
essary to make some concessions to European powers and
to their own non-Muslim subjects, and although some
Tanzimat [Reformation] statesmen did consider equality to
be an ultimate goal, it was the desire to preserve the state
that brought about the mobilization of resources for
modernization.13
Among the many seeds of awareness sprouting in the 19th
century was the birth of documents through collaboration
between the two powerful empires of the time. As a result
of the persecution of Christian subjects under the Ottoman
Empire, the nations of Europe, especially the British, forced
the Ottomans to make a pledge of tolerance by signing
documents, which may best be called Edicts of Submission,
for they were not given for the good of the world but for
self-interest and as an act of submission of the Turks to
greater European powers.
Here is the copy of the Edict issued on March 21, 1844, and
confirmed again on March 23:
Official Declaration of the Sublime Porte [the chief office
of the Ottomon Empire], relinquishing the practice of
Executions for Apostasy. It is the special and constant
intention of His Highness the Sultan that his cordial
relations with the High Powers [Christian nations] be
preserved, and that a perfect reciprocal friendship be main-
tained, and increased. The Sublime Porte engages to take
effectual measures to prevent henceforward the execution

4Chapter 12: The Times of the Gentiles

5and putting to death of the Christian who is an apostate.
March 21, 1844.14
Declaration of His Highness the Sultan to Sir Stratford
Canning at his Audience on the 23rd of March, 1844.
Henceforward neither shall Christianity be insulted in my
dominion, nor shall Christians be in any way persecuted
for their religion.15
Like the call issued by Mordecai Noah and others, the
Edicts of Submission did not result in immediate or signifi-
cant changes in the lives of the Jews. They only symbolized
a new direction for a sovereign Islamic Empire and the divine
destiny of a persecuted minority under its rule. They were the
first critical cracks in a mighty structure. They signaled the
fall and disintegration of a vast Empire that had dominated
the world and endured for many centuries. The Edicts
symbolized a shift of power, the submission of one of the
most powerful nations the world has ever known to newer
and greater Christian powers. They pointed to the dawning
of a new age of tolerance, independence, and recognition of
human rights and freedoms for all people.
Some Christian authors have recognized the Messianic mes-
sage implied in these Edicts in the unfoldment of God's
prophetic and progressive plan for humankind. Distinguished
scholars Dr. and Mrs. Guinnesse in their book Light for the
Last Days have emphasized their symbolic significance in the
destiny of the Jews. Here they refer to the edict issued on
March 21:
In 1844 the Porte was compelled by the Christian nations
of Europe to issue an edict of religious toleration
This year [1844] brought no military defeat, but one of a
far more important character, both as marking [symboliz-
ing] the loss of the independence of the Porte, and the
e
Leroy Froom in his classic work, The Prophetic Faith of Our Fathers, describes
Dr. Guinness “as one of the most outstanding among all modern expositors” and
a biblical scholar without peer among those in Britain.17

6274 I Shall Come Again

7liberation of its Jewish and Christian subjects…This decree
was published in the 1260th year of the Hegira. It is
dated March 21st, 1844. This date is the first of Nisan in
the Jewish year, and is exactly to a day twenty-three
centuries from the first of Nisan, B. C. 457, the day on
which Ezra states that he left Babylon in compliance
with the decree given in the seventh year of the reign
of Artaxerxes.18
The 1844 decree did not carry any military significance. It
did not allow the Jews to return to the Holy Land. It rather
symbolized “the day of trouble and dismemberment” for a
mighty Empire and the shift of power from the East to the
West.
In his discourse, delivered in the United States in 1844,
Mordecai Noah confirmed this shift of power:
Within the last twenty-five years great revolutions have
occurred in the East, affecting in a peculiar manner the
future destiny of the followers of Mohammad, and dis-
tinctly marking the gradual advancement of the Christian
power.19
The Turkish governments cannot be insensible to the fact
that clouds are gathering around them, and destiny, in
which they wholly confide, teaches them to await the day
of trouble and dismemberment. It is their interest to draw
around them the friendly aid and cooperation of the
Jewish people throughout the world, by conferring these
reasonable and just privileges upon them
What points to the symbolic significance of the preceding
Edict is not only the year 1844, but the day on which it was
signed. One figure coincides with the first year of the Bahá’í
Era (1844), the other coincides with the first day of the Bahá’í
year (March 21). Could this be a coincidence? It could be if
we ignore the grand jigsaw puzzle of prophetic profile. Other-
wise, it serves as one more piece of that gigantic puzzle.

8Chapter 12: The Times of the Gentiles

• • •
Chapter 91

The Principle Of

1According to this principle, the long-term consequences of an
act or event are both unpredictable and sometimes radically
out of proportion to the act or event.
Sometimes small changes of direction or little acts of justice
and kindness set in motion changes far beyond expectation.
When Rosa Parks refused to sit in the back of a bus, could
anyone have detected the stirrings of the Civil Rights Move-
ment in her seemingly little act of courage and defiance? In
one of his talks, King Duncan, author and orator, traces and
finds a seemingly impossible link between Rosa Parks and
the collapse of hard-line communists! To defeat Gorbachev,
he states, Yeltsin mounted a tank to rally the Russian people
in Red Square. Later someone asked him, “What caused you
to take the stand that helped defeat communism?” Yeltsin
said, “I guess it was Lech Walesa, that electrician in Gdansk
who took a stand and helped Poland overthrow communism
in that country.”
Someone asked Walesa, “What was the pivotal event that
caused you to stand against communists?” He answered, “I
guess it was reading about Dr. Martin Luther King Jr. and
the Civil Rights activists in the United States.”
Someone asked Dr. King, “What was the pivotal event in
your life that caused you to take the stand against racism?”
He answered, “I guess it was reading about Rosa Parks. That
little lady in Birmingham who refused to go to the back of the
bus.” Mr. Duncan then asks, “Is it possible that international
communism was brought down by one little Afro-American
lady who took a stand?”
Noah’s call for freedom and independence and the Edicts of
Submission may have seemed insignificant at the time, yet

2motion the gradual but persistent downfall of walls of
separation and prejudice. They may have symbolized the
dawning of a new age, especially for the people of Israel,
who have been the prime targets of persecution for centuries.
Prophecies are sometimes first fulfilled symbolically, just
like a seed that first germinates, but only later bears fruits.
When Jesus entered Jerusalem on a donkey, He fulfilled sym-
bolically the prophecies that pointed to a king. His literal
kingdom emerged centuries later. In his book The Master Plan,
Christian scholar Dr. David Reagan offers several examples
of this principle concerning prophecies of the first advent,
and then concludes:
…prophecy is often pre-filled in symbolic type before it is
completely fulfilled.21
We can find another example of the preceding principle in the
fulfillment of the following prophecy, covered in Chapter 14:
The dragon stood in front of the woman that he might
devour her child the moment it was born. She gave birth
to a son… Revelation 12:4-5 NIV

3The preceding prophecy was fulfilled symbolically long before
“the child” (the Báb) was born. Its literal fulfillment came
about later. (See Some Answered Questions, Chapter 13.)
The state of Israel was officially born in 1948, but a birth is
always preceded by a conception. The call issued in the West
by the statesman Mordecai Noah in 1844 to the Christian
world to acknowledge the rights of the Jews and to recog-
nize the advent of the appointed time for planting the Seed
of the State of Israel, on the one hand, and the submission
of the Ottoman Empire—which ruled over the Holy Land
with absolute authority—to western nations to sign the Edicts
of Submission in that same year, on the other, marked the
conception of a new day of freedom and independence for all

4Gentiles” had run their course and come to an end, not only
symbolically—which was marked at least by two historical
events—but also spiritually. The advent of a new Messenger
(the Báb) had signaled the End of the Age for all nations and
religions, including the Jews and the Gentiles.
In the early years of the 20th century (1904-1906), some forty
years before the birth of the state of Israel, while ‘Abdu’l-
Bahá Himself was confined in ‘Akká in the Holy Land, He
spoke of the coming together of the children of Israel:
…in this cycle Israel will be gathered in the Holy Land,
and…the Jewish people who are scattered to the East and
West, South and North, will be assembled together.22
Many biblical and historical references are cited in the suc-
ceeding volumes to prove that gradualism is a universal law,
and that nothing of great consequence can come without effort,

• • •
Chapter 92

Comparing The Prophecies Of The First And Second Advents A Comparison Of The Three Major Time Prophecies Examined So Far Shows The Perfect Harmony That Binds Together All The

1prophecies.
• Daniel’s prayer concerning the first advent:
O Lord, make thy face shine upon thy desolate sanc-
tuary…and look upon our desolation and upon the city
that bears thy name [Jerusalem]… Daniel 9:17-18 NEB

2The answer to this prayer: after 69 weeks, the Anointed
One (the Messiah) will come to anoint “the Most Holy
Place” (Daniel 9:24 NEB).
• Daniel’s prayer concerning the second advent:

3278 I Shall Come Again

4…how long will impiety cause desolation, and both the
Holy Place and the fairest of all lands [Jerusalem] be
given over to be trodden down? Daniel 8:13 NEB

5The answer to this prayer: after 2300 days the sanctuary
or the Holy Place will be restored (Daniel 8:14).
• The disciples’ question concerning the second advent:
‘Master,’ they asked, ‘when will it all come about?’
Luke 21:7 NEB

6Jesus’ answer: Jerusalem will be trampled down by foreign-
ers until their day has run its course (Luke 21:24 NEB).
All the preceding prophecies pertain to the destiny of Jerusalem
or its temple. This indeed seems a great mystery. Why should
the life history of a city and its temple be singled out so
frequently as the point of reference for such a momentous
event?
In the following verses Jesus also links the destiny of
Jerusalem and its temple to the advent of divine Messengers.
Since the people of Israel rejected their Redeemer, Jesus said
that their sanctuary would remain forsaken until the advent
of the Lord at the end of the age.
O Jerusalem, Jerusalem, the city that murders the prophets
and stones the messengers sent to her! How often have I
longed to gather your children, as a hen gathers her
brood under her wings; but you would not let me. Look,
look! there is your temple, forsaken by God. And I tell
you, you shall never see me until the time comes when
you say, “Blessings on him who comes in the name of the
Lord!” Luke 13:34-35 NEB

7Similarly, Isaiah 40:12 implores the Lord to come down
from heaven to restore His sanctuary and gain its deserved
freedom from those who have trampled it.

8Chapter 12: The Times of the Gentiles

9“The Times of the Gentiles”
and “That Day”
The fulfillment of “the times of the Gentiles” has still another
meaning. The advent of the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh fulfilled not
only the Jewish prophecies but also prophecies from other
scriptures as well. As we shall see later, many religions have
designated 1844 as a time marking the termination of their
spiritual cycle. The end of “the time of the Gentiles” signaled
the dawning of a new day not just for the people of Israel,
but for all peoples.
The expression commonly used in the Scriptures to signal the
termination of all previous dispensations are: that day, the
latter days, the last days, harvest-time, the end of the age,
and the time of the end. Here the age of prophecy ends and
the day of fulfillment dawns. It is a most blessed time in
history, for its arrival signals the coming of the promised
Kingdom, when one universal faith guides and inspires all
humanity.
Evidence of the change from promise to fulfillment is that
past Scriptures contain an abundance of prophecies, while
the Bahá’í Scriptures do not:
The Prophetic Cycle hath, verily, ended. The Eternal Truth
is now come.23 Bahá’u’lláh
It is helpful to note that the divine Messengers have stated, in
similar terms, that the duration of their dispensation is limited.
Daniel was told, “Seventy weeks are determined upon thy
people.” Christ used a similar language, “Until the times of
the Gentiles be fulfilled,” that is, until the times allotted to
them come to an end. Muhammad also confirms this:
To each age its Book. What God pleaseth He will abro-
gate or confirm… Qur’án 13:38-39
Neither too soon, nor too late, shall a people [body of
believers] reach its appointed time… Qur’án 23:45

10280 I Shall Come Again

11The life cycle of a religion is like that of a plant. It begins
at some point in history and then passes through the various
stages of development until its allotted “time” comes to an
end. At that point the divine Gardener takes a Seed from the
previous Plant and puts it once again into the vineyard of
the world.
To conclude: Jesus linked the time of His return to the
completion of the times of the Gentiles. His prophecy was
fulfilled symbolically by at least two historical events: a call
in 1844 for the formation of the State of Israel, and the sign-
ing of an Edict of Submission issued on March 21, 1844. The
year and the day correspond to the first year of the Bahá’í
Era, and the first day of the Bahá’í New Year. As we noted,
it is also the day on which the third edict for the rebuilding
of Jerusalem was issued. Once again we see an example of
the precise fulfillment of prophecies. For from the day on
which the third edict concerning the rebuilding of Jerusalem
was issued until the day on which an Edict of Submission
was signed, there is an interval of exactly 2300 years. There
is not even one day of discrepancy. The two edicts (the Third
Edict, and the Edict of Submission), the two prophecies (the
prophecy of 2300 days, and the words of Jesus about the
times of the Gentiles) all point to the same sacred surround-
ings: Jerusalem or the Holy Land.

12The Spirit That
Acknowledges Jesus Christ
I John 4:2

• • •
Chapter 93

An Introduction To Islam

1I slam is sometimes called the Misunderstood Religion. To
appreciate and decode the remaining time prophecies, we
need to take a closer look at the only independent major
religion born between the first and second advents—Islam.
Islam is the link between Christianity and the Bahá’í Faith.
Some knowledge of Islam is essential to enhance our
understanding of the Bahá’í Faith, even as Judaism is to
Christianity. To appreciate the grand design of the Supreme
Architect, we must look at His whole plan. Islam is part of
this plan.

2282 I Shall Come Again

3The subject is so vast and vital that a separate volume has
been devoted to it. Volume IV of this work compares the
teachings and prophecies of the Bible and the Qur’án and
demonstrates the astonishing similarity between them. This
chapter properly belongs to that volume, but is presented here
because many time prophecies of the Bible concerning the
advent of the Redeemer of our age are linked to the advent
of Islam. With a more realistic perception of the teachings
of the Qur’án we will be in a better position to appreciate
those prophecies.
Christian scholars believe that the Bible has influenced the
world more than all other books combined; that it has shaped
human life more than all the philosophers, politicians, and
rulers who have ever lived. Muslim scholars can say the same
about the Qur’án. Is it not fitting to study and understand a
book of such stature? All the sacred Scriptures emphasize the
need for true knowledge:
…through knowledge shall the just be delivered.
Proverbs 11:9
My people are destroyed from lack of knowledge.
Hosea 4:6 NIV
Listening to new ideas is considered a sign of wisdom:
A wise man will hear, and will increase learning…
Proverbs 1:5
…let the wise listen and add to their learning…
Proverbs 1:5 NIV
…the ear of the wise seeketh knowledge. Proverbs 18:15
Unfortunately true knowledge about Islam is lacking, especially
in the West, and this is not a new problem:
…most of them have no knowledge. Qur’án 31:24
…the greater part of people know it [Islam] not…
Qur’án 30:29

4Chapter 13: The Spirit that Acknowledges Jesus Christ

5Scholars believe that Islam gave rise to one of the greatest
civilizations the world has ever known. This positive dimen-
sion of Islam has seldom received due credit, especially in
the West. Stanwood Cobb in Islamic Contributions to
Civilization writes:
Even in this modern age of enlightenment few people are
aware of the significant contributions made by the Islamic
world to the progress of humanity. Yet for more than five
centuries, that civilization not only led the world in science,
but was the only portion of mankind actively engaged in
the systematic pursuit of knowledge.1
Many reasons have contributed to a lack of true knowledge
about Islam. Among them are:
• Islam is often believed to be antagonistic to Christianity.
• Western writers, as a whole, have paid little attention to
the contributions of Islam to world culture.
• The Qur’án is seldom studied seriously.
• Those leaders and followers of Islam who have been least
faithful to its teachings have attracted more than their fair
share of attention.
• What Muslims do is often equated with what Islam teaches.
Let us begin with the last point. As a result of the wars
waged by Muslims, many Westerners assume that Islam
enjoins force as a means of spreading its beliefs. Every
religion has been misused and exploited. We should judge
Islam by the Qur’án, not by the actions of its leaders or
followers. Freedom of conscience is one of the most funda-
mental and emphatic themes of the Qur’án:
To proclaim a clear message is our [God’s] only duty…
Qur’án 36:16
Of God it is to point out “the Way.” Qur’án 16:9

6284 I Shall Come Again

7Let him then who will, take the way to his Lord.
Qur’án 73:19
Say: O ye unbelievers!…I shall never worship that which
ye worship, neither will ye worship that which I worship.
To you be your religion; to me my religion.
Qur’án 109:1-6
But if thy Lord had pleased, verily all who are in the earth
would have believed together. What! wilt thou compel
men to become believers? Qur’án 10:99
Let there be no compulsion in religion. Qur’án 2:257
The Qur’án does not allow harsh words or arguments:
Of the mercy of God thou hast spoken to them [the
unbelievers] in gentle terms. Qur’án 3:153
Speak ye to him with gentle speech… Qur’án 20:46
Enjoin My [God’s] servants to speak in kindly sort…
Qur’án 17:55
And the servants of the God of Mercy are they who walk
upon the earth softly; and when the ignorant address them,
they reply, “Peace!” Qur’án 25:64
…speak with well-guided speech… Qur’án 33:70
And woe…to those…who plunged…into vain disputes…
Qur’án 52:11-12
Happy…the believers, who…keep aloof from vain words.
Qur’án 23:1,3
If force and harsh words are forbidden, how then should
Islam be taught?
Summon thou to the way of thy Lord with wisdom and
with kindly warning… Qur’án 16:126
…speak words that may penetrate their souls. Qur’án 4:66
These gentle and kind words were spoken to primitive people
whose major occupation was war. It is hard to conceive of a

8Chapter 13: The Spirit that Acknowledges Jesus Christ

9society more violent than the tribes of Arabia prior to the
advent of Islam.
The Qur’án even illustrates how Muslims should teach their
faith to Jews and Christians:
And say ye, “We believe in what hath been sent down to
us [Qur’án] and hath been sent down to you [the Torah or
the Gospel]. Our God and your God is one, and to him
are we self-surrendered.” Qur’án 29:45
Imposing faith or belief is not only against the teachings of
the Qur’án but against those of all the other sacred Scriptures
as well. They all teach that truth must be sought and received
with gratitude. It is God’s glorious gift:
And whoso maketh efforts for us [God], in our ways will
we guide them… Qur’án 29:69
The best test of Islam is Muhammad’s own example in imple-
menting the teachings of the Qur’án. Muhammad’s standards
of justice are clearly exemplified in a charter He “granted to
the Christians in general and to the monks of the monastery
of St. Catherine, near Mount Sinai, in particular, the actual
document itself having been faithfully preserved down the
centuries by the annalists of Islam.” 2 As George Townshend
points out, according to this charter, the Muslims were
supposed to:
…protect the Christians, to defend their churches, the
residences of their priests, and to guard them from all
injuries. They were not to be unfairly taxed; no bishop
was to be driven out of his bishopric; no Christian was
to be forced to reject his religion; no monk was to be
expelled from his monastery; no pilgrim was to be detained
from his pilgrimage. Nor were the Christian churches to be
pulled down for the sake of building mosques or houses
for the Muslims. Christian women married to Muslims were
to enjoy their own religion, and not to be subjected to
compulsion or annoyance of any kind on that account. If
Christians should stand in need of assistance for the repair

10286 I Shall Come Again

11of their churches or monasteries, or any other matter per-
taining to their religion, the Muslims were to assist them.3
To understand Islam, we must look at what Muhammad Him-
self taught and accomplished, rather than what others did in
His name. For after His death, the history of Islam took a
new turn. Those hungry for power did not even wait for the
Prophet to be buried. Through political plots they usurped the
leadership of Islam from Muhammad’s lawful successor ‘Alí.
The history of Islam following Muhammad’s death is one of
struggle, division, and deviation. Notable among those who
usurped both the political and spiritual powers of Islam were
the rulers of the dynasty of the Umayyads who, in the name of
Islam, committed many atrocities. They even massacred some
of the closest and most beloved descendants of the Prophet.
In the following passage, the Báb asks Muslims not to treat
Him the way they treated Husayn, the third Imám, grandson
of Muhammad, known as the Prince of Martyrs:
O peoples of the earth! Inflict not upon the Most Great
Remembrance [the Báb] what the Umayyads cruelly in-
flicted upon Husayn
Not all Muslims, however, came under the domination of such
atrocious leaders. There were many who acknowledged the
inspired leaders—Imáms—and practiced the teachings of the
Qur’án. Islam, as taught by the Prophet, was to expand by
the power of the tongue; Islam, as practiced by many of its
misguided leaders, was spread by the sword. One can see in
the entire history of Islam two forces moving in opposition—
the forces of light and the forces of darkness.
The deviation of some Muslim leaders from the original
teachings of their Faith, however, should in no way obscure
or belittle the overall influence of Islam on the advancement
of civilization. All religions have been misused, to some extent
or other, by misguided leaders. We should always look at the
original Gem bestowed by the divine Jeweller, not at the
crushed and polluted pieces. It should also be noted that when

12Chapter 13: The Spirit that Acknowledges Jesus Christ

13we refer to deviation from the original teachings of Islam,
we do not intend to single out a given sect, or imply that
those who followed Muhammad’s lawful successor—‘Alí—
necessarily lived a more exemplary life.

• • •
Chapter 94

The Spirit That Acknowledges Jesus Christ This Is How You Can Recognize The Spirit Of God: Every Spirit That Acknowledges That Jesus Christ Has Come In The Flesh

1is from God… I John 4:2 NIV
Many Christians are unaware of the great love Muhammad
had for Christ, and of the praise He bestowed on Him.
Muhammad called Christ the Spirit of God, a title that has
been widely used by Muslims since the dawn of Islam. The
Spirit of God (Rúh’u’lláh) and Mary (Maryam) are used
frequently as names by Muslims, just as Joshua and Sarah
are used by Christians. Dr. G. Parrinder of the University of
London quotes this passage from the sayings of Muhammad:
I bear witness that Jesus Son of Mary is the spirit of God
and His word which He cast to Mary the virgin.5
Similarly, this verse from the Qur’án points to Christ as the
Spirit of God:
We [God] breathed into her [Mary] of Our Spirit [the Spirit
of God], and We made her and her son [Jesus] a Sign [of
God] for all peoples. Qur’án 21:91 Y
According to a prophecy from Muhammad:
Even if no more than one day remains in the world, God
will make it long enough until in it will appear My
progeny Mahdí e [the Báb], and then descend the Spirit of
God, Jesus Son of Mary…and the earth will shine with the
light of her Lord
e
Literally the One [divinely] guided. The Báb was a descendant of Muhammad.

2288 I Shall Come Again

3We find a similar prophecy in the Book of Revelation:
After this I saw another angel coming down from heaven…
and the earth was illuminated by his splendor.
Revelation 18:1 NIV
It appears that the verse “Every spirit that acknowledges
Jesus Christ…” points specifically to Muhammad, the Báb,
and Bahá’u’lláh. They all have used those same titles (the
Spirit, and the Spirit of God ) to refer to Christ. In one
passage Bahá’u’lláh declares that He is the One who once
came in the name of the Spirit, namely Christ.
By God! This is He Who hath at one time appeared in the
name of the Spirit
In another passage, Bahá’u’lláh refers to Christ as the Spirit
of God:
If ye be intent on crucifying once again Jesus, the Spirit
of God, put Me to death, for He hath once more, in My
person, been made manifest unto you. Deal with Me as ye
wish, for I have vowed to lay down My life in the path
of God.8
Bahá’u’lláh calls Christ “the Lord of all being:”
…the Spirit of God, the Lord of all being.9
He also calls Him “the Spirit:”
Say, O followers of the Son! Have you shut out yourselves
from Me by reason of My Name?…Consider those who
rejected the Spirit [Christ] when He came
Christ assumed the title of the Spirit when He declared
that the Spirit of the Lord was upon Him (Luke 4:18). As the
Gospel testifies, after Christ’s baptism, “the Spirit of God”
descended and alighted upon Him (Matt. 3:16). Further,
Christ’s conception was by the power of the Holy Spirit
(Matt. 1:18; Luke 1:35), which is the Spirit of God.

4Chapter 13: The Spirit that Acknowledges Jesus Christ

5Another title bestowed on Christ in the Gospel, as well as the
Islamic traditions, and the Qur’án is the Word or the Word
of God:
The Word became flesh and lived for a while among us.
John 1:14 NIV
I bear witness that Jesus…is the Spirit of God and His
Word…11 Muhammad

6…the angel said, “O Mary! Verily God announceth to thee
the Word from Him [the Word of God]: His name shall
be, Messiah Jesus… Qur’án 3:40

7…an angel of the Lord…said…She will give birth to a son,
and you are to give him the name Jesus…
Matthew 1:20-21 NIV
Compared to the Gospel, how does the Qur’án portray Mary?
According to the Gospel, Mary’s glory lies in being the
mother of Jesus. Concerning her status as described in the
Scriptural record, Nelson’s Illustrated Bible Dictionary states:
That Mary ‘found favor with God’ and was allowed to
give birth to His child indicates that she must have been
of high character and faith.12
Of her position as portrayed in the Gospel, Unger’s Bible
Dictionary, published by Moody Bible Institute, states:
In a word, so far as Mary is portrayed to us in Scripture,
she is, as we should have expected, the most tender, the
most faithful, humble, patient, and loving woman, but a
woman still.13
Harper’s Bible Dictionary states that:
She is negatively portrayed in Mark, less so in Matthew,
and positively in Luke.14
What would happen if Christians recognized the great station
the Qur’án bestows on Mary, the mother of the Son of God—

8290 I Shall Come Again

9a station much higher than that granted her in the Gospel?
What would they think if they saw this verse from the
Qur’án?
…the angels said, “O Mary! Verily hath God…chosen thee
above the women of the worlds [emphasis added].
Qur’án 3:37
Could a station or an honor greater than this—standing
above every woman in the ‘worlds’—be conceived for a
human being, especially one about whom the world knows
very little? Please notice the word worlds, used in the plural.
In one of His sayings, Muhammad further glorifies Mary’s
status by placing her above His own daughter, Fátimih, who
is the noblest and most exalted woman in Islam.
Knowledge of this kind leads to understanding and peace, to
love and fellowship not only between Christians and Muslims,
but among all nations and religions. Such understanding has
the power to lift the hearts and fuse them in harmony, yet
the power has remained untapped for fourteen centuries. If
Christians had a true knowledge of Islam, if they had known
Muhammad’s glorification of Jesus and Mary, would they
have engaged in the Crusades? How much would our world
change, if these facts were proclaimed, especially among
Christians, who as a whole have a negative attitude toward
Islam?
Among the doctrines of the Christian faith is the virgin
birth of Jesus. This is a doctrine that cannot be proven. Only
the power of faith can lead one to acceptance. Even some
Christians hesitate to embrace it, yet the Qur’án clearly
confirms it. Christians need not ask for more evidence
concerning Muhammad’s love and respect for Jesus than this
confirmation of one of their most fundamental beliefs:
…said the angel…‘It is by the Holy Spirit that she has
conceived this child…’ Matthew 1:20 NEB

10Chapter 13: The Spirit that Acknowledges Jesus Christ

11We [God] sent our spirit [the Holy Spirit] to her…He [the
Spirit] said: “I am only a messenger of thy Lord, that I
may bestow on thee a holy son.” Qur’án 19:17-21
We [God] breathed into her of Our Spirit, and We made
her and her son, a Sign [of God] for all peoples.
Qur’án 21:91 Y
The Qur’án contains chapters titled Noah, Abraham, Joseph,
Jonah, Mary, and Imrán (Moses’ father). It gives a special
prominence to the stories of Moses, John the Baptist and
Jesus. It confirms the divine mission of the Hebrew prophets.
The Jews have suffered cruel humiliation and lived with
persistent prejudice directed against them by many nations.
Most of them are unaware that the Qur’án reaffirms God’s
deep love for them as declared in their own Scripture:
…you are a people holy…the Lord your God chose you out
of all nations on earth to be his special possession.
Deuteronomy 7:6 NEB
And We [God] chose them [the people of Israel]…above
all peoples. Qur’án 44:31

12One God, One Race,

• • •
Chapter 95

One Religion Among The Most Fundamental Teachings Of Great Religions Are

1these: one God rules the universe; all divine religions express
His purpose; all humans are His creation, and all of them
receive His favors, blessings, and bounties.
…the peoples of the world, of whatever race or religion,
derive their inspiration from one heavenly Source, and are
the subjects of one God.15 Bahá’u’lláh
I am the first and I am the last; apart from me there is
no God. Who then is like me? Let him proclaim it.
Isaiah 44:6-7 NIV

2292 I Shall Come Again

3God…hath made of one blood all nations of men…
Acts 17:24,
Have we not all one father? Did not one God create us?
Why do we violate the covenant of our forefathers by
being faithless to one another? Malachi 2:10 NEB
And truly this your religion is the one [eternal] religion;
and I am your Lord. Qur’án 23:54
…the one and indivisible religion of God…16 The Báb
Say: In whatsoever Books God hath sent down do I
[Muhammad] believe…God is your Lord and our Lord…
between us [Muslims] and you [those of other faiths] let
there be no strife; God will make us all one; and to Him
shall we return. Qur’án 42:14
To gain a global picture of the oneness of peoples and reli-
gions, we must first clarify the historical perspective. Jews,
Christians, and Muslims are close relatives. As confirmed in
Hebrew Scriptures, the peoples of these faiths belong to the
same family: Abraham is their father. The Jews believe they
are the descendants of Isaac, Abraham’s second son; the
Arabs believe they are the descendants of Ishmael, Abraham’s
eldest son. As The Zondervan Bible Dictionary notes, the
descendants of Ishmael, whose wife was an Egyptian, settled
“in camps in the desert of Northern Arabia.”17 The racial
bond between Ishmael and the Arabs is well recognized.
For instance, Unger’s Bible Dictionary writes: “we may fairly
regard the Arabs as essentially an Ishmaelite race.”18
People make great efforts to find a lost brother or sister. And
when they find him or her, they sense an indescribable joy
and peace. Why, then, does the knowledge of having the
same father (Abraham), of being brothers and sisters, not
move Jews, Christians, and Muslims to jubilation?
People may lose their sense of fellowship with one another;
the divine Messengers never do. Every religion confirms the

4Chapter 13: The Spirit that Acknowledges Jesus Christ

5past religions and predicts the coming of future revelations.
Both the Old and New Testaments predict the advent of
Islam. The following prophecies, often quoted by Muslims,
demonstrate such predictions:
Do not be afraid: God has heard the child [Ishmael] crying
where you laid him. Get to your feet, lift the child up and
hold him in your arms, because I will make of him a great
nation…God was with the child, and he grew up and lived
in the wilderness of Paran. Genesis 21:17-21 NEB
And again:
I [God] have heard your [Abraham’s] prayer for Ishmael.
I have blessed him and will make him fruitful. I will
multiply his descendants; he shall be father of twelve
princes, and I will raise a great nation from him.
Genesis 17:20 NEB
This prophecy was fulfilled in the fullest sense. Ishmael in-
deed became fruitful—from him descended the vast majority
of Muslims who now number about one sixth of the earth’s
population. From a small beginning in the desert of Arabia,
Islam grew into a great nation, governing a large portion
of the globe for centuries. In fact, there has never been a
religious polity as vast as the Islamic empire; its embrace
extended from western China to Spain.
The promise of “twelve princes” attained double fulfillment:
Ishmael was blessed with twelve sons, some of whom became
rulers. Thus he “became the progenitor of twelve tribes of
desert nomads.”19
The promise of “twelve princes” attained fulfillment once
again in the appearance of the twelve Imáms under the Islamic
dispensation. The last of these twelve princes was the Báb,
who also descended from Ishmael. As we shall see later, John
the Revelator saw these twelve princes as “twelve stars” on
a crown (Rev. 12:1-2). To deny Islam is to deny a religion
whose followers have received all the blessings of God.

6294 I Shall Come Again

7Christians and Jews revere their own ancestor Isaac above
Ishmael, yet both brothers were blessed by God. Concerning
Ishmael, Harper’s Bible Dictionary writes:
He is especially celebrated in the Priestly source as one
whom God would bless, multiply, and make fruitful…
(Gen. 17:20). Also in the Yahwistic and Elohistic sources,
Ishmael is favored of God. The angel of the Lord who
guarded Isaac…Lot…and…Joseph, also protected Ishmael’s
mother in pregnancy…and then protected both Hagar and
Ishmael (Gen. 21:15-21). These sources reiterate that God
will make Ishmael “a great nation” (Gen. 21:18).20
The New Testament too confirms God’s favor for the descen-
dants of Ishmael. The Book of Revelation contains clear and
significant prophecies about Islam. (Some of them will be
examined in succeeding chapters.)
The more we study the sacred Scriptures, the clearer becomes
our perception of their oneness; we see them as pieces of a
magnificent painting revealed progressively by the grand
Designer.

8They Will Prophesy for
1260 Days
Revelation 11:3 NIV

• • •
Chapter 96

Prophecies From The Book Of Revelation

1countless signs and prophecies. It was revealed solely
to prepare people, especially Christians, for the Object of their
desire, the Redeemer of our age. It begins with these words:
The revelation of Jesus Christ, which God gave him to
show his servants what must soon take place…Blessed is
the one who reads the words of this prophecy, and blessed
are those who hear it and take to heart what is written…

2The last chapter of Revelation once again reminds the seekers
of truth of the invaluable prophetic knowledge it contains:
Happy is the man who heeds the words of prophecy
contained in this book…I, Jesus, have sent my angel to
you with this testimony for the churches.
Revelation 22:7, 16 NEB
Chapters 11 and 12 of the Book of Revelation contain some
of the most specific prophecies concerning the advents of both
Islam and the Bahá’í Faith. The Muslims for the most part
have been unaware of the relevance of these prophecies to
Islam. Intertwined with the prophecies is a message that does
not appeal to them. That message is this: at the appointed
time, the Islamic dispensation will come to an end. This
message undermines the Muslims’ most dearly cherished—yet
unfounded—doctrine: Islam will never be followed by another

• • •
Chapter 97

The Two Witnesses Who Will

1Prophesy 1260 Days
Before examining the time prophecies of the Book of Revelation,
we need to know a few facts about the Islamic calendar:
• The Islamic calendar dates from the migration (Hegira)
of Muhammad from Mecca to Medina. The year of this
migration was 622 A. D. The abbreviation used to identify
Islamic dates is “A. H.” (Anno Hejirae), in the year of
Hegira.
• The Muslims count their calendar according to a lunar—
not a solar—year.e
• The year 1844 in the Christian calendar corresponds to the
year 1260 in the Islamic calendar.
e
A lunar month is “the period of complete revolution of the moon around the
earth…equal to 29.531 days.” The Islamic year consists of 12 such months, or
354 days in total.

2Chapter 14: They Will Prophesy for 1260 Days

3Chapter 11 of Revelation makes three references to the time
of the advent. Verse 3 involves little if any symbolism:e
And I will give power to my two witnesses, and they will
prophesy for 1260 days, clothed in sackcloth.
Revelation 11:3 NIV
The prophecies of Revelation, like those of the book of
Daniel, are revealed to John in a vision; and like all visions
they wear the veil of symbolism. At first glance we may have
difficulty recognizing the underlying meanings of the symbols.
But once the veil is lifted, the meanings become so apparent
and so closely interrelated with all the other segments of the
prophetic profile that we would have difficulty not recogniz-
ing them.
Those who receive power from God to testify for Him must
also be divine. This is the extent of their powers:
These men [two witnesses] have power to shut up the sky
[the heaven of divine revelation] so that it will not rain
[revelation] during the time they are prophesying [the
prophetic dispensation, which ends the age of prophecy]…
Revelation 11:6 NIV
Having power and serving as God’s witness are honors
bestowed only on divine Messengers and their apostles. Jesus
declared that all power was given Him (Matt. 28:18), and that
He will return with great power. He was also called “the
faithful witness” (Rev. 1:5). Similarly, apostles “bore witness
with great power from God” (Acts 4:33 NEB). The prophecy
indicates that the two witnesses “were clothed in sackcloth”
implying that they
…were to be clothed in old raiment, not in new raiment;
in other words, in the beginning they would possess no
splendor in the eyes of the people, nor would their Cause
appear new…1 ‘Abdu’l-Bahá
e
This interpretation of prophecies from the Book of Revelation is based mainly on
those given by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá. See Some Answered Questions, Chapters 11 and 13.

4298 I Shall Come Again

5God promises to grant divine power to two witnesses. Who
are these two witnesses? And for what purpose do they
prophesy? According to ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, the two witnesses
referred to in this verse are Muhammad and His successor
‘Alí, who were related to each other both spiritually and
physically (Muhammad being ‘Alí’s cousin and father-in-law).
As we proceed to examine other facts about the two witnesses,
the validity of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá’s words will become more evident.
As John’s vision reveals, God promises to send two witnesses
who will have the authority to prophesy in His Name. This
same chapter (Rev. 11:10) calls the two witnesses the prophets.
Both of these titles were bestowed on Muhammad. For He
was called not only a prophet—“the seal of prophets”—but a
witness as well:
Surely We [God] have sent thee [Muhammad] as a witness,
good tidings [of the coming of the Kingdom] to bear, and
warning… Qur’án 48:8 A
Who was ‘Alí, the other witness? ‘Alí had the honor of being
the first man to accept Islam and was appointed the successor
to Muhammad. In one passage from Islamic traditions
Muhammad hails him by saying:
I and ‘Alí are the Father of this [the Islamic] people [body
of believers].2
‘Abdu’l-Bahá compares ‘Alí to Joshua, for as Joshua assisted
Moses in His life and served as His successor after His death,
so did ‘Alí for Muhammad.
The prophecy indicated that the two witnesses or prophets
would prophesy for 1260 days. (As stated, 1260 in the Islamic
calendar corresponds to 1844 in the Christian calendar.) For
what purpose would the two prophets prophesy? All the past
Messengers have predicted the coming of God’s Kingdom
upon the earth. They have been the heralds of the Good
News. Hundreds of references in the Bible and the Qur’án

6Chapter 14: They Will Prophesy for 1260 Days

7point to the coming of the Kingdom and the advent of the
Lord. The time up to the advent of the Báb is called the
prophetic age, or the prophetic cycle:
The prophetic Cycle hath, verily, ended. The Eternal Truth
is now come.3 Bahá’u’lláh
During the prophetic age, all the Messengers and Prophets of
God prophesied and prepared the people for the dawning of
the age of fulfillment, the coming of God’s Kingdom on
earth as it is in heaven:
…We [God] have indeed sent tidings unto every Prophet
concerning the Cause of Our Remembrance [the Báb]
The Báb
In addition to prophesying, past Messengers and Redeemers
have also served as God’s Witnesses, for they have delivered
His Message and warned humanity of the consequences of
unbelief. Both the Gospel and the Qur’án indicate that their
Revelators or Revealers (Jesus and Muhammad) were sent to
serve as the Heralds of the New Age, to give the good news
of the Kingdom. Compare the words of Jesus with those of
Muhammad:
I [Jesus] must give the good news of the kingdom of
God…for that is what I was sent to do. Luke 4:43 NEB
Surely we [God] have sent thee [Muhammad] as a witness,
good tidings [of the coming of the Kingdom] to bear, and
warning… Qur’án 48:8
One more question requires clarification. How long is 1260
days? As we noted in Chapter 9 concerning the prophecies
of the first advent (69-70 weeks), in the prophetic language
a day equals a year.
Let us review two more references from Christian sources:
…each ‘day’ mentioned by the seer represents a year
(Guinness, 1880, p. 295ff ). The key to this is seen in

8300 I Shall Come Again

9Ezekiel 4:6 where God tells Ezekiel that He has assigned
him ‘a day for each year.’ Hence, 1260 days means 1260
years and so on. Guinness compares this to a cartographer
who draws a map to a scale where, for example, one
inch represents 100 miles (1880, p. 299). With the correct
scale, we can then correctly interpret all the time measure-
ments in the prophetic Scriptures.5
The period mentioned is 1260 days, which in this place
prophetically refers to 1260 years according to the “day
for a year ” principle found in Numbers 14:34 and
Ezekiel 4:5.6
Now we should be able to interpret the prophecy:
And I will give power to my two witnesses, and they will
prophesy for 1260 days… Revelation 11:3 NIV

10God promises to select two prophets or witnesses who will
serve as instruments of His Will, who will continue to
prophesy and proclaim the coming of the Kingdom until the
end of their dispensation. The end arrives in the year 1260.
They also stand as God’s Witnesses, testifying that the tidings
and the warnings were conveyed.
This is exactly what they did. They prophesied the advent and
warned of the consequences of unbelief. The period of their
prophesying, the prophetic cycle, lasted until the year 1260
(1844 A. D.), when the Báb proclaimed that by His coming
the previous dispensation had come to an end and that the
time allotted to the spiritual rulers of Islam had terminated.
Apart from the many other clues or signs revealed through-
out the Bible, the preceding verse (Rev. 11:3) may appear
somewhat puzzling . But when viewed from a broader
perspective and compared with many other facts and figures,
its meaning becomes quite clear.

11Chapter 14: They Will Prophesy for 1260 Days

• • •
Chapter 98

The Gentiles Will Trample The

1Holy City 42 Months
The end of the Islamic dispensation is also predicted in units
of months rather than days:
They [the Gentiles] will trample on the holy city for
months. Revelation 11:2 NIV

2Forty-two months converted into days equals 1260 days:
42 × 30 =1260
At first thought, the exact conversion of months into days
may seem impossible, for “a month,” as we know it, is a
variable entity (28, 29, 30, or 31). Not so when we consider
biblical times or the language of prophecy. Both the Egyptians
and Babylonians used calendars based on 12 months, each
month consisting of 30 days. Hugh Schonfield writes:
In ancient Egypt the year consisted of 12 months, each of
30 days, making 360 days. To bring this into line with the
solar year of 365 days, five year-end days were added
associated with the birthdays of the divinities.7
Christian writer, A. J. McClaim, states:
There is conclusive evidence to show that the prophetic
year of Scriptures is composed of 360 days, or twelve
months of 30 days.8
In Chapter 12 we discussed “the times of the Gentiles.” We
demonstrated that the appointed “times” ended with Mordecai
Noah's Declaration of 1844, and by the Edicts of Submission
issued in 1844 of the Christian calendar and 1260 of the
Islamic calendar. Once again we see the confirmation of that
prophecy in similar wording from another book in the Bible.
Here in this prophecy we are directed to the same historic
year 1844 A. D. or 1260 A. H.

3302 I Shall Come Again

4The Symbolism of “the
Trampling of Jerusalem”
“The trampling of Jerusalem by the Gentiles” carries two
meanings: spiritual and literal. Literally it points to the last
conquest of Jerusalem by the Gentiles (Muslims), and the
conclusion of this period (of the persecution of the Jews) by the
birth of two documents: the Declaration of Mordecai Noah
in the West, and the Edicts of Submission in the East. Both
of these documents were issued in 1260 A. H., a figure
prophetically equal to 42 months. Spiritually, the expression
refers to the disintegration or completion of the old cycle,
paving the way for the rising of the new. For, as stated, the
advent of every new faith terminates the old dispensation
and inaugurates a new one. Therefore, “42 months” (or 1260
days) points to the completion of the Islamic dispensation,
the only independent major religion to appear between the
advent of Jesus and the advent of the Promised One of all
ages and religions, an event known to Christians as the return
of Christ in the glory of His Father. In the year 1260 A. H.
when the Báb declared His Mission, the Islamic dispensation
came to an end.
As the prophecy of 70 weeks (Daniel 9:24-27) was fulfilled
first spiritually and then literally after the crucifixion, so
was the prophecy of 42 months. As stated previously, the
advent of Jesus removed the need for making any offering.
The spiritual fulfillment was then followed by a literal fulfill-
ment, when the sanctuary, the place of offering, was completely
destroyed by the Romans. First occurred the spiritual conquest
of Jerusalem (a city symbolic of divine Laws) by Muhammad
Himself, and later the literal conquest of Jerusalem by His
followers soon after His death. (The span of time between the
death of Jesus and the conquest of Jerusalem by the Romans
was, according to the conventional calendar, about 36 years.
The span of time between Muhammad’s death and the conquest
of Jerusalem by the Muslims was about 5 years.)

5Chapter 14: They Will Prophesy for 1260 Days

6Once again the absolute harmony between the sacred words
from two sources separated by centuries (the Book of Daniele
and the Book of Revelation) is demonstrated. These books
link the desolation of the human spirit and the inception of
the era of spiritual renewal and purification (the cleansing of
the sanctuary) to an identical period in human history, despite
using entirely different starting points. They also harmonize
with Jesus' prophecies by linking the time of His return, on
the one hand, to Daniel’s prophecy of “the abomination of
desolation” and, on the other, to the treading down of Jerusa-
lem by the Gentiles until their time came to an end. Again the
termination of this period was shown to correspond to 1260
A. H. or 1844 A. D., when the Báb inaugurated a new dispen-
sation (spiritual fulfillment), and when Noah's Declaration
and the Edicts of Submission were issued (literal fulfillment).
Compare the prophetic words of Jesus about His return as
recorded in Luke and again as decoded by Him in the Book
of Revelation:
“Teacher,” they asked, “when will these things happen?”
“…Jerusalem will be trampled on by the Gentiles until the
times of the Gentiles are fulfilled [completed].”
Luke 21:7, 24 NIV
They [the Gentiles] will trample on the holy city [Jerusalem]
for 42 months. Revelation 11:2 NIV
In the first passage Jesus links His return to the completion
or fulfillment of “the time of the Gentiles.” In the second
passage, He clearly specifies “the times of the Gentiles.”
Since the last group of Gentiles to dominate Jerusalem were
the Muslims, it seems reasonable to assume that the figure
given refers to the Muslims, whose reign completed or brought
to an end the domination of Jerusalem by the Gentiles. After
being exposed to its last humiliation, Jerusalem eventually
came under the control of the state of Israel, the seeds of

7e
See Daniel’s prophecy of 2300 days discussed earlier.

8304 I Shall Come Again

9whose birth were planted in the year 1260 (equal to 42 months)
by two historical declarations.

10The Two Witnesses Who Lie Unburied
for Three and a Half Days
In the prophecies that follow, the veil of symbolism in the
vision begins to darken somewhat, as if the Revealer has
resolved to test the depths of human vision. Here the story
becomes more challenging, for its meaning remains sealed
or incomprehensible unless the seeker resolves to tread
patiently through the dark and deep valleys of search.
The succeeding verses of Revelation (Chapter 11) deal with
the struggle between the positive and negative forces in
Islam. In sum, the two Witnesses (likened to two olive trees
or “two candlesticks standing before the God of the earth”)
shall enjoy divine protection and shall be endowed with great
powers to perform wondrous things. And when they have
completed their work—“finished their testimony”—the beast
(symbolic of the Umayyads,9 who usurped the leadership
from the lawful successors) shall “ascend out of the bottom-
less pit,” that is, from the depths of ignorance and shame,
and “shall make war against them, and shall overcome them,
and kill them” (Rev. 11:7), that is, destroy the spirit of their
Faith.
The spirit they kill, but the body or skeleton they expose “in
the street,” that is, they reduce religion to a social or political
skeleton; preserving its name, its institutions, and its dogmas,
but destroying its inspirational or spiritual powers. The faith
that was meant to be centered on the Spirit is gradually altered
into a public show or museum, where lifeless bodies are
stored and displayed. (For the Islamic prophecies pointing to
the spiritual state of the Muslims in the last days, please refer
to Volume IV).

11Chapter 14: They Will Prophesy for 1260 Days

12The prophecy concerning the two Witnesses continues:
For three and a half days men from every people, tribe,
language and nation will gaze on their bodies and refuse
them burial. Revelation 11:9 NIV
The symbolism in the preceding verse should by now have
become quite clear. Simply, the dead body of religion is not
allowed to be buried, that is, to disappear from the eyes of
the people. It is rather kept in sight for three and a half days.
How long is “three and a half days”? It equals the same
prophetic periods of 42 months, or 1260 days, to which we
have already referred. Here are the calculations: since each
day is equal to a year, three and a half days means three and
a half years, which equals 42 months or 1260 days.
3½ × 12 months = 42 months
42 × 30 = 1260 days
As you may have noted, the conversion of the figure “3½”
is carried not once, but twice. Are we justified in doing so?
First, as stated, in the prophetic language no one piece of
evidence, no single fact or figure, can by itself be binding.
Each bit of the evidence must be assessed in relation to the
whole panorama of proofs.
Second, unlike Daniel’s single vision designating the time
of Christ’s first coming, here we have not one, but many
references from many sources, all pointing to the appointed
time.
Third, as mentioned, the language of prophecy is a language
of signs, shrouded in mystery, otherwise facts would not
remain sealed or guarded until the appointed time. The mist
of symbolism seems to increase in proportion to the frequency
with which a given prophetic figure is repeated. The biblical
prophecies foretell the appointed time of the second advent
in four different ways: (1) 1260 days, (2) 42 months, (3) three
and a half days, (4) time, times, and half a time. This may

13306 I Shall Come Again

14be one reason why Daniel’s vision on the first advent also
comprised different or seemingly different dates: 62, 69, and
70 weeks.
Fourth, the figure 3½ (or its equivalent “a time, times, and
half a time”) is used synonymously with the other two figures
(1260 days, and 42 months). Therefore the context of the
vision reaffirms the accuracy and necessity of the conversion
of the figure 3½. For instance, it is prophesied that:
The woman fled into the desert to a place prepared for her
by God, where she might be taken care of for 1260 days.
Revelation 12:6 NIV
And soon thereafter (verse 14) it is said that:
The woman was given the two wings of a great eagle, so
that she might fly to the place prepared for her in the
desert, where she would be taken care of for a time,
times and half a time, out of the serpent’s reach.
Revelation 12:14 NIV
(The symbolism contained in the preceding verses will be
decoded later in this chapter.)
Fifth, in the context of the prophecies, we can find the same
relation between 42 months and 1260 days as we do between
“a time, times and half a time,” and “1260 days.” In some
translations such as The New English Bible and The New
American Bible their identical meaning is more evident. A
review of two of the time prophecies previously quoted will
prove this point.
…they [the Gentiles] will trample the Holy City underfoot
for forty-two months. And I have two witnesses, whom I
will appoint to prophesy, dressed in sackcloth, all through
those twelve hundred and sixty days. Revelation 11:2-3 NEB
What does the phrase “all through those twelve hundred and
sixty days” refer to? Obviously it refers to the preceding figure,
namely, “forty-two months.”

15Chapter 14: They Will Prophesy for 1260 Days

16The above two verses once again confirm what was already
stated about the duration of the prophetic month. If 1260 days
and 42 months are equal, then the length of a prophetic
month must be:
1260 ÷ 42 =
In fact the identity of the four figures (1260 days, 42 months,
3½ days, and “time, times and a half time”) is so well
established that The Amplified Bible in translating any one of
them often adds their equivalents in brackets to emphasize
their unity. (See any of the quoted verses in The Amplified
Bible.) Many of the new versions of the Book of Revelation
drop “time, times, and half a time” altogether. They replace
it with “three years and a half.” (See for instance: The New
English Bible, Today’s English Version of the New Testament,
The Amplified Bible, or The New American Bible.)
Sixth, many Christian scholars, who have puzzled over these
mysterious figures, have at least recognized the identical
interval they represent. (See The Major Prophetic Eras,
Chapter 16.) As we shall see later, the mysterious figure
“time, times, and half a time” was also revealed to Daniel,
in the same context (the destiny of the people of Israel) and
in relation to the same advent.
Here is a reference from a Christian source confirming such
a view:
…in Revelation, each group of 360 days is called a ‘time’
(12:6, 14). If each day in turn becomes a year, then each
‘time,’ in fact, represents 360 years. (This is all based on
a lunar year, of course). So the seven ‘times’ mentioned
in Leviticus 26:28 as a period of punishment for Israel are
seen as a total period of 2520 years

17308 I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 99

The Resurrection Of The Two Witnesses

1Witnesses are not allowed to be buried. What about the
reaction of the nations antagonistic to these two Prophets or
Witnesses? The vision reveals that these nations shall rejoice
over the dead bodies and “shall send gifts one to another.”
The prophecy then continues:
But after the three and a half days a breath of life from
God entered them, and they stood on their feet, and terror
struck those who saw them. Revelation 11:11 NIV
Each preceding passage makes the meaning of the succeeding
ones a little more clear. The dead bodies of the two Witnesses
or the two Prophets have been lying in the open. Then after
three and a half days—1260 years—the spirit of life vivifies
them; that is, in the year 1260, the Spirit of God once again
enters the skeleton of their faith to endow it with a new life.
Many are terrified to hear this news.
The prophecy of the two Witnesses was fulfilled not only
symbolically but literally as well. As stated, the two Witnesses
“whose bodies had been lying in the open for 1260 years”
were Muhammad and His greatest apostle ‘Alí. As it happens,
the names of the other two Witnesses who fulfilled the
prophecy by appearing after the appointed time of 1260 days
(thereby empowering the dead body of religion with a new
Spirit) contained the same two names: ‘Alí and Muhammad.
The first and the greater of the two Witnesses to receive the
power of the Holy Spirit in the year 1260 was the Báb, with
the given name of ‘Alí-Muhammad. The Báb was, further-
more, a direct descendant of both Muhammad and ‘Alí, who,
as mentioned, were spiritually and physically related to each
other. The other Witness to receive a portion of the Holy
Spirit and “to stand upon his feet” was Quddús—meaning

2embraced the new faith in that same eventful year: 1260
(corresponding to 1844 A. D.). Quddús’ given name consisted
of a combination of the same two names but in the reverse
order : Muhammad-‘Alí. Bahá’u’lláh has conferred great
honors on Quddús. He indicates that the Qur’án refers to him
as a Messenger or Prophet.11 That is the exact title the Book

• • •
Chapter 100

The Woman With The Child And The Seven-headed Dragon

1A similar story, but one clothed in a somewhat different
symbolism, is repeated in Chapter 12 of Revelation. Here we
find not only the time of the advent of the Promised One of
all Faiths, but also a major part of the history of Islam, the
faith prophesied to appear between Christ’s first and second
comings.
To appreciate the prophecies that follow, we need to review
some of the history of Islam. As stated, soon after Muhammad’s
death, the Muslims lost the unity they had enjoyed during
their Messenger’s ministry. A major cause of division among
them was the question of succession. The group that followed
Muhammad’s lawful successor ‘Alí, the first Imám—as well as
the other ten Imáms who succeeded him—is called Shí’ah or
Shí’i. The duration of inspiration in Islam lasted as long as
these eleven spiritual leaders or Imáms continued (in spite of
severe opposition from other sects) to assume the leadership
of the minority of the Muslims who followed them. This
period ended in the year 260 A. H., when the eleventh
Imám—Imám Hasan-i-‘Askarí—died and left no heir.

2e
Quddús was not an independent Messenger with a new Revelation. He simply
received an honorary title. Similarly, divine Messengers are not God, yet God
honors them with that very title.

3310 I Shall Come Again

4But according to the Islamic prophecies, there were to appear
not eleven, but twelve Imáms—the twelfth one to come and
lead the people in the last days, referred to in Islamic Scrip-
ture as “the end of time.” The Báb, the Inaugurator of the
New Age, claimed to be not only an independent Messenger
but also the twelfth Imám prophesied in Islamic Scriptures.
The time span between the death of the eleventh Imám (in the
year 260) and the proclamation of the Báb was one thousand
lunar years.
Among those deviating from the true spirit of Islam were a
group of Muslims headed by a succession of leaders who
established a dynasty—or Caliphate—called the Umayyads.
The Umayyads were extremely hostile to the descendants
of Muhammad and massacred many of them. There were
rulers in this dynasty with 10 different names. (Several of
them had exactly the same names.) Let us now proceed with
the prophecies.
Chapter 12 of Revelation contains John’s marvelous and mys-
terious vision of the next two religions, those of Muhammad
and the Báb:
A great and wondrous sign appeared in heaven: a woman
clothed with the sun, with the moon under her feet and a
crown of twelve stars on her head. She was pregnant and
cried out in pain as she was about to give birth.
Revelation 12:1-2 NIV
To interpret the preceding verses we need to decode several
symbols:
• In the Scriptures, religion is likened to heaven, and the
Law of God to an adorned bride, or a woman (see Volume
V). So the woman coming from heaven is the same as the
Law of God or divine truths coming from religion.
• Among the kingdoms coming under the Law of Islam were
the two neighboring countries of Persia, whose national
emblem contains an image of the sun, and Turkey, whose
national emblem contains an image of the moon.

5Chapter 14: They Will Prophesy for 1260 Days

6Now we should be able to interpret the passage quite readily.
The Law of God (the woman) dawned in the heaven of
religion and spread to the neighboring countries of Persia and
Turkey, which are represented by their national emblems, the
sun and the moon. In the heaven of this faith also dawned
twelve Imáms likened to twelve stars. The faith bore a baby
(the Báb) and had difficulty delivering Him because of the
opposition of the heedless people.
The Báb, although an independent Manifestation, was “born
from the Law of Muhammad.” He was a descendant of
Muhammad and the last of His twelve Imáms. The other
eleven Imáms followed each other without interruption.
But the Báb appeared a thousand years later. The vision
continues:
Then another sign appeared in heaven: an enormous red
dragon with seven heads and ten horns and seven crowns
on his heads. Revelation 12:3 NIV
Interpretation: This dragon (that appeared in the heaven of
Islam) represents the succession of the Umayyad dynasty,
which swallowed country after country. It wore the crowns of
seven dominions—Damascus, Persia, Arabia, Egypt, Africa
(consisting of Tunisia, Morocco, and Algeria), Andalusia
(Spain), and Turkestan. The ten horns of the dragon represent
the ten names of the rulers of the dynasty.
Verse 4:
His tail swept a third of the stars out of the sky and flung
them to the earth. The dragon stood in front of the
woman who was about to give birth, so that he might
devour her child the moment it was born.
Revelation 12:4 NIV
Interpretation: As ‘Abdu’l-Bahá states, the Umayyad dynasty
massacred a “third part of the holy and saintly people of the
lineage of Muhammad who were like the stars of heaven.”
The Umayyads “were always waiting to get possession of the
Promised One [the twelfth Imám], who was to come from the

7312 I Shall Come Again

8line of Muhammad.” They wished “to destroy and annihilate
Him.”
Herod conceived and carried out the same scheme and met
the same failure. He tried to get possession of the Promised
One of the people of Israel:
Jesus was born in Bethlehem during the reign of Herod
the Great. The wise men came asking, “Where is he that
is born King of the Jews?” This aroused Herod’s jealous
spirit. According to Matthew’s account, Herod tried to
eliminate Jesus by having all the male infants of the
Bethlehem region put to death (Matt. 2:13-16). But this
despicable act failed. Joseph and Mary were warned by
God in a dream to take their child and flee to Egypt. Here
they hid safely until Herod died (Matt. 2:13-15).14
Verse 5:
She gave birth to a son, a male child, who will rule all the
nations with an iron scepter. And her child was snatched
up to God and to his throne.e Revelation 12:5 NIV
Interpretation: The Faith of Islam (the woman) gives birth to
a “man child” (the Báb) who is to be the King of the nations.
(The Kingdom of the past Messengers was spiritual, that of
the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh is both literal and spiritual, “the
Kingdom of God on earth as it is in Heaven.”) The child
then offers his life and ascends to the divine Kingdom (“was
snatched up to God”). The martyrdom of the Báb was the
fulfillment of this prophecy.
Verse 6:
The woman fled into the desert to a place prepared for her
by God, where she might be taken care of for 1260 days.
Revelation 12:6 NIV

9e
‘Abdu’l-Bahá explains that “the man child,” the Báb, existed in the worlds of
God before His birth. The Book of Revelation confirms the eternal destiny of
the Báb. It refers to the Báb as, “the Lamb that was slain from the creation of
the world" (Rev. 13:8 NIV).

10Chapter 14: They Will Prophesy for 1260 Days

11Interpretation: The woman or the Law of God, which first
appeared in heaven moves to the wilderness (Arabia), where
God had chosen to nourish her for 1260 years. This is exactly
what happened; Arabia became the center of the Law of God.
The Law received nourishment from God until it reached the
end of its cycle in 1260 A. H.—the year in which the Báb
inaugurated a New Age.
In verse 14 of this same chapter (12) it is again repeated that
the woman goes into the wilderness and receives nourishment
“for a time, times, and half a time,” or three years and a half,
already shown to equal 1260 prophetic days.
“The beast with seven heads and ten horns” emerges again
(Rev. 13:1), wielding power and authority and drawing the
admiration and acclamation of the masses. Again the duration
of the beast’s authority is prophesied:
The dragon gave the beast his power and his throne and
great authority…The beast was given a mouth to utter proud
words and blasphemies and to exercise his authority for
forty-two months. Revelation 13:2, 5 NIV
As stated, the Islamic dispensation was marred by many
deviant leaders (the beast) who were guided not by the
divine teachings, but by their own selfish or satanic desires,
symbolically called the dragon. Again, as the preceding verse
predicts, the time allotted to the beast is prophesied to endure
42 months or 1260 days.
It is astounding how these prophecies agree with one another.
As ‘Abdu’l-Bahá reminds every seeker of truth:
There are no clearer proofs than this in the Holy Books
for any Manifestation.e For him who is just, the agreement
of the times indicated by the tongues of the Great Ones
is the most conclusive proof. There is no other possible

12e
As stated, in the Old Testament there are only three verses (Daniel’s vision of
62, 69, and 70 weeks) designating the time of Christ’s first coming.

13314 I Shall Come Again

14explanation of these prophecies. Blessed are the just souls
who seek the truth.15

• • •
Chapter 101

Other Explanations Christian Commentators Have Tried To Accomplish What

1succeeded. Failing to find any event that would relate the
prophecies of 1260 days, 42 months, etc. to the year 1260 in
the Christian calendar, some of them have tried to find events
at any two points in history separated by a span of 1260
years. Since this too has proved impossible, as a last resort,
they have tried to find an approximate fulfillment for these
prophecies by events that coincide closely with the figure
1260. In this case, these interpreters have not considered
the precise fulfillment of time prophecies essential.
The bewilderment of Bible interpreters in understanding
Revelation’s time prophecies and the events associated with
them is reflected clearly in an assessment presented by the
Christian scholar, William Biederwolf, who carried out one
of the most exhaustive searches into biblical prophecy in
search for common, consistent, and reasonable elements in
the works of recognized Bible interpreters. He spent “by far
the largest part of ten years of his time” reviewing and sum-
marizing the works and views of “some five hundred or more
authorities.”16 He found several schools of thought, each with
a unique perspective, for virtually all biblical prophecies.
To illustrate the bewilderment of interpreters, let us take
the views of only one of the schools—perhaps the most
popular one.
The supporters of this school have tried to find links between
the time prophecies of the Book of Revelation and the
historical events associated with “Papal Rome in its political
and ecclesiastical character, that is, the empire and the
Hierarchy of the Papacy.” 17 As we noted, Revelation contains

2Chapter 13 of that Book. Even if we ignore the events of
other chapters, we find many difficulties in associating
Papal Rome with the events or facts contained in that one
chapter alone. Biederwolf lists in this connection seven
discrepancies or difficulties. Here are three of them, quoted
in his own words, from his monumental work The Second
Coming Bible Commentary:
• No one has ever found the ten-fold division of the empire.
Twenty-eight different commentators have named sixty-five
different lists. What would it be if all the commentators
were consulted!
• Even if the 1260 days mean “years” none of them
[scholars] have been able to agree as to when they begin
or when they end; whether they have already ended or
whether the saints are yet in the power of the beast: and
the saints themselves do not seem to know!
• This class of interpreters has as many different interpreta-
tions of 666 as there are interpreters.18 e
Thus we see that the difficulties of relating even one
chapter of Revelation to historical events other than those
declared by ‘Abdu’l-Bahá are enormous. The probability of
finding the fulfillment of these prophecies by “trial and
error” or chance is a virtual impossibility.
As we have noted, the Bahá’í interpretation shows the fulfill-
ment of two events in the precise designated year (1260).
One was the declaration of the Báb, who proclaimed the
dawning of a new Age for humankind. The other was the
declaration of Mordecai Noah, whose efforts signaled the
dawning of a new age for the people of Israel. Furthermore,
it shows an absolute harmony between the prophecy of 2300
days (which is totally independent of the Islamic calendar),
and the prophecy of 1260 days (which is totally dependent on
e
For the fulfillment of the figure 666 by the Umayyad dynasty, see The
Apocalypse Unsealed, by Robert F. Riggs, Chapter 13. The three discrepancies

3the Islamic calendar). As we have noted, the “2300-days” of
Daniel ended in 1844 A. D., which was 1260 in the Islamic
calendar. In addition, the Bahá’í interpretation demonstrates

• • •
Chapter 102

The Context Of The Prophetic Figures

1puzzle, let us make one last observation. The Book of
Revelation contains seven time prophecies on the second
advent. These prophecies are expressed in four seemingly
different forms: 42 months, 1260 days, three days and a half
(all of them used twice), and three times and a half (used
only once). But there is a pattern in the way these four forms
of prophetic figures are used.
1. The figure “42 months” in both cases is used in relation
to the worldly powers in Islam. One of the “42” figures
relates to “the beast,” which symbolizes the worldly kingdom,
and the other to those who trample the Holy City, namely the
forces of the worldly kingdom.
2. The figure 1260 is used in both cases in relation to the
spiritual powers in Islam. One of the “1260” figures relates
to the Founders of Islam (the two Witnesses), and the other,
to the religion itself (the woman).
3. The figure “three and a half days” is used in both cases
in relation to the dead body of Islam, which symbolizes
the outward observance of religion, such as attending and
building magnificent mosques or shrines, praying and fasting
especially in public, wearing veils, calling to prayer, building
and attending seminary, carrying and reading the Holy Book
just for the sake of reading, wearing priestly costumes,

24. Finally the last coded figure “three times and a half ” is
used (like 1260) in relation to the woman, which symbolizes

• • •
Chapter 103

The Prophecy Of The Four Angels The Book Of Revelation Contains Still Another Time Prophecy

1pointing to 1844:
“Release the four angels who are bound at the great river
Euphrates.” And the four angels who had been kept ready
for this very hour and day and month and year were
released to kill a third of mankind [emphasis added].
Revelation 9:14-15 NIV
Let us first decode the main symbolism contained in the
prophecy and then study its fulfillment:

• • •
Chapter 104

Codes Meaning

1bound at the Spiritually, the four existing
Euphrates River religions born in the Middle East
Killinge a third of Secularly, cutting off, conquering,
mankind or controlling a third of
Christendom. Spiritually, directing
or controlling a third of mankind
hour one hour (the Hour)
1 day 1 year
1 month 30 years
1 year 360 years
391 years

2e
“Killing” sometimes symbolizes self-control or self-sacrifice. We are asked
repeatedly to destroy our ego, to sacrifice our earthly pleasures, and to “die in

3Perhaps the first writer or scholar to gain a glimpse of the
inner meanings of this prophecy and decode its timing was
Charles Buck (1771-1815). He wrote:
This period, in the language of prophecy, makes 391 years,
which being added to the year when the four angels were
loosed (prepared), will bring us down to 1844, or there-
abouts, for the final destruction of the Mahometan
[Muhammadan] empire.19
What helped Charles Buck find the date was his realization
that on May 30, 1453, Constantinople and Eastern Christendom
had fallen to the Turks, namely the Islamic empire. He took
that date as the beginning point of the prophecy. He then
computed the period assigned to the four angels, namely, the
time interval for which they had been prepared to rule. This,
as we noted, totals 391 years. To get the final date, he added
the two figures: the span of time assigned to the angels, and
the beginning point of the prophecy (the date the angels were
let loose):
391e + 1453 = 1844
Besides its literal or temporal meaning, the prophecy seems
to contain a spiritual message as well. The four angels bound
at the Euphrates River represent the four existing religions
that originated in the Middle East, in the same geographical
zone where the Euphrates flows. The four religions are:
Judaism, Zoroastrianism, Christianity, and Islam. Although
Islam was the dominant force, all four religions were granted
391 more years to control a third of mankind. Then at the end
of the 391 years (1844) their reign was terminated, by another
angel that appeared in the same region.

4e
“The hour” is discounted. It is frequently used by Christ to refer to the exact
point of His advent. As author Robert Riggs indicates, that is probably what it
symbolizes here. Even if we add an extra “hour” (which is the equivalent of
15 days) to our time span, the final year (1844) derived from the prophecy still

5These are the same four religions Bahá’u’lláh specifically
names in the public proclamation of His Message:
At one time We address the people of the Torah [the Jews]
and summon them unto Him…At another We address the
people of the Evangel [the Christians]…At still another,
We address the people of the Qur’án [the Muslims]…Know
thou, moreover, that We have [also] addressed to the
Magians [the Zoroastrians] Our Tablets.20
What Charles Buck discovered early in the 19th century has
been accepted and its accuracy confirmed by hundreds of
Christian writers and scholars, who for the most part were
unaware of the advent of the Bahá’í Revelation in 1844.
The prophecy of the four angels is so precise as to designate
not only the year (1844) but the season (spring) in which the
past dispensations ended and the new age dawned. The span
of time assigned to the four angels began and ended in spring:
May 30, when the angels were let loose; and May 23, when
the Báb declared His Mission. The Báb’s advent signalized
the closing of all past dispensations.
The Prophetic Cycle hath, verily, ended. The Eternal Truth

• • •
Chapter 105

Other Prophecies From The Book Of Revelation

1The Book of Revelation contains, in addition to the time
prophecies, many other references to the return of Christ. Like
the Book of Daniel, it refers to the rise of Michael—whose
name means “Who is like God?”—and calls Him the Arch-
angel. Daniel referred to this same angel as “Michael…the
great Prince which standeth for the children of thy [Daniel’s]
people” (Daniel 12:1). Then, after giving the time of the
advent, the Book of Revelation predicts the triumph of this

2320 I Shall Come Again

3heavenly spirit over the dragon and other negative forces.
And then it goes on to declare:
Now have come the salvation and the power and the king-
dom of our God, and the authority of his Christ…
Revelation 12:10 NIV
In subsequent chapters, the apocalypse declares the descend-
ing of the city of God ( Jerusalem) from heaven:
I saw the Holy City, the new Jerusalem, coming down out
of heaven from God, prepared as a bride beautifully
dressed for her husband. Revelation 21:2 NIV
As has been stated, the desolation of Jerusalem and the
sanctuary is symbolic of deprivation from the restoring power
of the divine Spirit. Similarly, the restoration or cleansing
of Jerusalem and the sanctuary is symbolic of the dawning
of divine Power over the desolate and despairing centers of
faith. Once again we see the very symbol revealed to Daniel
is also used in the Book of Revelation with an identical
meaning.
The descent of Jerusalem signifies the descent of divine Law
or divine Revelation. Indeed this is one meaning of the
descent of Christ from heaven. Christ’s Spirit (the Bride-
groom) descended from the heaven of divine Knowledge
adorned with the Robe of divine Revelation (the Bride).
As every city needs a source of light, so does the Holy City;
it shines with the Glory of God, the meaning of the title
Bahá’u’lláh:
The city does not need the sun or the moon to shine on
it, for the glory of God gives it light, and the Lamb is its
lamp. Revelation 21:23 NIV
The Lamb, which symbolizes sacrifice, refers not only to
Jesus, but also to the Báb. They both offered their youthful
lives for the life of the world. (See Volume II.)
And again:

4Chapter 14: They Will Prophesy for 1260 Days

5And he…showed me the Holy City, Jerusalem, coming
down out of heaven from God. It [ Jerusalem] shone with
the glory of God [Bahá’u’lláh]… Revelation 21:10-11 NIV
The Book of Revelation refers also to the advent of the
Báb, an independent Messenger as well as the Forerunner of
Bahá’u’lláh:
Blessed are those who wash their robes, that they may
have the right to the tree of life and may go through the
gates into the city. Revelation 22:14 NIV
The word “Báb” in Arabic means “Gate.” The Báb pro-
claimed repeatedly that He was a Gate to the Revelation of
Bahá’u’lláh, a portal through whom the seekers of truth could
enter the City of God and partake of the tree of life. Like-
wise, one of the most distinguished disciples of the Báb and
the first to recognize Him was named Bábu’l-Báb, meaning
“the gate of the Gate.” The two seers, who predicted the
advent of the Báb, were also called “the Gates:”
O ye peoples of the earth! During the time of My absence
I sent down the Gates unto you. However the believers,
except for a handful, obeyed them not…What hath befallen
you, O people of the Book? Will ye not fear the One true
God, He Who is your Lord, the Ancient of Days?…O ye
who profess belief in God! I adjure you by Him Who is
the Eternal Truth, have ye discerned among the precepts
of these Gates anything inconsistent with the command-
ments of God as set forth in this Book? Hath your learning
deluded you by reason of your impiety? Take ye heed then,
for verily your God, the Lord of Eternal Truth, is with you
and in very truth is watchful over you…22 The Báb
The Book of Revelation is rich not only in prophecy but also
in offering counsels and warnings to seekers of truth, lest
they ignore or underestimate their responsibility. God in His
justice never punishes people without giving them ample
warning in advance:

6322 I Shall Come Again

7Behold, I am coming soon! My reward is with me, and I
will give to everyone according to what he has done…
Blessed are those who wash their robes, that they may
have the right to the tree of life and may go through the
gates into the city. Outside are…the sexually immoral,
the murderers, the idolaters and everyone who loves and
practices falsehood. Revelation 22:12-15 NIV
A great portion of the Book of Revelation concerns the
advent of the Bahá’í Faith and to a lesser extent that of
Islam. To examine all the prophecies of Revelation that have
been fulfilled by the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh requires a separate
volume. This is exactly what The Apocalypse Unsealed by
Robert Riggs accomplishes.23

• • •
Chapter 106

Prophecies From Daniel

The Great Prince

1Daniel 12:1

1D aniel’s last and briefest chapter contains one of the most
remarkable prophetic visions in all the Scriptures. In less
than a page, it presents a distinct, unmistakable, and readily
recognizable profile of “the time” and “the signs of the time.”
These are the opening words of Daniel’s vision:
And at that time [of the end] shall Michael stand up,
the great prince which standeth for the children of thy

2Obviously by Michael is meant the adored and the exalted
Savior of the Jews, destined to stand as the symbol and
embodiment of their fairest hopes and dreams. The literal
meaning of Michael, “Who is like God?” provides us with
the first clue. Who, we might ask, deserves such an exalted
honor—like God—save the Son coming in the Glory of the
Father, a Manifestation reflecting the fullest Image of divine
Perfections?
Dr. Ray Stedman in Waiting for the Second Coming writes:
The only angel in the Bible called an archangel is Michael.
Though Gabriel is a great angel, he is never referred to
as an archangel.1
Still another clue comes from the perfect harmony between
the Books of Daniel and Revelation. It is intriguing to note
that the same chapter (12) in both Books (each consisting of
about a page) refers to the coming of the same divine Being,
Michael, (verse 1 in Daniel, verse 7 in Revelation), then
uses the same prophetic figure “time, times and half a time”
to identify the time of His advent.
Both of these chapters also provide us with a decoded figure.
Chapter 12 of Revelation refers to 1260, the time of the
advent of the Báb; and Chapter 12 of Daniel points to 1290
(as we shall see later), the time of the advent of Bahá’u’lláh.
Daniel introduces Michael as the great prince. Here we find
one more clue. As we noted earlier, Daniel in his vision of the
first advent also referred to Jesus as the Messiah, the Prince:
Know therefore and understand, that from the going forth
of the commandment to restore and to build Jerusalem
unto the Messiah the Prince shall be seven weeks…
Daniel 9:25
“The Prince of Peace” is among the best-known titles of the
Redeemer of our age. Bahá’u’lláh fulfilled the designation
“great Prince” both symbolically, by bringing a plan of peace;

3Beyond the title bestowed upon the Prince of the last days,
other signs and clues, linking the prophecy to the advent of
the Lord, abound throughout the vision.
After referring to the coming of Michael, the great prince,
Daniel points to the darkness of the time and the abundance
and triumph of evil (a common prophetic theme appearing in
all the Scriptures). Then he alludes to the acceptance of the
Redeemer by some and the denial or rejection of Him by
others. Following this, the vision begins to become increas-

• • •
Chapter 107

Increase In Knowledge And Travel

1Daniel’s vision of the time of the end offers two striking
signs that signal the ripening of the Age and the dawning of
the new Day: an increase in knowledge, and an abundance
of travel. Here are the words of the vision:
But thou, O Daniel, shut up the words, and seal the book,
even to the time of the end: many shall run to and fro,
and knowledge shall be increased. Daniel 12:4
The history of civilization shows that for thousands of years
humans moved at an extremely slow pace along the path
of progress until the end of the 18th century when there
occurred a sudden and dramatic acceleration of knowledge.
It is believed that the changes brought about in the last two
centuries far exceed all those recorded in the entire previous
history of civilization. An example of this dramatic change
has occurred in the mode and speed of travel. Alvin Toffler
in Future Shock portrays the phenomenal increase in the speed
of travel since the mid-19th century:
…in 6000 B. C. the fastest transportation available to man
over long distances was the camel caravan, averaging eight
miles an hour…when the first mail coach began operat-
ing in England in 1784, it averaged a mere ten mph.

2326 I Shall Come Again

3The first steam locomotive, introduced in 1825, could
muster a top speed of only thirteen mph, and the great
sailing ships of the time labored along at less than half
that speed. It was probably not until the 1880’s that man,
with the help of a more advanced locomotive, managed to
reach a speed of one hundred mph. It took the human race
millions of years to attain that record. [Less than a century
later (1960’s)]….men in space capsules were circling the
earth at 18,000 mph.2
Toffler then goes on to explain:
Whether we examine distances traveled, altitudes reached,
minerals mined, or explosive power harnessed, the same
accelerative trend is obvious. The pattern, here and in a
thousand other statistical series, is absolutely clear and
unmistakable. Millennia or centuries go by, and then, in
our own times, a sudden bursting of the limits, a fantastic
spurt forward.3
From 6000 years before the advent of Christ up to eighteen
and a half centuries after His advent (a total of 78 centuries),
the speed of traveling remained quite constant. Why, then,
did the change happen around the appointed time of Christ’s
return, namely 1844? Was this simply a coincidence?
Dr. Harold Bernard writes:
It has been conjectured that if all the knowledge mankind
had accumulated up to the time of Christ could have been
compressed into one volume, it would have taken until
1750 to double that knowledge. But instead of another 1750
years to double knowledge again, it took only 150 years. The
postulation of acceleration of knowledge looks like this:
Year 1 – one volume
1750 – two volumes
1900 – four volumes
1950 – eight volumes
1960 – sixteen volumes
1967 – thirty-two volumes4

4Chapter 15: The Great Prince

5Since the dawn of history up to the middle of the 18th cen-
tury, the rate of the accumulation of knowledge was about
one volume every three thousand years. From the middle of
the 18th century up to 1967, it climbed to about one volume
every seven years. This is an increase in the acceleration rate
equal to at least 428 times.
The following chart indicates that the greatest acceleration in
creativity—measured by the number of patents issued per
capita—occurred around 1850 and continued unabated until
around 1890, a period that roughly covers the years from
the beginning of the ministry of the Báb to the end of the
ministry of Bahá’u’lláh (1844-1892):

6Source: Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 1962.
(Quoted in Child, Family, Community, 1989, p. 298.) Reprinted
with permission from the American Psychological Association.

7Charles Meister, a Christian writer who wrote Year of the
Lord, a book devoted entirely to the events of 1844 asks:
“Why did so many earth-shaking events occur in the year
1844?” 5 One major scientific achievement in 1844 was the
operation of the first telegraph service. The first message was
sent about one day after the Báb had declared His Message:e
e
The Báb declared His Mission on the evening of May 22nd. But as the Bahá’í
day begins at sunset, and not at midnight as in the West, the Báb’s declaration
is celebrated on 23rd of May.

8328 I Shall Come Again

9The telegram inaugurating commercial service was sent
May 24, 1844, by Professor Samuel Finley Breese Morse…
The message, “What hath God wrought,” was selected
from the 23rd verse of the 23rd chapter of Numbers.6
Another source confirming the dawning of a new civilization
in the mid-19th century is a three-volume series called 1844,
by Christian scholar Jerome Clarke, professor of history at
Southern Missionary College. The author introduces his work
in these words:
The 1830’s and 1840’s were a time of religious, social,
cultural, and political reforms so widespread and intensive
that historians have termed this the period of the Benevolent
Empire. In this period, 1844 was a pivotal year, during
which many of the movements had their beginning, experi-
enced a severe crisis, or reached their climax, or high point.7
And again:
Seldom has an awakening sense of social consciousness
wrought such changes as did these which had their rise in
the 1830’s and 1840’s. Reforms arose in politics, dress,
health, temperance, medicine, and education, and in prisons
and insane asylums. Peace, antislavery, and women’s rights
movements gained momentum. Socialism in the form of
organized experimental communities flourished.8
Mr. Clarke describes the contents of his three volumes (named
1844) as:
Selected religious, humanitarian, social, cultural, and
intellectual movements prominent in 1844 are covered.
Volume I is concerned with topics having a religious
orientation; Volume II deals with areas whose emphasis is
on man’s physical and/or mental development; Volume III
covers movements having a philosophical, cultural, or
social focus.9
Surprisingly, Mr. Clarke does not mention the Bahá’í Faith
in any of his three volumes!

10Chapter 15: The Great Prince

11A passage from a book published in 1881 (some 37 years
after the Advent of the Báb) confirms the fulfillment of
Daniel’s prophecy:
Look at the marvelous achievements of the human mind,
and the cunning works of men’s hands, rivaling the
magician’s wildest dreams, which have been accomplished
within the last fifty years. It was recently stated in the
Scientific American that more advancement had been
made in all scientific attainments, and more progress in all
that tends to domestic comfort, the rapid transaction of
business among men, and the transmission of intelligence
from one to another, than all that was done for three
thousand years previous, put together. Or, on the other
hand, look at the wonderful light which, within the past
thirty years, has shone upon the Scriptures. The fulfillment
of prophecy has been shown in the light of history.
Applications are made which are beyond dispute, show-
ing that the end of all things is near. Truly the seal has
been taken from the book, and knowledge respecting what
God has revealed in his word, is wonderfully increased.10
The increase in knowledge is one more evidence of the
uniqueness of our age. It is a reflection of the release of the
heavenly power, a gleam of the Glory of God.

• • •
Chapter 108

The Time Of The Advent Of The Great Prince After Giving The Two Specific Signs Of The Approach Of The

1new Age—an increase in knowledge and travel—Daniel goes
on to designate the exact time of the advent of the Prince.
In his vision he observes two men standing on the opposite
sides of a river. One of the two asks the other: “How long
shall it be to the end of these wonders?” (Verse 6). That is,
when shall these prophecies be fulfilled? A question to which
the other man responds by raising his hands towards heaven
and swearing:

2330 I Shall Come Again

3…by him that liveth for ever that it shall be for a time,
times, and an half; and when he shall have accomplished
to scatter the power of the holy people, all these things
shall be finished. Daniel 12:7

4Most new translations use the familiar but coded figure “time,
times, and half a time.” Some of the new translations, such
as The New American Bible, are more specific; they decode
the figures. Others, such as The Amplified Bible and The New
International Version place the decoded figure (three and a
half years) in the footnote, or add it to the text in brackets.
The passage appears in The New American Bible this way:
…by him who lives forever that it should be for a year,
two years, a half-year; and that, when the power of the
destroyer of the holy people was brought to an end, all
these things should end. Daniel 12:7

5In the brief passage cited, the vision designates the date in
two different but by now familiar ways. First, by the phrase
“a time, times, and half a time,” an exact prophetic figure
revealed to John many centuries later e (Rev. 12:14); and then
by linking the date to the time when the scattering of the
power of the holy people, the Jews, has been accomplished.
This is again in perfect accord with the prophetic words of
Jesus to His inquisitive disciples wishing to know the time
of His return. It is also in accord with the testimony given
in Revelation.
There are still other clues that link Daniel’s prophecy of three
years and a half to Jesus’ own words about His return. Due
to their special significance, let us review the verses we just
studied, in the context of a few additional verses:

6e
As stated, this important prophetic figure was revealed to John in four different
ways: a time, times, and half a time (Rev. 12:14), three days and a half (Rev.
11:11; 11:9), forty two months (Rev. 13:5; 11:2), and 1260 days (Rev. 11:3;
12:6).

7Chapter 15: The Great Prince

8At that time Michael, the great prince who protects your
people, will arise. There will be a time of distress such
as has not happened from the beginning of nations until
then…“How long will it be before these astonishing things
are fulfilled?”…It will be for a time, times and a half.
Daniel 12:1, 6, 7 NIV
Besides the clarity with which the preceding prophecy
conveys its chief message, it provides us with one more clue
that has an exact counterpart in the New Testament. The clue
is: “There will be a time of distress such as has not happened
from the beginning of nations until then.”
The preceding passage from Daniel is in perfect harmony
with what Jesus told His disciples on the Mt. of Olives about
His return:
For then [at the time of the advent] there will be great
distress, unequaled from the beginning of the world until
now—and never to be equaled again. Matthew 24:21 NIV
Just six verses before uttering these words (Matt. 24:15),
Jesus had asked those who wished to know the time of His
return to refer to the Book of Daniel, where, He knew, the
rich treasures of these time prophecies were deposited.
Daniel’s prophecy declares that “when he shall have accom-
plished to scatter the power of the holy people, all these
things shall be finished” (Dan. 12:7). Because the holy people
transgressed the divine laws, God inactivated or “scattered”
the power that joined them together. The winds of destiny
dispersed them to the farthest reaches of the earth.
The prophecy declares that when the goal of scattering is
accomplished, when the holy people are no longer being
dispersed, all “these things should be finished.” Among
“these things” is the promise of the coming of Michael. By
then that promise must have already been fulfilled.
The force that had been scattering the people of Israel for
centuries turned visibly and dramatically at the appointed

9332 I Shall Come Again

10time into a unifying power. The appointed time was 1948.e
Since then Israel has once again become an independent
nation. The motherland has called and continues to gather her
scattered children. Then, where is Michael? The house has
been built. Where is its Master? Will the Bridegroom be late
for His banquet? Has not God’s purpose of scattering been
accomplished? Then, where is the great Prince?

11Daniel’s Second Prophecy of
“Three Times and a Half ”
Daniel’s remarkable prophecies of the last days reveal further
detail. In still another vision, he refers to the rise of several
kingdoms that are followed by the rise of a last king (king-
dom), one that “will speak against the Most High, oppress
his saints, and try to change the set times and the laws.”
Then Daniel’s vision predicts the exact time allotted to this
king or kingdom:
The saints will be handed over to him for a time, times
and half a time. Daniel 7:25 NIV
As mentioned, the last religious kingdom (Islamic) was
dominated by rulers who disregarded some of the divine
laws and introduced their own. Soon after Muhammad’s
death, rivalry and division broke out among the Muslims and
continued throughout the Islamic dispensation. The Umayyad
dynasty was the first to take power away from the lawful
successors of Muhammad, to oppress the saints, and to try to
change the laws to its own favor. Other leaders followed suit.
We know too well how often throughout history people have
used religion as a weapon to win selfish ends.

12e
This was preceded by Noah's call in 1844 A. D. to establish the State of Israel
and the signing of the Edicts of Submission that symbolized the weakening and
the ultimate downfall of the Ottoman Empire, which ruled the Holy Land.

13Chapter 15: The Great Prince

14It is essential to note that the prophecy does not concern
religion; it only points to rulers or kingdoms. Although many
of the Islamic governments deviated from the divine Laws,
we should in no way disregard or belittle the Islamic con-
tributions to both the spiritual and secular development of
civilization. We should also note that Islam was not the only
religion to be misused by religious leaders, though it will be
the last. We will soon learn why.

• • •
Chapter 109

Harmony Among The Prophecies

1and St. John’s visions of the last days. There are also similar
parallels between Daniel’s preceding vision of “time, times,
and half a time” (7:25) and Jesus’ words on His own return.
For example, the Book of Daniel states:
In my vision at night I looked, and there before me was
one like a son of man, coming with the clouds of heaven.
He approached the Ancient of Days and was led into his
presence. He was given authority, glory and sovereign
power; all peoples, nations and men of every language
worshiped him. His dominion is an everlasting dominion
that will not pass away, and his kingdom is one that will
never be destroyed. Daniel 7:13-14 NIV
This prophecy is confirmed by Jesus. Such expressions as a
son of man, coming with the clouds of heaven, and glory
and sovereign power are almost identical with Jesus’ words
on His own return:
…they shall see the Son of man coming in the clouds of
heaven with power and great glory. Matthew 24:30
The phrase one like a Son of man is particularly enlighten-
ing, for it fully accords with the Bahá’í view of “return.”
Neither the Báb nor Bahá’u’lláh claimed to have possessed

2declare themselves to be separate creations, but endowed with
powers and attributes similar to those possessed by the Son.
(See the explanation offered in Volume V on the return of
Elijah as John the Baptist.)
Further, the prophecy refers to two Beings: one like a
son of man (the Báb), and the other the Ancient of Days
(Bahá’u’lláh). The Ancient of Days is a title assumed by
Bahá’u’lláh. Here are His words:
God is my witness! He, the Ancient of everlasting days
is come, girded with majesty and power.11
There is an amazing similarity between Jesus and the Báb.
Volume II offers over 86 specific parallels between their lives.
The more we examine and compare the prophetic passages,
the more we see their similarity and common purpose. Before
concluding this chapter, let us make one more comparison.
At the beginning of his vision of 2300 days, Daniel states that:
…a vision appeared to me, Daniel, similar to my former
vision. Daniel 8:1-2 NEB
“The former vision” Daniel is referring to is the vision of
“three times and a half ” we have just examined. Here we
can see one more evidence of harmony and relationship
between the intent of two seemingly different visions, one
based on Jewish history, the other on Islamic history.e

3e
Those interested in continuing their study of Daniel’s visions may wish to refer
to The Quest for Eden by E. M. Marsella, Philosophical Library, 1966, pp. 207-

• • •
Chapter 110

Prophecies From The Books Of Moses

The Seven Times

1Leviticus 26:18

1the Seven Times

2B efore concluding our examination of time prophecies
pointing to 1844 or 1260, let us examine one more piece
of the grand puzzle concealed in Hebrew Scriptures. A special
time prophecy in the books of Moses covers the second
longest prophetic period recorded in the Bible. It is called the
prophecy of the seven times. Knowing it will help us gain a

3But if you will not listen to me…and if you reject my
decrees…I will punish you for your sins seven times over.
Leviticus 26:14, 15, 18 NIV
If in spite of these things you do not accept my correction
but continue to be hostile toward me, I…will afflict you
for your sins seven times over…I will turn your cities into
ruins and lay waste your sanctuaries, and I will take no
delight in the pleasing aroma of your offerings. I will lay
waste the land…I will scatter you among the nations…
Leviticus 26:23, 24, 31, 33 NIV
These coded prophecies, many Christian scholars have
maintained, point to the interval or the era during which the
Jews were deprived of the temporal power and glory they had
once enjoyed. Those who decoded the prophecies calculated
the intended era in this way: since in prophetic language a
time equals a year of 360 days, seven times must equal
7 × 360 = 2520. They called these twenty-five centuries the
times of the Gentile rule. They believed this period extended
from the latter part of the 7th century B. C.—perhaps the most
critical period in the disintegration of Jewish independence—
to the mid-19th century A. D.
The scholars knew that since the fall of the Jews from power
was gradual, their rise to power must also be gradual; there-
fore, they did not expect a single date or event to mark the
closing of the twenty five centuries. In spite of this, they
found so much evidence as to be convinced that a closing
date could be set.
They were aware of the biblical prophecies linking 1260—
which is one half of 2520—to the end of “the times of the
Gentiles.” To them the prophecy of the seven times seemed to
carry a similar message, linked to an earlier starting point.
And they found a turning point—a historical milestone—in
the lives of Jewish people that confirmed their observations.
Before examining their findings, we should look briefly at

4Chapter 16: The Seven Times

• • •
Chapter 111

The Meteor That Lighted The World

1the seekers of the mid-19th century in unraveling the prophe-
cies were remarkable. Their zeal and dedication led them to
many discoveries. Like a brilliant meteor they lighted the
world, but sadly their light did not endure. What narrowed
their horizons and the range of their influence was a strong
inclination to expect a literal fulfillment of all the prophecies.
Surprisingly, this handicap worked in opposite ways. It
sharpened their understanding of time prophecies, but dulled
their perception of other prophecies.
It is evident that dates involve numbers, and numbers constitute
literal—not symbolic—entities. A literal mind detects specific
facts and relationships, and delights in traditional thinking; a
liberal mind, like an eagle, soars beyond conventional beliefs
and traditions to gain a global vision of reality.
Those seekers, like many Christians of today, acknowledged
being literal in interpreting the Bible and were proud of it.
The assumption was and still is that the more literal a
believer, the closer he or she will be to the reality of God’s
words. William Miller, the leader of the Advent Movement,
was characterized by one of his close associates, Joshua
Himes, as
…a great stickler for literal interpretation; never admitting
the figurative, unless absolutely required to make correct
sense
Miller described his standards in interpreting the Scriptures
this way:
I believe the Bible is the revealed will of God to man…
and that it is to be understood as literal as it can be and

2The problem with the preceding statement is this: what makes
good sense to us may have no place in God’s grand scheme
of creation. The expectation that God would send a Savior
to restore a literal kingdom to the Jews—who had suffered
for so long and prayed so hard—made perfect sense to
every Jew at the time of Jesus. But their “perfect sense”
turned out to be flawed—distorted by human desire for
earthly power and glory:
…the Lord seeth not as man seeth; for man looketh on the
outward appearance, but the Lord looketh on the heart.
I Samuel 16:7
Ye judge after the flesh… John 8:15
The idea of receiving a King-Messiah was so logical and
defensible that even Jesus’ disciples—who were the most
enlightened people of their time—expected and cherished it.
They were quite disappointed by the reality of God’s wisdom
and ways of doing things:
When Jesus was crucified, all his disciples, except John,
left him, discouraged and heartbroken, partly because
their dreams for the Kingdom of God on earth were now
shattered.3
In addition to suffering from extreme literalness, the seekers
of the mid-19th century suffered from still another handicap:
their unquestioned rejection of Islam. To solve a puzzle, all
the facts must be accepted and integrated without any pre-
conceived notions. Those seekers for the most part either
ignored or distorted the prophecies that seemed to give
credibility to a religion they considered to be false. They
were severely handicapped by their inability to liberate
themselves from a deeply rooted tradition, one that is still
present among Christians. They rejected Muhammad even as
an atheist would reject Jesus without ever examining His
evidence. The forces of tradition command awesome powers.
They have obscured the identity of every Messenger God has

3The seekers of the mid-19th century knew that the year 1260
of the Islamic Era coincided with the year 1844 of the Chris-
tian Era. But this knowledge would not prompt them to make
an impartial search into the Islamic Scriptures. They displayed
marvelous ingenuity and made grand discoveries, but because
of their “Islamic handicap,” they could not detect some
simple connections. They could not see that the figure 1260
(and its counterparts) specified the duration of the Islamic
dispensation, that it pointed to the interval during which
“God’s two Witnesses or Prophets” (Rev. 11:3; see Chapter
14) guided the people to the path of the coming Kingdom.
This handicap thwarted their efforts and diminished their
insight. Had they viewed Islam with an open mind, they
could have deciphered many more mysteries in the grand
jigsaw puzzle of prophecies.
There was one more piece of the puzzle they did not notice.
They failed to realize the significance of Mordecai Noah's
call to the western nations for the establishment of the State
of Israel. Noah's call, like the advent of spring, awakened
and nourished the seed-idea of an independent nation for
the Jews. It activated the dormant dreams of nationalism
among the people of Israel. They were also unaware of the
weakening and downfall of an Empire that ruled the Holy
Land. Had the seekers of the mid-19th century known that
such glimmers of hope and fulfillment were on the horizon,

• • •
Chapter 112

The Link Between Two Critical Events Let Us Now See If We Can Discern A Closer Link Between Two

• • •
Chapter 113

Transforming The Codes Into Dates

1the throne at the age of 12 and reigned for 55 years; 698-
643 B. C. He was taken captive in the 22nd year of his reign,
namely 677-676 B. C.11 e If we use the captivity of Manasseh
and the tribe of Judah as the critical starting point in the
decline of the Jews as a nation, we arrive at the grand
terminal point of the seven times: 677+1843 = 2520.
What Moses predicted was fulfilled with precision. The
termination of the seven times that the Jews were granted
arrived in 1843 B. C. E. (Before Common, or Christian,
Era), which corresponds to 1844 A. D. As stated in Chapter
10, since the Christian calendar began with the year one
instead of zero, whenever we move from B. C. to A. D., we
need to make a correction, otherwise we will have an extra
year. Thus 1844 A. D., when the Báb declared His Mission,
was actually the 1843rd year of the Christian Era.
e
After his captivity, Manasseh was released and allowed to continue his reign in

2Before concluding our examination of the prophecy of the
seven times, we should examine two more examples from
among the works of the many Christian scholars of the
mid-19th century who proclaimed and promoted it. Perhaps
the first seeker to decode the prophecy was William Miller,
who made his discovery before the advent of the Báb. He
states:
From a further study of the Scriptures, I concluded that
the seven times of Gentile supremacy must commence
when the Jews ceased to be an independent nation, at
the captivity of Manasseh, which the best chronologers
assigned to B. C. 677.12
The seven times are 2520; take 677 from it, and it leaves
1843 after Christ, when “all these things will be finished.”13
And again:
…[in] B. C. 677, Esarhaddon, king of Assyria and Babylon,
came with a large army into the land of Israel and Judah,
carried away the last remnant of Israel, and they have not
been a nation since. Then he also made war against
Jerusalem, took Manasseh and carried him to Babylon;
which begins the “seven times” Judah was to be in
bondage to the kings of the earth, and also the “seven
years” Israel should be a captive, robbed and spoiled
people; both beginning and ending at one time, 2520
years, beginning B. C. 677, ending A. D. 1843. To 1843
add 677, and the sum equals 2520.14
Matthew Habershon was another early pioneer to examine
this prophecy. In his works, he lists the dates 677-676 B. C.
as the commencement of “the times of the Gentiles” or 2520
years. He states that in 677-676 B. C. Esarhaddon “carried
away the small remnant of Israel…and thus totally and finally
destroyed the kingdom of Israel from being a nation.”15 He
then adds that both prophetic areas of “2520-years” and

3The final termination of the ‘seven times’ was proved to
correspond exactly to this year—that is, 2520 years,
reckoned from 677 B. C., the date of Israel’s final ruin;
and 2300 years, reckoned from Ezra’s commission in

• • •
Chapter 114

A Unique Prophetic Figure

1Islamic literature. Ibn-i-‘Arabí (Shaykh Ibnu’l-‘Arabí, known
as Muhyi’d-Dín, 1165-1240 A. D.) —one of the most eminent
scholars of the East and author of some two hundred volumes—
reveals the time of the advent of the Redeemer of our time
in this puzzle:
The time of the advent of Mahdí [the Promised One of the
Muslims] is equal to half of the smallest number divisible
by the numbers 1 through 9.17
This number is 2520, and half of it is 1260. Perhaps because
of his great discernment, Ibn-i-‘Arabí found the figure from
Islamic prophecies and then enclosed it in a puzzle.
Dr. Guinness, a distinguished Christian scholar from the
West, on the basis of his studies of biblical prophecies,
discerned the significance of the figure 2520 as Ibn-i-‘Arabí
had done centuries earlier. Dr. Guinness began publishing
his works (nine volumes) “after twenty years of intensive,
independent study of the Scripture prophecy and the second
advent.” As Dr. Guinness notes:
…2520 is arithmetically a most remarkable number; a
number as distinct from all other numbers as the circle is
from all other forms. It is not a number that could possibly
have been selected by chance…Its selection in preference
e
For a list of other Christian writers or scholars who selected 677 B. C. as the
beginning point of the prophecy of the seven times, please refer to The Prophetic

2to all other numbers is an indication of intelligent design
…The omniscient God has deliberately passed by all
other conceivable numbers…that He might select…a
number which is sui generis, altogether unique, one
which stands forth by its very nature as a king among
other numbers…2520 is the least common multiple of the
first ten numbers; in other words, it is the first in the
entire series of numbers, that is exactly divisible by all the
first ten numerals.
1 is contained in it 2520 times without remainder
2 "
1260 "
3 "
840 "
4 "
630 "
5 "
504 "
6 "
420 "
7 "
360 "
8 "
315 "
9 "
280 "
10 "
252 "

3Also if we add the figures contained in 2520, we get 9, which
is the numerical value of Bahá. Nine symbolizes the divine
attributes of perfection and oneness. It is the highest one-digit

• • •
Chapter 115

The Major Prophetic Eras Looking At The Major Prophetic Eras Will Help Us See More Clearly Not Only The Main Stages Of The Social And Spiritual

1evolution of humanity, but also the cycles of God’s promises
and their fulfillment at the appointed intervals.
These are the main Prophetic Eras found in the Bible:
• The Grand Gentile Era of 25 centuries (seven times).
• The Gentile Era of 12 centuries (three and a half times).

2• The Grand Sanctuary Era of 23 centuries (2300 days).
• The Sanctuary Era of 5 centuries (69-70 weeks).
Dr. and Mrs. Guinness present this analysis of the two
Gentile Eras:
The great “Seven Times” is divided into two halves, and
the predictions respecting the second half of the week are
far more numerous than those respecting the whole period.
Bisect a week, and you have three and a half days. Bisect
seven times, and you have three and a half times. Bisect
2520 years, and you have 1260 years.
Now this last period is more frequently used in prophecy
to measure historic episodes than any other. It is mentioned
under various names, all conveying the same interval of
time; it is sometimes called “forty and two months”; some-
times “1260 days”; sometimes “time, times, and a half ”—
some mysterious designation being always employed
instead of the clear statement 1260 years, in order that a
veil might rest for a time over the period, and that its true

• • •
Chapter 116

The Relationship Between Heavenly And Earthly

1“Jerusalem and Sanctuary”
This section is a summary of the time prophecies we have
studied and a comparative examination of the codes by which
they were concealed. Seeing the prophecies in close succes-
sion will give us a clearer perspective of their harmonious
relationships.
The prophecy of the seven times carries an ultimatum to the
people of Israel: obey God or face the consequences.

2Chapter 16: The Seven Times

3If…you still do not listen to me…I will turn your cities into
ruins and lay waste your sanctuaries…I will scatter you
among the nations… Leviticus 26:27, 31, 33 NIV
This prophecy supports all the others examined earlier. And
it offers the same clues they do to convey the same message.
Here are the clues:
• The transgression or rebellion against God and His com-
mandments, which leads to…
• The desolation of the sanctuary
• The desolation of Jewish cities (including Jerusalem)
• The dispersion of the Jewish people among the nations
As we noted in Chapter 10, Daniel had this vision:
“How long will it take for the vision to be fulfilled—the
vision concerning the daily sacrifice, the rebellion that
causes desolation, and the surrender of the sanctuary and
of the host that will be trampled underfoot?” He said to
me, “It will take 2300 evenings and mornings; then the
sanctuary will be reconsecrated.”…“Son of man,” he said
to me, “understand that the vision concerns the time of the
end.” Daniel 8:13, 14, 17 NIV
The clues offered in Daniel’s vision are identical with those
revealed to Moses. They consist of:
• The surrender of the sanctuary, and its humiliation and
desolation (“trampling under foot”).
• The surrender, humiliation, and desolation of the host of
the sanctuary—those who protect and serve it—namely the
Jews.
• The impact of these events on one of the ceremonies of
the sanctuary, namely the daily sacrifice.
When the disciples asked Jesus about His return, He cited
some of these same clues:

4348 I Shall Come Again

5‘Master,’ they asked, ‘when will it all come about?’…They
will fall at the sword’s point; they will be carried captive
into all countries; and Jerusalem will be trampled down
by foreigners [Gentiles] until their day has run its course…
And then they shall see the Son of Man coming…
Luke 21:7, 24, 27 NEB

6On still another occasion, Jesus linked one of these clues—
the destroying of Jerusalem and its sanctuary—to the advent
of the Lord, namely His own return:
O Jerusalem, Jerusalem, the city that murders the prophets
and stones the Messengers sent to her! e How often I have
longed to gather your children, as a hen gathers her brood
under her wings; but you would not let me. Look, Look!
there is your temple, forsaken [left to you desolate, NIV]
by God. And I tell you, you shall never see me until the
time comes when you say, “Blessings on him who comes
in the name of the Lord!” Luke 13:34-35 NEB

7This same sign was revealed also in the Book of Revelation:
I saw the Holy City, the new Jerusalem, coming down
out of heaven from God…The city does not need the
sun or the moon to shine on it, for the glory of God
[Bahá’u’lláh] gives it light, and the Lamb [the Báb] is its
lamp. Revelation 21:2, 23 NIV
See also verses 10-11

8Here Jerusalem symbolizes the divine Revelation. When
people cease to live in the City of God, when its light turns
into darkness, God sends a new Jerusalem, a new City illu-
mined with His infinite light and glory.
According to The Zondervan Bible Dictionary, “There is no
doubt about it that even in the Old Testament, Jerusalem,
e
An allusion to Jesus’ own crucifixion in Jerusalem, and the dawning and
reappearance of His divine Power in the name of the Lord.

9Chapter 16: The Seven Times

10especially when referred to as Zion, sometimes was used
to express spiritual rather than geographical or historical
ideas.” 20 It then quotes this verse as an evidence:
You have not come to a mountain that can be touched…
you have come to Mount Zion, to the heavenly Jerusalem,
the city of the living God. Hebrews 12:18, 22 NIV
e

11The symbol of “Jerusalem” appears again in the Book of
Revelation with additional facts. As we noted, Jesus linked
His return to the time when the trampling of Jerusalem by
the Gentiles “has run its course.” (Luke 21:24 NEB). In the
following prophecy He specifies the time when that event
will have been accomplished:
…and they [the Gentiles] will trample the Holy City
[Jerusalem] underfoot for forty-two months.
Revelation 11:2 NEB
The next verse is preceded and confirmed by still other
prophecies from Daniel:
But you Daniel, keep the words secret and seal the book
till the time of the end…‘How long will it be before these
portents cease?…’ ‘It shall be for a time, times, and a
half. When the power of the holy people ceases to be dis-
persed, all these things shall come to an end.’
Daniel 12:4-7 NEB

12e
In addition to “the city that descends from heaven” (divine Revelation), Zion
and Jerusalem sometimes symbolize the heart of the Holy Land, the spirit of
Israel. For instance, when Jesus declared “O Jerusalem, Jerusalem, the city that
murders the prophets…How often have I longed to gather your children” (Luke
13:34 NEB), it is certain He was not pointing to a specific city in Israel, but to
the people of that blessed Land, whose heart is Jerusalem. Similarly, some of the
prophecies that declare Zion to be the dawning-place of the divine Kingdom do
not refer to a specific location but rather to what Zion stands for: the blessed
land of the people of Israel:
…from the heart of Zion [Israel] there cometh the cry: “The promise of all
ages is now fulfilled.” 21 Bahá’u’lláh

13350 I Shall Come Again

14There is a clear link between the preceding prophecies
(Jesus' and Daniel’s) and the prophecy of the seven times.
For Moses predicted that:
• The Jewish people will be scattered among nations.
• The scattering will continue for seven times.
Daniel’s vision contains the same expression and predictions:
• The scattering or disintegration of the temporal power or
sovereignty of the holy people, namely the Jews, will con-
tinue. (By Daniel’s time, the disintegration had already
started.)
• The scattering of that power will cease after three and a
half times.
Jesus referred to the same time interval by the figure
months, instead of 3½ times. To help His followers gain more
knowledge about the time of His return, Jesus asked them
specifically to search into Daniel’s prophecies that speak of
desolation:
Tell us, when shall these things be? and what shall be the
sign of thy coming?…When ye therefore shall see the
abomination of desolation spoken of by Daniel…(whoso
readeth, let him understand). Matthew 24:3,
These were but a few segments of a grand prophetic profile
put together piece by piece by the Prophets and Messengers
over an interval of about fifteen centuries, from the time of
Moses to Jesus.

• • •
Chapter 117

To Conclude The Prophecy Of The Seven Times Specified The Exact Interval Between Two Critical Points In The Fall And The Rise Of The Jewish People As Citizens Of Both The Earthly And The Heavenly

1Jerusalem.

2Chapter 16: The Seven Times

3During the reign of Manasseh they completely abandoned the
heavenly Jerusalem, and thus God’s time of grace for them
ran out (Jeremiah 15:4-7). The chosen people, who were
adored and cherished, fell from favor.
If only you will now listen to me and keep my covenant,
then out of all peoples you shall become my special
possession… Exodus 19:5 NEB
During the reign of the same sovereign, namely in 677 B. C.,
as the result of the first captivity of the tribe of Judah and
of Manasseh—the sovereign of Jerusalem—the dominoes of
their earthly splendor also began to fall and crumble. The
loss of the heavenly splendor of Jerusalem for the Jews was
followed by the loss of its earthly splendor.
Their dominoes continued to fall for 2520 years. (By reject-
ing Jesus, they had already lost an earlier opportunity for
redemption.)
Then at the end of this long interval, they were presented
once again with a new opportunity to restore themselves.
Once again they could find favor with God by welcoming
their new Redeemer, and once again they could build the
kingdom they had lost. The key to the earthly Jerusalem was
presented to them in 1844 when Mordecai Noah called the
western nations to establish a homeland for Jewish people.
The gate to the heavenly Jerusalem was opened to them, and
to all humanity, in that same year—1844—when the Báb
declared the dawning of the new age.
As stated in this and the preceding chapters, the time proph-
ecies covered a period of about 25 centuries, and all of them—
the seven times, 2300 days, three and a half times, and its
equivalents, 42 months, and 1260 days—converged on one
point: 1844.

4The Ancient of Days
Daniel 7:9 NIV

5Prophecies Concerning the Time of
the Advent of Bahá’u’lláh

6The Prophecy of 1290 Days

7A s I looked, thrones were set in place, and the Ancient
of Days took his seat. Daniel 7:9 NIV
The Ancient of Days is come in His great glory.1
Bahá’u’lláh
God is my witness! He, the Ancient of everlasting days
is come, girded with majesty and power.2 Bahá’u’lláh

8354 I Shall Come Again

9Daniel’s visions of the appointed “time of the end” seem
inexhaustible. After referring repeatedly to the time of the
dawning of the new Day in 1844 or 1260, the prophecies
finally point to the time of the rising of its “Sun,” namely
Bahá’u’lláh.
As stated earlier, Daniel was told that Michael, the great
Prince, would come. He then asked about the time, and was
told that “It shall be for a time, times, and half a time.”
Daniel could not interpret the meaning of this figure, so he
asked for further explanation. In response, he received further
clues that helped him recognize that the vision pertained
to the time of the end. After all these, he was given still
another figure:
From the time when the regular offering is abolished and
“the abomination of desolation” is set up, there shall be
an interval of one thousand two hundred and ninety days.
Daniel 12:11 NEB
The compass of prophetic utterances seems to have been
drawn primarily toward the beginning point of the new Age
(1260 A. H. or 1844 A. D.) and seldom toward the time of
Bahá’u’lláh’s advent (1280 A. H. or 1863 A. D.), Daniel’s
prophecy is one of the few exceptions.
According to ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, the prophetic figure “1290 days”
refers to the time lapse between the public ministry of
Muhammad and the public ministry of Bahá’u’lláh. Accord-
ing to the Islamic calendar, Bahá’u’lláh proclaimed His
Mission publicly in 1280, and Muhammad had proclaimed
His Mission publicly ten years prior to His departure from
Mecca to Medina, the event that marked the beginning of the
Islamic Era.e
Thus the time period between the inauguration of the public
ministries of Muhammad and Bahá’u’lláh was 1290 prophetic

10e
As stated, all the prophetic dates linked to the advent of Islam are based on the
lunar year, the time interval used by the Muslims.

11Chapter 17: The Ancient of Days

12days. Again, this one fact cannot and should not by itself be
regarded as conclusive evidence; it should rather be viewed
as one more fact fitting into the whole profile.
We can also find the ten-year difference by comparing the
distance between the advent of Muhammad and the advent
of the Báb. Even though the Báb proclaimed His Mission in
the year 1260 of the Islamic Calendar, the length of time
between the onset of the revelation of His holy Book, the
Bayán, and that of Muhammad, the Qur’án, was 1270 years.
The Báb frequently refers to this interval:
Indeed, if any living creature were to pause to meditate
he would undoubtedly realize that these verses are not the
work of man, but are solely to be ascribed unto God, the
One, the Peerless…Had human beings been able to accom-
plish this deed surely someone would have brought forth
at least one verse during the period of twelve hundred and
seventy years which hath elapsed since the revelation of
the Qur’án until that of the Bayán [the Báb’s Holy Book].3
Daniel's prophecy also carries two symbols. We noted that
when Jesus was on the Mount of Olives, His disciples asked
Him about the time of His return, and He gave them two
clues. One had to do with the fulfillment of the times of the
Gentiles, whereas the other pointed to the abomination of
desolation spoken of by Daniel. (The abominable acts that
caused the desolation of the spiritual and temporal civilization
of the Jews, transgressions that “scattered” their unifying
powers.) We also noted that the Book of Daniel carries two
prophecies in which the abomination of desolation is used
along with a number. The first prophecy was that of 2300
days, already demonstrated to end in 1844, the time of the
declaration of the Báb. The second prophecy to contain the
same symbolic expression, along with a number, is the
prophecy of 1290 we are now examining. Here is once again
the question raised by the disciples:

13356 I Shall Come Again

14‘Tell us,’ they said, ‘when will this happen? And what
will be the signal for your coming and the end of the
age?’ Matthew 24:3 NEB
After referring to the signs of the time of His return, Jesus
referred to the time itself :
When ye therefore shall see the abomination of desolation,
spoken of by Daniel the prophet, stand in the holy place,
(whoso readeth, let him understand)… Matthew 24:15
Thus Jesus has specifically referred us to the prophecy of
1290 days we are now examining.
We should now return to Daniel’s prophecy of 1290 days to
decode its symbols. The two symbols it carries are: the taking
away (or cessation) of daily sacrifice, and the abomination
of desolation. The first symbol, namely the cessation of
daily sacrifice (explained in Chapter 9) is used prophetically
to signal the change of the age. This same symbol was also
revealed in Daniel’s vision of 70 weeks to signal the begin-
ning of the public ministry of Jesus (see Daniel 9:27). The
advents of Christianity and Islam signaled a change of the age
and the dawning of a new day, which is always accompanied
by change in social laws such as: ways of worship, daily
sacrifice, marriage, divorce, forbidden foods, holy days, etc.
The advent of both of these religions was followed by the
literal cessation of daily sacrifice. Less than forty years after
the crucifixion of Jesus, Titus caused the daily sacrifice
among the Jews to cease. ‘Umar did the same, five years
after the death of Muhammad when he conquered the Holy
Land. Once again we see the same symbol used to convey
the same message in relation to both the first and second
advents of Christ.
What does the abomination of desolation imply? Titus and
‘Umar stopped the daily sacrifice and deprived the Jews of
any access to their beloved Jerusalem. The holy people were
pushed out of their beloved city and dispersed among other
nations. This was indeed an abominable desolation for the

15Chapter 17: The Ancient of Days

16Jews. It was also an outward expression of a spiritual
desolation, which always ensues as a result of the denial of
the new Messengers.
In addition to the specific signs of the time, Daniel’s remark-
able vision also includes counsels, admonitions, and warnings,
lest any one fall into complacency and take the Word of God
in vain. A compassionate Creator can only offer advice and
encouragement and warn of the consequences of disobe-
dience and denial. He would not force His Will upon His
children.
But at that time your people—everyone whose name is
found written in the book [the book of faith and affirma-
tion]—will be delivered. Multitudes who sleep in the dust
of the earth will awake: some to everlasting life, others to
shame and everlasting contempt. Those who are wise will
shine like the brightness of the heavens, and those who
lead many to righteousness, like the stars for ever and
ever. Daniel 12:1-3 NIV

• • •
Chapter 118

The Biblical Sources Of Time Prophecies Before Completing The Discussion Of The Time Prophecies From

1The time prophecies in the Old and the New Testaments are
not scattered as if by chance throughout the many books of
the Bible. First, the time of the second advent was predicted
by both Moses and Jesus. Second, in the Old Testament, the
honor of offering time prophecies on both of Christ’s advents
was bestowed mainly upon Daniel. For he alone predicted the
time of the first advent, and he alone offered at least four
time prophecies pointing clearly to the second advent. No
wonder Jesus cited Daniel’s book as the source of the
appointed time of His return. And third, in the New Testa-

2mainly upon St. John the Revelator. For out of 16 time
prophecies in the Bible, 8 were revealed through him.
The prophecies—such as 1260 or 1290 days—whose begin-
ning coincide with the advent of Islam are all expressed in
lunar units, namely the calendar the Muslims use. But the
prophecies—such as 2300 days, 69-70 weeks, or 7 times—
whose beginnings coincide with major events in Judaism
or Christianity are all expressed in solar units. Clearly, it is
not chance that governs the units of time enclosed in the
prophecies.

3The Báb’s Prophecies
Concerning Bahá’u’lláh
Bahá’u’lláh first declared His Mission to a few of His fellow-
prisoners in 1852, about nine years after the Báb had declared
His Mission. The Báb repeatedly predicted that the advent of
the next Redeemer would take place in the year nine, or in
the 9th year from the onset of His Revelation. The ninth year
was the period from May 1852 to May 1853. Shoghi Effendi
has collected and translated some of these prophecies:
In the year nine ye will attain unto the Presence of God.4
In the year nine, ye shall attain unto all good.5
Ere nine will have elapsed from the inception of this [the
Báb’s] Cause, the realities of created things will not be made
manifest…Be patient until thou beholdest a new creation.6
Wait thou until nine will have elapsed from the time of
the Bayán [the Báb’s Holy Book]. Then exclaim: “Blessed,
therefore, be God, the most excellent of Makers!”
By using gematria, the Báb also predicts the time of the
public declaration of Bahá’u’lláh, which took place 19 years

4The Lord of the Day of Reckoning will be manifested at
the end of Váhid (19) and the beginning of eighty (1280
A. H.).8
Be attentive from the inception of Revelation till the
number of Váhid (19).9
In Arabic, each letter has a specific numerical value. For
instance A=1, B=2, J= 3, D = 4. Thus, a letter, a word, or
a combination of words (a meaningful sentence) can be used
as a code for a given number. The same procedure is followed
in some other languages:
For example, Roman numerals correspond to certain letters
in Latin. “I” becomes one, “V” becomes five, “X” becomes
ten, “L” becomes fifty, “C” becomes one hundred, etc.
In a similar fashion, Hebrew numbers are taken from their
alphabet. The first ten letters become 1 through 10. The
eleventh letter becomes 20, the twelfth becomes 30, etc.
A special procedure is used by which Hebrew letters are

• • •
Chapter 119

Summer Is Near

1Repetition always strengthens a prophecy. For instance, about
“the year of the Lord” we have numerous references, all
confirming each other. The prophecies that follow do not
enjoy this status. Thus they cannot be placed on a par with
those with multiple references.
Since this volume is about time prophecies, it should not
exclude the following two references. The first gives us a hint
as to the season in which “the tree” begins to blossom and
bear fruits:
Now learn this lesson from the fig tree: As soon as its
twigs get tender and its leaves come out, you know that
summer is near. Even so, when you see all these things,
you know that it is near, right at the door.
Matthew 24:32-33 NIV

2360 I Shall Come Again

3Christian scholars have speculated about the symbolism of
“the fig tree” and whether Jesus specified intentionally the
time of its germination. Do His words contain codes that
may be broken? We cannot be absolutely sure, but curiosity
demands that we explore such a possibility.
Alford says that as the withered fig tree, which the Lord
cursed, represented the Jewish race in their unfruitfulness,
so this fig tree represents the reviviscence [revival] of that
race.11
Biederwolf in his commentary states that the fig tree puts
forth its leaves “about Passover season, near the last of March.
The fruit of the fig tree accompanies the mature leaf.” 12 It
happens that the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh declared their Missions
in the months following March: April and May. The symbol-
ism may be this: once the spring arrives and the leaves break
out, we know the “harvest time of fruit” 13 is nigh. Similarly,
once the fig tree puts forth its leaves (around the end of
March), we should recognize that “the harvest reward in the
Messianic kingdom” 14 is approaching; it is “right at the door”
(Matt. 24:33 NIV). Is the use of “the door” (the meaning of
the word “ the Báb”) also intentional? Some prophecies
seem to confirm this:
Blessed are those who wash their robes, that they may
have the right to the tree of life and may go through the
gates into the city. Revelation 22:14 NIV

4O ye peoples of the earth! Hearken unto My call…Enter
ye, one and all, through this Gate…15 The Báb

5…there stands the Judge, at the door. James 5:9 NEB

6Some translations of the prophecy in which Jesus speaks
about “the fig tree” (Matt. 24:32-33) read with a slight
difference. They use “he” in place of “it.” For instance, The
American Revised Version reads:

7Chapter 17: The Ancient of Days

8…[when the fig tree] puts forth its leaves, ye know that
the summer is nigh; even so…know ye that he is nigh
[emphasis added].
We should note that Jesus uttered the prophecy in response
to the disciples’ inquiry about the onset of the parousia (His
coming and presence) and the end of the age.
The following verses may also contain a prophetic message.
They may refer to the advent of the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh and
the failure of the masses to receive their blessings in due
season.
Listen to the cry of my people from a land far away: “Is
the Lord [the Báb] not in Zion [the Holy Land]? Is her
King [Bahá’u’lláh] no longer there?…The harvest is past,
the summer has ended, and we are not saved.”
Jeremiah 8:19-20 NIV
The “harvest” may symbolize the advent of the Báb, and the
“summer” the advent of Bahá’u’lláh. As we just noted, Jesus
referred to His second coming as the approaching of the
“summer.” Jeremiah declares that the “summer” has come and
gone and people are still waiting. Most of them have not yet
been harvested. The harvest-time coincides with the closing
of one age and the beginning of another. When a new Mes-
senger comes, people must spread the news of His com-
ing so that the ripe ones are harvested. Those who spread His
mighty message are called the angels.
…gather the clusters of the vine of the earth; for her
grapes are fully ripe (Rev. 14:18)…open your eyes and
look at the fields! They are ripe for harvest. (John 4:35
NIV). The harvest is the end of time. The reapers are angels
(Matt. 13:39 NEB).
The next prophecy also pertains to time. It seems to give us
a hint concerning the part of the day when the new light
would dawn:

9362 I Shall Come Again

10No one knows about that day or hour, not even the angels
in heaven, nor the Son, but only the Father. Be on guard!
Be alert! You do not know when that time will come. It’s
like a man going away: He leaves his house in charge of
his servants, each with his assigned task, and tells the one
at the door to keep watch. Therefore keep watch because
you do not know when the owner of the house will come
back—whether in the evening, or at midnight, or when
the rooster crows, or at dawn. If he comes suddenly, do
not let him find you sleeping. What I say to you, I say
to everyone: ‘Watch!’ [Emphasis added.]
Mark 13:32-37 NIV
William Biederwolf, a Christian scholar, in The Second Coming
Bible Commentary writes:
By “even” is meant 9:00 P. M.; by “midnight,” 12:00; by
“cockcrowing,” 3:00 A. M., and by “morning,” 6:00 A. M.
“These periods,” says Lange, “may denote the same
unexpectedness:—the evening, the evening of the old
world (Matt. 20:8); the midnight, the frame of mind of the
slumbering Church (Matt. 25:6); the cockcrow, the voice
of the watchers (Isa. 21:11); the morning, the dawn of
Christ’s appearing, the breaking into day of the new
world (Mal. 4:2).” (See Matt. 14:24.)…The coming, which
is to be unexpected and sudden, is pictured as taking
place in the night between 9:00 P. M. and 6:00 A. M.
[Emphasis added.]16
The Báb declared His message on May 22, 1844, two hours
and eleven minutes after sunset to a lone stranger in search
of his Master. The Báb’s conversation with this stranger (who
attained the honor of being His first disciple) continued in
His home throughout the evening and night and into the early
morning of the next day.
The hours match Biederwolf’s expectation that the advent
takes place between 9:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m. This is how this
first disciple, one of the most distinguished scholars of his

11Chapter 17: The Ancient of Days

12time, whose title is the gate of the Gate, recalled his encoun-
ter with the Báb on that night:
I sat spellbound by His utterance, oblivious of time and
of those who awaited me…All the delights, all the ineffable
glories, which the Almighty has recounted in His Book as
the priceless possessions of the people of Paradise, these
I seemed to be experiencing that night.
Sleep had departed from me that night. I was enthralled
by the music of that voice which rose and fell as He
chanted…
And again:
This Revelation, so suddenly and impetuously thrust upon
me, came as a thunderbolt which, for a time, seemed to
have benumbed my faculties. I was blinded by its dazzling
splendor and overwhelmed by its crushing force. Excite-
ment, joy, awe, and wonder stirred the depths of my soul.
Predominant among these emotions was a sense of glad-
ness and strength which seemed to have transfigured me.
How feeble and impotent, how dejected and timid, I had
felt previously! Then I could neither write nor walk, so
tremulous were my hands and feet. Now, however, the
knowledge of His Revelation had galvanized my being. I
felt possessed of such courage and power that were the
world, all its people and its potentates, to rise against me,
I would, alone and undaunted, withstand their onslaught.
The universe seemed but a handful of dust in my grasp.
I seemed to be the Voice of Gabriel personified, calling
unto all mankind:
“Awake, for, lo! the morning Light has broken. Arise, for
His Cause is made manifest. The portal of His grace is
open wide; enter therein, O peoples of the world! For He
Who is your Promised One is come!”
The Báb asked this first disciple to keep the new message
secret for a short while:

13364 I Shall Come Again

14O thou who art the first to believe in Me! Verily I say, I
am the Báb, the Gate of God, and thou art the Bábu’l-
Báb, the gate of that Gate. Eighteen souls must, in the
beginning, spontaneously and of their own accord, accept
Me and recognize the truth of My Revelation. Unwarned
and uninvited each of these must seek independently to
find Me.19
Similarly, Bahá’u’lláh first declared His Mission privately to
a few of the Báb’s disciples. This took place when He, along
with a few of the Báb’s followers, were imprisoned in a pitch
dark dungeon known as the Black Pit. Here is how Bahá’u’lláh
describes the first intimation of His Revelation there:
One night, in a dream, these exalted words were heard on
every side: “Verily, We shall render Thee victorious by
Thyself and by Thy Pen. Grieve Thou not for that which
hath befallen Thee, neither be Thou afraid, for Thou art
in safety. Erelong will God raise up the treasures of the
earth—men who will aid Thee through Thyself and through
Thy Name, wherewith God hath revived the hearts of
such as have recognized Him.”
Unlike the initial declaration of His Mission to one humble
seeker of truth, the Báb later had an opportunity to announce
His Mission publicly to an official assemblage organized and
attended by crown prince Násiri’d-Dín and some of the most
prominent and powerful religious and political leaders of
the time. The Báb repeated His claim three times to make
sure His audience would not ignore or underestimate its
magnitude.
I am, I am, I am the promised One! I am the One Whose
name you have for a thousand years invoked, at Whose
mention you have risen, Whose advent you have longed
to witness, and the hour of Whose Revelation you have
prayed God to hasten.21
Bahá’u’lláh, too, announced His message a second time
during a 12-day-festival attended by many people. Still later,

15Chapter 17: The Ancient of Days

16He proclaimed His message in Epistles addressed to common
people in general and to the political and religious leaders of
the earth in particular.
As we shall see in greater depth in succeeding volumes, these
declarations fulfilled both the prophecies that compare Jesus’
parousia to the coming and presence of “a thief in the night”
and the prophecies that compare His parousia to “ the
lightning” that flashes forth from the east (Matt. 24:27). The
following prophecy should clarify or decode the meaning of
“the lightning” in passages that declare the universal and
open expression of God’s glory to all people:
The Lord reigns, let the earth be glad; let the distant shores
rejoice. Clouds and thick darkness surround him…His
lightning lights up the world; the earth sees and trembles.
Psalms 97:1, 2, 4 NIV

17What manner or kind of “earth” sees, rejoices, and trembles?
The hearts of the people.
What clouds surround the Redeemer? The thick and dark
clouds of illusions, misunderstandings, superstitions, and
fears; the vapors that rise from people’s hearts and souls; the
elements that create the night of concealment.
What lightning enlightens the world? The lightning of the
Lord’s presence, of His spiritual splendor, the resplendent
glory of His word, which every “eye” can see.
O people! Verily, the Day is come, and My Lord hath
made Me to shine forth with a light whose splendor hath
eclipsed the suns of utterance. Fear ye the Merciful, and
be not of them that have gone astray.22 Bahá’u’lláh

18…the Word which is uttered by God shineth and flasheth
as the sun amidst the books of men. Happy the man that
hath discovered it, and recognized it, and said: “Praised
be Thou, Who art the Desire of the world…” 23 Bahá’u’lláh

19366 I Shall Come Again

20The Sun of Truth shineth resplendently, at the bidding of
the Lord of the kingdom of utterance…and ten thousand
hosts arrayed against it were powerless to withhold it from
shining.24 Bahá’u’lláh
He…is come in the clouds of light, that He may…unify the
world, and gather all men around this Table which hath
been sent down from heaven. Beware that ye deny not the
favor of God…Better is this for you than that which ye
possess; for that which is yours perisheth, whilst that which
is with God endureth.25 Bahá’u’lláh

21Would the Master Be Late?
As we noted earlier, some Christian scholars and writers
indicate that the Master has delayed His return. They state
that the signs of the time indicate that He could have come
sooner, as early as 1844. George Vandeman, perhaps the best
known spokesman for Seventh-day Adventists, declares:
…so far as any time prophecy is concerned, Jesus could
have returned to this earth any time after 1844. He is not
waiting for any prophetic time period to end. No time
prophecy is holding Him back. Then why hasn’t He
returned? For nearly two hundred years we have been
living in the time of the end. Why isn’t He here? Scripture
provides the answer. “The Lord is not slow in keeping his
promise, as some understand slowness. He is patient with
you, not wanting anyone to perish, but everyone to come
to repentance.” 2 Peter 3:9 NIV.
Do you see the reason for the delay? Our wonderful Lord,
our compassionate, loving Saviour, doesn’t want anyone
to be lost. And so He holds up the final flight of time, He
slows the march of history—because some have not yet
made a decision. And He doesn’t want one to be lost!
C. E. Lewis confirms the same message:

22Chapter 17: The Ancient of Days

23God is holding back to give us that chance [to repent].27
The world trends do not support the idea that the passage of
time will make the sinners any more repentful than they have
been in the past. Many believe that in this century people
have become even less spiritual, less repentant. In a book
called The Return, Christian scholar, Dr. Barry Chant states:
William Booth [founder of the Salvation Army] pointed
out a century ago that the greatest dangers of the 20th
century would be religion without the Holy Spirit, Heaven
without Hell, faith without repentance, salvation without
Lordship, and Christianity without Christ.28
As time goes on and the Lord does not come, the unbelievers
and sinners keep multiplying and losing their chance for
repentance. Delay only increases the total number of sinners
and sufferers.
…evil men and imposters will go from bad to worse…
II Timothy 3:13 NIV
Dr. John White in Re-entry writes:
But truth is truth and the Church is currently in a state
of decline. No one grieved more than our Lord that the
Church would fall into appalling decay prior to His com-
ing. Indeed this is the primary reason for His coming.29
Jesus issued stern warnings to those servants who say the
Master will be late (Matt. 24:48-51). The book of Hebrews
also confirms the firm promise of no delay:
He who is coming will come and will not delay.
Hebrews 10:37 NIV
The verse quoted from II Peter 3:9 states clearly that “the
Lord is not slow in keeping his promise.” Peter implies that
the advent will happen neither later nor sooner than planned.
God keeps a perfect timing. If He sends His Harvester too
early, He meets with an unripe crop; if He sends Him too

24368 I Shall Come Again

25late, He meets with a perishing crop. Waiting eighteen and
a half centuries can point to God’s patience. If most of the
people of our planet would not repent in that long period,
would the respite of another century make much difference?
Whether too soon or too late, the evidences of His effulgent
glory are now actually manifest. It behoveth you to ascer-
tain whether or not such a light hath appeared. It is neither
within your power nor mine to set the time at which it
should be made manifest. God’s inscrutable Wisdom hath
fixed its hour beforehand. Be content, O people, with that
which God hath desired for you and predestined unto
you…Had it been in my power, I would have, under no
circumstances, consented to distinguish myself amongst
men…And whenever I chose to hold my peace and be
still, lo, the voice of the Holy Ghost, standing on my
right hand, aroused me, and the Supreme Spirit appeared
before my face, and Gabriel overshadowed me, and the
Spirit of Glory stirred within my bosom, bidding me arise
and break my silence.30 Bahá’u’lláh

26The Times Spoken of by
All Holy Prophets
Acts 3:21

• • •
Chapter 120

A Summary Of Prophetic Dates T He Times Of Refreshing Shall Come From The Presence

1heaven must receive until the times of restitution of all
things, which God hath spoken by the mouth of all his
holy prophets since the world began. Acts 3:19-21
Our Lord! Grant us what Thou didst promise unto us

2370 I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 121

Zoroastrian And Native American Time Prophecies The Zoroastrian Scriptures Point To The Dawning Of A New Age

1Zoroaster refers to the gradual decay and disintegration of
Islam during its first millennium, and by implication the
expiration of its cycle and the dawning of a new one:
When a thousand years have passed from the Arabian
Faith, such will be its condition, due to division and disunity,
that even if presented to its Founder, He won’t recognize it.1
The Zoroastrian Scriptures contain another prophetic figure,
more specific than the preceding:
When one thousand two hundred-odd years have elapsed
from the Arabian Faith, Húshídar will be raised to
prophethood.2
“The Arabian Faith” obviously refers to Islam and Húshídar
to the Báb, who appeared about 1200 years after the birth of
Islam.
Furthermore, the name Húshídar provides us with more clues,
for it consists of two Persian words: húsh meaning under-
standing and wisdom, and dar meaning door or gate. (The
pronunciation of dar and door is so similar as to indicate a
common origin.) The Báb, meaning the Gate, serves as the
Gate of Wisdom and Understanding through whom the
seekers of truth and tranquility can gain access to the City
of God.
Happy he who has found wisdom, and the man who has
acquired understanding… Proverbs 3:13 NEB
Teach us to order our days rightly, that we may enter the
gate of wisdom. Psalms 90:12 NEB
Another prophecy with a similar message from the Zoroastrian

2When a thousand two hundred and some years have
passed from the inception of the religion of the Arabian
and the overthrow of the Kingdom of Iran and the deg-
radation of the followers of My religion, a descendent of
the Iranian kings will be raised up as a Prophet.3
This prophecy refers to Bahá’u’lláh because He too appeared
“1200 and some years” (1280 A. H.e) after the inception of
the Arabian Faith. Further, He was a descendant of Iranian
kings, namely, the Sásáníyán Dynasty, which was overthrown
by Islamic armies; a defeat that in turn led to the dispersion
and degradation of the Zoroastrians. In this prophecy alone
there are five basic elements, all of which were fulfilled to
the letter.
Haarb, a German scholar, in his translation of the book of
Dínkird (attributed to Zoroaster) includes this clear prophecy,
which contains many elements of Bahá’í history, and a few
of Islamic:
When 1260 years have passed from the Arabian Faith, it
will be in such a state that if it is shown to its Messenger,
He will not recognize it. At this time, Húshídar will
appear and the land of Iran will again become the land of
Faith, to lead the world…[then] the Iranians will kill Him
[Húshídar]
The same prophecy also predicts the coming of Bahá’u’lláh
with astonishing details. It points to “the appearance of the
Glory of God in Iran,” His universal Mission “to lead the
world to God,” and the next two locations in which He
would live.
This brief prophecy contains as many as eleven points or
predictions, all of which have come true, with marvelous
precision, in the Islamic, the Bábí, and the Bahá’í Revelations.
The prophecies listed here are by no means complete. Others
will be discovered in the future.
e
1280 A. H., or 1290 years after the public declaration of Muhammad. As

3The time of the advent can also be found in some of the
American Indian prophecies. These prophecies , as Olin
Karch has recently discovered, designate the 13th Toltec
Era—extending from 1844 A. D. to 1896 A. D.—as the time
of the dawning of a Savior from the East, One who is to
inaugurate “a reign of peace” and “a new spiritual order.”
This is similar to the prophecy from Revelation indicating that
“the old order of things has passed away” (Rev. 21:4 NIV).
The Native American prophecies also refer to the advent of
another “great Spiritual Being” predicted to appear in “the
twelfth tun,” namely between 1862-1863 A. D.6 This prophecy
was fulfilled by the public declaration of Bahá’u’lláh in

• • •
Chapter 122

Prophecies Pointing To

11844 or 1260
The following is a list of 25 prophecies designating the year
1844 or 1260 as the time of the advent of the Redeemer of
our age. As mentioned, 1844 and 1260 refer to the same year,
because 1844 of the Christian calendar corresponds to 1260
of the Muslim calendar.

• • •
Chapter 123

From Hebrew Prophecies

1times 23, 24,
2. Daniel’s vision of 2300 days 1844 A. D. Daniel 8:14
3. Daniel’s vision of three and 1260 A. H. Daniel 7:25
4. Daniel’s vision of three and 1260 A. H. Daniel 12:7

25. Daniel’s vision pointing to 1844 A. D. Daniel 12:7
the completion of the
scattering of the holy
people, fulfilled by Noah's

• • •
Chapter 124

From Christian Prophecies

1of 2300 days
7. Christ’s words on the 1844 A. D. Luke 21:24
termination of the times
of the Gentiles
8. John’s vision of 42 months 1260 A. H. Revelation 11:2
9. John’s vision of 1260 days 1260 A. H. Revelation 11:3
10. John’s vision of three days 1260 A. H. Revelation 11:9
and a half
11. John’s vision of three days 1260 A. H. Revelation 11:11
and a half
12. John’s vision of 1260 days 1260 A. H. Revelation 12:6
13. John’s vision of three and 1260 A. H. Revelation 12:14
a half times
14. John’s vision of 42 months 1260 A. H. Revelation 13:5
15. John’s vision of the four 1844 A. D. Revelation 9:14-
angels bound at the
Euphrates
16. Peter’s prediction of the 1260 A. H. II Peter 3:8
length of the Last Day

2374 I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 125

From Zoroastrian And Native American Prophecies

117. Zoroaster’s prophecy 1200+ some Glad Tidings
pointing to Húshídar more years of Sacred
Scriptures, p. 94
18. Zoroaster’s prophecy of 1260 A. H. Glad Tidings
1260 years from the Arabian of Sacred
Faith Scriptures, p. 61
19. The Native American 1844 A. D. Four Remarkable
Prophecies designating the Indian
earliest time of the coming Prophecies, p. 8
of the Promised One

• • •
Chapter 126

Islamic Prophecies Pointing To

120. Islamic prophecy of a day 1260 A. H. Qur’án 32:4
of a thousand years + the
period of Revelation, which
ended in 260 A. H.
21. Another prophecy confirm- 1260 A. H. Glad Tidings
ing the preceding prophecy of Sacred
of 1000 + 260 = 1260 Scriptures, p.
22. The prophecy of the 1260 A. H. Glad Tidings
numerical value of ghars of Sacred
Scriptures, p.
23. The prophecy giving the ? + 60 Glad Tidings
last two figures of the date of Sacred
Scriptures, p.
24. The coming of the day of 1260 A. H. Qur’án 34:25-29
judgment or chastisement
after the lapse of a thousand

225. The coming of the day of 1260 A. H. Qur’án 22:46,
chastisement after the lapse 49,
of a thousand years.

• • •
Chapter 127

Prophecies Pointing To

11852-1853 and 1863
The following is a list of 13 prophecies designating 1852-
1853 and 1863 as the time of the advent of a Great Message.
As stated, Bahá’u’lláh received the first intimations of His
Message near the end of 1852 (1269 A. H.), and declared it
publicly in 1863 (1280 A. H.).e

• • •
Chapter 128

Prophecies Pointing To The Public

11. Daniel’s prophecy of 1290 1863 A. D. Daniel 12:11
days, from the proclamation
of Muhammad’s Mission
2. Christ’s confirmation of the 1863 A. D. Matthew 24:15
preceding prophecy
3. The Indian prophecy 1862-1863 Four Remarkable
pointing to the years A. D. Indian
between Prophecies, p.
4. Zoroaster’s prophecy 1200+ some All Things Made
pointing to a descendent more years New, p.
of Iranian kings
5. Zoroaster’s prophecy pointing 1863 A. D. Glad Tidings
to the coming of the Glory of of Sacred
God 19 years after Húshídar. Scriptures, p.
1844+19=1863
e
“ The Declaration of the Báb took place in 1260 A. H. Year nine was therefore
1269 A. H., which began in the middle of October when Bahá’u’lláh had been

26. The Báb’s prophecy pointing 1863 A. D. God Passes By,
to the year 19 (two p.
prophecies quoted)

3The Qur’án’s Prophecy Pointing to the

• • •
Chapter 129

Covered In Volume Iv

17. Qur’ánic prophecy pointing 1852-1853 Qur’án 38:88
to the year “after Hín,” or 69 A. D.
A. H.

2The Báb’s Prophecies Pointing to the
First Declaration of Bahá’u’lláh
8. The Báb’s prophecy pointing 1852-1853 God Passes By,
to the year 9 (four prophecies A. D. p. 29
quoted)
9. The Báb’s prophecy 1852-1853 God Passes By,
confirming the Qur’án’s A. D. p. 29
prophecy pointing to “after
Hín,” or

• • •
Chapter 130

The Evidence Is Established

1proof manifest and the evidence established.8 Bahá’u’lláh
To ask if the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh fulfilled the time prophecies
is superfluous, for it is evident that they did. What we should
ask is this: did any Messenger ever appear with such an
overwhelming array of evidence pointing to the exact time

2Have not all the prophets spoken about the dawning of such
a glorious day? Have not all the great Messengers foretold a
new age, when all things are made new (Rev. 21:5)? Have
they not predicted the coming of “the time of refreshing” and
“restitution of all things” when the Lord “shall send Jesus
Christ,” the times “spoken by the mouth of all holy prophets
since the world began” (Acts 3:19-21)?
…Thou didst enter into a Covenant, concerning me, with
all that hath been created in Thy realm.9 Bahá’u’lláh
With each and every Prophet Whom We have sent down
in the past, We have established a separate Covenant
concerning the Remembrance of God [the Báb] and His
Day.10 The Báb
The total number of the prophetic dates cited here from the
Scriptures of such diverse peoples as the American Indians,
the Christians, the Jews, the Zoroastrians, and the Muslims
all pointing to the same year (1844) reaches 25. It seems
most incredible and unjust to think that God would keep
His two or three promises of the date concerning Christ’s
first coming (Daniel’s vision of 69-70 weeks) , and yet He
would not honor His more than twenty promises—spoken
over several thousand years by so many Messengers—
concerning Christ’s second coming.
Is it merely a matter of chance that out of thousands of
probable dates only one should emerge and stand out so many
times from such seemingly diverse and unrelated sources? Is this
not clear evidence in itself that these sources all spring from
one single Source?
What is the probability that all these prophecies just “happened”
to point to the same date? Let us assume that out of hundreds
of possibilities, the chance of each time prophecy pointing
to the same date, by chance alone, is one in a hundred. Then
according to the laws of chance, the probability that all the
biblical prophecies, pointing to 1844 or 1260, could appear

3To have a better understanding of the preceding number,
consider this. A sextillion is equal to 10 21. The figure 10 32 is
hundred billion times larger than a sextillion.
If we include all the 38 prophecies from various Scriptures
that point to the times of the coming of both the Báb and
Bahá’u’lláh, our probability figure rises to 1076. A number of
this magnitude can best be understood when it is compared
with the number of elementary particles (protons, neutrons,
and electrons) in the known universe—estimated at 1080.
(More about this in Volume II.)
The preceding probability figure (1076) pertains only to the
time of the advent of the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh. If we include
the fulfilled prophecies that pertain to other aspects of the
new Revelation (to be covered in the next two volumes),
our probability figure will rise many times higher. In fact, it
will reach a point of practical impossibility!
Of God it is to point out “the Way.”
Muhammad (Qur’án 16:9)
Let him who wisheth turn unto Him, and him who
wisheth turn aside. Our Lord, the Merciful, is verily the
All-Sufficing, the All-Praised.11 Bahá’u’lláh
By God! If ye do well, to your own behoof will ye do
well; and if ye deny God and His signs, We, in very truth,
having God, can well dispense with all creatures and all
earthly dominion.12 The Báb
Come forward, you who are thirsty; accept the water of
life, a free gift to all who desire it.

• • •
Chapter 131

He Will Not Be Late

1Hebrews 10:37

2This investigation raises many questions—questions to which
the Scriptures have already responded.

3Are we not asked to reason and to put everything to the test?
Come now, and let us reason together, saith the Lord…
Isaiah 1:18
Test everything. I Thessalonians 5:21 NIV
Can we disregard all these clear and conclusive time prophecies?
…do not despise prophetic utterances, but bring them all
to the test… I Thessalonians 5:20 NEB
Did Jesus not appeal to prophecies to substantiate His claim?
Then he [Jesus] began with Moses and all the prophets,
and explained to them the passages which referred to him-
self in every part of the scriptures. Luke 24:27 NEB
If you believed Moses, you would believe me, for he
wrote about me. John 5:46 NIV
These are the Scriptures that testify about me, yet you
refuse to come to me to have life. John 5:39- 40 NIV
Is it possible that God would not honor His firm covenant
to send His Messenger to humanity?
Heaven and earth will pass away; my words will never
pass away. Luke 21:33 NEB
Also Mark 13:31
Does he speak and then not act? Does he promise and not
fulfill? Numbers 23:19 NIV
Would God abandon His children at such an hour of darkness?
Never will I leave you; never will I forsake you.
Hebrews 13:5 NIV
Is not the earth’s crop ripe to be harvested?
Stretch out your sickle and reap; for harvest-time has
come, and earth’s crop is over-ripe. Revelation 14:15 NEB
Have not the times of the refreshing and restitution of all

4…the times of refreshing shall come from the presence of
the Lord; And he shall send Jesus Christ…Whom the
heaven must receive until the times of restitution of all
things… Acts 3:19-21
Should we not stand awake in the day of darkness, so that
we may not be overtaken by “the thief ”?
But you, my friends, are not in the dark, that the day [of
advent] should overtake you like a thief.
I Thessalonians 5:4 NEB
Would God delay the fulfillment of His promises?
The Lord is not slow in keeping his promise…
II Peter 3:9 NIV
He who is coming will come and will not delay.
Hebrews 10:37 NIV
What about those who do not heed the prophecies? What
about those who say “My master is staying away a long
time”?
The master of that servant will come on a day when he
does not expect him and at an hour he is not aware of.
He will…assign him a place with the hypocrites, where
there will be weeping and gnashing of teeth [anger].
Christ (Matt. 24:50-51 NIV)
Shake off, O heedless ones, the slumber of negligence,
that ye may behold the radiance which His glory hath
spread through the world. How foolish are those who
murmur against the premature birth of His light…Whether
too soon or too late, the evidences of His effulgent glory
are now actually manifest. It behoveth you to ascertain
whether or not such a light hath appeared. It is neither
within your power nor mine to set the time at which it
should be made manifest. God’s inscrutable Wisdom hath
fixed its hour beforehand. Be content, O people, with that
which God hath desired for you and predestined unto

5no circumstances, consented to distinguish myself amongst
men…And whenever I chose to hold my peace and be
still, lo, the voice of the Holy Ghost, standing on my right
hand, aroused me, and the Supreme Spirit appeared before
my face, and Gabriel overshadowed me, and the Spirit of
Glory stirred within my bosom, bidding me arise and break

• • •
Chapter 132

The Three Stages Of The Social And Spiritual Evolution Of Humanity The Scriptural Prophecies Portray A Clear Picture Of Human

1history, with the following distinct outline: civilization goes
through three stages of growth and evolution, each preparing
it for the next.
First is the period of trial and error, when government is left
to humans. This is an era of struggle, conflict, and war in
which there are many encounters between the forces of good
and evil, with the forces of evil winning most of the time.
This stage is well exemplified in Daniel’s time prophecy
quoted earlier (Daniel 7:25). As we noted, the last kingdom,
mentioned in the vision, spoke against the Most High, op-
pressed His saints, and tried to change the set times and the
laws. This first stage of human evolution ended with the
advent of the Báb (1844 A. D., 1260 A. H.).
Humanity’s second stage of evolution, as the prophecies reveal,
is that of purification or transition. The old and decayed
institutions and ideologies (nationalism, racism, communism,
sectarianism, etc.) are judged and toppled, the dominion of
the forces of darkness destroyed, and the world is gradually
prepared for the establishment of the divine Kingdom. This
stage began with the advent of the Báb in 1844 and will
continue to an hour as yet undisclosed. In terms of time, this
is by far the shortest stage. This stage is often called the time
of the end, the latter days, the last days, the end of the age,
or that day.

2382 I Shall Come Again

3Daniel’s vision of the latter days, after referring to the last
kingdom and its allotted period of three and a half times,
characterizes this second stage in these words:
But the court will sit, and his [last kingdom’s] power will
be taken away and completely destroyed forever.
Daniel 7:26 NIV
Jesus’ parable of the Lord of the vineyard (Matt. 21:33-41)
also confirms God’s progressive plan for humanity. The
parable indicates that God sent many Messengers, but
people mistreated them throughout the ages. At last the
Owner of the Vineyard Himself comes to put an end to
their transgressions. From then on, the Owner takes charge
by establishing His own Kingdom.
For our Lord God Almighty reigns. Let us rejoice and be
glad and give him glory! Revelation 19:6-7 NIV
Another passage in Daniel’s vision provides further details
about the coming of the Ancient of Days (Bahá’u’lláh) and
His Role as a Judge:
As I looked, thrones were set in place, and the Ancient
of Days took his seat…The court was seated, and the
books were opened. Daniel 7:9-10 NIV
The Book shall be set…and judgment shall be given
between them with equity… Qur’án 39:69
Ours is this second stage, the Day of Judgment, when the
divine Court is established. We are given the tools and asked
to accomplish the goal of preparing the ground. The old
order is crumbling and in its place is rising a new order des-
tined to give rise to a Kingdom imperishable and everlasting.
After the judgment and purification, the third stage dawns—
an age characterized by the triumph of the forces of light
over the hosts of darkness and decay; the era of the King-
dom, when peace prevails, love abounds, and righteousness
reigns. We are now at the dawning of this Golden Millennium

4Chapter 18: The Times Spoken of by All Holy Prophets

5of Enlightenment. Here in the following verse Daniel com-
pletes his description of the three stages:
Then the sovereignty, power and greatness of the king-
doms under the whole heaven will be handed over to the
saints, the people of the Most High. His kingdom will be
an everlasting kingdom, and all rulers will worship and
obey him. Daniel 7:27 NIV
In the following passage, Shoghi Effendi, the Guardian of
the Bahá’í Faith, refers briefly to the connecting link—the
cleansing stage—between the first and the third stage, which
as testified by Bahá’u’lláh, is destined to give rise to the
fruits of the Kingdom:
We stand on the threshold of an age whose convulsions
proclaim alike the death-pangs of the old order and the
birth-pangs of the new. Through the generating influence
of the Faith announced by Bahá’u’lláh this New World
Order may be said to have been conceived. We can, at the
present moment, experience its stirrings in the womb of
a travailing age—an age waiting for the appointed hour at
which it can cast its burden and yield its fairest fruit.14

6And This Gospel of the
Kingdom Will be

• • •
Chapter 133

Proclaimed

1T o make people aware of the dawning of the Kingdom,
Christ promised that the good news of its coming would
be preached among all nations, so that God’s testimony to
His people would be complete.
And this gospel [good news] of the Kingdom will be
proclaimed throughout the earth as a testimony to all
nations; and then the end will come. Matthew 24:14 NEB
The fulfillment of this prophecy and promise has been so
dramatic as to deserve further study. In the spiritual history

2The intensity of the desire of the people of that age to meet
their Savior and their fervor and dedication in preaching and
proclaiming the dawning of His kingdom are without parallel
in all history. Never before had so many so fervently set their
hopes on heaven—a hope that within a few decades embraced
the whole planet.
A Christian scholar who has done much research on the
Advent Awakening of the mid-19th century writes:
Nothing like it had ever been proclaimed before. Simul-
taneously, in England, Scotland, Ireland, Germany, France,
Switzerland, Scandinavia, America, India, Northern Africa,
and the Near East, a growing chorus of voices were heard,
springing up independently but proclaiming the same
message and prophetic time period. It bore all the ear-
marks of a true advance in contemporary recognition of
a currently fulfilling epoch in the grand prophetic outline.1
According to one authority, as many as a thousand scholars
and seekers around the world were proclaiming and preach-
ing the millennial message. Himes announced that in the
United States, “by May 1844…5,000,000 copies of Adventist
publications had been distributed.”
The events of the 1840s seemed so impressive to a Christian
scholar—Jerome Clarke, professor of history at Southern
Missionary College—as to prompt him to write three volumes
on the subject and entitle them by the date: 1844. Each
volume covers certain aspects of reform (social, religious,
political, and educational) instituted in the mid-19th century.
The Bahá’í Faith does not appear in any of the three volumes.
In his preface, the author indicates that an atmosphere of
reform permeated the mid-19th century. He then adds:
Such an atmosphere made people receptive to change and
provided the attitude of mind which made the widespread
dissemination of new ideas possible. Surely it was in the
providence of God that the “great Second Advent Move-

3Chapter 19: And This Gospel of the Kingdom Will be Proclaimed

• • •
Chapter 134

The Child Preachers Of The

1Mid-19th Century
Sometimes a goal is achieved through some unusual or
dramatic means. Jesus said:
I tell you, if my disciples keep silence the stones will
shout aloud. Luke 19:40 NEB
As historical records reveal, in one country the torch of the
dawning of the new age was carried aloft by children and
youth, some of them as young as ten and twelve. This drama
unfolded in Sweden and caused a stir in that land:
The nineteenth-century Advent Awakening penetrated
Scandinavia in the early forties, but by a means markedly
different from that employed in any other country of the
Old World or the New. In Sweden, preaching contrary to
that of the established church was forbidden. The clergy
of the state church opposed emphasis upon the soon
coming of Christ. Their refusal to speak was met by the
amazing spectacle of children and youth in the homes of
humble cottagers—some of whom had not yet learned to
read—proclaiming the impending judgment hour and
imminent advent, and giving expositions of prophecy.4
The records of this incredible event, the opposition of the
priests to these “child preachers,” and the response of the
population “permeated the Swedish press for two or three
years—particularly in 1842 and 1843.” 5 First, let us see an
unfriendly report from a paper published in Stockholm
(February 23, 1842):
They [the child preachers] claimed to have received their
revelations directly through the Holy Spirit and claim to
have visited heaven and hell…A general superstition has
taken hold of the people, who refute the warnings and
instructions of the priests, and in multitudes ranging from
2,000 to 3,000 go to listen to those who claim to be the
chosen messengers of heaven.6

2388 I Shall Come Again

3Another record from another paper is somewhat neutral to
this unusual phenomenon (March 4, 1842):
From far and near hundreds of persons come daily to
listen to these girls. The girl from Swenarum, daughter of
a poor peasant, preached twice a day, and had always two
or three hundred listeners daily…The common people
either believe the girls to be God’s [messengers], as they
themselves claim, or they do not know what to think. Few
are they who do not see in this something marvelous, or
feel this to be the voice of God to man. Almost everyone
believes or trembles.7
As we would expect, people’s perceptions of these young
preachers varied. Many were inspired and transformed by
their childish purity and sincerity; others considered them
pawns of the devil; and still others viewed them as “the sick
ones.” Some of the participants in the drama advocated severe
punishment as the best cure for a rampant disease. On one
occasion, two of the young preachers were arrested and tried
in court. Years later, one of them recalled:
When we were brought before the governor for examina-
tion, he demanded by what authority we were sent to
preach. We referred him to Joel 2 and Rev. 14:6-8, and
told him further that the Spirit of God came upon us with
such power that we could not resist it.8
The prophecies from Joel quoted by the youths before the
governor were these:
Thereafter the day shall come when I will pour out my
spirit on all mankind; your sons and your daughters shall
prophesy, your old men shall dream dreams and your
young men see visions… Joel 2:28 NEB
Then Joel adds that such events will happen “before the great
and terrible day of the Lord comes” (Joel 2:31 NEB). The
prophecies from Revelation were these:
Then I saw an angel flying in mid-heaven, with an eternal
gospel to proclaim to those on earth, to every nation and

4Chapter 19: And This Gospel of the Kingdom Will be Proclaimed

5tribe, language and people. He cried in a loud voice, ‘Fear
God and pay him homage; for the hour of his judgment
has come!’ Revelation 14:6-7 NEB
Apparently, the biblical argument did not convince the
governor. He decided that the best remedy for such a “con-
tagious disease” was punishment:
After being beaten they were taken to the hospital for
mental examination by physicians. Their heads were
shaved, with the exception of two strips of hair left in the
form of a cross. Then they were imprisoned and tortured
by powerful streams of cold water. Finally they were
released, only to keep on preaching until 1844.9
We should note that in the first advent children also played
a role:
When the young children of Jerusalem joined the crowd
at the temple, proclaiming Jesus as the Messiah, the “son
of David,” they fulfilled the Old Testament promise that
“babes” would give praise to God. The religious leaders
were outraged at this outburst of faith from these mere
“children” and demanded they be silenced. Yet, Jesus knew
that these words had been placed in the mouths of these
children by God Almighty, Himself.10

6Joseph Wolff, the Hero
of the Advent Movement
This discussion of the fulfillment of Jesus' prophecy, that
before His advent the Gospel will be preached in all the
world, would be incomplete without a brief reference to Joseph
Wolff (1795-1862), who spread the Good News (Gospel)
more than anyone else in the 19th century.
If William Miller was the herald of the Advent Movement in
the West, its hero must undoubtedly be Joseph Wolff. (In the
East, too, there appeared two bright “stars” that heralded the
dawning of the new day: Shaykh Ahmad and Siyyid Kázim.)

7390 I Shall Come Again

8Joseph Wolff was a brilliant orator “of Jewish birth, Catholic
education, and Protestant persuasion.” His zeal, courage,
devotion, sacrifice, and adventures are all legendary. John
Quincy Adams called him “one of the most remarkable men
living on earth at this time.”
Joseph Wolff was born to a strict Jewish family and received
Hebrew training from the age of four. To make him imper-
vious to the influence of Christians, his parents frightened him
with dire warnings. They told him that Christians worship
wooden crosses. To teach him German, his ambitious but
unwary parents sent him to a Christian school, where he
learned much more than German: he also learned about Jesus
and recognized Him as the expected Messiah of the Jews. He
professed his faith to the Lutheran minister, but fearing his
father, who was a rabbi, he concealed his love for the beloved
Messiah until the age of seventeen, when his father died.
Because of his many distinctions, Joseph Wolff received the
full support of British royalty and even joined them by
marrying a member of the royal family. But the ease and
comfort did not satisfy his spiritual hunger. He left the
security of his surroundings for adventures that immortalized
him. For almost two decades, he was on the move, often
traveling under the most trying conditions, carrying the news
of an imminent advent to the farthest reaches of the earth,
“from the Thames to the Oxus, the Ganges, the wilderness
of Arabia, and the mountains of Abyssinia.”
He called himself “Missionary to all the Nations.” Joshua
Brooks, one of the leaders of the Advent Movement, said:
“no individual has perhaps given greater publicity to the
doctrine of the second coming.” 12 Wolff declared that “an
invisible power” continually moved him “from land to land,
and from sea to sea to preach the tidings of salvation, and
the second coming of our Lord in glory and majesty.”

9Chapter 19: And This Gospel of the Kingdom Will be Proclaimed

10To succeed in his endeavors, Wolff learned 14 languages,
among them Persian, Chaldean, Arabic, Hebrew, Greek, and
Latin. He carried the message of the imminent advent of
Christ to all, from peasants to pashas and princes, from
bishops and priests to kings and American presidents. He
even addressed the assembled Congress of the United States.
The hardships he endured for the purpose of fulfilling Jesus'
predictions—that before “ the end,” the Gospel shall be
preached as a testimony to all nations—is beyond the scope
of this book. But a brief reference to his tenacity and
resilience is in order. In a letter addressed to Sir Thomas
Barring, he states that he had:
…traversed the most barbarous countries for eighteen
years, without protection of any European authority what-
soever, and…[had] been sold as a slave, thrice condemned
to death, attacked with cholera and typhus fever and
almost every Asiatic fever in existence, and bastinadoed
and starved.14
Perhaps the most intriguing part of his adventures occurred
in 1843-1845, while he was travelling through Persian terri-
tory. This was the interval during which the Báb declared His
Mission. It was during that trip that “the Persian banditti of the
Khán of Khorásán made him a slave.” They planned to sell
him to a Turkoman chief, but changed their minds, treated
him as a guest, and sent the Arabic Bibles he had brought
them to their religious leaders. While he was in Mashhad—
a city that a few years later became a rallying point for
the followers of the Báb—he announced the imminent advent
of the Redeemer of the world. He believed the date was 1847.
About his activities in Mashhad, he wrote:
I fixed on their tents public proclamations, announcing to
them the second coming of Christ in Glory and Majesty,
called on them to repent of their evil doings, and especially
exhorted them to give up the practice of making slaves of
the Persians.15

11392 I Shall Come Again

12Like William Miller, he too was sustained in his hope by
visions. While in Bukhárá, depressed and despondent because
of the obstacles he was facing:
…suddenly a splendor covered the room, and the voice
‘Jesus enters!’ thundered in my ears. I saw suddenly
Jesus standing upon a throne surrounded by little children,
mercifully and kindly looking at them. I fell down, and
worshipped, and the vision disappeared.16
Again, while in Malta and “very much cast down:”
…suddenly my room was transfigured and I believe I was
in New Jerusalem. Jesus Christ, surrounded by Abraham,
Isaac, and Jacob, and the Apostles, walked about the street.17
Due to his courage, persistence, and dedication, Joseph Wolff,
unlike many others in his time, became an immortal “star”
shining “like the brightness of the heavens” (Daniel 12:2-3),
not only in our kingdom but in the kingdom of heaven as
well. How many millions will be inspired by his selfless
example, in centuries to come? Had he been pleased “with
the ease of a passing day,” he would have been soon forgotten.
O OFFSPRING OF DUST !
Be not content with the ease of a passing day, and deprive
not thyself of everlasting rest. Barter not the garden of
eternal delight for the dust-heap of a mortal world. Up
from thy prison ascend unto the glorious meads above,
and from thy mortal cage wing thy flight unto the paradise
of the Placeless.18 Bahá’u’lláh
Praise be to God that He hath enabled us to become
cognizant of Him Whom God shall make manifest
[Bahá’u’lláh] in the Day of Resurrection, so that we may
derive benefit from the fruit of our existence and be not
deprived of attaining the presence of God. For indeed
this is the object of our creation and the sole purpose
underlying every virtuous deed we may perform. Such is
the bounty which God hath conferred upon us; verily He
is the All-Bountiful, the Gracious.19 The Báb

• • •
Chapter 135

Humanity

Part Iii

1God’s Covenant With

1The remaining chapters do not deal directly with proofs.
They offer some insight into these two questions:
• Why has the Bahá’í Faith not been acknowledged by the
majority of humanity, and why have religious leaders not
seriously investigated Bahá’u’lláh’s claim? (Chapter 20).
• What are the four main elements of God’s covenant
with humanity? (Chapters 21 and 22).

2dge Responsibility

• • •
Chapter 136

Knowle Rewar Edo M Punis D And Fre Hment Freedom Knowledge Responsibility Reward And Punishment

1The first three elements of God’s covenant with humanity
(freedom, knowledge, and responsibility) are covered here.
The fourth element (reward and punishment) is covered in
Volume III.

2My People Perish for
Want of Knowledge
Hosea 4:6 NAB

3Why Haven’t I Heard
About this Faith Before?

4M any of those who hear the message of the new revelation
for the first time wonder why they haven’t heard of it
before. They say: “Bahá’u’lláh presents the greatest claim
and the most awesome challenge. Why hasn’t such a mighty
message spread more widely?” The reasons are many and
varied. They stem both from the means or methods the
Bahá’ís use to teach their Faith, and from the lack of recep-

5396 I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 137

The Gentle Method Of Teaching

1ing. Bahá’u’lláh admonishes His followers to teach His Faith
with the utmost dignity and care, expressing the deepest
reverence for the seeker’s freedom to follow the dictates of his
own conscience. It is His Command that His followers should
not proselytize, lest they encroach upon anyone’s freedom of
choice. This is how Bahá’u’lláh describes the accepted way
of teaching:
O people of Bahá! Ye are the dawning-places of the love
of God…Set forth that which ye possess. If it be favorably
received, your end is attained; if not, to protest is vain.
Leave that soul to himself and turn unto the Lord…Be not
the cause of grief, much less of discord and strife.1
And again:
Consort with all men, O people of Bahá, in a spirit of
friendliness and fellowship. If ye be aware of a certain
truth, if ye possess a jewel, of which others are deprived,
share it with them in a language of utmost kindliness and
good-will. If it be accepted, if it fulfill its purpose, your
object is attained. If anyone should refuse it, leave him
unto himself, and beseech God to guide him. Beware lest
ye deal unkindly with him.2
Because of such admonitions, the Bahá’ís have been cautious—
sometimes too cautious—in declaring Bahá’u’lláh’s Message
with the zeal and boldness it deserves. Some Bahá’ís are
extremely concerned about imposing their beliefs on others,
lest their Faith be identified with those denominations that use
aggressive and undignified means to gain converts. Others
hesitate to share their beliefs because of a lack of self-
confidence, insufficient knowledge of the Bahá’í teachings, or
an inadequate understanding of their spiritual responsibility.
But we should remember that what matters are the long-range—

2teaching may not bring immediate results, but it does bring
enduring ones. Although coercion may enjoy a quick and
crushing triumph, a lasting victory can come only from
gentleness and loving-kindness.
Yet in spite of the caution and the care, the spread of the
Bahá’í Message has been phenomenal. For within the span of
a century and a half, it has encircled the earth, touching the
hearts and minds of many followers in over 200 countries and

• • •
Chapter 138

Mistrust Of The Non-traditional And Unfamiliar

1Faith is a prevailing suspicion and mistrust among many
people toward any outsiders trying to teach them something
about religion. This mistrust and suspicion is a defense against
all those who have misused religion, who in the name of pre-
serving the pearl of faith have pursued their own prejudices,
their own selfish ends, who have demeaned the nobility and
distinction of the divine Words by teaching dogmatism and
fanaticism, by rejecting reason, by exaggerating minute
theological questions to further their own causes.
Since fanaticism and dogmatism do not thrive on freedom of
choice and reason, other means must be devised to sustain
them. The obvious solution is to employ pressure to subdue
freedom and to apply emotionalism to dull reason. This is
exactly what has happened. These are the means some of the
preachers and churches have used, and are using, in search
of converts.
Such unjustified methods of spreading beliefs have succeeded
in stirring the masses, but they have proved costly to the dignity
and nobility of religion. They have alienated the educated
and the enlightened segments of society. They have also

2extent that they are alarmed by even the most subtle and
innocent attempts at an exchange of ideas.
From their own experience and that of their family and
friends, people have learned to be on their guard against
intruders, to be armed with apathy, to tune out the loud and
varied voices of a myriad of preachers, all trying to convert
them, to make them to be born again quickly and painlessly
by uttering a few simple words.
The spread of strange cults with weird and dangerous beliefs
and the influence of propaganda (political, commercial, and
religious) through the mass media have further intensified
suspicion to such a degree that people refuse even to do the
most elementary research into a claim as awesome as that of
the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh. They have heard so many half-truths
and have been lied to so often that, even faced with the truth,
they would fail to see it. Their spiritual senses have grown
so dull through repeated misuse as to become inoperative.
No wonder the Scriptures declare that when the Redeemer
comes “the world neither sees nor knows him” (John 14:17
NEB). If we do not muster up the courage to break the bonds
of suspicion and apathy, we will remain deprived of this
glorious gift.
For the Lord hath poured out upon you the spirit of deep
sleep, and hath closed your eyes… Isaiah 29:10
See also Jer. 5:21; Isa. 42:20; Mark 8:18

3Go to this people and say: You may hear and hear, but
you will never understand; you may look and look, but
you will never see. For this people’s mind has become
gross; their ears are dulled, and their eyes are closed.

• • •
Chapter 139

The Excessive Fear Of Falsehood

1The combined effects of the infamy of cults, as well as the
misuse of the mass media in general and of religion in

2particular, have caused excessive fear of falsehood at the
expense of love for truth. Most people do not fear the
consequences of denying truth as much as they fear the
danger of being deceived. The force of fear has caused
undue apathy, doubt, and despair; it has led to a feeling
that “Everyone claims to know the truth, but no real truth
may be found anywhere.”
This fear of falsehood gains strength—and becomes con-
tagious—especially among family and friends. It causes well-
wishing individuals to discourage their spouses from searching.
It leads caring parents to deprive their mature children of
their right to freedom of conscience. Friends, peers, and priests
join their powers of persuasion with those of parents and
partners to stifle inquiry. Thus those endowed with the least
courage and afflicted with the most apathy, suspicion, and
conformity not only refuse to pursue their own independent
search for truth, but also use their influence to discourage
others. They become, in the words of Jesus, stumbling-blocks
to the seekers of truth. They forget the words of Jesus
addressed to their forebears who had done the same:
As for the man who is a cause of stumbling to one of
these little ones who have faith, it would be better for him
to be thrown into the sea with a millstone round his neck.
If your hand is your undoing, cut it off ; it is better for
you to enter into life maimed than to keep both hands and
go to hell and the unquenchable fire. Mark 9:42-44 NAB
Causes of stumbling are bound to arise; but woe betide
the man through whom they come. Luke 17:1 NEB
See also Matt. 18:7

3Many people assume that any religion with an unfamiliar
name must be the work of deceivers. Others lack self-
confidence. When they hear the call of their conscience to
search, they respond by thinking: “How would I know
someone is right or wrong? I am not good enough to make
a judgment. At least I have something to hold on to. Why

4Then there are other seekers who trust their spiritual instincts.
These seekers do not fear falsehood, they know they cannot
be fooled, they know man’s words can never be disguised as
God’s Words. They have trust in their insight; they know
their insight is illuminated by divine injunctions. They
remember the words of the Scriptures to “test the spirits, to
see whether they are from God” (I John 4:1 NEB); whether
they are divine or deceptive. The words of Paul, “test every-
thing” (I Thess. 5:21 NIV), constantly ring in their conscience,
stirring them to action, to search. They know that the Creator
would never fail in His promise to guide their search. They
know that He who has commanded His children saying ye
shall seek and ye shall knock, has promised ye shall find,
and it shall be opened unto you (Matt. 7:7-8). These seekers
also know that by not searching they put their fears above
God’s assurances, casting a vote of no confidence in His

• • •
Chapter 140

Preoccupation With Worldly Concerns

1pation with surviving or making a living. People are too busy
earning their daily bread to have time for spiritual enrichment.
It seems a great sacrifice to them to spend their precious time
for something that fails to bring immediate and tangible
rewards. Of course, this is exactly what the prophecies
predicted would happen. For we are told that the promised
Redeemer will walk among the masses like those to whom
Noah was sent:
As things were in Noah’s days, so will they be when the
Son of Man comes. In the days before the flood they ate
and drank and married, until the day that Noah went into
the ark, and they knew nothing until the flood came and
swept them all away. That is how it will be when the Son
of Man comes. Matthew 24:37-39 NEB

2Lack of Knowledge,
the Common Denominator
Almost all the reasons cited so far seem to converge at one
point: a lack of recognition results to a large extent from not
knowing the claim advanced by the Báb and Bahá’u’lláh nor
the proofs that sustain their claim.
…my people are destroyed from lack of knowledge.
Hosea 4:6 NIV
If people became well informed, they would not reject the
truth. Indeed, after gaining full knowledge, the new Bahá’ís
ask the same question they asked before, but with an opposite
intent. Before knowing the claim of Bahá’u’lláh, many of
them would say to themselves, “If the expected Redeemer
ever comes, it will be impossible for me not to know about
it.” After gaining full knowledge of Bahá’u’lláh’s claim, they
ask, “How could I not have known about such an awesome
event? Why is it that the world cannot see? Why don’t the
majority of people even try to test Bahá’u’lláh’s claim?”
These are the kinds of questions the Bahá’ís keep asking,
always wondering why others do not see what they see. They
forget that before becoming well informed of the Bahá’í
Revelation, they too had the same problem, they too were
handicapped by the same obstacles. To give a simple analogy,
let us assume that near you there is a most exquisite and
enchanting garden, but it is hidden by walls. You pass by the
garden many times without even considering the possibility
of seeing anything but wild grass and weeds. Then perhaps
by chance, perhaps by the word of a friend, you raise your
vantage point and you suddenly see what startles your
imagination, what awakens a vision of undreamed-of ecstasy
and splendor. This is exactly what happens to those who
change their perspective on Bahá’u’lláh’s Revelation. They
see a glory and splendor that only the grand Designer could
have planned and implemented. Alas, the celestial Scene is

3Let us go back once more to the original questions: If
Bahá’u’lláh is indeed the promised Redeemer, why haven’t
I heard about Him? And why has the world not known Him?
The answer is simple and brief, and it is given by Jesus Him-
self. First He predicts, “The world cannot receive him” (John
14:17 NEB), and then He adds: “because the world neither
sees nor knows him” (John 14:17 NEB). Thus lack of true
knowledge of the new Messenger is the main reason the world
has not as yet received Him.
God has fulfilled His promises. He has sent His Messenger
exactly as He had promised: “as a thief in the night.” He has
also asked us to stay awake and aware, to make the effort
to be informed, to gain knowledge of the truth. God does not
want to force anyone into belief, to offer the water of life to
those who are not thirsty, to those who would rather sleep
than search for truth.
Among all the major reasons that Bahá’u’lláh’s Message has
not as yet shaken the world, there exists one more that
overshadows and influences all the others. That reason, as

• • •
Chapter 141

The Role Of Religious Leaders

1These questions often arise: “The masses may not know
about Bahá’u’lláh’s claim, but what about the religious
leaders? Is it not they who are responsible for people’s
spiritual guidance? Should not they be the first to wish to
know? And if they do know, why haven’t they guided us?
If Bahá’u’lláh is indeed the world Savior and Teacher, the
return of the Son in the Glory of the Father, then the religious
leaders would be—and should be—the first to find Him,
follow Him, and adore Him.” This seems a very logical
assumption to make, but the prophecies predict otherwise.
They foresee apathy and lack of discernment on the part of
these leaders:

2Chapter 20: My People Perish for Want of Knowledge

3All prophetic vision has become for you like a sealed
book…Then the Lord said: Because this people approach
me with their mouths and honor me with their lips while
their hearts are far from me, and their religion is but a
precept of men, learnt by rote, therefore I will yet again
shock this people, adding shock to shock: the wisdom of
their wise men shall vanish and the discernment of the
discerning shall be lost. Isaiah 29:11-14 NEB

4One of the most prominent Christian leaders and scholars to
accept Bahá’u’lláh was George Townshend, formerly Arch-
deacon of Clonfert and Canon of St. Patrick’s Cathedral in
Dublin, Ireland. In his works he addressed the religious
leaders of Christendom again and again, urging them to
examine the claim of Bahá’u’lláh. The concluding words of
his book Christ and Bahá’u’lláh, composed shortly before his
death, were:
The Bahá’í Faith today presents the Christian Churches
with the most tremendous challenge ever offered them in
their long history: a challenge, and an opportunity. It is
the plain duty of every earnest Christian in this illumined
Age to investigate for himself with an open and fearless
mind the purpose and the teachings of this Faith and to
determine whether the collective center for all the construc-
tive forces of this time be not the Messenger from God,
Bahá’u’lláh, He and no other; and whether the way to a
better, kinder, happier world will not lie open as soon as
we accept the Announcement our rulers rejected…O,
Christian believers! for your own sakes and for the sake
of the Churches, for the sake of all mankind, for the sake
of the Kingdom, cast away your conflicting dogmas and
interpretations which have caused such disunity and led
us to the verge of wholesale self-destruction. Recognize
the age of Truth. Recognize Christ in the glory and power
of the Father and, heart and soul, throw yourselves into
His Cause.3

5404 I Shall Come Again

6Bahá’u’lláh had made the same plea repeatedly to the leaders
of all religions. He had addressed them in the most definitive
and emphatic terms. Did they listen? Did they try to test the
new Revelation? The mass of religious leaders have so far
preferred to ignore Bahá’u’lláh’s claim as the bearer of a
divine Revelation. They have preferred to remain detached
from the new Faith.
To those spiritual leaders whose character and conduct
conform to their confession, Bahá’u’lláh accords the highest
honor:
The divine [the religious leader] whose conduct is upright,
and the sage who is just, are as the spirit unto the body
of the world. Well is it with that divine whose head is
attired with the crown of justice, and whose temple is
adorned with the ornament of equity.4
The most trying time for religious leaders is the dawn of a
new dispensation. Most of them stand so veiled by centuries
of man-made traditions and doctrines, and so engulfed by
the prevailing views as to be unable to discern the Day-Star
of Truth. They allow human knowledge to become a veil
between them and the One Who is the Object and the Source
of all knowledge.
The denials…of these leaders of religion have, in the main,
been due to their lack of knowledge and understanding.5
Bahá’u’lláh
What has held many religious leaders back from examining
the claim of Bahá’u’lláh is their supposition that all the
scriptural prophecies are literal. They still maintain that the
Redeemer must come from heaven on the clouds. Some of
them even go so far as to say that Jesus must return bearing
the scars inflicted on His body during the crucifixion.
They fail to heed the warnings of the Scriptures, to recognize
that they should not insist on their own interpretation; that
symbolic language is used abundantly throughout the Bible.

7Chapter 20: My People Perish for Want of Knowledge

8Their negligence in insisting on literal interpretation of the
prophecies has allowed a simple word such as cloud (signify-
ing misconception and misjudgment) to become truly a
cloud that obscures the glory of the One who is the Light of
the world (John 8:12). Countless references in the Scriptures
prove beyond any doubt that expressions such as coming
from heaven or on the clouds are simple metaphors. Some
religious leaders fail to realize sufficiently that expectations
based on literal interpretation of prophecies also prevailed
during the first advent of Christ. The literal-minded Jews of
that time were deprived of the light of their Redeemer for the
same reason.
Bahá’u’lláh repeatedly asks us to look back and try to learn
from the example of those who have lived at the dawning of
earlier revelations. Here are some of His words about the
conduct of the religious leaders during the time of the advent
of previous Messengers:
Consider the former generations. Witness how every time
the Day Star of Divine bounty hath shed the light of His
Revelation upon the world, the people of His Day have
arisen against Him, and repudiated His truth. They who
were regarded as the leaders of men have invariably
striven to hinder their followers from turning unto Him
Who is the Ocean of God’s limitless bounty.
Behold how the people, as a result of the verdict pronounced
by the divines [religious leaders] of His age, have cast
Abraham, the friend of God, into fire; how Moses, He
Who held converse with the Almighty, was denounced as
liar and slanderer. Reflect how Jesus, the Spirit of God,
was, notwithstanding His extreme meekness and perfect
tender-heartedness, treated by His enemies. So fierce
was the opposition which He, the Essence of Being and
Lord of the visible and invisible, had to face, that He had
nowhere to lay His head. He wandered continually from
place to place, deprived of a permanent abode.6

9406 I Shall Come Again

10To conclude, the recognition of Truth requires purity, open-
mindedness, and detachment from traditions, from one’s ego,
and from worldly concerns. It does not require knowledge of
Greek, or Hebrew, or theology. Far be it from divine justice
to make the truth accessible or recognizable only to those
with a degree in divinity.
Wisdom and knowledge based on human standards sometimes
create pride and self-satisfaction.
Your wisdom [and knowledge, KJV] betrayed you, omni-
scient as you were, and you said to yourself, ‘I am, and
who but I?’ Isaiah 47:10 NEB
Therefore, let your judgment be dependent on yourself, and
yourself on Him who gave you the gift of life, not anyone
else! If the attitude of self-dependency is not assumed and
maintained, there can be little hope of finding the truth. At
the beginning of The Book of Certitude, Bahá’u’lláh writes:
The essence of these words is this: they that tread the path
of faith…must cleanse themselves of all that is earthly—
their ears from idle talk, their minds from vain imaginings,
their hearts from worldly affections, their eyes from that
which perisheth. They should put their trust in God, and,
holding fast unto Him, follow in His way. Then will they
be made worthy of the effulgent glories of the sun of
divine knowledge and understanding, and become the
recipients of a grace that is infinite and unseen, inasmuch
as man can never hope to attain unto the knowledge of
the All-Glorious, can never quaff from the stream of divine
knowledge and wisdom, can never enter the abode of
immortality, nor partake of the cup of divine nearness and
favor, unless and until he ceases to regard the words and
deeds of mortal men as a standard for the true understand-
ing and recognition of God and His Prophets.7
As stated, not all religious leaders have ignored or rejected
the new Messenger. A few have indeed acknowledged Him,
and others have admired His teachings. But neither their

11Chapter 20: My People Perish for Want of Knowledge

12acceptance nor their rejection should make any difference to
you in meeting your spiritual responsibility to pursue your
own independent search. Even if all the religious leaders
and all those who follow them unanimously acknowledged
Bahá’u’lláh, you should still decline to take their word for
granted and their judgment for truth until you have carried
out your own independent investigation of truth.
Thus on the Day of Resurrection God will ask everyone
of his understanding and not of his following in the foot-
steps of others. How often a person, having inclined his
ears to the holy verses, would bow down in humility and
would embrace the Truth, while his leader would not do
so. Thus every individual must bear his own responsi-
bility, rather than someone else bearing it for him…How
often the most insignificant of men have acknowledged
the truth, while the most learned have remained wrapt in
veils. Thus in every Dispensation a number of souls enter
the fire by reason of their following in the footsteps of
others.8 The Báb
This work offers the leaders of all faiths an opportunity to
honor their spiritual obligation, to put Bahá’u’lláh’s claim to
the test, and to decide if this Savior is divine or deceptive.
Such a search must rank first among all their worthy endeav-
ors, and first in their hearts and their minds, above every
other responsibility they may ever encounter as the guardians
of faith.
In the meantime no one should wait for his religious leaders
to make the first move. The records of history, the voice of
reason, and the testimony of the Scriptures all declare that it
is unwise indeed to wait for them to rise first. There have
been many in the past who have waited and waited, with no
end in sight. Among them are millions and millions of Jews,
who have been waiting for twenty centuries for their religious
leaders to bring them the glad-tidings of the coming of the
Messiah. They are still waiting and praying for His advent!

13I Have Set My Rainbow
in the Clouds
Genesis 9:13 NIV

14God’s Eternal Covenant

• • •
Chapter 142

With Humanity

1It may be broad or specific. It is always mutual:
…be true to your covenant with me; I will be true to my
covenant with you… Qur’án 2:38
According to a Christian source:
The concept of covenant between God and His people is

2By making a covenant with Abraham, God promised to
bless His descendants and to make them His special
people. Abraham, in return, was to remain faithful to God
and to serve as a channel through which God’s blessings
could flow to the rest of the world (Gen. 12:1-3)…Another
famous covenant was between God and David, in which
David and his descendants were established as the royal
heirs to the throne of the nations of Israel (II Sam. 7:12;
22:51). This covenant agreement reached its highest
fulfillment when Jesus the Messiah, a descendant of the
line of David, was born in Bethlehem about a thousand
years after God made this promise to David the king.1
But the striking thing about God’s covenant with His
people is that God is holy, all-knowing, and all powerful;
but He consents to enter into covenant with man, who
is weak, sinful, and imperfect.2
Every Messenger mediates a new covenant or testament
between God and humanity:
…Christ is the mediator of a new covenant [testament]…
Hebrews 9:15 NIV
One of the most vital terms of the covenant concerns the
coming of a new mediator, who comes to fulfill the previous
covenant and establish a new one. For instance, as the New
Testament confirms, this prophecy from Moses predicted the
advent of Jesus:
The Lord your God will raise up for you a prophet like
me [Moses] from among your own brothers. You must
listen to him. Deuteronomy 18:15 NIV
I will raise up for them a prophet like you from among
their brothers; I will put my words in his mouth, and he
will tell them everything I command him. If anyone does
not listen to my words that the prophet speaks in my
name, I myself will call him to account.
Deuteronomy 18:18-19 NIV

3Muhammad, too, predicted the advent of other Messengers:
O children of Adam! There shall come to you Apostles
[Messengers] from among yourselves, rehearsing my signs
to you; and whoso shall fear God and do good works, no
fear shall be upon them, neither shall they be put to grief.
But they who charge our signs with falsehood, and turn
away from them in their pride, shall be inmates of fire:
for ever shall they abide therein. Qur’án 7:33-34

4There is no exception to this rule:
The Lord of the universe hath never raised up a prophet
nor hath He sent down a Book unless He hath established
His covenant with all men, calling for their acceptance of
the next Revelation and the next Book…3 The Báb

5He…redeemed his people; he decreed that his covenant
should always endure. Psalms 111:9 NEB

6When God entered into covenant with the prophets, he
said, “This is the Book and the Wisdom which I give you.
Hereafter shall a prophet come unto you to confirm the
Scriptures already with you. Ye shall surely believe on
him, and ye shall surely aid him. Are ye resolved?” said
he, “and do ye accept the covenant on these terms?” They
said, “We are resolved”; “Be ye then the witnesses,” said
he, “and I will be a witness as well as you. And whoever
turneth back after this, these are surely the perverse.”
Qur’án 3:75-76

7All great Messengers have also made a covenant with their
followers concerning the Redeemer of our time—the Desire
of ages. They have all foretold His coming. This is called the
Greater Covenant:e
e
See God Passes By, p. 27, 1957 edition. The Greater Covenant is also used in
Bahá’í literature in a broader sense to denote the Covenant which every
Messenger of God makes with His followers, promising that a new Messenger

8…Thou [God] didst enter into a Covenant, concerning me,
with all that hath been created in thy realm.4 Bahá’u’lláh
…We [God] have taken a covenant from every created
thing…concerning the Remembrance of God [the Báb]
The Báb
Another covenant seeks to preserve the unity and indicate the
line of authority in a given faith. When Jesus called Peter “the
rock” (Matt. 16:18), or the foundation of His church, that
was His covenant with Christians.
Perhaps the most fundamental of all covenants is God’s
Eternal Covenant, symbolized by rainbow:
I have set my rainbow in the clouds, and it will be the
sign of the covenant between me and the earth. Whenever
I bring clouds over the earth and the rainbow appears in
the clouds, I will remember my covenant between me and
you and all living creatures of every kind.
Genesis 9:13-15 NIV
Then I saw another mighty angel [Bahá’u’lláh] coming
down from heaven. He was robed in a cloud, with a rain-
bow above his head…A rainbow…encircled the throne.
Revelation 10:1; 4:3 NIV
This covenant pertains to the spiritual laws that govern our
relationships with God. The terms of this covenant never
change. They are as fixed and unchangeable as the laws
of nature:
His works are truth and justice; his precepts all stand on
firm foundations, strongly based to endure for ever, their
fabric goodness and truth. He sent and redeemed his
people; he decreed that his covenant should always
endure. Psalms 111:7-9 NEB
The way of God is that which has been in the past, and you

• • •
Chapter 143

Translated By The Author

1See also 33:62; 30:29

2This is why the sacred Scriptures ask us to study history to
learn how people behaved and what was God’s role in human
affairs.
There is, in their stories, instruction for men endued with
understanding… Qur’án 12:111 Y
In The Book of Certitude, Bahá’u’lláh draws the reader’s
attention to the past and asks him repeatedly to ponder this
question: why did people, throughout all ages, reject the very
Redeemers for whose advent they prayed day and night? He
uses expressions such as these again and again:
• Consider the past…
• Ponder for a moment…
• Reflect a moment…
• Meditate profoundly…
• Reflect what could have been the motive for such deeds?
• What could have prompted such behavior?
Since the people of our age are not much different from the
people of past ages the conclusion must be:
Whatever in days gone by hath been the cause of the
denial and opposition of those people hath now led to
the perversity of the people of this age.6 Bahá’u’lláh
The history of past religions displays the basic and unchanging
elements of human nature as well as the unchanging ways in
which God’s wisdom operates. Just as scientists learn from
the experiments of other scientists, so can we learn from the
“experiments” of history. Unfortunately, most people do
not look to the past as a guide for the future. They are not
touched by the “tests and trials” of past generations. One
reason is that humans learn best from direct experience. For
instance, those who have been touched by the ravages of war,
often have strong feelings against war. They know war is

3Sometimes they cannot even believe it. So it is and has
always been. This is how humans think and behave.
Thus, the better we understand human nature, the better we
can be guided to the ways of divine wisdom. The spiritual
history of the world is perhaps the richest source of this
wisdom. Understanding history helps us understand the
basic elements of God’s Covenant. Knowing the Covenant
also helps us understand history. The basic elements of God’s
Eternal Covenant are these:
• Freedom of choice is granted to humans by God.
• Spiritual guidance is provided by God through His Me-
diators, according to people’s capacity, so that they may
learn about their Creator, their purpose in living, and the
difference between good and evil.
• Each individual has the responsibility and duty to avoid
evil and pursue that which is good.
• Reward and punishment are provided according to one’s

• • •
Chapter 144

The Gift Of Freedom A Most Precious And Generous Gift God Has Granted Us Is

1freedom to pursue, within our potential and possibilities, the
spiritual path we prefer. In His wisdom, He has allowed us
an infinite range of choices—good, evil, and a myriad of
stages in between—so that each of us may attain his or her
due position in the scheme of spiritual evolution.
Freedom is a distinctive mark of our nature, of our nobility,
of our humanity. It is so fundamental and essential to our
nature that if we were ever to lose it, we would be reduced
to the state of mere animals.
Behold, I have set before thee an open door, and no man
can shut it… Revelation 3:8

2Chapter 21: I Have Set My Rainbow in the Clouds

3This day I call heaven and earth as witnesses…that I have
set before you life and death…Now choose life…the Lord
is your life… Deuteronomy 30:19-20 NIV
Any major alteration in the everlasting laws would permanently
destroy human freedom. It would violate God’s own eternal
covenant with His creation. It would be as if the law of gravity
were made void. The literal descent of Jesus from heaven
with power and glory, and with flaming fire to “punish those
who do not know God and do not obey the gospel” (II Thess.
1:8 NIV), is a clear example of such an alteration.
God accomplishes His goals through the instruments He has
already created. Otherwise:
If He so pleased, He could blot you out and bring in a
new creation (Qur’án 35:16 Y). Had God pleased, He
could have made you one people (Qur’án 16:95). Had He
pleased, He had guided you all aright (Qur’án 16:9).
Should it be Our wish, it is in Our power to compel,
through the agency of but one letter of Our Revelation,
the world and all that is therein to recognize, in less than
the twinkling of an eye, the truth of Our Cause…7 The Báb
The law of cause and effect is as binding in the spiritual
world as in the material:
All things must needs have a cause, a motive power, an
animating principle.8 Bahá’u’lláh
God is all-powerful. “His arm is not too short” to save all
humanity, to make them see His great glory. This He has
never done. Why? He wants humans to use their own power
to discern His glory. To succeed, they must first remove the
veils of the world. He hides His face from all those who
worship their own desire:
Surely the arm of the Lord is not too short to save, nor
his ear too dull to hear. But your iniquities have separated
you from your God; your sins have hidden his face from
you… Isaiah 59:1-2 NIV

4416 I Shall Come Again

5The next prayer was revealed for our time. First, the passage
contains the expression “that day,” used frequently in the
Bible and the Qur’án to refer to our time; and second, its
message resembles that of the Lord’s prayer, a prayer about
the coming of the kingdom. Jesus asked Christians to pray
for protection from temptations. Muhammad asked Muslims
to pray for protection from evil.
O our Lord!…keep them from evil, for on him hast thou
mercy whom on that day [of the Advent] thou shalt keep
from evil… Qur’án 40:8-9
God’s Plan is that we should grow under the shadow of tests
and trials, the unknown and the unknowable, so that our free-
dom is preserved, so that our worthiness may bloom out of
our endeavors:
Verily the Hour is coming—My design is to keep it hidden—
for every soul to receive its reward by the measure of its
endeavor. Qur’án 20:15 Y
Human freedom to choose good or evil can be maintained
only in the darkness of concealment, and the twilight of mys-
teries. The greater the darkness, the greater the freedom. If
people saw the light of God, they could do nothing but His
will. All humans would turn into perfect robots forever.
Were I to remove the veil, all would recognize Me as their
Best Beloved, and no one would deny Me.9 The Báb
O SON OF MY HANDMAID!
Didst thou behold immortal sovereignty, thou wouldst
strive to pass from this fleeting world. But to conceal the
one from thee and to reveal the other is a mystery which
none but the pure in heart can comprehend.10 Bahá’u’lláh
This is why the Son of God came as the son of a carpenter,
poor and homeless. This is why the One greater than Solomon
(Matt. 12:42) was wrapped in meekness. He who influenced
the world more than all the kings and philosophers who have
ever lived, chose the cross for His throne, thorns for His
crown, and suffering as His glory. This is why He declared

6Chapter 21: I Have Set My Rainbow in the Clouds

7that His identity will be wrapped again in “clouds” and
“darkness” (see Chapter 2).
Recently a blackout occurred in the business section of a
major city. Many ordinary people, the news media reported,
took advantage of the darkness by carrying away what they
considered their fair share of goods from the stores. So many
were involved that the police could not keep up with them.
The veil of darkness granted people a freedom they had
not enjoyed before. It allowed their hidden desires and
motives to bloom.
For there is nothing hidden that will not become public,
nothing under cover that will not be made known and
brought into the open. Christ (Luke 8:17 NEB)
…the hour of trial that is going to come upon the whole
world to test those who live on the earth. Revelation 3:10 NIV
Blessed be He…Who hath created death and life to prove
[test] which of you will be most righteous in deed…
Qur’án 67:1-2
That which is on earth we have made but as a glittering
show…in order that we test them—as to which of them are
best in conduct. Qur’án 18:7 Y
Among all those who seek to educate humankind, the divine
Teachers rank first in teaching and honoring human freedom.
They admonish us to seek and adore the truth, without ever
imposing their will on us. They reveal laws, indicate the
consequences of obedience and disobedience, and then leave
us to decide for ourselves how to live.
We send not our Sent Ones but to announce [the most
great news] and to warne (Qur’án 18:54). Come forward,
you who are thirsty; accept the water of life, a free gift
to all who desire it (Rev. 22:17 NEB). If a man is thirsty,
let him come to me and drink ( John 7:37 NIV). Come, all
you who are thirsty, come to the waters (Isa. 55:1 NIV).
e
For references that confirm this, see Volume IV.

8418 I Shall Come Again

9He satisfieth the longing soul, and filleth the hungry soul
with goodness (Ps. 107:9).
Come to me, all whose work is hard, whose load is heavy;
and I will give you relief. Bend your necks to my yoke,
and learn from me, for I am gentle and humble-hearted;
and your souls will find relief. For my yoke is good to
bear, my load is light. Matthew 11:28-30 NEB
Blessed are they which are called unto the marriage supper
of the Lamb [the Báb]. Revelation 19:9
Come and gather yourselves together unto the supper of
the great God [Bahá’u’lláh]… Revelation 19:17
Only those who thirst for truth, who seek and desire the water
of life, are invited. “Hear, you who have ears to hear”
(Rev. 13:9 NEB).
Bahá’u’lláh echoes the same message:
Let him who wisheth turn unto Him, and him who wisheth
turn aside. Our Lord, the Merciful, is verily the All-
Sufficing, the All-Praised.11
Let him who will, acknowledge the truth of My words;
and as to him that willeth not, let him turn aside. My sole
duty is to remind you of your failure in duty towards the
Cause of God, if perchance ye may be of them that heed
My warning. Wherefore…return ye to God and repent, that
He, through His grace, may have mercy upon you, may
wash away your sins, and forgive your trespasses.12
Similarly, the teachings of Islam, as declared in the Qur’án,
uphold religious freedom:
To proclaim a clear message is our only duty (Qur’án
36:16). Verily, thy [Muhammad’s] work is preaching only,
and ours [God’s] to take account (Qur’án 13:40). Let there
be no compulsion in religion (Qur’án 2:257). Let him then
who will, take the way to his Lord (Qur’án 73:19). (See
also 109:6; 27:95; 29:17.)

10Chapter 21: I Have Set My Rainbow in the Clouds

11This verse from the Qur’án clearly encourages an independent
search for truth:
Give then the good tidings to those who hear an utterance
and follow the best [they find] therein. These are they
whom God guideth and are endowed with wisdom.e
Qur’án 39:19
As the verse implies, a wise person listens (to different points
of view) and then chooses the best. Such is the one who
receives guidance from God and finds the truth.
The true beginning of wisdom is the desire to learn (The
Wisdom of Solomon 6:17 NEB). A wise man will hear, and
will increase learning (Proverbs 1:5).
God’s wisdom ordains that people be guided by the power
of love and compassion:
The path to guidance is one of love and compassion, not
of force and coercion. This hath been God’s method in the
past, and shall continue to be in the future!13 The Báb
To stay in harmony with the spirit of freedom, Jesus admon-
ished His disciples to teach the truth only to the deserving.
He asked them to “look for some worthy person” (Matt. 10:11
NEB), not just any person. For if the receiver is not receptive,
he may feel pressured or annoyed. Furthermore, truth is noble
and divine, it is the honor of the wise and the virtuous, the
crown of the righteous. It should not be thrown before those
who wish to trample the crown:
Give not that which is holy unto the dogs, neither cast ye
your pearls before swine, lest they trample them under
their feet… Matthew 7:6
In the Old Testament we find again and again that God
promises to guide the meek:
e
Translated by the author. The original word in Arabic is qawl, meaning
utterance. The translations available to the author capitalize the word, thus
limiting its meaning only to divine Utterance. This is not the intent of the verse.

12420 I Shall Come Again

13The meek will he guide in judgment: and the meek will
he teach his way (Ps. 25:9). God arose to judgment, to
save all the meek of the earth (Ps. 76:9). (See also Ps.
149:4; Zeph. 2:3.)
When Jesus spoke about His return, He said that He would
disclose Himself to those who obeyed His commands (John
14:21). He made no mention of others. Truth unveils itself
only to the receptive.
…it is He Who leadeth those who…seek the way of
righteousness14 (The Báb). Therefore announce ye the
Message unto those who manifest virtue and teach them
the ways of the One True God, that haply they may com-
prehend15 (The Báb). God guideth all who seek His good
pleasure to ways of peace and safety (Qur’án 5:16 Y).
To foster this same spirit of freedom and honor, Bahá’u’lláh
repeatedly asks His followers not to offer the water of life
unless they find a soul that thirsts for truth and a heart that
is pure, worthy, and receptive.
The wise are they that speak not unless they obtain a
hearing…16 Bahá’u’lláh
Thus, we see that God never wishes to force anyone, even
to the slightest degree, to accept the truth. He simply warns
the undeserving of the consequences of their deeds, but does
not forcibly remove the barriers that they place between
themselves and their Creator. For His Justice, which follows
and fulfills His gift of freedom, demands that those who
choose darkness stay in darkness:
He has blinded their eyes and dulled their minds, lest they
should see with their eyes, and perceive with their minds,
and turn to me to heal them ( John 12:40 NEB). Truly we
have thrown veils over their hearts lest they should
understand this Qur’án, and into their ears a heaviness
(Qur’án 18:55). These are they whose hearts and ears and
eyes God hath scaled up; these are the careless ones
(Qur’án 16:110). (See also Qur’án 14:4.)

14Chapter 21: I Have Set My Rainbow in the Clouds

15In other words, God in His wisdom made humans in such a
way as to allow only the deserving (those who do not close
their hearts) to see the truth.
When Jesus was with His disciples He often spoke in plain
language, but when surrounded by the self-righteous and the
prejudiced, He shifted from plain language to parables, for
they were not receptive to the plain truth:
When he was alone, the Twelve and others who were round
him questioned him about the parables. He replied, ‘To
you the secret of the kingdom of God has been given; but
to those who are outside everything comes by way of
parables, so that (as Scripture says) they may look and
look, but see nothing; they may hear and hear, but un-
derstand nothing; otherwise they might turn to God and be
forgiven.’ Mark 4:10-12 NEB
God’s wisdom ordains that those who fail to prepare them-
selves for the heavenly banquet should not enter therein (Matt.
22:11-14). Bahá’u’lláh too confirms this principle. He states
that some people were kept back from the truth “by reason
of what their hands have wrought.”
This principle is called the law of cause and effect, a law
prevailing in every aspect of human life, in fact in every
aspect of the universe. If this universal law were nullified,
the whole order of the universe would crumble and fall. The
law is quite simple, but immutable. Whether it is eyesight or
insight, if it is veiled, darkness prevails.
People receive what they choose. They are given many choices:
Some turned towards Thee…Others recognized Thee and
then hesitated, others allowed the world to come between
them and Thee…Others disdained Thee…and wished to
prevent Thee from achieving Thy purpose. And yet behold
how all of them are calling upon Thee…18 Bahá’u’lláh
It is always we who hinder ourselves. The Creator would
never deprive a true seeker of the Truth.

16422 I Shall Come Again

17Consider how at the time of the appearance of every
Revelation, those who open their hearts to the Author of
that Revelation recognize the Truth, while the hearts of
those who fail to apprehend the Truth are straitened by
the reason of their shutting themselves out from Him.
However, openness of heart is bestowed by God upon
both parties alike. God desireth not to straiten the heart of
anyone, be it even an ant, how much less the heart of a
superior creature, except when he suffereth himself to be
wrapt in veils, for God is the Creator of all things.19
The Báb
He who shall accept and believe, shall receive his reward;
and he who shall turn away, shall receive none other than
his own punishment.20 Bahá’u’lláh
Freedom is a sublime gift sent from heaven. We must cherish
it and invest it for our spiritual growth. Unfortunately, many
of us cherish our freedom only as long as it does not concern
our religious beliefs. Consequently, when we face a spiritual
choice, we often select the stalemate of indecision over the
agony of decision. We prefer to walk in the ways of our fore-
bears and relinquish our responsibility, acting as if a choice
does not exist.
But the truth is otherwise. We are as free to choose our
spiritual lives as we are to choose any other aspect of our
lives, with one major difference; because we are in essence
spiritual beings, we should take our spiritual choices more
seriously. For we may ask: what is the difference between
or 80 or even 100 years, and eternity? The difference can
only be infinite, one that we cannot conceive. What use is it
if we serve our perishable bodies, but lose the opportunity to
ennoble our spirit, an entity that endures into eternity? Should
we not then take our spiritual choices more seriously? Does
not the end justify absolute dedication and commitment and
our highest endeavor?
For what profit is it to a man if he gains the whole world,
and loses his own soul? Matthew 16:26 NKJ

18Through Knowledge Shall
the Just Be Delivered
Proverbs 11:9

• • •
Chapter 145

The Gift Of Understanding And Knowledge

1B esides freedom, God has granted us many other gifts as
well, among them the gift of reasoning, understanding,
and knowing good and evil (Genesis 3:22). This gift allows
us to appreciate knowledge, to uncover the mysteries of the
universe.
Knowledge is not gained by acquiring and accumulating
an abundance of facts, but rather by understanding the

2424 I Shall Come Again

3unchanging, eternal principles, recognizing the divine
wisdom. Everyone is born with this potential. The primary
requirement for developing the potential is not high intelli-
gence or scholarship, but a heart that is pure, radiant, and
sincere. The paramount necessity for a pure heart is emphasized in
all the Scriptures:
…keep yourselves pure, you who carry the vessels of the
Lord (Isaiah 52:11 NEB). Blessed are the pure in heart: for
they shall see God (Christ, Matthew 5:8). Who may ascend
the hill of the Lord? Who may stand in his holy place?
He who has clean hands and a pure heart (Psalms 24:3-4 NIV).
The heart must needs therefore be cleansed from the idle
sayings of men, and sanctified from every earthly affection,
so that it may discover the hidden meaning of divine
inspiration, and become the treasury of the mysteries of
divine knowledge…This is the prime requisite of whosoever
treadeth this path. Ponder thereon, that, with eyes unveiled,
thou mayest perceive the truth of these words.1 Bahá’u’lláh
When knowledge strikes a pure heart, it generates the spark
of true understanding. Without a pure heart, knowledge itself
becomes a veil, for it creates vanity and self-satisfaction—
qualities that close the mind. This is what happened to the
religious leaders of Israel at the time of Jesus. As a Christian
scholar observes:
Jesus offered the Kingdom to Israel, for they were its proper
heirs…but the religious leaders, followed by most of the
people, not only refused to enter its blessings but tried to
prevent others from entering (Matt. 23:13). Nevertheless,
many tax-collectors and harlots did enter the Kingdom
(Matt. 21:31).2
Bahá’u’lláh shows this source of true knowledge:
Know verily that Knowledge is of two kinds: Divine and
Satanic. The one welleth out from the fountain of divine
inspiration; the other is but a reflection of vain and obscure
thoughts. The source of the former is God Himself ; the

4Chapter 22: Through Knowledge Shall the Just Be Delivered

5motive-force of the latter the whisperings of selfish desire…
The former bringeth forth the fruit of patience, of longing
desire, of true understanding, and love; whilst the latter
can yield naught but arrogance, vainglory and conceit.3
Jesus confirms the same truth:
I thank thee, Father, Lord of heaven and earth, for hiding
these things from the learned and wise, and revealing them
to the simple. Yes, Father, such was thy choice.
Matthew 11:25-26 NEB
Knowledge based on human desire is nothing but fancy,
nothing but a veil. The following passage, which Bahá’u’lláh
quotes from the Islamic Scriptures, points to such a knowledge:
Knowledge is the most grievous veil between man and his
Creator.4
This prophecy is about our time:
There will be terrible times in the last days. People will
be lovers of themselves, lovers of money, boastful, proud,
abusive…They are the kind who…are…always learning but
never able to acknowledge the truth. II Timothy 3:1-7 NIV
To dispel misunderstanding, Bahá’u’lláh often qualifies knowl-
edge with these two attributes: understanding and wisdom.
Sometimes He says true knowledge.
To have any value, knowledge must be guided by wisdom
and be tempered with humility: “Knowledge is proud that
he has learned so much; wisdom is humble that he knows
no more.” In relation to the events of our time, Daniel was
inspired to say:
…only the wise leaders shall understand. Daniel 12:10 NEB
Jesus, too, in His parables pertaining to His return, empha-
sized the attributes of wisdom as an essential prerequisite
for recognizing Him (Matt. 24:45- 47; 25:1-13). (These
prophecies are covered in Chapter 1.)

6426 I Shall Come Again

7To grant us spiritual knowledge and help us uncover the
spiritual mysteries, God sends Messengers, Teachers, or
Redeemers. The reason they are needed is this: the knowl-
edge of our spiritual nature and destiny stands beyond our
reach; we cannot acquire it on our own. All around us we
see people with the most brilliant minds who function on the
most primitive spiritual levels, like animals, or even worse.
Our world presents us with a perfect example. Our technical
advancement is astonishing, but what can we say about our
spiritual advancement? The profoundest and most creative
minds of our time are baffled and bewildered when they
think about the spiritual state of the world. Some of these
minds cannot even set their own houses in order.
Truly man’s guidance is with Us [God]. Qur’án 92:12
When the time is ripe, God in His infinite Wisdom bestows
divine knowledge, so that He may save us from the agony
of not knowing who we are, what we must be doing, and
where we are going.
…through knowledge shall the just be delivered (Proverbs
11:9). My people perish for want of knowledge (Hosea 4:6
NAB).

8The knowledge that God grants to us is expanded progres-
sively by new Messengers. In the Bahá’í Faith this is called
the progressive revelation of truth.
Knowledge is an essential partner to freedom; one without
the other stands incomplete, unfulfilled. It is the purpose of
knowledge to mark the boundaries of freedom, to point to its
stumbling blocks and to its stepping stones.
Thus we see that God leaves us suspended between the
temptations of freedom and the knowledge of the conse-
quences of the proper and improper use of freedom. In the
midst of all this He asks us to make choices, to prove
ourselves, to try our worthiness.
The idea that God will instantly change the world is a mis-
conception found in many religions. We are the instruments

9Chapter 22: Through Knowledge Shall the Just Be Delivered

10He has created for carrying out His Plan and Purpose. Our
participation is essential:
Verily never will God change the condition of a people
until they change it themselves (with their own souls).
Qur’án 13:11 Y
Our greatest glory lies in serving our Creator, in participating
with Him to promote His Purpose. When God reveals new
Knowledge through His Messengers and Redeemers, we must
arise to promote it.
Christ: Go ye therefore, and teach all nations…
Matthew 28:19
And as you go proclaim the message: “The
kingdom of Heaven is upon you.”
Matthew 10:7 NEB

• • •
Chapter 146

Nobody Lights A Lamp And Then Covers It With

1a basin or puts it under the bed. On the
contrary, he puts it on a lamp-stand so that
those who come in may see the light.
Luke 8:16 NEB
Muhammad: To proclaim a clear message is our only duty.
Qur’án 36:16

• • •
Chapter 147

Ye Shall Surely Make It Known To Mankind

1Bahá’u’lláh: …God hath prescribed unto everyone the duty
of proclaiming His Message
It behoveth you, in this day, to proclaim aloud
the Most Great Name among the nations.6
The Báb: Proclaim that which hath been sent unto Thee
as a token of the grace of the merciful Lord
Bahá’ís are given the responsibility of spreading the knowledge
of the advent of the new Revelation to all the peoples of the

2they consider two principles: proclamation, and teaching. They
proclaim the Bahá’í message to everyone, but teach only the

• • •
Chapter 148

The Gift Of Responsibility The Partnership Between Freedom And Knowledge Gives

1birth to a third element: responsibility. Responsibility is the
inevitable child of freedom and knowledge. If either were
wanting, responsibility could never be born:
If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not be
guilty of sin; but now they have no excuse for their sin
(John 15:22 NEB). We never punished until we had first sent
a Messenger (Qur’án 17:16). Because thou hast rejected
knowledge, I will also reject thee (Hosea 4:6).
When knowledge strikes our inborn freedom, the spark of
responsibility flashes forth. As soon as we hear the divine
Call, our accountability begins to assert itself. In this respect,
there is an immeasurable difference between those who hear
the divine Call and those who don’t. The relationship among
the three elements constitutes a spiritual law as definite as
the law of gravity: as knowledge and freedom rise or fall,
so does responsibility.
Where a man has been given much, much will be expected
of him; and the more a man has had entrusted to him the
more he will be required to repay (Luke 12:48 NEB). Say:
Shall they who have knowledge and they who have it not,
be treated alike? (Qur’án 39:12).
Now how do we demonstrate our sense of responsibility?
By the decisions we make. The quality of our decisions
determines our destiny both in this world and the next. By
our choices we build either a castle that rises heavenward,
ultimately crowning us with honor and glory, or a hut that
instantly crumbles and crushes us.

2Chapter 22: Through Knowledge Shall the Just Be Delivered

3The decisions we must make cover a wide spectrum, from
the most fundamental to the most trivial, from choosing a
profession or a partner to selecting a movie to see or a story
to read. One of the decisions we make—or at least we should
make—concerns our spiritual destiny. Here many of us
wander and waver.
Some people shift the burden of their spiritual responsibilities
to others—parents, religious leaders, or the majority. This
practice violates the terms of the Covenant:
“…every man shall bear his own burden” (Gal. 6:5). “No
bearer of burdens can bear the burden of another” (Qur’án
39:7 Y). “…every individual must bear his own responsi-
bility, rather than someone else bearing it for him” (the
Báb).8
Among the responsibilities given to us none is as consequen-
tial as that of the search for truth. “Seek ye the kingdom of
God” (Luke 12:31). “Seek ye the Lord while he may be
found” (Isa. 55:6). “You will find him, if indeed you search
with all your heart and soul” (Deut. 4:29 NEB). “Be always
on the watch…that you may be able to stand before the Son
of Man” (Luke 21:36 NIV). “Blessed are those servants,
whom the Lord when he cometh shall find watching” (Luke
12:37). “Behold, I come like a thief! Blessed is he who stays
awake” (Rev. 16:15 NIV).e
The essence of all that We have revealed for thee is Justice,
is for man to free himself from idle fancy and imitation,
discern with the eye of oneness His glorious handiwork,
and look into all things with a searching eye.9 Bahá’u’lláh
Let the flame of search burn with such fierceness within
your hearts as to enable you to attain your supreme and
most exalted goal—the station at which ye can draw nigh
unto, and be united with, your Best-Beloved…10 Bahá’u’lláh

4e
Chapter 1 of this volume is devoted almost entirely to Jesus’ emphasis on the
necessity of the independent investigation of Truth.

5430 I Shall Come Again

6And whoso maketh efforts for Us, in our ways will We
guide them. Qur’án 29:69
How can we tell if we know and love God?
Here is the test by which we can make sure that we know
him: do we keep his commands? The man who says, ‘I
know him,’ while he disobeys his commands, is a liar and
a stranger to the truth; but in the man who is obedient to
his word, the divine love has indeed come to its perfection.
I John 2:3-5 NEB
If you love me, you will obey what I command. And I
will ask the Father, and he will give you another Coun-
selor to be with you for ever—the Spirit of truth…Whoever
has my commands and obeys them, he is the one who
loves me. He who loves me will be loved by my Father,
and I too will love him and show myself to him.
John 14:15-17, 21 NIV
Thus the evidence of our knowing and loving the divine
Redeemer is obedience to His commandments. And the
consequence of disobedience is the loss of divine love, in fact,
of the Redeemer Himself. For as the last passage indicates and
as stated earlier, Jesus promises to disclose Himself to those
who honor His commands. He makes no promises to others.
(Chapter 14 of John, which deals primarily with the promise
of the second advent, repeatedly refers to the subject of
obedience, in five verses out of 31.)
How can we be true to our beliefs if we ignore the com-
mandment to search? How can we disregard the awesome
claim made by Bahá’u’lláh that He is indeed the expected
Redeemer of the world, that He fulfills all the prophecies,
and that the proofs of His Mission are so abundant as to be
unparalleled in all human history? Since the consequences are
so fundamental and far-reaching, is it wise to take chances,
to ignore such a claim? Surely we would wish to know, to
prove to ourselves, beyond any doubt, whether the claim is
true or false.

7Chapter 22: Through Knowledge Shall the Just Be Delivered

8If we find the claim to be false, we have honored our respon-
sibility of obeying the divine commandment; we have also
exercised our right to freedom. We have lost nothing. On the
contrary, we have at least gained something noble, a clear
conscience. However, if we find the claim to be true, then
we have gained something even nobler: a bounty beyond our
fairest dreams, the most glorious reward ever granted by the
Creator to the created, a blessing imperishable and ever-
lasting, a divine gift that defies description. So whatever the
consequences, by seeking we can only win. As for not
seeking, that is something everyone may wish to answer for
himself.
The sacred Scriptures teach us that we all carry the burden
of responsibility for our own deeds, and that we shall all
stand before God’s tribunal:
I will call you to account for your doings… Ezekiel 7:3 NEB
We shall all stand before God’s tribunal. Romans 14:10 NEB
…every one of us shall give account of himself to God.
Romans 14:12
By God ye shall be called to account for your devices!
Qur’án 16:58
…they [the dead] take with them the record of their deeds.
Revelation 14:13 NEB
…hereafter shall ye return to your Lord, and he will tell
you of your works. Qur’án 39:9
But I tell you that men will have to give account on
the day of judgment for every careless word they have
spoken. Matthew 12:36 NIV
Set before thine eyes God’s unerring Balance and, as one
standing in His Presence, weigh in that Balance thine actions
every day, every moment of thy life.11 Bahá’u’lláh
Ye, and all ye possess, shall pass away. Ye shall, most
certainly, return to God, and shall be called to account

9432 I Shall Come Again

10for your doings in the presence of Him Who shall gather
together the entire creation…12 Bahá’u’lláh
Know ye that the world and its vanities and its embellish-
ments shall pass away. Nothing will endure except God’s
Kingdom which pertaineth to none but Him, the Sovereign
Lord of all, the Help in Peril, the All-Glorious, the Al-
mighty. The days of your life shall roll away, and all the
things with which ye are occupied and of which ye boast
yourselves shall perish, and ye shall, most certainly, be
summoned by a company of His angels to appear at the
spot where the limbs of the entire creation shall be made
to tremble, and the flesh of every oppressor to creep. Ye
shall be asked of the things your hands have wrought in
this, your vain life, and shall be repaid for your doings.
This is the day that shall inevitably come upon you, the
hour that none can put back. To this the Tongue of Him
that speaketh the truth and is the Knower of all things
hath testified.13 Bahá’u’lláh

11O SON OF BEING!
Bring thyself to account each day ere thou art summoned
to a reckoning; for death, unheralded, shall come upon
thee and thou shalt be called to give account for thy
deeds.14 Bahá’u’lláh
Like freedom, responsibility is an essential part of being
human. By surrendering it, we descend to a lower state
of being. Again, any major alteration in the laws of the
universe—such as the physical resurrection of the dead—
would permanently destroy this gift. God’s wisdom conceals
many mysteries in order to preserve and honor our freedom:
Should the greatness of this Day be revealed in its fullness,
every man would forsake a myriad lives in his longing to
partake, though it be for one moment, of its great glory—
how much more this world and its corruptible treasures!15
Bahá’u’lláh
The fourth element of God’s covenant with humanity—reward
and punishment—is presented in Volume III.

12Appendices

• • •
Chapter 149

Appendix I Then Shall The Sanctuary

1B efore 1844, tens of thousands believed that “the cleansing
of the sanctuary” meant the end of the world and the
return of Christ. When Jesus did not descend from the clouds
in that critical year, some of those who expected Him
desperately reexamined their beliefs. One of them thought of
this idea: Daniel’s prophecy did not point to the coming of
the Master to the earth; it pointed to a heavenly occurrence.
In 1844 an event of great magnitude happened in the heavenly
sanctuary. (It is far easier to reinterpret an idea than a number.
Numbers are fixed entities; they cannot be reshaped.) This
quotation from a Seventh-day Adventists’ publication explains
this new position:
Based on his study of the prophecy of Daniel 8:14 [the

2would return to earth on October 22, 1844. When Jesus
did not appear, Miller’s followers experienced what came
to be called “the great disappointment.”
Most of the thousands who had joined the “great second
advent awakening” left it, in deep disillusionment. A few,
however, went back to their Bibles to find why they had
been disappointed. Soon they concluded that the October
22 date had indeed been correct, but that Miller had pre-
dicted the wrong event for that day. They became convinced
that the Bible prophecy predicted not that Jesus would
return to earth in 1844, but that He would begin at that
time a special ministry in heaven for His followers
[emphasis added].1
This new idea received a warm welcome from a few dis-
appointed believers whose very faith was on trial, and who
could find no other explanation for their unfulfilled hope. It
served as the seed from which a new church sprouted. The
few disappointed but faithful believers, who welcomed the
new interpretation of the prophecy, eventually grew into
several million and into a number of churches, who to this
day have continued to declare the dawning of a new age in
1844. The Seventh-day Adventists are the largest and best
known among them. Since the Great Disappointment of 1844,
they have continued to proclaim with zeal and fervor the
imminent return of Christ. They have not allowed the light
of faith to grow dim or die in the hearts of the faithful. For

• • •
Chapter 150

The Position Held By Adventists

1Based on the teachings of Ellen G. White, the Adventists
maintain the following basic principles:
• Jesus’ ministry consisted of two phases.
• The marking line between them was the year 1844.

2Appendix I: Then Shall the Sanctuary Be Cleansed

3• During the first phase, Jesus’ Mission was “to intercede
for His people.”
• During the second phase, His Mission was to judge His
people.
• Heaven has two “apartments.”
• One “apartment” is linked to intercession; the other to
judgment.
• In the summer of 1844 Jesus entered the “apartment”
linked to judgment.
• At that moment His Mission of judgment began.
• The judgment to which people are subjected is called
“investigative judgment.” 2 Its purpose is to examine
people’s character and their readiness for the kingdom of
God.
• “The cleansing of the Sanctuary” does not refer to the
coming of Christ to the earth, but to a turning point in
His Mission.
These quotations further clarify the Adventists’ beliefs:
• So when Christ entered the holy of holies to perform the
closing work of the atonement [intercession], He ceased
His ministration in the first apartment [intercession phase].3
• And, as the Second Apartment phase of that ministry, He
entered upon the work of judgment in 1844.4
• The mistake had not been in the reckoning of the prophetic
periods, but in the event to take place at the end of 2300
days.5
• …instead of coming to the earth at the termination of the
2300 days in 1844, Christ then entered the most holy place
of the heavenly sanctuary to perform the closing work of
atonement preparatory to His coming.6
What are the issues that this position or interpretation does
not address? These are a few:

4438 I Shall Come Again

5n The explanation offered does not pertain to the central
question. What we need to know is not the various phases
of Jesus’ ministry, but the meaning of this critical message:
“the sanctuary shall be cleansed.”
n The prophecy declares that at that time (1844) the sanc-
tuary will be cleansed or restored. The words “cleansed”
and “restored” are clearly relevant to the terrible conditions
of our planet—both physically and spiritually. Are they
also relevant to heaven? Does the heavenly sanctuary need
restoring or cleansing? Is heaven as defiled or desolated
as the earth? Is not where Jesus resides already perfect—
pure, radiant, and heavenly?
n It is claimed that in 1844 Jesus entered “the holy of
holies,” a title synonymous with “the most holy place
of the sanctuary,” and “the inner sanctuary.” But the
Gospel declares that Jesus had already entered there:
…the inner sanctuary behind the curtain, where Jesus,
who went before us, has entered on our behalf. He
has become a high priest forever, in the order of
Melchizedek. Hebrews 6:19-20 NIV
n As stated, there is no clear relationship between restoring
or purifying the sanctuary and entering a new phase of
ministry or going from one apartment of heaven to another.
Even if we assume there is, what benefit can we gain on
earth from knowing that Jesus began a new phase of His
ministry in a second apartment in heaven?
n Since heaven is invisible, how can we be sure that
something indeed took place there? People can make any
claim they wish. What matters most is not the claim
but the evidence that supports the claim. The purpose of
prophecy is to offer a link between the invisible source
(the divine) and the visible (the earthly). Why prophesy
about invisible events?
n Prophecies refer to our time specifically as the time of
Judgment (Ps. 96:13). But, in general, the time of the

6Appendix I: Then Shall the Sanctuary Be Cleansed

7advent of every Messenger is a time of judgment, because
people are judged by their response to their new Redeemer.
For judgment I have come into this world… John 9:39 NIV
…the Father…has entrusted all judgment to the Son…
whoever hears my word and believes him who sent
me…will not be condemned… John 5:22-24 NIV
n Why would Christ judge His people after 1844 and not
before?

8The Symbolism of “the Cleansing
of the Sanctuary”
This section presents further evidence on the meaning of the
chief symbol in Daniel’s prophecy of 2300 days. How do we
know that “the cleansing of the sanctuary” is synonymous
with the coming of the Lord? We are faced with a puzzle:
we must seek and assemble all the pieces and then make a
judgment. The following are some of the pieces and clues:
1 Perhaps the leading clue is Jesus' own words to His inquisi-
tive disciples who sought to know the time of His return.
Instead of directly designating the time, He guided His
disciples to Daniel’s vision of “abomination of desolation,”
saying that if they referred to it, they would know.
An examination of the Book of Daniel reveals that he has
two time visions involving the identifying phrase the abomi-
nation or transgression of desolation. One relates to the
prophecy of 2300 days, which specifies the dawning of the
New Age (1844 A. D.) inaugurated by the Báb; the other
specifies the time of Bahá’u’lláh’s public ministry (1863 A. D.).

92 The angel speaking to Daniel states clearly that the vision
of 2300 days refers to “the time of the end,” a common
expression used in the Scriptures to point to the ending of the
prophetic cycle, and the dawning of the Day of the Lord.

10440 I Shall Come Again

11This fact can be further verified by comparing the evident
similarities found between the words of the Gospel regard-
ing the vision and some key words found in the vision itself.
For instance, the disciples asked Jesus about the sign of His
coming and “the end of the world,” or “the end of the age”
(Matt. 24:3). In Daniel’s vision we find a similar expression
with an identical meaning—“the vision points to the time of
the end” (Dan. 8:17 NEB).

123 The sanctuary is the heart of religion, the House of God,
the Holy of Holies. “God’s sanctuary was His established
earthly abode, the place where he chose to dwell among
His people.”
And let them make me a sanctuary; that I may dwell among
them. Exodus 25:8

13…do not withdraw from the sanctuary of His presence
The Báb

14Purifying the world is the purpose of every Messenger and
Redeemer:
O peoples of the earth! Verily His Remembrance [the Báb]
is come to you…that He may purge and purify you from
uncleanliness in anticipation of the Day of the One true
God…9 The Báb

154 Who, we might ask, has the power and authority to cleanse
such a holy and exalted habitation but a God-sent Savior?
The harmony between the prophecy of 2300 days and the
fifteen other prophecies, all confirming 1844 as the appointed
time, provides us with further evidence.

165 The two time prophecies pertaining to both advents appear
together in close succession and share several common
clues, such as the desolation or illumination of the sanctuary
and the termination of the daily sacrifice.

17Appendix I: Then Shall the Sanctuary Be Cleansed

18Even Daniel’s inability to comprehend his vision of 2300
days in itself constitutes a clue, indicating its relationship to
the last days (see Dan. 12:4; 12:9).

196 Jerusalem is the City of God, and the sanctuary or temple its
very heart. Jerusalem sometimes symbolizes the people of
Israel and their temporal civilization. The sanctuary or temple
symbolizes their spiritual life and heavenly civilization. After
the Jews rejected Jesus, He predicted desolation for both the
temple and the city until the time of the advent of the Lord,
a term frequently used to signify Christ’s second coming:
O Jerusalem, Jerusalem, the city that murders the prophets
and stones the messengers sent to her! How often have
I longed to gather your children, as a hen gathers her
brood under her wings; but you would not let me. Look,
look! there is your temple, forsaken by God. And I tell
you, you shall never see me until the time comes when
you say, “Blessings on him who comes in the name of the
Lord!” Christ (Luke 13:34-35 NEB)

20This prophecy clearly links the end of “desolation” of Israel’s
house of worship or temple to the advent of the Lord. The
New International Version reads:
Look, your house is left to you desolate. I tell you, you
will not see me again until you say, ‘Blessed is he who
comes in the name of the Lord.’ Luke 13:35 NIV

21By the Báb’s advent the sanctuary was spiritually renewed,
and Jerusalem began gradually to gather her children. We
find the Bahá’í World Center established in the same region
and the city itself in a state of continuing growth and
prosperity. Once again we see that the end of desolation for
the City of God and its Temple is connected to the advent
of the Lord. Because Jesus first spoke of the desolation of
Jerusalem and its temple, then gave the good news of the
advent of the Lord. When Bahá’u’lláh was exiled to the Holy

22442 I Shall Come Again

23Land, the vicinity of Jerusalem was literally blessed by the
presence of her Lord.
Marvin Rosenthal, a Christian writer, describes the relationship
between the glory of God and the temple. He states that the
first temple was built more than nine hundred years before
Jesus by David and Solomon. He then continues:
Although God is omnipresent and “the heaven of heavens
cannot contain [Him]” (2 Chron. 6:18), He chose…to dwell
among His people within His temple and to manifest His
glory there. The children of Israel would be permitted…
to see the holiness…and mercy of God—what He was
truly like…
But about four centuries later, the prophet Ezekiel described
the departure of the glory of God from the temple. His
description is one of the most heartrending stories in all
the Word of God. The Sovereign of the universe…who chose
Israel as His “ peculiar treasure” (Ps. 135:4), was driven
out of the temple by His people’s grievous sin (Ezek.
8:6).10
In the course of several chapters, Ezekiel offers a detailed
description of the presence of the glory of God in the temple
and His departure from it. Here is a brief summary of those
chapters by Rosenthal:
First, the glory of God departed from over the ark of the
covenant…to the threshold of the temple (Ezek. 10:4). It
was almost as if the glory of God had paused there at the
threshold to say, “Don’t drive Me away. I want to be your
God. I want you to be My people…Repent of your sin,
and I will stay.” Then the glory of God moved from the
threshold of the temple to the east gate of the Lord’s
house (Ezek. 10:19). And once again, it was as if the
glory of God paused, hesitated, hoping for a repentance
that would allow Him to remain…Finally the glory moved
from the Eastern Gate…over the Mount of Olives (Ezek.
11:23). The nation had forced the withdrawal of the

24Appendix I: Then Shall the Sanctuary Be Cleansed

25presence of God from their midst by their grievous, con-
tinuous sin. With that event, over Israel was written the
word Ichabod, meaning the glory is departed (I Sam.
4:21).11
Almost six centuries later history repeated itself. The glory
of the Father (the glory of God) once again appeared in the
temple through His Son. But those who saw themselves as
the true custodians of the temple tried to prevent Him from
entering and restoring it. They were told that their house
would be left desolate until they were ready to say: “Blessed
is He who comes in the name of the Lord ” (see Matt.
23:37-39 NIV).
People can refuse to enter God’s temple, but they cannot
prevent Him from building one. By His advent Jesus built a
new temple, a new church, which in time would also become
desolate.
The Book of Revelation confirms the desolation or dis-
appearance of the old temple and its regeneration by two
blessed Beings in the end-time: one called the Lamb and the
other the Lord God or the glory of God:
I did not see a temple in the city [of God], because the
Lord God Almighty and the Lamb are its temple. The city
does not need the sun or the moon to shine on it, for the
glory of God gives it light, and the Lamb is its lamp.e
Revelation 21:22-23 NIV
Isaiah confirms the same message:
…and he [the Lord Almighty] will be a sanctuary…
Isaiah 8:14 NIV
The Book of Revelation declares that everything will be made
new; it refers repeatedly to the temple in the new Jerusalem:

26e
Volume II contains a whole chapter devoted to the meaning of the two great
Beings with various titles, mentioned repeatedly in the Book of Revelation.

27444 I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 151

Him Who Overcomes I Will Make A Pillar In The Temple Of

1my God…I will also write on him my new name.
Revelation 3:12 NIV
This verse also points to two great Beings in the temple: God
and the Lamb.
…they [the new believers] are before the throne of God
and serve him day and night in his temple…the Lamb at
the center of the throne will be their shepherd; he will lead
them to springs of living water. Revelation 7:15, 17 NIV
(For further references, see The Relationship Between Heavenly
and Earthly “Jerusalem and Sanctuary,” Chapter 16.)

27 The words sanctuary, temple, tabernacle, holy of holies, and
inner court are often linked to the coming or the presence
of the Lord or the Glory of God (Bahá’u’lláh):
O God…I come before thee in the sanctuary to look upon
thy power and glory. Psalms 63:1-2 NEB
And Moses and Aaron went into the tabernacle…and the
glory of the Lord appeared unto all the people.
Leviticus 9:23
Behold, I will send my messenger, and he shall prepare
the way before me: and the Lord, whom ye seek, shall
suddenly come to his temple… Malachi 3:1
See also Ezek. 8:3-4; 9:3; 10:3-4; 44:4; 43:4-5

3The prophetic words of the Old Testament invariably find
their counterparts in the New. The mysterious and marvelous
Book of Revelation, too, links tabernacle, temple or sanctuary
with the advent of the Glory of God in the last days:
And the temple was filled with smoke from the glory of
God and from his power… Revelation 15:8 NIV
See also Isa. 60:13-16

4To protect the seeker from misjudging the significance or the
meaning of “the opening of the tabernacle,” and to prevent

5Appendix I: Then Shall the Sanctuary Be Cleansed

6him from cherishing the illusion of expecting earthly glory
and majesty, soon after revealing the preceding signs, the
divine Predictor adds these prophetic words:
That is the day when I come like a thief!
Revelation 16:15 NEB

78 Jesus declared that He would come with power and great
glory (Matt. 24:30). The verses quoted from Psalms (63:1-2),
Revelation (15:8), as well as many others, refer to the appear-
ance or presence of both power and glory in the sanctuary.

89 The Scriptures indicate that “the cleansing of the temple or
sanctuary” was used as a symbol for the inauguration of
the first advent of Christ. At the beginning of His ministry,
Jesus “drove out the unholy business that had defiled the
house of God.” He cleansed the Temple from those who
had transformed the spiritual into the worldly (John 2:13-22).
As George Rice, a Christian writer, notes:
The first cleansing of the temple was a carefully planned
move by Jesus to inaugurate His ministry
The first public act on the part of Jesus that reflected
anything suggesting kingship was the cleansing of the
temple at the beginning of His ministry. John 2:13-22…
This first cleansing was the public announcement of
His Messiahship and mission. He acted and spoke with
the authority of a king…the first cleansing accomplished
its purpose; his mission was announced to the world, and
the leaders were made aware of His presence [emphasis
added].13

910 Atheprophecy in the New Testament predicts the dawning of
second advent in these terms:
Repent, then, and turn to God…that times of refreshing
may come from the Lord, and that he may send the Christ
…He [Christ] must remain in heaven until the time comes
for God to restore everything, as he promised long ago
through his holy prophets. Acts 3:19-21 NIV

10446 I Shall Come Again

11We are told that Christ will come to refresh and restore every-
thing. This is exactly what Daniel’s prophecy predicted:
…then the sanctuary shall be cleansed and restored.
Daniel 8:14 AB
Why is restoration needed? Because of the prevalence of
desolation. And that was the original question one saint asked
the other:
…how long will impiety cause desolation…?
Daniel 8:13 NEB
The words desolation and restoration are exact opposites.
The latter is a logical response to the former. Further, the
prophecy from the New Testament states:
…the time comes for God to restore everything, as he
promised long ago through his holy prophets.
Acts 3:21 NIV

12Who were the holy prophets through whom the promise
was made? Obviously, one of them must be Daniel, whose
book contains many prophecies and promises, including
the promise of restoration after 2300 days.

1311 This verse from the Book of Revelation clearly links the return
of the Redeemer of our age to the tabernacle or sanctuary:
And I John saw the holy city, new Jerusalem [new
Revelation], coming down from God out of heaven…And
I heard a great voice…saying, Behold, the tabernacle of
God is with men, and he will dwell with them…
Revelation 21:2-3

1412 Just before referring to Daniel’s vision of “abomination of
desolation,” Jesus talked about the destruction of the temple
(Matt. 24:1-2). That message prompted His disciples to ask
Him about the time and signs of His return. Jesus’ ominous
words concerning the future of the temple—the words that
stirred His disciples’ curiosity—carried this symbolic message:
when I pass away, so will the soul of the temple; when My

15Appendix I: Then Shall the Sanctuary Be Cleansed

16body, the temple of My Spirit, is desecrated and destroyed,
so will be your temple, which also enshrines that Spirit. It
will become an empty shell for the worshippers until I come
again to restore it with the pearl of My Spirit.

1713 The tearing of the veil of the temple at the moment of Jesus’
death is one more symbol pointing to the end of opportunity
for the people of Israel and the loss of the spiritual powers
of their temple. When the veil was rent asunder, a spiritual
age ended and a new dispensation dawned; a new church was
born to replace the old temple. The daily sacrifice at the altar
lost its purpose. The great sacrifice of God who offered His
Son as a ransom for the sins of an ungrateful humanity made
the ritual vain. According to a Christian source:
At the moment of Jesus’ death, the veil of the Temple was
torn from top to bottom (Matt. 27:51; Mark 15:38; Luke
23:45). By His death, Jesus opened a new way into the
presence of God. A new order replaced the old. No longer
was the Temple in Jerusalem to be the place where men
worshiped God. From now on they would worship Him
“in spirit and truth” ( John 4:21-24).14
14 Biblical references as well as Bahá’u’lláh’s words indicate
clearly that there are two tabernacles or sanctuaries: one in
heaven, the other on earth.
We do have such a high priest [Jesus, the heavenly priest],
who sat down at the right hand of the throne of the
Majesty in heaven, and who serves in the sanctuary, the
true tabernacle set up by the Lord…They [the earthly priests]
serve at a sanctuary that is a copy and shadow of what is
in heaven. Hebrews 8:1-5 NIV
The following verse links the opening of God’s temple in
heaven with His covenant. The implication is this: when
God opens the gate of a new temple to His people, He also
presents them with a new covenant.
Then God’s temple in heaven was opened, and within his
temple was seen the ark of his covenant. Revelation 11:19 NIV

18448 I Shall Come Again

19In the following prayer, Bahá’u’lláh communicates with God
concerning His sufferings, sufferings that touched the heart
of heaven:
He [Bahá’u’lláh]…hath suffered more grievously…than any
pen can recount, and been so harassed that He Who is
Thy [God’s] Spirit [Jesus] lamented, and all the denizens
of Thy Kingdom and all the inmates of Thy Tabernacle
[heavenly tabernacle] in the realms above cried with a
great and bitter lamentation.15
As stated in Chapter 10, the vision pertains to the time
when the people of Israel will have an opportunity to free
themselves from self-imposed humiliation by turning to their
Redeemer. Their deeds and destiny are described and pre-
dicted by these ominous words:
• Abomination • Rebellion
• Desolation • Impiety
• Transgression • Humiliation
All the words and messages are negative; they are signs of
imperfection. The vision is a response to this simple question:
…how long will impiety cause desolation…? Daniel 8:13 NEB
To imply that the prophecy pertains to heaven is to associate
impiety, rebellion, transgression, and desolation with that
divine realm. Heaven has always been the ideal model of
purity and perfection. Jesus prayed that God’s Kingdom would
become as real on earth as it is in heaven. Although impiety,
rebellion, transgression, and desolation cannot describe the
heavenly realm, they do describe the earthly realm.
The question posed by the saint and the answer given to him
both indicate that the vision pertains to an imperfect world.
Seeing the response in different translations may further
clarify the intent of the vision. Can any of these events
relate to heaven?
…then the holy place will be properly restored. Daniel 8:14

• • •
Chapter 152

The Jerusalem Bible

New American Standard

1Appendix I: Then Shall the Sanctuary Be Cleansed

2…then the sanctuary shall be restored to its rightful state.

Revised Standard Version

1…[the] holy place will certainly be brought into the right
condition. New World Translation
…then the sanctuary shall have its rights restored.

115 Common codes point to a common message concealed in the
two parts of the vision. These six key codes are found in
both parts of Daniel’s vision; the part that points to the first
advent, and the part that points to the second:
The First Advent The Second Advent
1. daily sacrifice (9:27) 1. daily sacrifice (8:13)
2. transgression (9:24) 2. transgression (8:13)
3. desolation (9:18; 9:17; 9:27) 3. desolation (8:13)
4. sanctuary (9:17) 4. sanctuary (8:13; 8:14)
5. restore (9:25) 5. restore and cleanse
6. the city that bears thy name, (8:14 AB); cleanse
Jerusalem, the holy city (8:14 KJV)
(9:18; 9:25) 6. the fairest of all lands
(Jerusalem) (8:13 NEB)
Some translations such as The New English Bible read
“desolation of both the Holy Place (the sanctuary) and the
fairest of all lands” (Jerusalem). Others, such as New Inter-
national Version, read “the desolation, and the surrender of
sanctuary and of the host” (the Jews). If we substitute “the
host” for “the fairest of all lands” (Jerusalem), then we can
find another common clue in place of Jerusalem. The clue is
“thy people” (9:24), and “the host” (8:13), both of which
refer to the people of Israel.
For further evidence linking “the cleansing of sanctuary”

2450 I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 153

Tabernacle And Sanctuary In

1The words tabernacle and sanctuary appear repeatedly in
Bahá’u’lláh’s Writings, and are in perfect harmony with
biblical usage. By them He conveys these meanings:
• The spiritual domain of the world
• The unifying power of God, His “collective center for
humanity ”
• The religion of God
• The spiritual abode of the divine Messengers
• The seat of God’s love in humans
• The domain of divine protection
• The instrument of God’s presence among humans, His
Manifestation
These few examples demonstrate Bahá’u’lláh’s usage of the
word tabernacle:
O thou who art waiting, tarry no longer, for He is come.
Behold His Tabernacle and His Glory dwelling therein. It
is the Ancient Glory, with a new Manifestation.16
The tabernacle of unity hath been raised; regard ye not
one another as strangers. Ye are the fruits of one tree
How vast is the tabernacle of the Cause of God! It hath
overshadowed all the peoples and kindreds of the earth,
and will, erelong, gather together the whole of mankind
beneath its shelter.18
They who dwell within the tabernacle of God, and are
established upon the seats of everlasting glory, will refuse,
though they be dying of hunger, to…seize unlawfully the

2…behold Them [the divine Messengers] all abiding in the
same Tabernacle
Know thou that he is truly learned who hath acknowledged
My Revelation, and drunk from the Ocean of My knowledge,
and soared in the atmosphere of My love, and cast away
all else besides Me…Verily, such a man is blessed by the
Concourse on high, and by them who dwell within the
Tabernacle of Grandeur
Biblical prophecies pointing to sanctuary and tabernacle and
the presence of the glory of God in them were fulfilled by
Bahá’u’lláh not only symbolically but literally as well. For
Bahá’u’lláh had a tent called the Tabernacle of Glory. He
pitched that glorious tent on Mt. Carmel. That was one of
His specific earthly abodes.
We should note that Israel’s earliest sanctuary, like Bahá’u’lláh’s,
was a movable tent:
Israel’s earliest sanctuary was the movable tent known as
the tabernacle where the ark containing the tablets of
the covenant was housed (Ex. 25:8 etc.).22
Carmel, in the Book of God, hath been designated as the
Hill of God, and His Vineyard. It is here that, by the
grace of the Lord of Revelation, the Tabernacle of Glory
hath been raised. Happy are they that attain thereunto;
happy they that set their faces towards it.23 Bahá’u’lláh
And again:
This is the Day whereon He Who is the Revealer of the
names of God [Bahá’u’lláh] hath stepped out of the Taber-
nacle of Glory…24 Bahá’u’lláh
Blessed the wayfarer who directeth his steps towards the
Tabernacle of My glory and majesty…and [blessed] the
needy one who entereth beneath the shadow of the

• • •
Chapter 154

Appendix Ii

1I dreamed that God, by an unseen hand, sent me a
curiously wrought casket about ten inches long by six
square, made of ebony and pearls curiously inlaid. To the
casket there was a key attached. I immediately took the key
and opened the casket, when, to my wonder and surprise,
I found it filled with all sorts and sizes of jewels, diamonds,
precious stones, and gold and silver coin of every dimen-
sion and value, beautifully arranged in their several places
in the casket; and thus arranged they reflected a light
and glory equaled only to the sun.
I thought it was not my duty to enjoy this wonderful sight
alone, although my heart was overjoyed at the brilliancy,

2a center table in my room and gave out word that all who
had a desire might come and see the most glorious and
brilliant sight ever seen by man in this life.
The people began to come in, at first few in number, but
increasing to a crowd. When they first looked into the
casket, they would wonder and shout for joy. But when the
spectators increased, everyone would begin to trouble the
jewels, taking them out of the casket and scattering them
on the table.
I began to think that the owner would require the casket
and the jewels again at my hand; and if I suffered them
to be scattered, I could never place them in their places
in the casket again as before, and felt I should never be
able to meet the accountability, for it would be immense.
I then began to plead with the people not to handle them,
nor to take them out of the casket; but the more I pleaded,
the more they scattered; and now they seemed to scatter
them all over the room, on the floor and on every piece of
furniture in the room.
I then saw that among the genuine jewels and coin they
had scattered an innumerable quantity of spurious [fake]
jewels and counterfeit coin. I was highly incensed at their
base conduct and ingratitude, and reproved and reproached
them for it; but the more I reproved, the more they scattered
the spurious jewels and false coin among the genuine.
I then became vexed in my physical soul and began to use
physical force to push them out of the room; but while I
was pushing out one, three more would enter and bring
in dirt and shavings and sand and all manner of rubbish,
until they covered every one of the true jewels, diamonds,
and coins, which were all excluded from sight. They also
tore in pieces my casket and scattered it among the rubbish.
I thought no man regarded my sorrow or my anger. I
became wholly discouraged and disheartened, and sat down

3While I was thus weeping and mourning for my great loss
and accountability, I remembered God, and earnestly
prayed that He would send me help.
Immediately the door opened, and a man entered the room,
when the people all left it; and he, having a dirt brush in
his hand, opened the windows, and began to brush the dirt
and rubbish from the room.
I cried to him to forbear, for there were some precious
jewels scattered among the rubbish.
He told me to “fear not,” for he would “take care of them.”
Then, while he brushed the dirt and rubbish, false jewels
and counterfeit coin, all rose and went out of the window
like a cloud, and the wind carried them away. In the
bustle I closed my eyes for a moment; when I opened
them, the rubbish was all gone. The precious jewels, the
diamonds, the gold and silver coins, lay scattered in pro-

• • •
Chapter 155

Interpretation

1us by God’s great Messengers:
Thus We…bestow upon thee the gems of divine wisdom,
that haply thou mayest soar on the wings of renunciation
to those heights that are veiled from the eyes of men.2
He [Bahá’u’lláh] it is Who hath laid bare before you the
hidden and treasured Gem, were ye to seek it.3 Bahá’u’lláh
At the beginning, the gems are pure and radiant, but as time
goes on people begin to tamper with them. They “trouble
the jewels,” take them out of their context, conceal them
under their illusions, scatter them, and abuse them for their

2denominations, and sects, and then package them, and present
them as genuine. This desire to abuse the divine truths entrusted
to the human hand is so powerful and pervasive that no one
can stop it. William Miller felt frustrated at his inability to
protect the jewels. We can see a clear example of this in his
life. He was the first to discover and proclaim the date of
Christ’s return. After the Great Disappointment, although
perplexed and disillusioned, he remained loyal to the Word
of God. He continued to believe in the accuracy of his find-
ings, supported by so much evidence that no one could refute
them. But those around him distorted his findings by saying
that the great event associated with 1844 happened in heaven.
The purity of the truth he had discovered was lost under the
dust of selfish ends, theological assumptions, arguments,
and illusions. Despite his strenuous efforts, Miller failed to
keep people on course. In the end, he experienced rejection
and ridicule. He was abandoned by the very people who had
followed him. He became an outcast.
A true seeker who carries enough "oil" of wisdom (Matthew
25:1-13) can always find his Beloved. He can always recognize
the gems of true knowledge. He can always see the difference
between the genuine and the fictitious:
Each and every thing, however small, would be to him a
revelation, leading him to his Beloved, the Object of his
quest. So great shall be the discernment of this seeker that
he will discriminate between truth and falsehood, even as
he doth distinguish the sun from shadow. If in the uttermost
corners of the East the sweet savors of God be wafted, he
will assuredly recognize and inhale their fragrance, even
though he be dwelling in the uttermost ends of the West.
He will, likewise, clearly distinguish all the signs of God—
His wondrous utterances, His great works, and mighty
deeds—from the doings, the words and ways of men, even
as the jeweler who knoweth the gem from the stone

3God is patient. He always gives people a chance. But at the
precise moment, He steps in, scatters the forces of darkness,
removes the rubbish, gathers His gold, jewels, and pearls
together, and allows them once again to glitter in the utmost
glory and splendor. The parable of the vineyard (Matthew
21:33-41) proclaims this same divine drama. Isaiah summarizes
the same message:
On that day sing to the pleasant vineyard, I the Lord am
its keeper, moment by moment I water it for fear its green
leaves fail. Night and day I tend it… Isaiah 27:2-3 NEB

4Jesus predicted that He would come on the clouds. In his
dream, William Miller saw all the counterfeit jewels and
coins rise like a cloud and disappear. As Bahá’u’lláh teaches,
the clouds on which Christ was promised to ride are super-
stitions, false dogmas, beliefs, illusions, and assumptions that
prevent the peoples of the earth from beholding the Glory of
God. What an astonishing dream! At the end, Miller was
blessed with seeing a glimpse of the glorious Kingdom that
God has promised to humankind:
He then placed on the table a casket, much larger and more
beautiful than the former, and gathered up the jewels, the
diamonds, the coins, by the handful, and cast them into the
casket, till not one was left, although some of the diamonds
were not bigger than the point of a pin.
He then called upon me to “come and see.”
I looked into the casket, but my eyes were dazzled with
the sight. They shone with ten times their former glory.
I thought they had been scoured in the sand by the feet of
those wicked persons who had scattered and trod them in
the dust. They were arranged in beautiful order in the
casket, every one in its place, without any visible pains
of the man who cast them in. I shouted with very joy…

5For these are the words of the Lord of Hosts…I will shake
heaven and earth, sea and land, I will shake all nations;
the treasure of all nations shall come hither, and I will
fill this house with glory; so says the Lord of Hosts, and
the glory of this latter house shall surpass the glory of
the former, says the Lord of Hosts. In this place will I
grant prosperity and peace. This is the very word of the
Lord of Hosts. Haggai 2:6-9 NEB
Should the greatness of this Day be revealed in its fullness,
every man would forsake a myriad lives in his longing to
partake, though it be for one moment, of its great glory—
how much more this world and its corruptible treasures!
It [the City of God] shone with the glory of God, and its
brilliance was like that of a very precious jewel, like a
jasper, clear as crystal. Revelation 21:11 NIV
The moon will shine like the sun, and the sunlight will be
seven times brighter, like the light of seven full days…
Isaiah 30:26 NIV
The moon shall grow pale and the sun hide its face in
shame; for the Lord of Hosts has become king.
Isaiah 24:23 NEB
Great, immeasurably great is this Cause! Mighty, incon-
ceivably mighty is this Day! Blessed indeed is the man
that hath forsaken all things, and fastened his eyes upon
Him Whose face hath shed illumination upon all who
are in the heavens and all who are on the earth.6

• • •
Chapter 156

Part Ii A Mong The Most Critical Instructions Jesus Gave About His Return Were These:

Appendix Iii

I Shall Come Upon You
Like A Thief

1Revelation 3:3 NEB

1• I shall come upon you like a thief!
• Watch!
In Chapter 1 we examined several of Jesus’ parables to show
that “Watch!” means “Search!” or “Investigate!” Similarly in
Chapter 2 we studied several biblical references to indicate
that coming “like a thief ” means coming secretly.

2460 I Shall Come Again

3How do Christian writers and scholars interpret the first
instruction, which compares Jesus’ coming to that of a thief ?
Many of them say that the intent of the prophecy is not to
say that Christ comes secretly, but rather to say that He comes
suddenly. They say this because other prophecies point to His
sudden return. How do they interpret the second instruction
“Watch!”? They simply say it means to be ready.
What those Christian interpreters accomplish is this: they
eliminate the commandment “Watch!” as a special instruc-
tion. They make it subordinate to the general command “Be
ready!” They do the same with “I shall come upon you like
a thief.” They eliminate it as a special sign and make it
subordinate to the word “suddenly.” They act as if “Watch!”
and “like a thief in the night” do not add anything new to
other signs and commandments. They simply ignore the unique
purpose for which they were given.
Other Christian writers and scholars admit that “Watch!”
means “ Investigate! ” For instance, a widely distributed
Christian magazine explains that the command to “Watch!”
means to keep up with the news, with what is happening
around the world. Then it adds that one way this can be done
is to read that magazine. Unfortunately, the magazine has
failed to inform its readers of the news of the coming of the
Báb and Bahá’u’lláh.
Similarly in recent times some Christian writers and scholars
have accepted the idea that Christ will initially return in
secret. This may eventually open the door to many seekers
of truth to investigate the Bahá’í message. The first obstacle
for many Christians in testing Bahá’u’lláh’s Revelation is
their expectation that there will be a display of great power
and glory at the very outset of the advent. It should be noted
that those who accept the initial secret coming of Christ still
insist that Christ will make a visible and dramatic descent
from heaven at a later date. Will their position on this issue
also eventually change?

4Appendix III: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

5The following statement from Dr. Ray Stedman offers a
rationale behind his belief in the initial secret coming of
Christ:
A key to understanding the teaching of the New Testament
on this subject is the Greek word parousia. This word is
commonly translated “coming,” which in the mind of the
reader projects the vision of the single dramatic appearance
described above. But parousia should properly be translated
“presence.” This is the meaning given first by both Thayer
and Arndt and Gingrich lexicons and includes the idea of
an entrance, a consequent duration, and either an exit or
a continued presence. It is not, therefore, a single event
( /), but a continuation (| |) of unspecified duration.
This meaning is the only way to make sense of Jesus’
revelation in Matthew 24 of His return to earth in the last
days. There He describes a coming in power and glory
immediately following the terrible time of trouble that He
calls “the great tribulation” and the darkening of the sun
and moon and the falling of the stars from heaven (Matt.
24:28-30). But it would be impossible for such a coming
to take anyone by surprise who knew of our Lord’s
description. For in the same chapter Jesus speaks of His
coming as unexpected and sudden as the flood came
upon the people of Noah’s day; and He likens it to a
thief creeping into a household at night, without warn-
ing, and surreptitiously removing its treasure (vv. 36-44).
Yet how could His coming be both unexpected and
preceded by such cosmic events of dramatic character?
[Emphasis added.]
The only answer is that one passage describes His initial,
totally unheralded and unexpected appearing while the other
describes the disclosure of His presence by a dramatic
display of power and glory…
…Thus His initial, thieflike coming, His continued presence
behind the scenes on earth, and His final revelation in power
would all be covered by the term parousia.1

6462 I Shall Come Again

7Many of those who believe in the initial secret coming of
Christ, also believe that during His secret presence He will
start to take the faithful believers secretly to Himself, one or
a few at a time. They call this “the rapture,” which literally
means “ to snatch away.” This idea is popular and has many
supporters.
This is how a Christian source describes the rapture:
According to this belief, Jesus will return to this earth in
two phases. First, He will return secretly to whisk away
all true Christians to heaven to protect them from the time
of “great tribulation” Jesus foretold. Therefore, it is be-
lieved that the Church will be protected not on this earth,
but up in heaven. The second phase is believed to be His
“public” coming, at which time all will be able to see and
hear Him.2
Some Christian writers have portrayed the rapture in graphic
and dramatic terms. Here is a passage from Dr. Ivor Powell,
a believer in bodily rapture:
I shall always remember the woman who came to me at
the end of a meeting in California. She said, “I hope the
Lord will not return when my husband is coming across
the Atlantic with his passengers. He is a pilot with United
Airlines. He is a Christian, and furthermore, his co-pilot
is also a Christian. What would happen to that plane load
of people if the pilot and his co-pilot were suddenly
removed?” I could only reply, “Friend, that plane would
crash!” Probably hundreds of planes will crash, hundreds
of thousands of automobiles will crash, railway trains will
crash, and from all parts of the world will come news
of unprecedented disaster. Every radio and television
program, every newspaper, will tell stories of strange
events which will have taken place all over the earth.3
Strict literalism has led Dr. Powell and many other Christians
to expect such strange and dramatic events. They fail to
recognize that spectacular dramas do not serve a thief ’s

8Appendix III: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

9purpose. The heavenly thief is interested in His servants’
inner essence: their spirits. If He can quietly lift their immortal
spirits, why should He concern Himself with their perishable
bodies?
The rapture is spiritual. It relates to the hearts and souls
of humankind. As soon as the awakened ones acknowledge
their Lord, they rise to a new realm invisible to others. We
know too well that a married couple may live in the same
house for fifty years yet fail to discern each other’s private
invisible world.
Moreover, we know the heavenly thief is extremely kind and
gentle. He respects people’s right of freedom. He would
never disturb a sleeper’s sweet dreams—one who prefers rest
over rapture. His goal is to be seen by “every eye,” by every
householder who stands at the door praying and watching
for his heavenly thief:
Two men will be in the field; one will be taken and the
other left. Two women will be grinding with a hand mill;
one will be taken and the other left. Therefore keep
watch… Matthew 24:40-42 NIV

10If “watch” means “look carefully,” what benefit can come
from seeing people raptured (lifted to heaven)? Only a
spiritual rapture requires watching or investigating.
The thief’s peerless skill lies in this: to rapture the ripe spirits
before the gazing eyes of others without being detected. He
does His work so efficiently that even those who live and
work together in the same field fail to discern each other’s
disappearance, fail to detect the thief’s marvelous workings.
Aside from taking the wakeful servants to Himself, the thief
accomplishes still another goal. He tries to awaken His sleep-
ing servants by gently calling them. If they refuse to rise and
accompany Him, He takes their spiritual possessions away
from them. The parable of the talents makes this quite clear.

11464 I Shall Come Again

12These two verses are quite instructive:
On that day no one who is on the roof of his house, with
his goods inside, should go down to get them…I tell you,
on that night two people will be in one bed; one will be
taken and the other left [emphasis added].
Luke 17:31, 34 NIV
What does Jesus mean by “that day,” and what does He
mean by “that night”? He uses “the day” in relation to the
urgency of the news of His return and the need for immediate
action. He applies “the night” to the secret “rapture” of the
believers’ hearts and souls in the dark of confusion, fear, and
the stress and distress of living.
Let us explore the sign “like a thief ” and the commandment
“Watch!” a little further. Among the most critical signs Jesus
gave concerning His return were that He would return
suddenly and secretly. And in relation to each of those signs
He gave special instructions or commandments. In relation
to the first sign (coming suddenly) He said “Be prepared!”
According to the dictionary, the word “suddenly” means
“quickly and without warning.” Preparation is especially
required when an event happens without prior notice. When
people are asked to expect a sudden event, they cannot
excuse themselves at any given time by saying “I don’t need
to be ready now. I will either know in advance to prepare
before the event, or I will do so after the event.” If a team
is told that they may be called at any time to play a game,
they cannot say, “We will prepare on the day of the game.”
In relation to the second sign (coming like a thief in the
night), Jesus gave the commandment: “Watch!” Watching is
required when an event can escape one’s attention. This is
how The American Heritage Dictionary defines “watch:” “to
look or observe attentively or carefully, be closely observant,
be on the look out or alert; be constantly observant or
vigilant, look at steadily, observe carefully; observe the
course of; keep up on or informed about…” For instance, to

13Appendix III: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

14a child we say, “When you cross the street watch for cars,
look both ways.” We say this because his attention span and
perception are limited. We remind him that careful and close
observation is essential. It would seem strange indeed if on
a sunny day and at noon we asked someone to watch for the
sun! Similarly, we say, “Watch for the news of…” Can a
person remain watchful but uninformed? The following
verses clarify the meaning of “Watch:”
…unto them that look for him shall he appear the second
time… Hebrews 9:28
…be ye yourselves like unto men looking for their Lord…
Luke 12:36 ARV
…Christ…will appear a second time…to those who are
watching for him. Hebrews 9:28 NEB
Once people are asked to “Watch!” they cannot abandon their
responsibility to investigate the truth. They cannot say, “When
Jesus comes I will know.” Because a clearly visible event
does not require watching.
Let us explore the analogy of the thief further. The most
critical question we must ask is this: what is the goal of a
thief ? To carry away precious goods without being detected.
To attain that goal the thief devises and follows a special
strategy. He knows he must come:
• Suddenly (without warning)
• Quietly
• At a time when people do not expect him
• In the darkness of the night
The thief may also wish to wear dark clothes and a mask,
and even carry some electronic devices. These are all part of
the strategy. But a thief does not come just for the sake of
executing a strategy. He comes to execute a goal, to accom-
plish an objective. The means he uses are to help him attain

15466 I Shall Come Again

16that objective. Aside from that, the means have no signifi-
cance. The coming of a thief must always be in harmony
with his goal.
A thief ’s sole purpose is to steal precious property, and his
only concern is to observe secrecy. Secrecy is so critical to
him that he even kills and destroys to conceal the evidence.
The thief comes only to steal and kill and destroy…
John 10:10 NIV
Let us review this brief quotation from Dr. Stedman:
He [Jesus] likens it [His coming] to a thief creeping into
a household at night, without warning [unexpectedly], and
surreptitiously [secretly], removing its treasures (Matt.
24:36-44).
What would a thief gain if he came suddenly or in any other
way but failed to carry away precious goods? Therefore,
the interpretation that “coming like a thief ” simply means
“suddenly” carries these weaknesses:
• It disregards the objective of the thief, it puts the strategy
in place of the goal.
• It replaces a thief ’s all-inclusive strategy with a partial
strategy.
It is obvious that if a thief announces his coming he cannot
observe secrecy. But to remain secret he must do more than
that. All the necessary things he must do are covered by the
word secrecy but not suddenness.
Furthermore, the words “night” and “awake” in these two
prophecies point clearly to secrecy:
The day of the Lord will come like a thief in the night..
I Thessalonians 5:2 NIV

17Behold, I come like a thief! Blessed is he who stays
awake… Revelation 16:15 NIV

18Appendix III: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

19A thief can choose to come suddenly, but not secretly,
before the wakeful and astonished eyes of the householder,
and take everything by force. But this is not what Jesus and
Paul imply. Paul uses “night” to suggest “concealment and
secrecy,” and Jesus uses “awake” to imply a state of con-
sciousness required to counteract the strategy of secrecy. Both
words show that the “householder” can indeed miss the thief
and never be aware of His parousia (presence).
Paul addressed these words to the enlightened believers:
…you know perfectly well that the Day of the Lord comes
like a thief in the night…But you, my friends, are not in
the dark, that the day should overtake you like a thief.
You are all children of light, children of day. We do not
belong to night or darkness, and we must not sleep like
the rest, but keep awake and sober. Sleepers sleep at
night, and drunkards are drunk at night, but we, who
belong to daylight, must keep sober…
I Thessalonians 5:2-8 NEB

20Paul’s words clearly show that recognition of the promised
Redeemer requires enlightenment. If a person is deprived of
that, he cannot recognize the Lord. Paul’s words contradict
the literal coming of Jesus from the sky. Who are the
“children of light”? They are the enlightened people. Only
they see the thief. Who are the “sleepers”? The unenlightened
people. Why do the “sleepers” remain unaware? Why do they
miss the thief ? Clearly, their handicap is spiritual, not physi-
cal, because both the enlightened and the unenlightened have
physical eyes.
If the Master came suddenly from the sky, what would be
the purpose of wakefulness? All people—whether they are
physically or spiritually asleep—would know. In fact, the open
and sudden descent of Christ from the sky would require
less wakefulness than the perception of any other event in
history.

21468 I Shall Come Again

22Jesus points out that the obstacles that prevent people from
recognizing Him are spiritual:
Be careful, or your hearts will be weighed down with
dissipation, drunkenness and the anxieties of life, and that
day will close on you unexpectedly like a trap…Be always
on the watch, and pray that you may be able to escape
all that is about to happen, and that you may be able to
stand before the Son of Man. Luke 21:34-36 NIV
What does Jesus mean by saying “your hearts will be weighed
down with drunkenness”? Being “drunk” resembles being
“asleep.” Both states imply spiritual unawareness. How can
one “escape all these things”? How can one stay out of the
snare of unawareness, complacency, and unconcern, or the
terrible trap of the denial of the Lord and its everlasting con-
sequences? The remedy, as Jesus instructs, is this:
• Keep your hearts sober
• Never allow the worries and the anxieties of life to entrap
you
• Never allow the worldly pleasures (dissipation) to entrap
you
• Always watch or investigate
• And pray
This emphasis on wakefulness would suggest a secrecy that
requires investigation. The following verses further encourage
alertness and action:
Wake up! Strengthen what remains and is about to die…
But if you do not wake up, I will come like a thief
[emphasis added]… Revelation 3:2-3 NIV
Arise…your light has come, and the glory of the Lord rises
upon you. See, darkness covers the earth and thick dark-
ness is over the peoples [emphasis added]…
Isaiah 60:1-2 NIV

23Appendix III: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

24Wake up, you drunkards, and lament your fate [emphasis
added]… Joel 1:5 NEB
The following prophecy, which pertains to our time, clearly
expresses the meaning of staying asleep:
The Lord has brought over you a deep sleep…For you
this whole vision is nothing but words sealed in a scroll
[emphasis added]. Isaiah 29:10-11 NIV
All these instructions indicate that the coming of the Lord
and the day of the Lord are like the coming of a thief in the
night. The whole Gospel confirms this interpretation. When
Jesus compared His second coming and His presence
(parousia) among the people of our time to the coming and
presence of Noah and Lot among the ancient people, what
did He intend to convey? If Christ came from the sky, both
His coming and presence among us would be in stark
contrast to the coming and presence of Noah and Lot among
ancient people. Indeed the station of both Noah and Lot
were veiled to most of the people of their time. Only the
enlightened people “saw” them. Only those who had “eyes”
discerned their glory.
…without holiness no one will see the Lord.
Hebrews 12:14 NIV
I counsel you to buy from me…salve to put on your eyes,
so you can see. Revelation 3:18 NIV
The following verses indicate that recognizing Christ in
the second advent, as in the first, is private and personal. It
does not come from a public display of glory. The Master
“knocks,” if the host opens his heart, then He comes in:
Here I am! I stand at the door and knock. If anyone hears
my voice and opens the door, I will come in and eat with
him, and he with me. Revelation 3:20 NIV
The Master shows Himself only to those who love Him and
obey Him:

25470 I Shall Come Again

26I will not leave you as orphans; I will come to you…
Whoever has my commands and obeys them…I…will…
show myself to him. John 14:18, 21 NIV
Showing must be spiritual, because all people—both the
faithful and the unfaithful—have physical eyes, but only those
who truly love their Master and obey Him have spiritual
eyes. Only they see Him. Only those who have spiritual hear-
ing will hear the knocking. Only they will open their hearts.
The people walking in darkness have seen a great light…
For to us a child is born…he will be called…Prince of
Peace… Isaiah 9:2, 6 NIV
Who will see the light? Those who walk and seek in the dark
of unbelief. What light do they see? Spiritual. With what
eyes? Spiritual.
As we noted in Chapters 1 and 2, Jesus recounted many
parables to clarify the meaning of “Watch!” and “thief in
the night.” Who were the five maidens who entered the
banquet of the Kingdom? They were the enlightened ones.
The Bridegroom appeared and left while other people remained
unaware. The parable clearly points to secrecy.
Jesus also used the parable of the talents. Who received the
most severe punishment from the Master? The fearful servant
who failed to invest his talents, who said “I was afraid” (Matt.
25:25 NIV). The parables and prophecies of Jesus clearly point
to His knowledge of the prevailing fear among His followers
at the time of His return. We see the full realization of that
knowledge in the response of many Christians to the Message
of Bahá’u’lláh.
In summary, Jesus issued several simple instructions to His
faithful followers. One of them was that “I will come sud-
denly.” We can read all these messages in that instruction:
Always be ready in spirit and in deed, be just and humble,
have an open heart and mind. Spiritual receptivity cannot be
gained on short notice; it is a lifelong endeavor. Someday

27Appendix III: I Shall Come Upon You Like a Thief

28you may stand before Me. When that day dawns, I will
appear suddenly on the horizon of your soul. Do not allow
yourself to be entangled in the mesh of tradition, fantasy, and
the pressures of daily living.
Another clue Jesus gave was that “I will come secretly.” This
clue implies that “To find Me you must search, inquire, and
investigate. God does not wish to impose the gift of Himself
on unwilling, complacent, ungrateful, and apathetic people.”
Independent investigation of truth (Watch!) is the master key
that opens all the treasuries of heaven. It is the seed from
which everything good and noble grows and multiplies; it
is the essence of wisdom, the wellspring of knowledge.
The essence of all that We have revealed for thee is
Justice, is for man to free himself from idle fancy and
imitation, discern with the eye of oneness His glorious
handiwork, and look into all things with a searching
eye.4 Bahá’u’lláh

• • •
Chapter 157

References Foreword

11. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Arabic, No. 8.
2. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 66.
3. Taherzadeh, Adib. The Revelation of Bahá’u’lláh, Oxford: George
Ronald, 1988, vol. 4, p. 236.
4. Selections from the Writings of ‘Abdu’l-Bahá, p. 12.
5. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p. 46.
6. The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 94.
7. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 16.
8. The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 63.

• • •
Chapter 158

He Who Overcomes

11. Living By the Book, CBN Center, Virginia Beach, Virginia, p. 2.
2. The Plain Truth, August 1991, pp. 9-10
3. Pratney, Winkie and Barry Chant. The Return, Chichester: Sovereign
World, 1988, pp. 242-243.

2474 I Shall Come Again

34. Ibid., p. 243.
5. The Book of Certitude, p. 3.
6. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, persian, No. 82.
7. Adler, Ronald and Neil Towne. Looking Out Looking In, New York:
Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1987, p. 96.
8. The Book of Certitude, pp. 3-4.
9. Dyer, Wayne. You’ll See It When You Believe It, New York: Avon
Books, 1983, pp. 167-168.
10. Ibid., pp. 164-165.
11. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p. 139.
12. The Book of Certitude, p. 3.
13. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 134.
14. The Book of Certitude, p. 89.

4Chapter
1. Stedman, Ray. What’s This World Coming To? Ventura: Regal Books,
1986, pp. 120-167.
2. Unger, Merrill F. Unger’s Bible Dictionary, Chicago: Moody Press,
1985, p. 632.
3. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 143.
4. Haynes, Carlyle B. Our Lord’s Return, Nashville: Southern
Publishing Association, 1964, p. 6.
5. Achtemeier, Paul J. (ed.). Harper’s Bible Dictionary, San Francisco:
Harper and Row, 1985, p. 751.
6. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 16.
7. MacPherson, Dave. The Great Rapture Hoax, Flecher, N.C.: New
Puritan Library, 1983, pp. 125-127.
8. Ibid., p. 57.

5Chapter
1. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 216.
2. Stedman, Ray C. Waiting for the Second Coming, Grand Rapids:
Discovery House, 1990, pp. 84-85.
3. Ibid., pp. 91-92.
4. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 27.
5. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 186.
6. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 15.

6References

77. The analogy is adopted from the Words of Bahá’u’lláh.
8. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 86.
9. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 238.
10. Ibid., pp. 240-241.
11. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 112.
12. The Book of Certitude, p. 177.
13. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 112.
14. The Book of Certitude, p. 142.
15. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 75.
16. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 22.
17. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Persian, No. 41.
18. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 197.
19. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 68.
20. The Book of Certitude, p. 53.
21. The analogy is adopted from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh.
22. The Book of Certitude, p. 8.
23. Ibid., pp. 195-196.
24. The Seven Valleys and the Four Valleys, p. 7.
25. Stedman, Ray. What’s This World Coming To? Ventura: Regal
Books, 1986, pp. 54-56.
26. The Kitáb-i-Aqdas, p. 49.
27. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 47.
28. The Kitáb-i-Aqdas, p. 57.
29. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 155.
30. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Arabic, No. 6.
31. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 156.
32. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p. 25.
33. The Seven Valleys and the Four Valleys, p. 9.
34. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 156.

8Chapter
1. Lindsell, Harold. God’s Incomparable Word, Minneapolis: World
Wide Publications, 1977, p. 5.
2. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 218.
3. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 106.
4. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 109.

9476 I Shall Come Again

105. Ibid., p. 134.
6. Kennedy, James. Why I Believe, Waco: Word Books, 1980, p. 14.
7. Ibid., p. 14.
8. Chant, Barry, and Winkie Pratney. The Return, Chichester: Sovereign
World, 1978, p. 101.
9. Paris Talks, p. 101.
10. Living By the Book, CBN Center, Virginia Beach, Virginia,
23463.
11. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 75.
12. Bahá’í Prayers, Wilmette, Illinois: Bahá’í Publishing Trust, 1982,
p. 19.
13. Ibid., p. 22.
14. Ibid., p. 55.

11Chapter
1. White, John Wesley. Re-entry, Minneapolis: World Wide
Publications, 1971, p. 14.
2. Ibid., p. 8.
3. The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 27.
4. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 12.
5. Shoghi Effendi. The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh, Wilmette: Bahá’í
Publishing Trust, 1980, p. 104.
6. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 45.
7. Smith, Peter. In Iran, Los Angeles: Kalimát Press, 1986, p. 163.
8. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, pp. 12-13.
9. The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh to the Kings and Leaders of the
World, Haifa: Universal House of Justice, 1967.
10. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 11.
11. Ibid., p. 11.
12. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 16.
13. Ibid., p. 136.
14. Ibid., pp. 10-11.
15. Ibid., p. 11.
16. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, pp. 9-10.
17. Lockyer, Herbert Jr. (ed.). Nelson’s Illustrated Bible Dictionary,
New York: Thomas Nelson Publishers, 1986, p. 66.
18. Tenney, Merrill C. (ed.). The Zondervan Pictorial Bible Dictio-
nary, Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1977, p. 466.

12References

1319. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, pp. 235-236.
20. The Book of Certitude, p. 211.
21. Ibid., p. 3.
22. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 143.
23. Ibid., p. 143.
24. The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 91.
25. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, pp. 85-86.
26. Ibid., p. 57.
27. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, pp. 63-64.
28. The Promulgation of Universal Peace, p. 86.
29. The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 96.
30. Some Answered Questions, p. 121.
31. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 138.
32. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 7.
33. You will find some of these quotations and many others in The
Bahá’í World, Volumes viii and ix.

14Chapter
1. Adler, Ronald, and Neil Towne, Looking Out Looking In, New York:
Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1987, p. 152.
2. Ibid., p. 152.
3. Pratney, Winkie and Barry Chant. The Return, Chichester: Sovereign
World, 1988, p. 135.
4. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Arabic, No. 56.
5. The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 89.
6. The Kitáb-i-Aqdas, p. 49.
7. The Dawn-Breakers, New York: Bahá’í Publishing Committee,
1953, p. 608.
8. The Kitáb-i-Aqdas, p. 64.
9. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 169.
10. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 182.
11. Ibid., p. 11.
12. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 36.
13. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 107.
14. Shoghi Effendi. The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh, Wilmette:
Bahá’í Publishing Trust, 1980, p. 105.
15. The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 27.

15478 I Shall Come Again

1616. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 100.
17. Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh, p. 278.
18. The Book of Certitude, p. 192.
19. Ibid., pp. 14-15.
20. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 16.
21. Ibid., p. 169.
22. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 16.
23. Ibid., pp. 16-17.
24. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 213.
25. Biederwolf, William E . The Second Coming, Bible Commentary,
Grand Rapids, Michigan: Baker Book House, 1985, p. 321.
26. Ibid., p. 321.
27. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 17.
28. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 248.
29. Ibid., p. 313.
30. The Book of Certitude, p. 60.
31. Graham, Billy. World Aflame, Minneapolis: The Billy Graham
Evangelical Association, 1965, p. 211.
32. Appreciations of the Bahá’í Faith, Wilmette: Bahá’í Publishing
Committee, 1947, pp. 9-10.
33. Esslemont, J. E. Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era, Wilmette: Bahá’í
Publishing Trust, 1980, p. 39.
34. The Book of Certitude, p. 131.
35. Kennedy, D. James. Why I Believe in Christianity, Fort Lauder-
dale: Coral Ridge Ministries, 1977, p. 2.
36. Moayyad, Heshmat (editor). The Bahá’í Faith and Islam, Canada:
Association for Bahá’í Studies, 1990, p. vii.
37. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 203.
38. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 12.
39. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 85.
40. Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh, p. 154.
41. Pratney, Winkie, and Barry Chant. op. cit., pp. 241-242.
42. Sper David (ed.). Knowing God Through the New Testament,
Grand Rapids: Thomas Nelson, Inc., 1982, p. 23.
43. Robertson, Norman K. Understanding End Time Prophecy,
Chichester, England: Sovereign World Ltd., 1983, p. 95.
44. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p. 25.

17References

1845. Pratney, Winkie, and Barry Chant. op. cit., p. 135.
46. Ibid., p. 131.

19Chapter
1. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 244.
2. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Arabic, No. 56.
3. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 44.
4. Ibid., p. 41.
5. Ibid., p. 255.
6. Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh, p. 189.
7. Dyer, Wayne W. You’ll See It When You Believe It, New York: Avon
Books, 1989, p. 64.
8. Vandeman, George. Winds on a Leash, Thousand Oak: it is written,
pp. 12-13.
9. The Plain Truth, April 1991, p. 7.
10. Pratney, Winkie, and Barry Chant. The Return, Chichester: Sov-
ereign World, 1988, p. 116.
11. Church J. R. Hidden Prophecies in the Psalms, Oklahoma City:
Prophecy Publications, 1986, p. 206.
12. Berns, Roberta M. Child, Family, Community, New York: Holt,
Rinehart and Winston, 1985, p. 85.
13. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 90.
14. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 43.
15. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 10.
16. Ibid., p. 11.
17. Ibid., p. 14.
18. The Book of Certitude, p. 31.
19. White, John Wesley. Re-entry, Minneapolis: World Wide Publica-
tions, 1971, p. 110.
20. Ibid., p. 113.
21. Ibid., p. 117.
22. Ibid., p. 117.
23. The Plain Truth, April 1991, p. 6.
24. Armstrong, H.W. What Is the True Gospel? Worldwide Church
of God, 1972, p. 1.
25. Pratney, Winkie, and Barry Chant. op. cit., p. 127.
26. Graham, Billy. Till Armageddon, Minneapolis: World Wide,
1981, p. 7.

20480 I Shall Come Again

2127. Griffin, Mary, and Carol Felsenthal. A Cry for Help, Garden
City: Doubleday and Company, Inc., 1983, p. 11.
28. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, pp. 39-40.
29. Dadd, Debra Lynn. Let’s Live, “How the Global Environment
Affects Our Health,” April 1991, pp. 18-20.
30. Fox, Matthew. The Cosmic Coming of Christ, New York: Harper
& Roe, p. 15.
31. Carson, Robert, James Butcher, and James Coleman. Abnormal
Psychology and Modern Life, Glenview: Scott, Foresman and
Company, 1988, p. 4.
32. De Haan, Martin. “Things are not as they seem,” Radio Bible
Class News, October 1989.
33. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 213.
34. The Book of Certitude, pp. 30-31.
35. Carson, Robert, James Butcher, and James Coleman. op. cit., p. 4.

22Chapter
1. Vandeman, George E. Showdown at Armageddon, Boise: Pacific
Press Publishing Association, 1987, p. 93.
2. Ibid., p. 75.
3. The Plain Truth, March 1991, p. 1.
4. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Arabic, No. 56.
5. The Book of Certitude, pp. 3-4.
6. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 198.
7. Bahá’í World Faith, p. 254.
8. Peale, Norman Vincent. Plus, April 1988, vol. 39, no. 3 (Part I), pp.
6-7.
9. Vandeman, George, op. cit., p. 66.
10. Haynes, Carlyle B. Our Lord’s Return, Nashville: Southern Pub-
lishing Association, 1964, pp. 100-101.
11. Stedman, Ray C. Waiting for the Second Coming, Grand Rapids:
Discovery House, 1990, p. 117.
12. Kennedy, James. Why I Believe, Waco: Word Books, 1980, p. 152.
13. McKeever, Jim. The Coming Climax of History, Medford: Omega
Publications, 1982, p. 274.
14. Stedman, Ray C. op. cit., p. 88.
15. The Book of Certitude, p. 34.
16. The Seven Valleys and the Four Valleys, p. 10.

23References

2417. The Book of Certitude, p. 20.
18. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 163.
19. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, pp. 78-79.
20. Lindsey, Hal. The Promise, New York: Bantam Books, 1984, p. 19.
21. Ibid., p. 19.
22. Ibid., pp. 19-20.
23. Ibid., p. 23.
24. Ibid., p. 26.
25. Himes, Joshua V. Views of the Prophecies and Prophetic Chro-
nology Selected from Manuscripts of William Miller, Boston:
Published by Joshua Himes, 1842, p. 288.
26. Ibid., p. 284.
27. Ibid., p. 284.
28. Ibid., p. 284.
29. McDowell, Josh. More than a Carpenter, Minneapolis: World
Wide Publications, 1977, p. 43.
30. Ibid., p. 43.
31. Himes, Joshua, op. cit., p. 284.

25Chapter
1. Gale, Robert. The Urgent Voice, Washington D.C.: Review and
Herald, 1975, p. 119.
2. Ibid., p. 49.
3. Ibid., p. 49.
4. I wish to acknowledge my debt to Dr. A. Misbáh for finding and
introducing this source to me.
5. Froom, Leroy. The Prophetic Faith of Our Fathers, Washington,
D.C.: Review and Herald, 1950, vol. 3, p. 12.
6. Ibid., p. 750.
7. Meister, Charles W. Year of the Lord, A.D. Eighteen Forty Four,
North Carolina: McFarland and Company, Inc., 1983, p. 17.
8. Clarke, Jerome. 1844, Tennessee: Southern Publishing Association,
1968.
9. Froom, Leroy. op. cit., vol. 3, p. 495.
10. Meister, Charles W. op. cit., p. 18.
11. Ibid., p. 17.
12. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 12.

26482 I Shall Come Again

2713. Ibid., p. 74.
14. Ibid., p. 73.
15. Froom, Leroy. op. cit., vol. 4, p. 474.
16. Meister, Charles W. op. cit., p. 20.
17. Ibid., p. 21.
18. Ibid., p. 22.
19. Gale, Robert. op. cit., p. 101.
20. Ibid., p. 121.
21. Ibid., p. 121.
22. Ibid., p. 50.
23. Ibid., p. 82.
24. Ibid., p. 88.
25. Ibid., pp. 114-115.
26. Ibid., p. 87.
27. Ibid., p. 122.
28. Froom, Leroy. op. cit., vol. 4, p. 855.
29. Gale, Robert. op. cit., p. 123.
30. Meister, Charles W. op. cit., p. 33.
31. Gale, Robert. op. cit., p. 123.
32. White, E . G. The Triumph of God’s Love, Washington, D.C.:
Review and Herald, 1957, p. 133.
33. Gale, Robert. op. cit., p. 133.
34. Vandeman, George. Winds on a Leash, Thousand Oaks: it is
written, p. 12.
35. White, E . G. The Great Controversy, California: Pacific Publish-
ing Association, 1971, p. 359.
36. Ibid., p. 359.
37. Meister, Charles W. op. cit., p. 35.
38. Froom, Leroy. op. cit., vol. 4, p. 858.
39. Lindsey, Hal. The Promise, New York: Bantam Books, 1984, pp.
79-80.
40. Stedman, Ray C. Waiting for the Second Coming, Grand Rapids:
Discovery House, 1990, p. 88.
41. Ibid., p. 88.
42. Vandeman, George. op. cit., p. 12.
43. Ibid., pp. 12-13.

28References

29Chapter
1. Guinness, Henry Gratten (Dr. and Mrs.). Light for the Last Days,
London: Marshall, Morgan & Scott LTD, 1934, p. 65.
2. Archer, Gleason L. Jr. Encyclopedia of Bible Difficulties, Grand
Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1982, p. 289.
3. Ibid., p. 291.
4. Himes, Joshua V. Views of the Prophecies and Prophetic Chronology
Selected from Manuscripts of William Miller, Boston: published by
Joshua Himes, 1842, p. 72.
5. Clarke, Adam. Clarke’s Commentary, New York: Abingdon Press,
1825, vol. 4, p. 602.
6. Archer, Gleason L. Jr. op. cit., p. 289.
7. Biederwolf, William E . The Second Coming, Bible Commentary,
Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1985, p. 217.
8. Froom, Leroy. The Prophetic Faith of Our Fathers, Washington,
D.C.: Review & Herald, 1946, vol. 3, p. 11.
9. Ibid., p. 11.
10. Smith, Uriah. Thoughts, Critical and Practical on the Book of
Daniel, Battle Creek: Seventh Day Adventist Publishing, 1881,
p. 247.
The dates of the four decrees according to Evidence that De-
mands a Verdict are: 539 B.C., 519 B.C., 457 B.C., and 444 B.C.
(Josh MacDowell, Volume I, 1986, p. 172).
11. Ibid., p. 105.
12. Smith, Uriah, op. cit., pp. 144-145.
13. Ibid., p. 273.
14. Vandeman, George E. Showdown at Armageddon, Boise: Pacific
Press Publishing Association, 1987, p. 22.
15. Baker, Kenneth and John Kohlenberger (editors). Zondervan NIV
Bible Commentary, Volume 1: The Old Testament, Grand Rapids,
MI: Zondervan Publishing House, 1994, p. 1389.
16. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 87.
17. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 328.
18. Some Answered Questions, p. 41.

30Chapter
1. Some Answered Questions, p. 42.

31484 I Shall Come Again

322. White, E . G. The Triumph of God’s Love, Washington, D.C.:
Review and Herald, 1957, p. 240.
3. Robertson, Norman K. Understanding End Time Prophecy,
Chichester: Sovereign World, 1989, pp. 205-206.
4. Lindsey, Hal. The Promise, New York: Bantam Books, 1984, pp.
144-145.
5. Smith, Uriah. Thoughts, Critical and Practical, on the Book of
Daniel, Battle Creek: Seventh-Day Adventist Publishing
Association, 1881, p. 242.
6. Froom, Leroy. The Prophetic Faith of Our Fathers, Washington,
D.C.: Review and Herald, 1950, vol. 3, p. 273.
7. Ibid., p. 749.
8. Himes, Joshua V. Views of the Prophecies and Prophetic Chronology
Selected from Manuscripts of William Miller, Boston: Published by
Joshua Himes, 1842, p. 62.
9. Ibid., p. 297.

33Chapter
1. Biederwolf, William E . The Second Coming, Bible Commentary,
Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1985, p. 275.
2. Kennedy, James. Why I Believe in Christ, Fort Lauderdale: Coral
Ridge Ministries, 1977, p. 1.
3. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Arabic, No. 1.
4. The Seven Valleys and the Four Valleys, p. 36.
5. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 53.
6. Esslemont, J. E . Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era, Wilmette: Bahá’í
Publishing Trust, 1980, p. 23.

34Chapter
1. “Herzel, Theodore.” Britannica CD. Version 97. Encyclopaedia
Britannica, Inc., 1997.
2. “Israel.” Britannica CD. Version 97. Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc.,
1997.
3. Noah, M. M. Discourse on the Restoration of the Jews, New York:
Harper & Brothers, 1845, pp. iii-v.
4. Ibid., p. vii.
5. Ibid., p. viii.
6. Ibid., pp. 9-10.

35References

367. Ibid., p. 11.
8. Ibid., pp. 37-38.
9. “Herzel, Theodore.” Britannica CD. Version 97. Encyclopaedia
Britannica, Inc., 1997.
10. “Oliphant, Laurence.” Britannica CD. Version 97. Encyclopaedia
Britannica, Inc., 1997.
11. “Herzl, Theodor.” Britannica CD. Version 97. Encyclopaedia
Britannica, Inc., 1997.
12. Robbins, Anthony. Giant Steps, New York: Simon & Schuster,
1994, p. 39.
13. “Turkey and Ancient Anatolia.” Britannica CD. Version 97.
Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc., 1997.
14. Sours, Michael. “The 1844 Ottoman Edict of Toleration in Bahá’í
Secondary Literature," The Journal of Bahá’í Studies, vol. 8, no.
3, March-June 1998, p. 70.
15. Ibid., p. 72.
I am indebted to George Townshend for recognizing the relevance of
this Edict to the Bahá’í Faith, to William Sears who did further re-
search on this topic, and to Michael Sours for introducing and
evaluating the Edict in The Journal of Bahá’í Studies.
16. Guinness, H. Gratten (Dr. & Mrs.). Light for the Last Days, Lon-
don: Marshall, Morgan & Scott Ltd., 1934, pp. 114-115.
17. Froom, Leroy. The Prophetic Faith of Our Fathers, Washington,
D.C.: Review and Herald, 1950, vol. 4, pp. 1194-1195.
18. Guinness, H. Gratten. op. cit. pp. 230-232.
19. Noah, M. M. Discourse on the Restoration of the Jews, New
York: Harper & Brothers, 1845, p. 33.
20. Ibid., pp. 51-52.
21. Reagan, David. The Master Plan, Eugene, OR: Harvest House
Publishers, 1993, p. 46.
22. Some Answered Questions, p. 65.
23. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 60.

37Chapter
1. Cobb, Stanwood. Islamic Contributions to Civilization, Washington,
D.C.: Avalon Press, 1965, p. 5.
2. Townshend, George. Christ and Bahá’u’lláh, London: George
Ronald, 1957, p. 40.

38486 I Shall Come Again

393. Ibid., p. 41.
4. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 69.
5. Parrinder, Geoffrey. Jesus in the Qur’án, New York: Barnes &
Noble Inc., 1965, p. 15.
6. Nuqabá’í, H. Bishárát-i-Kutub-i–Ásmání (Persian), Tihrán, Bahá’í
Era 124, p. 226.
7. Smith, Peter. In Irán, Los Angeles: Kalimát Press, 1986, p. 163.
8. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 101.
9. Taherzadeh, Adib. The Revelation of Bahá’u’lláh, Oxford: George
Ronald, 1988, vol. 4, p. 97.
10. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 9.
11. Parrinder, Geoffrey. op. cit., p. 15.
12. Lockyer, Herbert Sr. (ed.). Nelson’s Illustrated Bible Dictionary,
Nashville: Thomas Nelson Publishers, 1986, p. 683.
13. Unger, Merril F. Unger’s Bible Dictionary, Chicago: Moody
Press, 1985, p. 702.
14. Achtemeier, Paul J. (ed.). Harper’s Bible Dictionary, San Fran-
cisco: Harper & Row, 1985, p. 611.
15. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 197.
16. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 56.
17. Tenney, Merrill C. (ed.). The Zondervan Pictorial Bible Dictio-
nary, Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1977, p. 387.
18. Unger, Merrill F. op. cit., p. 450.
19. Morse, Joseph Laffan. Funk and Wagnalls Standard Reference
Encyclopedia, New York: Standard Reference Works Publishing
Company, Inc., 1960, vol. 14, p. 5043.
20. Achtemeier, Paul J. op. cit., p. 432.

40Chapter
1. Some Answered Questions, p. 49.
2. Suleimání, A. Masábíh-i-Hedáyat (Persian), vol. 7, p. 272.
3. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 60.
4. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 74.
5. Pratney, Winkie and Barry Chant. The Return, Chichester: Sovereign
World, 1988, p. 121.
6. Neff, Leroy. Where Are We Now In Prophecy? “Is There Any
Place of Safety?” Passadena: Worldwide church of God, p. 20.

41References

427. Schonfield, H. J. Readers’ A to Z Bible Companion, New York:
New American Library, 1967, pp. 94-95.
8. McClaim, A. J. Daniel’s Prophecy of Seventy Weeks, Grand Rapids:
Zondervan Publishing Co., 1940, p. 62.
9. Some Answered Questions, p. 51.
The center of the Umayyad’s dominion was Syria and Jerusalem,
“and it was here that the religion of God and the divine teachings
first disappeared.”
10. Pratney, Winkie. op. cit., p. 121.
11. Taherzadeh, A. The Revelation of Bahá’u’lláh, Oxford: George
Ronald, 1988, vol. 4, p. 210.
12. Some Answered Questions, p. 70.
13. Ibid., p. 70.
14. Lockyer, Herbert Sr. (ed.) Nelson’s Illustrated Bible Dictionary,
New York: Thomas Nelson Publishers, 1986, p. 477.
15. Some Answered Questions, p. 71.
16. Biederwolf, William E . The Second Coming, Bible Commentary,
Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1985, p. 6.
17. Ibid., p. 635.
18. Ibid., p. 635.
19. Froom, Leroy. The Prophetic Faith of Our Fathers, Washington,
D.C.: Review & Herald, 1950, vol. 3, p. 638.
20. The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 87.
21. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 60.
22. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, pp. 51-52.
23. Riggs, Robert. The Apocalypse Unsealed, New York: Philosophi-
cal Library, 1981.
See also New Keys to the Book of Revelation, by Ruth Moffet, 1971,
Bahá’í Publishing Trust, India.

43Chapter
1. Stedman, Ray C. Waiting for the Second Coming, Grand Rapids:
Discovery House, 1990, p. 78.
2. Toffler, Alvin. Future Shock, New York: Random House, 1970, p. 26.
3. Ibid., pp. 26-27.
4. Bernard, H. W. Child Development and Learning, Boston: Allyn
and Bacon, Inc. 1973, p. 4.

44488 I Shall Come Again

455. Meister, Charles W. Year of the Lord, North Carolina: McFarland
and Company, Inc., 1983, p. 12.
6. Kane, Joseph Nathan. Famous First Facts, New York: The H. W.
Wilson Company, 1981, p. 635.
7. Clarke, Jerome. 1844: Religious Movements, Tennessee: Southern
Publishing Association, 1968, pp. 388-389.
8. Ibid., p. ii.
9. Ibid., p. i.
10. Smith, Uriah. Thoughts, Critical and Practical, On the Book of
Daniel, Battle Creek: Seventh-Day Adventist Publishing Associa-
tion, 1881, pp. 388-389.
11. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 36.

46Chapter
1. Himes, Joshua V. Views of the Prophecies and Prophetic Chronology
Selected from Manuscripts of William Miller, Boston: published by
Joshua Himes, 1842, p. 16.
2. Ibid., p. 23.
3. Lindsey, Hal. The Promise, New York: Bantam Books, 1984, p. 179.
4. Himes, Joshua V. op. cit., p. 262.
5. Encyclopedia Judaica, 1971, vol. 11, p. 854.
6. Ibid., p. 854.
7. Smith, William. Smith’s Bible Dictionary, Old Tappan: Fleming H.
Revell Company, 1979, p. 371.
8. Himes, Joshua V. op. cit., p. 80.
9. Ibid., p. 45.
10. Achtemeier, Paul J. (ed.). Harper’s Bible Dictionary, San Fran-
cisco: Harper and Row, 1985, p. 599.
11. Encyclopedia Judaica, op. cit., pp. 852-854.
12. Froom, Leroy. The Prophetic Faith of Our Fathers, Washington,
D.C.: Review & Herald, 1946, vol. 4, p. 473.
13. Himes, Joshua, op. cit., p.
14. Ibid., p. 80.
15. Froom, Leroy. op. cit., vol. 3, p. 634.
16. Ibid., p. 633.
17. Nuqabá’í, H. Bishárát-i-Kutub-i-Ásmání (Persian), Tihrán, Bahá’í
Era 124, p. 281.

47References

4818. Guinness, Henry Gratten (Dr. & Mrs.). Light for the Last Days,
London: Marshall, Morgan & Scott LTD, 1934.
19. Ibid., p. 44.
20. Tenney, Merrill C. (ed.). The Zondervan Pictorial Bible Dictio-
nary, Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1977, p. 425.
21. Shoghi Effendi. The World Order of Bahá’u’lláh, Wilmette:
Bahá’í Publishing Trust, 1955, p. 105.

49Chapter
1. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p. 47.
2. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 36.
3. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 105. See also pp. 89,
107, and 118.
4. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p.
5. Ibid., p.141.
6. Ibid., p. 152.
7. Ibid., p. 142.
8. Shoghi Effendi. God Passes By, Wilmette, IL: Bahá’í Publishing
Trust. 1957, p. 29.
9. Ibid., p. 29.
10. Church, J. R. Hidden Prophecies in the Psalms, Oklahoma City:
Prophecy Publications, 1986, p. 247.
11. Biederwolf, William E . The Second Coming Bible Commentary,
Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1985, p. 346.
12. Ibid., p. 346.
13. Ibid., p. 346.
14. Ibid., p. 346.
15. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 56.
16. Biederwolf, William E . The Second Coming Bible Commentary,
Grand Rapids: Baker Book House, 1985, pp. 365-366.
17. Shoghi Effendi. God Passes By, Wilmette, IL: Bahá’í Publishing
Trust. 1957, pp. 5-6.
18. Ibid., pp. 6.
19. Nabíl. The Dawn-Breakers, New York: Bahá’í Publishing Com-
mittee, 1953, p. 65.
20. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p. 21.

50490 I Shall Come Again

5121. Nabíl. The Dawn-Breakers, New York: Bahá’í Publishing Com-
mittee, 1953, pp. 315-316.
22. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p. 29.
23. Ibid., pp. 42-43.
24. Ibid., p. 119.
25. Ibid., p. 46.
26. Vandeman, George. Winds on a Leash, pp. 12-13.
27. Stedman, Ray, C. Waiting for the Second Coming, Grand Rap-
ids: Discovery House, 1990, p. 117.
28. Pratney, Winkie, and Barry Chant. The Return, Chichester: Sov-
ereign World, 1988, p. 27.
29. White, John Wesley. Re-entry, Minneapolis: World Wide Publi-
cations, 1971, p. 110.
30. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 103.

52Chapter
1. Suhráb, E . Mabádí-i-Estedlál (Persian), Tihrán, Bahá’í Era 130,
p. 251.
2. Nuqabá’í, H. Bishárát-i-Kutub-i-Ásmání (Persian), Tihrán, Bahá’í
Era 124, p. 94.
3. Ferraby, John. All Things Made New, London: Ruskin House, 1957,
p. 171.
4. Nuqabá’í, H. op. cit., p. 61.
5. Kahn, A., O. Karsh, and B. Mundy. Four Remarkable Indian
Prophecies, Healdsburg: Naturegraph Co., p. 8.
6. Ibid., p. 10.
7. Cameron, Glenn and Wendi Momen. A Bahá’í Chronology, Oxford:
Geroge Ronald, 1996, p.
8. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, pp. 51-52.
9. Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh, p. 284.
10. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 68.
11. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p. 97.
12. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 42.
13. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, pp. 103-104.
14. Shoghi Effendi. Guidance for Today and Tomorrow, London:
Bahá’í Publishing Trust, 1953, pp. 149-150.

53References

54Chapter
1. Froom, Leroy. The Prophetic Faith of Our Fathers, Washington,
D.C.: Review and Herald, 1950, vol. 3, p. 11.
2. Meister, Charles W. Year of the Lord, North Carolina: McFarland
and Company, Inc., 1983, p. 30.
3. Clarke, Jerome. 1844, Religious Movements, Tennessee: Southern
Publishing Association, 1968, vol. 1, Preface.
4. Froom, Leroy. op. cit., vol. 3, p. 671.
5. Ibid., p. 675.
6. Ibid., p. 677.
7. Ibid., p. 677.
8. Ibid., p. 674.
9. Ibid., p. 674.
10. Kennedy, James D. Messiah: Prophecies Fulfilled, Ft. Lauder-
dale: Coral Ridge Ministries, p. 71.
11. Froom, Leroy. op. cit., pp. 479-480.
12. Ibid., p. 463.
13. Ibid., p. 480.
14. Ibid., p. 463.
15. Ibid., p. 472.
16. Ibid., p. 481.
17. Ibid., p. 481.
18. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Persian, No. 39.
19. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 110.

55Chapter
1. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 129.
2. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p. 15.
3. Townshend, George. Christ and Bahá’u’lláh, London: George
Ronald, 1957, p. 116.
4. The Proclamation of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 79.
5. The Book of Certitude, p. 17.
6. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, pp. 56-57.
7. The Book of Certitude, pp. 3-4.
8. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, pp. 90-91.

56492 I Shall Come Again

57Chapter
1. Lockyer, Herbert Sr. (ed.). Nelson’s Illustrated Bible Dictionary,
Nashville: Thomas Nelson Publishers, 1986, p. 259.
2. Ibid., p. 259.
3. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 87.
4. Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh, p. 284.
5. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 65.
6. The Book of Certitude, p. 13.
7. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 68.
8. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 157.
9. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 15.
10. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Persian, No. 41.
11. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p. 97.
12. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 130.
13. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 77.
14. Ibid., p. 160.
15. Ibid., p. 162.
16. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Persian, No. 36.
17. Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh, p. 76.
18. Ibid., p. 97.
19. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 133.
20. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 339.

58Chapter
1. The Book of Certitude, p. 70.
2. Tenney, Merrill (ed.). The Zondervan Pictorial Bible Dictionary,
Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1977, p. 466.
3. The Book of Certitude, p. 69.
4. Ibid., p. 69.
5. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 278.
6. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 13.
7. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 62.
8. Ibid., p. 91.
9. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 157.
10. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, pp. 323-324.

59References

6011. Ibid., p. 236.
12. Ibid., p. 247.
13. Ibid., p. 125.
14. The Hidden Words of Bahá’u’lláh, Arabic, No. 31.
15. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 197.

• • •
Chapter 159

Appendix I

1Publishing Association, 1987, pp. 6-7.
2. White, E. G. The Triumph of God’s Love, Washington, D. C.: Review
and Herald Publishing Association, 1957, p. 252.
3. Ibid., p. 253.
4. Johnson, William C. Why I Am a Seventh-day Adventist, Washington,
D.C.: Review and Herald Publishing Association, 1986, pp. 28-29.
5. White, E. G. op. cit., p. 250.
6. Ibid., p. 249.
7. Tenney, Merrill C. (ed.). The Zondervan Pictorial Bible Dictionary,
Grand Rapids: Zondervan Publishing House, 1977, p. 751.
8. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 53.
9. Selections from the Writings of the Báb, p. 62.
10. Rosenthal, Marvin. Pre-Wrath Rapture of the Church, Nashville:
Thomas Nelson Publishers, 1990, pp. 92-93.
11. Ibid., p. 93.
12. Rice, George E. Christ in Collision, Mountain View: Pacific
Press Publishing Association, 1982, pp. 49-50.
13. Ibid., p. 105.
14. Lockyer, Herbert Sr. (ed.). Nelson’s Illustrated Bible Dictionary,
Nashville: Thomas Nelson Publishers, 1986, p. 1038.
15. Prayers and Meditations by Bahá’u’lláh, p. 285.
16. Esslemont, J. E . Bahá’u’lláh and the New Era, Wilmette: Bahá’í
Publishing Trust, 1980, p. 23.
17. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 164.
18. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 92.
19. Ibid., p. 298-299.
20. Ibid., p. 52.

222. Douglas, J. D. (ed.). New Bible Dictionary, Wheaton: Tyndale
House Publishers, Inc., 1986, p. 1070.
23. Epistle to the Son of the Wolf, p. 145.
24. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 32.

• • •
Chapter 160

Appendix Ii

11. White, Ellen G. Early Writings, Washington D. C.: Review & Herald,
1945, pp. 81-83.
2. The Book of Certitude, p. 97.
3. Gleanings from the Writings of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 30.
4. Ibid., p. 268.
5. Ibid., p. 197.
6. Ibid., p. 245.

• • •
Chapter 161

Appendix Iii

11. Stedman, Ray C. Waiting for the Second Coming, Grand Rapids:
Discovery House, 1990, pp. 156-157.
2. Tkach, Joseph W. (ed.). The Ambassador College Bible
Correspondence Course, “The Dramatic Return of Jesus Christ!”
Lesson 3, p. 4.
3. Ibid., pp. 61-62.
4. Tablets of Bahá’u’lláh, p. 157.

• • •
Chapter 162

Permissions Grateful Acknowledgment Is Made For Permission To Use Material From The Following:

1Copyright © the Delegates of the Oxford University Press and the
Syndics of the Cambridge University Press, 1961, 1970.
Reprinted by permission.
Holy Bible, New International Version (NIV).
Copyright © 1973, 1978, 1984. International Bible Society.
Used by permission of Zondervan Bible Publishers.
Harper’s Bible Dictionary, ed. P. Achtemier.
Copyright © 1985 by The Society of Biblical Literature.
More Than A Carpenter, by Josh McDowell.
Copyright © 1977 by Tyndale House Publishers, Inc.

2Why I Believe, by James Kennedy.
Copyright © 1980, Word, Inc.
Till Armageddon, by Billy Graham.
Copyright © 1981, Word, Inc.
The Zondervan Pictorial Bible Dictionary, edited by Merrill C. Tenney.
Copyright © 1975 by Zondervan Corporation.
Used by permission of the Zondervan Publishing House.
Encyclopedia of Bible Difficulties by Gleason L. Archer.
Copyright © 1982 by the Zondervan Corporation.
Used by permission of the Zondervan Publishing House.
Re-entry, John Wesley White
Copyright © 1982 by the Zondervan Corporation.
Used by permission of the Zondervan Publishing House.
Showdown at Armageddon, George Vandeman.
Copyright © 1987 Pacific Press Publishing Association.
Let’s Get Acquainted, Ken McFarland.
Copyright © 1987 Pacific Press Publishing Association.
The Great Controversy, E. G. White.
Copyright © 1971 Pacific Press Publishing Association.
Christ in Collision, George E. Rice.
Copyright © 1982 Pacific Press Publishing Association.
A Cry for Help, Mary Griffin and Carol Felsenthal.
Copyright © 1983 Doubleday and Company.
Winds on a Leash, George Vandeman.
Copyright © 1984 it is written.
Unger’s Bible Dictionary, Merrill F. Unger.
Copyright © 1985 Moody Press.

3The Prophetic Faith of Our Fathers, Leroy Froom.
Copyright © 1950 Review and Herald.
Nelson’s Illustrated Bible Dictionary, Herbert Lockyer.
Copyright © 1986 Thomas Nelson Publishers.
Pre-Wrath Rapture of the Church, Marvin Rosenthal.
Copyright © 1990 Thomas Nelson Publishers.
The Second Coming, Bible Commentary, William Biederwolf.
Copyright © 1985 Baker Book House.
What in the World Will Happen Next? Ivor Power.
Copyright © 1985 Kregel Publications.
The Return, Winkie Pratney and Barry Chant.
Copyright © 1988 Sovereign World Limited.
Understanding End Time Prophecy, Norman K. Robertson.
Copyright © 1983 Sovereign World Limited.
Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life, Robert Carson and James
Butcher.
Copyright © 1988 Scott, Forseman and Company.
Why I Believe in Christianity, James Kennedy.
Copyright © 1977 Coral Ridge Ministries.
Why I Believe in Christ, James Kennedy.
Copyright © 1977 Coral Ridge Ministries.
Messiah: Prophecies Fulfilled, James Kennedy.
Copyright © Coral Ridge Ministries.

4Waiting for the Second Coming, Ray Stedman.
Copyright © 1990 Discovery House Publishers.
Radio Bible Class News, April 1989, Martin De Haan.
Copyright © Discovery House Publishers.
Living by the Book, cassette tape.
Copyright © The Christian Broadcasting Network.
You’ll See It When You Believe It, Wayne Dyer.
Copyright © 1990 by Wayne Dyer.
Published by arrangement with Avon Books, a division of the Hearst
Corporation.

• • •
Chapter 163

Index

1Christian explanation of 233, 236, 238, 240-247,
188, 299, 314, 315 249, 251, 256-258, 344,
prophecies of 259-296, 298, 372-373, 439-441
300, 302, 305, 307, 324, 2520, the prophetic figure of
373 336, 344-345
the year of 372 42 months, the prophecies of
1290 days, prophecies of 324, 301-302, 305, 307, 350,
353-354, 356, 375
1844, the year of 96, 134, 183, 62 weeks, prophecies of 228-
186-188, 192-196, 200- 229,
201, 204, 207, 234, 243- 69 weeks, prophecies of 213-
248, 251, 253, 267, 272, 214, 216, 226-227, 241-
274, 279-280, 296, 300- 242, 244, 246,
301, 303, 309, 317-319, 70 weeks, prophecies of 212,
327-328, 339, 343, 354- 218-219, 226-227, 241-
355, 362, 372-373, 377, 242, 244-245, 256, 302,

2500 I Shall Come Again

• • •
Chapter 164

A Obstacles To Growth Of The

1‘Abdu’l-Bahá 97 29, 396-402, 407, 460
glorifies Christ 95 origin of the
interpretation of prophecies spread of the
208, 228, 297-298, 311- Bahá’u’lláh 12, 96, 358, 376
312, 354 first declaration of 200,
Abomination of desolation 236, 327, 362, 364, 375-376
238, 240, 258, 260, 264, evidence for the mission of
341, 355, 356, 439, 446 110, 112, 179, 376-378
Accountability 166, 428, 454 glorifies Christ 94-95
invites Christians 90, 93
Admonitions of the Master 69,
72, 74-79, 81-82 message of 72, 115
public declaration of 354,
Advent Movement 175, 184, 358, 364, 372, 375, 439
192, 242, 248, 337

• • •
Chapter 165

Banquet Of The Kingdom

1parable of 24-27, 29, 35, 46,
Advents, similarities of 256
‘Alí, the first Imám 309 readiness for 24,
Ancient of Days, the 321, 333- those who can enter 25, 49,
334, 353, 382
Angels, the prophecy of four Biblical time prophecy sources
317-319
Annas 91 Biederwolf, William 214, 314-
315, 360,
Attachment 9-11
Bride, symbolism of the 310,
Awake . 51, 112, 134, 143, 253,
466-467 C
B Caiaphas
Calendar, correction to 243,
Báb, the 96, 195,
251,
first believer in 362-363
Child preachers, the 387-388
glorifies Christ
Christ 93-95
Bahá’í Faith
Bahá’í Scriptures glorify
appreciations of the
94-95
goals of the 97-98
lack of knowledge of the 401 Christians, Bahá’u’lláh's Epistle
to the

2Codes of the 1st and 2nd advents Desolation 238-241, 259, 264,
230 320, 347-348, 350, 357,
Communication 9, 101, 103, 113 440-441, 443, 446, 448-
Comparing the 1st and 20th
Detachment 8-10,

• • •
Chapter 166

Difficulty Of Finding The Truth

110, 73-74
Disappointment, explanations for
Concealment, principle of 416 184, 195, 200, 203,
Confusion in faith and belief the great 183, 195, 200-205,
141, 155-156, 158
in the church 140 Discoverers and proclaimers of
Consequences of acceptance and the second advent 184-
denial 225, 357, 407, 468
Covenant 220, 409, 429 Disease, spread of 150-151,
Divine 221 Dragon, symbolism of 276,
elements of God's 221-223, 309, 311,
393, 410, 414, 432 Drunkenness 33, 131-132, 135,
God's 220, 222, 224, 234, 158,
249, 379, 393, 400, 409-
410, 412, 414, 415, 447 E
Greater 411 Edicts of Submission, the 271-
Critical domino, the principle of
275-276 Einstein, Albert 52,
D Elam 246-247
Emerson, Ralph Waldo
Daily sacrifice
Escape
Daniel's visions, similarities
Euphrates 317-318,
between 1st and 2nd of
256-258 Exact time kept secret 252,
Dates, Table of Advent 245-246 Eye, meaning of the 36-37, 114,
467,
Day, symbolic meaning of
the length of a prophetic F
214-215, 241,
Fear 24, 31, 47, 64, 73-74
Death, the meaning of 113,
freedom from

2of God 64-65 Gospel
of truth 30 confirmed
Fearful 28 proclaimed 385, 388-389,
Fig tree, the 360
Fire, meaning of 56-57, 163, Gratten, Dr Henry Guinness
166, 168-170 212, 273, 299, 345-346
Flee 137 Great tribulation, the
Freedom 107, 393, 396, 414, H
416-417, 419,
Heart, the pure in 70, 72, 77, 92,
gift of 414,
112, 255, 258-261, 416,
of choice 162, 208, 230,
396-397,
of conscience 399 Heaven, descending from 87,
108-109, 208,
religious
symbolism of 310, 320,
Future, the glorious
405,
G Herod 45,
Galileo Galilei 52 History, learning from 74, 90,
96, 161,
Gate of the Gate, the 321, 363-
364 “Hour,” the time of the
Gate, the 96, 321, 364, 370 Householder, the 44-46, 48,
463,
Gentiles 263, 265, 301-303,
times of the 263-266, 277, Human standards of judgment
279, 280, 301, 303, 336, 161, 164, 172,
343-344, 346, 355, 373 Humility 54, 57, 61, 78-80, 90,
Glory 58, 106, 108, 111, 114- 106,
116 Hushidar
God, of 12, 87, 96,
I
the meaning of 110,
God – most manifest and most Instruments of God 44-45, 415,
hidden 52 426,
God's guidance, need for 414, Interpret, the right to 97, 119-
419 121, 124,
law of visibility and Investigation of truth 26, 73, 407,

3Islam 263, 281-283, 286, 309- Joshua 287,
310, 322 Judgment, God's 143,
Christians handicapped by postponing
denying 338-339 standards of 127-128,
division within 309,
freedom of faith 285 K
homage to Christ and Mary Kennedy, Dr James 5, 7, 76, 80,
by 287, 289-290 116-117,
in prophecy
“King,” the meaning of
oneness of all races and
religions 291-292 Kingdom of Heaven, the 24, 30,
44, 49,
Israel
the state of 266, 269, 276- King's plot, the
277 Knowledge 393,
a call for creation of 266- divine and satanic
271 gift of

• • •
Chapter 167

J L

1230, 241-242, 269, 276, Lamb 238, 312, 349, 443-444
278, 302-303, 320-321, symbolic meaning of the
340, 347-348, 356, 441,
449 Language, divine 168,
and sanctuary 347 literal interpretation of
temple building decrees of prophecies
215 of revelation 108-109
fall of 141 plain
rebuilding of 214-217, 220, prophetic 119, 207, 230,
228, 243, 246-247, 280, 299, 301, 305,
324 symbolic 103, 124, 230,
relationship between Late coming of the Master, belief
heavenly and earthly in the 134, 366-368
349, 351 Law of double fulfillment, the
trampling of 264-265, 302-
303, 348 Life, the meaning of
Jesus, titles bestowed on 95 Literalism, the dangers of 167-
Jewish decline, the most critical 168, 172,

2Logic, God's versus human 338 Offering, the regular
Love of God 65 Olivet Discourse, the 21, 22, 66-

• • •
Chapter 168

M P

1133, 470 Parable of the Banquet of the
Kingdom, the 24-27, 29,
Male child
35, 46,
Manasseh, son of King Hezekiah Parousia 8, 33, 361, 365, 461,
of Judah 340-343, 351 467,
Mental and spiritual health, state Pascal, Blaise
of 141, 143-144, 150, 153 Past, learning from the 6, 10, 90,
Michael, the great prince 323-
325 Persia 96, 117, 246, 310-311
Miller, William 175, 196-201, Personal and social problems
204-206, 213, 219, 242,
248, 337-338, 342-343, Peter, the Apostle 91, 167-168,
435-436, 453, 456-457
dream of Miller 453 Pharisees
Mistrust of the non-traditional Poison, the meaning of
397-398
Poor in spirit, the
Month, the length of a lunar
Power 58, 106, 108, 110, 115-
length of a prophetic 301 116,
N scattering of 330,
the meaning of
Newton, Sir Isaac 194, 256 those in positions of 23,
Night, symbolic meaning of Prayers for divine guidance 82,
464, 466
Noah, Mordecai 267-270, 301- Praying 81-82
302, 339, 351 Prince, the great 319, 323-325,
329, 331-332
O
Probability 315, 377-378
Oblation, symbolism of 37, 223, Progressive revelation 222,
224,
Promise of return
Obstacles 30, 33, 131, 135, 400,
Promises fulfilled 104, 110, 170,
460,

2Prophecies, biblical sources of R
199, 357-358
Rapture, the 34, 37, 119, 124,
about the declaration of 462-464
Bahá’u’lláh 375-376
Readiness for the Master
comparing 1st and 2nd
advents 277-278 Reason 71, 73-74, 76,
context of figures in 316 Rejection 173,
in Hebrew Scriptures 235 Religious leaders, the actions of
Islamic 304, 310, 344, 374, 91, 96, 173-174, 333, 389,
376 393, 404-406,
Native American 370, 372, the role of
374-375, 377 Religious leaders, the station of
of the first advent 211-230
purpose of 255 Responsibility
Revelation of John 288, the gift of
295-298, 303, 304, 306, Restoration
309-313
Resurrection, the meaning of
revised dates for 213, 226- 113,
Reward
statistical analysis of time
377-378 Riggs, Robert 318,
summary of time 347 Run away
the context of the 316-317
the harmony among 333- S
334 Sacrifice 224,
Zoroastrian 370-371, 374, daily 226, 238-240, 256,
375 347-348, 356, 440, 447,
Prophetic cycle 279, 299-300,
319, 346, 439 symbolism of
dates, a summary of 369 Sanctuary, cleansing of the
eras, major 346 186, 208, 236, 239-240,
242, 261, 303, 320, 435,
Publications, date of the 2nd
437-439, 445,
advent in 188-191
heavenly and earthly
Punishment 23, 393, 414, 432 in Bahá’í Scriptures, the
Q 450-451
restoration of the 239, 244,

3symbolic meaning of the Suddenly, the meaning of 464-
239, 440-441
Second advent, table of dates for Suffering of new believers 32,
the 245, 246
Secrecy, reason for 43, 45, 47, of new Redeemer 32, 111,
50, 55, 58, 194 118, 174-175,
Secrets revealed 48 Summer is near 359,
Seeing 77, 92, 111 Summary of prophecies 369-383
the meaning of 92, 111 Symbolism, examples of 167,
Seeker, attributes of the true 218, 224, 230, 236, 240,
48, 72, 76-78, 81-82, 259 273-274, 276, 280, 302,
Self-dependency 406 305, 316-317, 320, 324,
Seven times, prophecies of the 349, 405, 412, 441, 447,
226, 335-336, 343, 346-
347, 350-351, 372 purposes of 230-231,
Seventh-day Adventists 196, reasons for
204, 436-437
T
Shoghi Effendi
Snake, the meaning of 167 Tabernacle, heavenly 236-237,
444, 446-448
Social and spiritual evolution,
human 381-383 in Bahá’í Scripture 260,
262, 448, 450-451
Spiritual state of our time 126,
129, 131-133, 135-136, Talents, parable of the 28-31,
141, 153, 172, 177-178 463,
Stages of evolution of humanity Tarrying time, the
381 Teaching God's Message 396-
Stand in the Holy place, meaning
of 258-260 Telegram, the first
State of the world 33, 63, 150, Temple, the 261, 441-447
426 Tests and trials 57-58, 170, 413,
Strategy of the Master 40-43, 46
Stress and anguish, the day of Thief in the night 39, 43, 45, 50,
135, 141, 331 61, 68, 157, 175, 184, 206,
Stress and distress 135-136, 142, 365, 402, 459, 463-464,
150, 154-155 467, 469-470
Stumbling, causes of 399 Christian interpretations of

4Christian understanding of Volumes of this work, subsequent
the 461-462, 466
meaning of the 459, 463-
467, 469 W
Three and a half days 304-305, Wake up! 50,
307-308, 330, 372-373 War, the new Redeemer expected
“Time,” symbolic meaning of to wage
307, 336 Watch! 21, 36, 51, 459-460,
Time, exact time not revealed, the 463-465, 470-471
252 Christian interpretations of
Time, times and a half time
305, 307, 330, 332, 333 the meaning of 21-22, 28,
Titles bestowed on Jesus 95 34, 36, 38, 61, 459, 464-
465,
Titus Flavius Vespasianus 225,
356 Wesley, John
Townshend, George 285, 403 Wisdom 64-65, 406, 421,
Tradition, the power of 167, 173, Witnesses, God's 297, 299-300
177 the two 296-298, 300,
Travel, the increase in 325-326, 304-305, 308, 316,
329 Wolff, Joseph 188, 310-313,
316-317, 389-390,
Tribulation, the great 141, 156,
461 “Woman,” the meaning of
Truth, independent investigation Woman with child, the meaning

• • •
Chapter 169

Worldly Concerns Are An Obstacle

1U to investigation 33, 131,
400, 406, 468
Umayyads, the 286, 304, 310-
311, 332 Worm, meaning of the
Universal House of Justice, the Y

• • •
Chapter 170

Index Of Bible Verses Used In This Book

1Acts 1:6 ……………………………… 14 I Chronicles 17:11-14 …………
Acts 1:6-8 ………………………… 253 II Chronicles 30:8 ………………
Acts 1:7 ……………………………. 114 I Corinthians 3:13 ………… 56,
Acts 2:17 ………………………….. 193 I Corinthians 3:2 ………………..
Acts 3:19-21 ………. 369, 380, 445 I Corinthians 4:5 ………. 49, 60, 77,
Acts 3:21 ………………………….. 446 80, 121, 222,
Acts 5:31 ………………………….. 214 I Corinthians 13:9-10 …………
Acts 7:51-52 ………………………. 89 II Corinthians 3:17 …………….
Acts 14:22 …………………. 162, 170 II Corinthians 3:6 ………………
Acts 17:2 ………………………….. 167 II Corinthians 6:2 ………………
Acts 17:24, 26 ………………….. 292 Daniel 7:9 …………………………
Acts 28:26 ………………………… 178 Daniel 7:9-10 …………………….
Acts 28:26-27 …………………… 398 Daniel 7:13-14 …………………..
Amos 3:7 …………… 179, 212, 255 Daniel 7:25 ……………………….
Amos 5:19 ……………………….. 137 Daniel 7:26 ……………………….
Amos 8:11-12 …………………… 139 Daniel 7:27 ……………………….

2510 I Shall Come Again

3Daniel 8:1-2 ………………. 247, 334 Ephesians 5:14 …………………….
Daniel 8:13 …………. 241, 278, 446 Exodus 19:5 ………………………
Daniel 8:13,14,17 ……… 239, 347 Exodus 24:7 ………………………
Daniel 8:14 …………. 241, 446, 448 Exodus 25:8 ………………………
Daniel 8:16 ………………………. 256 Ezekiel 4:6 ………………………..
Daniel 8:17 ………………………. 257 Ezekiel 5:11 ………………………
Daniel 8:19 ………………………. 257 Ezekiel 7:3 ………………………..
Daniel 8:26 ……………….. 194, 257 Ezekiel 7:19 ………………………
Daniel 8:27 ………………………. 194 Ezekiel 28:18 …………………….
Daniel 9:17-18 …………… 241, 277 Ezekiel 30:2-3 …………………..
Daniel 9:21-24 ………………….. 257 Ezekiel 34:17, 20 ………………….
Daniel 9:22 ………………………. 256 Ezekiel 37:22-24 ……………….
Daniel 9:24 ………………………. 218 Ezekiel 43:2 ………………………
Daniel 9:25 ……………….. 215, 324 Galatians 1:10 ……………………..
Daniel 9:25-26 ………………….. 227 Galatians 6:5 ……………………….
Daniel 9:26 ………………………. 226 Genesis 9:13-15 …………. 221,
Genesis 11:6 ……………………..
Daniel 9:27 ……………….. 220,
Genesis 17:20 ……………………
Daniel 12:1 ……. 135, 141,153,323
Genesis 21:17-21 ……………….
Daniel 12:1, 6, 7 ………………..
Habakkuk 2:2-3 …………………
Daniel 12:1-3 …………………….
Haggai 2:6-9 ……………………..
Daniel 12:3,4,10 ………………….
Haggai 2:7 ………………………….
Daniel 12:4 ……………….. 194,
Hebrews 2:9 ……………………….
Daniel 12:4-7 …………………….
Hebrews 6:19-20 ……………….
Daniel 12:7 ……………………….
Hebrews 8:1-5 …………………..
Daniel 12:9 ……………………….
Hebrews 8:13 …………………….
Daniel 12:10 ……………………..
Hebrews 9:15 …………………….
Daniel 12:11 ……………………..
Hebrews 9:28 …. 19, 30,51, 69,465
Deuteronomy 1:17 ……………….
Hebrews 10:35-37 ……………..
Deuteronomy 4:29 …….. 48, 69, 84 Hebrews 10:37 ……. 134, 234, 367,
Deuteronomy 7:6 ………………. 291
Deuteronomy 18:15 …………… 410 Hebrews 12:14 ……. 51,72, 111,
Deuteronomy 18:18-19 ……… 410 Hebrews 12:18, 22 ……………..
Deuteronomy 30:19-20 …… 27,415 Hebrews 12:24 …………………..
Deuteronomy 32:7 …………….. 172 Hebrews 12:29 …………………..

4Index of Bible Verses Used in this Book

5Hebrews 13:5 ……………………. 379 Isaiah 59:2 ………………………..
Hosea 4:6 …………… 282, 401, 426 Isaiah 60:1-2 ……………… 131,
Hosea 6:3 …………………………… 54 Isaiah 61:1 ……………………………
Isaiah 1:18 ………………….. 71, 379 Isaiah 61:1-2 ……………………….
Isaiah 2:21 ……………………….. 137 Isaiah 66:7-8 ……………………..
Isaiah 8:14 ……………………….. 443 Isaiah 66:18, 22-24 …………….
Isaiah 9:2,6 ………………………. 470 Isaiah 66:18-20 ……………………
Isaiah 11:2-3 ………………………. 65 James 1:12 ………………………….
Isaiah 24:7-13 …………………… 135 James 2:14, 17 ……………………..
Isaiah 24:20 ……………………… 135 James 5:9 ………………………….
Isaiah 24:23 ……………………… 458 Jeremiah 8:19-20 ……………….
Isaiah 25:7 …………………………. 51 Jeremiah 9:12 ……………………
Isaiah 27:2-3 …………………….. 457 Jeremiah 9:23 ……………………..
Isaiah 29:5-8 …………………….. 133 Jeremiah 15:4-7 …………………
Isaiah 29:9 ……………………….. 132 Jeremiah 17:12 ………………….
Isaiah 29:10 ……………………… 398 Jeremiah 29:14 ……………………
Isaiah 29:10-11 …………………. 469 Jeremiah 30:7 ……… 125, 126,
Isaiah 29:11-14 …………….. 26, 403 Jeremiah 31:31 ………………….
Isaiah 29:13 ……………………… 130 Jeremiah 49:38 ………………….
Isaiah 30:26 ……………………… 458 Job 12:25 ………………………….
Isaiah 33:6 …………………………. 66 Job 22:29 ……………………….. 7,
Isaiah 35:4 ………………….. 75, 138 Job 32:7 ………………………… 6,
Isaiah 41:21 ……………………… 179 Joel 1:5 …………………………….
Isaiah 44:6-7 …………………….. 291 Joel 1:5, 15 ………………………..
Isaiah 45:15 ……………………….. 54 Joel 2:28 …………………………..
Isaiah 47:10 ………………………. 404 Joel 2:32 …………………………….
Isaiah 48:10 ………………………. 170 Joel 3:1-2 ……………………………
Isaiah 52:11 ………………………. 424 John 1:5 ……………………….. 56,
Isaiah 53:8 ……………………….. 226 John 1:14 …………………… 111,
Isaiah 54:9 …………………………. 33 John 1:46 ………………………….
Isaiah 55:3, 6 …………………….. 138 John 3:3 …………………………….
Isaiah 55:6 …………………………. 69 John 3:13 ………………………….
Isaiah 55:8 ……………………….. 104 John 3:31 …………………… 101,
Isaiah 59:1-2 ……………….. 56, 415 John 3:31-32 ……………………..

6512 I Shall Come Again

7John 5:22-24 …………………….. 439 I John 3:6 …………………………..
John 5:39 …………………………… 69 I John 4:1 ……………………………
John 5:39-40 …………. 89, 212, 379 I John 4:2 ………………………….
John 5:46 ………………….. 212, 379 I John 4:18 ………………………….
John 6:38 …………………………. 108 Joshua 1:8 …………………………..
John 6:39 …………………………… 95 Jude 1:12, 13 ……………………..
John 6:42 …………………………. 108 Leviticus 9:23 ……………………
John 6:63 ………………………….. 161 Leviticus 25:8 ……………………
John 7:24 …………………………… 70 Leviticus 26:14, 15, 18 ………..
John 7:48 …………………………… 92 Leviticus 26:14-33 …………….
John 7:51 …………………………… 77 Leviticus 26:23,24,31,33 ……
John 8:14-15 …………………….. 172 Leviticus 26:27,31,33 ………..
John 8:15 …………………… 161, 338 Luke 1:31-33 …………………….
John 8:32 …………………………. 107 Luke 1:68-69 ………………. 107,
John 8:34 …………………………. 108 Luke 1:70-71 ……………………..
John 8:51 ………………………….. 113 Luke 2:35 ……………………………
John 9:39 …………………………. 439 Luke 4:18 …………………….. 86,
John 10:4 …………………………… 93 Luke 4:43 ………………………….
John 10:10 ………………………… 466 Luke 8:15 ……………….. 70, 77,
John 10:27 …………………………. 92 Luke 8:16 ………………………….
John 11:25-26 …………………… 113 Luke 8:17 …………………….. 56,
John 12:23 ……………………….. 110 Luke 9:23-24 ………………………
John 13:15 ……………………….. 164 Luke 9:54-56 …………………….
John 14:1-3 ………………………… 85 Luke 9:62 ……………………………
John 14:15-17, 21 ………………. 428 Luke 12:32 ……………………. 31,
John 14:18 …………….. 13, 85, 241 Luke 12:35 ………………….. 30,
John 14:18, 21 …………………… 470 Luke 12:35-38 …………………….
John 14:28 …………………………. 85 Luke 12:36 ………………………..
John 16:12-13 …………………… 222 Luke 12:36-37 …………………….
John 16:33 ……………………….. 106 Luke 12:37 ……………….. 19, 30,
John 17:1 …………………………. 111 Luke 12:39-40 …………….. 44,
John 18:36 ……………………….. 105 Luke 12:47-48 …………………….
John 18:37 ……………………….. 104 Luke 12:49 ………………………..
I John 2:3-5 ………………………. 428 Luke 13:34-35 …….. 278, 348,

8Index of Bible Verses Used in this Book

9Luke 13:35 ……………………….. 441 Mark 7:8 …………………………..
Luke 14:24 …………………………. 35 Mark 7:9 …………………………..
Luke 16:15 ………………………… 161 Mark 8:33 …………………………
Luke 17:1 …………………………. 399 Mark 9:23 …………………………
Luke 17:20-21 ………………….. 105 Mark 9:42-44 …………………….
Luke 17:24-26 …………………… 118 Mark 9:44-48 ……………………..
Luke 17:27 …………………………. 33 Mark 9:49 ………………………….
Luke 17:31 …………………………. 36 Mark 13:23 ………. 29, 67, 179,
Luke 17:31,34 ………………….. 464 Mark 13:32-37 …………… 252,
Luke 18:8 ……………….. 19, 63, 129 Mark 13:33 …………………………
Luke 18:17 …………………………. 58 Mark 13:33-37 …………………….
Luke 19:40 ……………………….. 387 Mark 13:36 …………………………
Luke 19:41-44 …………………… 158 Mark 13:36-37 …………………..
Luke 21:7 ………………….. 264, 268 Mark 13:37 …………………………
Luke 21:7,8,24,27 …………….. 265 Mark 14:9 …………………………..
Luke 21:7,24 ……………………. 303 Mark 16:17-18 …………………..
Luke 21:7,24,27 ……………….. 348 Matthew 1:20 …………………….
Luke 21:23 ……………………….. 135 Matthew 1:20-21 ……………….
Luke 21:24 ………………… 224, 264 Matthew 3:16 ………………………
Luke 21:33 ………………… 234, 379 Matthew 5:3, 8 …………………..
Luke 21:34 …………………………. 58 Matthew 5:4 ………………………
Luke 21:34-36 ……. 33,81,131,468 Matthew 5:5 ………………………..
Luke 21:36 ………………… 22, 71, 78 Matthew 5:5-9 …………………..
Luke 22:40 …………………………. 82 Matthew 5:8 ……… 72, 92, 112,
Luke 24:21 ………………………… 114 Matthew 5:17 ………………………
Luke 24:25-26 …………………… 115 Matthew 5:48 …………………….
Luke 24:27 ………………… 212, 379 Matthew 6:9-10 ……………………
Malachi 2:10 …………………….. 292 Matthew 7:6 ………………………
Malachi 3:1 ………………………. 444 Matthew 7:9-11 ……………………
Malachi 3:2 ………………………… 57 Matthew 7:11 ………………………
Malachi 4:1 ………………………. 169 Matthew 7:20 ………………………
Malachi 4:5 ………………………. 125 Matthew 7:21 …………………….
Mark 4:10-12 ……………………. 421 Matthew 8:26 ………………………
Mark 4:25 ………………………….. 29 Matthew 9:13 …………………….

10514 I Shall Come Again

11Matthew 10:7 ……………………. 427 Matthew 24:40-42 ……….. 47,
Matthew 11:25-26 …………….. 425 Matthew 24:45-47 ……………….
Matthew 11:28-30 ……… 168, 418 Matthew 24:46 …………………….
Matthew 12:33 ……………………. 74 Matthew 24:48-51 ……………..
Matthew 12:36 ………………….. 429 Matthew 24:50-51 ……………..
Matthew 12:42 ………………….. 106 Matthew 25:31-32 ……………..
Matthew 13:15-16 …………….. 232 Matthew 25:34 …………………….
Matthew 13:16 …………………… 113 Matthew 25:35-36 ……………….
Matthew 13:44 ………………….. 162 Matthew 25:39 …………………….
Matthew 13:52 ………………. 23, 44 Matthew 25:40 …………………….
Matthew 13:55 ………………….. 106 Matthew 25:41-46 ……………….
Matthew 16:23 ………………….. 168 Matthew 26:2 ………………………
Matthew 16:24 ……………………. 49 Matthew 26:64 ……………………
Matthew 16:26 ………………….. 421 Matthew 28:18 …………………..
Matthew 16:27 ……………………. 85 Matthew 28:19 …………………..
Matthew 16:27-28 ……………… 114 Micah 5:2 ………………………….
Matthew 18:21 ………………….. 168 Micah 7:2-7 ……………………….
Matthew 19:28 ……………………. 57 Micah 7:4 …………………… 141,
Matthew 21:22 ………………. 19, 78 Numbers 23:19 ………………….
Matthew 22:1-2,11-14 …………. 49 Obadiah 1:16 …………………….
Matthew 24:3 ….. 22, 238,264,356 I Peter 1:7 …………………………..
Matthew 24:3,15 ……………….. 351 I Peter 3:15-16 …………………..
Matthew 24:10 ………………….. 129 I Peter 5:4 …………………………..
Matthew 24:12 ………………….. 129 II Peter 1:20 …………………. 80,120
Matthew 24:14 ………………….. 385 II Peter 3:9 …………………. 164,380
Matthew 24:15 ……. 238, 242, 249, Proverbs 1:5 ………………. 282,
258, 356 Proverbs 1:7 ………………………..
Matthew 24:21 ……… 135, 141, 331 Proverbs 3:13 …………………….
Matthew 24:30 ……… 131, 154, 333 Proverbs 8:17 ………………………
Matthew 24:32-33 …………….. 359 Proverbs 11:9 ………… 70, 282,
Matthew 24:36-44 …………….. 466 Proverbs 16:2 …………………….
Matthew 24:37 ………….. 19, 33, 41 Proverbs 18:15 …………………..
Matthew 24:37-39 …………….. 400 Proverbs 21:2 ……………….. 11,
Matthew 24:39 ……………………. 33 Proverbs 25:25 …………………..

12Index of Bible Verses Used in this Book

13Proverbs 28:26 ……………………. 26 Revelation 3:11-12 …………………
Psalms 2:1-2 ………………………. 45 Revelation 3:11-13 ……………….
Psalms 6:4 ………………………….. 85 Revelation 3:12 ……………. 71,
Psalms 15:1-2 …………………… 259 Revelation 3:15 …………………..
Psalms 24:3-4 …………………… 424 Revelation 3:15-21 …………….
Psalms 24:3-6 …………………… 258 Revelation 3:18 ……. 112, 169,
Psalms 25:4-5 …………………….. 82 Revelation 3:20 …………………
Psalms 25:4-5,9 ……………….. 7, 79 Revelation 3:20-22 ………………
Psalms 27:14 ……………….. 75, 138 Revelation 3:21 …………………..
Psalms 43:2-5 …………………….. 83 Revelation 7:15,17 …….. 238,
Psalms 63:1-2 …………………… 444 Revelation 9:14-15 …………….
Psalms 67:1-2, 5-6 ………………. 83 Revelation 10:1;4:3 ……………
Psalms 80:3-4 …………………… 261 Revelation 11:2 ……. 301, 303,
Psalms 89:34 ……………………. 250 Revelation 11:2-3 ……………….
Psalms 90:12 ……………………. 370 Revelation 11:3 …………… 297,
Psalms 90:13,16,17 ……………… 85 Revelation 11:6 ………………….
Psalms 97:1,2, 4 ………………… 365 Revelation 11:9 ………………….
Psalms 104:2-3 …………………… 54 Revelation 11:11 ………………..
Psalms 107:26-32 ……………… 158 Revelation 11:19 ………………..
Psalms 111:7-9 ………………….. 412 Revelation 12:1-2 ……………….
Psalms 111:9 ……………… 221, 411 Revelation 12:3 …………………
Psalms 111:10 ……………………… 64 Revelation 12:4 …………………
Psalms 116:4,6 ……………………… 7 Revelation 12:4-5 ………………
Psalms 119:2 ………………………. 84 Revelation 12:5 …………………
Psalms 132:11 …………….. 105, 221 Revelation 12:6 …………. 306,
Psalms 139:23-24 ……………….. 83 Revelation 12:10 ………………..
Psalms 149:4 ……………………… 61 Revelation 12:14 ……………….
Revelation 1:1-3 ……………….. 295 Revelation 13:2, 5 ………………
Revelation 1:5 ………………….. 106 Revelation 14:6-7 …………. 85,
Revelation 3:2,3,6 ………………. 50 Revelation 14:13 ……………….
Revelation 3:2-3 ……………….. 468 Revelation 14:14-16 ……………..
Revelation 3:3 ……… 19, 29, 43, 52 Revelation 14:15 ……………….
Revelation 3:8 ………… 27, 31, 414 Revelation 15:8 …………………
Revelation 3:10 …………….. 81, 169 Revelation 16:15 ……… 19, 39, 43,

14516 I Shall Come Again

15113, 206, 260, 445, 466 I Thessalonians 5:20-21 ……….
Revelation 17:2 ………………… 132 I Thessalonians 5:21 ……. 71, 179,
Revelation 18:1 …………. 126, 288
Revelation 19:6-7 ……………… 382 II Thessalonians 1:7-8 ………..
Revelation 19:7 ………………… 126 II Timothy 3:1-7 …………………
Revelation 19:8 ………………… 260 II Timothy 3:1-8 ………………….
Revelation 19:9 ………………… 418 II Timothy 3:2-5 ………………..
Revelation 19:17 ……………….. 418 II Timothy 3:2-7 ………………..
Revelation 20:15 ………………. 170 II Timothy 3:6-7 ………………….
Revelation 21:2 ………………… 320 II Timothy 3:13 …………………
Revelation 21:2,23 ……………. 349 II Timothy 4:3 …………………..
Revelation 21:2-3 ……………… 446 Zechariah 1:11 …………………..
Revelation 21:3-5 ……………… 237 Zechariah 1:15 …………………..
Revelation 21:4-5 ……………….. 98 Zechariah 9:16-17 ………………
Revelation 21:7-8 ………….. 30, 74 Zechariah 10:2-3 ……………….
Revelation 21:10-11 …………… 321 Zechariah 14:7 …………………..
Revelation 21:11 ……………….. 458 Zephaniah 1:15 ………………….
Revelation 21:22-23 ………….. 443 Zephaniah 1:15-16 ……………..
Revelation 21:23 ………………. 320 Zephaniah 1:17 ………………….
Revelation 22:7 ………………….. 85 Zephaniah 2:3 …………………. 7,
Revelation 22:7,16 …………….. 296 Zephaniah 3:4 ……………………
Revelation 22:12-15 …………..
Revelation 22:14 ……….. 321,
Revelation 22:17 …………. 70,
Revelation 22:20 …………………
Romans 14:10 ……………………
Romans 14:12 ……………………
I Samuel 16:7 …….. 104, 127,
I Thessalonians 5:2 ……… 43, 206,
I Thessalonians 5:2-8 …………
I Thessalonians 5:4 …………….
I Thessalonians 5:6 …………….
I Thessalonians 5:20 …………..

16Contents of Volumes

• • •
Chapter 171

Ii And Iii Volume Ii Lord Of Lords

12. Who Has the Wisdom to Interpret Prophecies?
3. The Prophetic Evidence for Jesus Christ
4. Wonders in the Heavens
5. I Will Assemble the Exiles
6. Look at the Fig Tree
7. What Shall Be the Sign of Thy Coming? (Literal
Prophecies)
8. What Shall Be the Sign of Thy Coming? (Symbolic
Prophecies)
9. Carmel Shall See the Glory of the Lord
10. Our God Shall Come
11. The Oneness of the Great Messengers

213. One Like a Son of Man
14. Lord of Lords and King of Kings
15. The Twin Comings
16. My Servant, the Branch (Prophecies about ‘Abdu’l-Bahá
and Shoghi Effendi)
17. Other Figures of the Bahá’í Faith
18. The prophecy of 1335 Days
19. Let Us Reason Together (Applying Statistics to Prophecies)

• • •
Chapter 172

Volume Iii King Of Kings

11. Have Ye Shut Out Yourselves By Reason of My Name?
2. You Shall Be Called By a New Name (Part I)
3. You Shall Be Called By a New Name (Part II)
4. The Antichrist of Our Time
5. Satan, the Devil
6. I Was Sick and in Prison and You Did Not Look After
Me
7. The Parables and Prophecies
8. The Day of Mourning
9. War Against God
10. That the Souls May Be Edified
11. Do Not Put Your God to the Test
12. I Will Show Them My Wonders
13. Robed in a Cloud
14. He That Denieth Me…Shall Be Denied
15. The Day of Divine Blessings

• • •
Chapter 173

Sources For Information And Literature

1Bahá’í Faith, call: 1-800-228-6483.
2. Visit these Bahá’í Web Sites:
• www.bahai.org
• www.onecountry.org
• www.bahai-library.org
3. Check the white and yellow pages for the Bahá’í Faith
or a community listing.
4. To receive free literature on the Bahá’í Faith, call us at:
1-800-949-1863.
5. To receive a free catalog of Bahá’í books or to order
Bahá’í books in the United States, call Bahá’í Distribu-
tion Service: 1-800-999-9019, or write to:
Bahá’í Distribution Service
4703 Fulton Industrial Boulevard
Atlanta, GA 30336-2017

2A Few Bahá’í Centers
Alaska Hawaii
13501 Brayton Drive 3264 Allan Place
Anchorage, Alaska 99516 Honolulu, Hawaii 96817
USA USA

3Australia India
Bahá’í Publications Bahá’í House
173 Mona Vale Road 5 Canning Road
Ingleside, NSW 2101 Post Box

• • •
Chapter 174

United States

India
Canada

17200 Leslie Street New Zealand
Thornhill, Ontario P.O. Box 21-551
L3T 6L8 Canada Henderson 1231

Auckland
New Zealand
England

127 Rutland Gate
London SW7 1PD

United States

1United Kingdom 536 Sheridan Road
Wilmette, IL 60091

1United Kingdom 536 Sheridan Road
Wilmette, IL 60091

📖 End of Book

Return to Book Details